Ovation Q Line

Q-Line Installation ManualSection Title Page Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes-1 Section 1. Introduction 1-1 1-2 1-3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Contents of this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Section 2. Field Wiring Procedures 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 WDPF Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 System Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Noise Minimization Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Thermocouple Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Common Input Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Field Termination Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Q-Card Hardware Address Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Using Address Selection Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Pre-Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Field Wiring Half-Shell Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Section 3. Q-Card Reference Sheets 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 QAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 QAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 QAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 QAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 QAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 QAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119 QAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148 QAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173 QAXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190 QAXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193 QBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200 QBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212 QBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224 5/99 i Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d Section 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 Title Page 3-235 3-254 3-265 3-266 3-276 3-282 3-283 3-296 3-317 3-318 3-332 3-343 3-351 3-359 3-365 3-398 3-399 3-410 3-420 3-421 3-453 3-458 3-483 3-512 3-541 3-552 3-553 3-562 3-573 QCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QFR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Worksheets A-1. Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Appendix B. Setting Q-Card Addresses B-1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Appendix C. Card-Edge Field Termination C-1. C-2. Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Card-Edge Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 M0-0053 ii Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d Section C-3. Title Page Field Wiring Card-Edge Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Glossary Index 5/99 iii Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures Figure Title Page Section 1. Introduction 1-1. Phases of WDPF Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Section 2. Field Wiring Procedures 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14. 2-15. Example Sort-by-Hardware Terminations List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Termination List Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Amplitude Discrimination Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Typical Noisy Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Ideal Analog Signal Field Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Typical Thermocouple Analog Signal Wiring by User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Typical Sensor Analog Signal Wiring by User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 QAXT Half-Shell Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Standard “A” Cabinet and Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Enhanced “B” Cabinet, Termination Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Address Jumpers on Cable Connector (“B” Cabinet Terminations) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Q-Card Number of Channels and Starting Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Address Jumpering Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Section 3. Q-Card Reference Sheets 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6. 3-7. 3-8. 3-9. 3-10. 3-11. 3-12. 3-13. 3-14. 3-15. 3-16. 3-17. Typical Q-Card Termination, “Standard” Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Typical Q-Card Termination, Remote “B” Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 QAA G01 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 QAA G02 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 QAA Card Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 QAA Card Usage Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 QAA Card State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 QAA G01 Detailed Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 QAA G02 Detailed Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 QAA Mother Card Components, Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 QAA DWC Daughter Card Components, Test Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 QAA DBK Daughter Card Components, Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 QAC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 QAC Block Diagram (Groups 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 QAC Block Diagram (Group 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 QAC Block Diagram (Group 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 QAC Block Diagram (Group 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 M0-0053 iv Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures, Cont’d Figure 3-18. 3-19. 3-20. 3-21. 3-22. 3-23. 3-24. 3-25. 3-26. 3-27. 3-28. 3-29. 3-30. 3-31. 3-32. 3-33. 3-34. 3-35. 3-36. 3-37. 3-38. 3-39. 3-40. 3-41. 3-42. 3-43. 3-44. 3-45. 3-46. 3-47. 3-48. 3-49. 3-50. 3-51. 3-52. 3-53. 3-54. 3-55. 3-56. 3-57. 3-58. Title Page QAC Block Diagram (Group 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 QAC Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 QAC Card Components (Indicators and test Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 QAH Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 QAH Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 QAH Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 QAH Word Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 QAH Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 QAH Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 QAH CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 QAI Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 QAI Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67 QAI Control Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68 QAI Analog Point Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 QAI Analog Point Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 QAI Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 QAI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 QAI CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 QAM Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 QAM Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 QAM Card Systems Application Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 QAM Card Usage Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 QAM Card Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91 QAM Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95 QAO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 QAO Card Functional Block Diagram, 5-Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102 QAO Point Block Diagram, 5- Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 QAO Card Functional Block Diagram, 6-Level and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 QAO Point Block Diagram, 6-Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105 QAO Bipolar Output Voltage Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111 QAO Unipolar Output Current Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112 QAO Unipolar Output Voltage Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113 QAO Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114 QAO Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116 QAO CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 & 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117 QAO CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 through 6, & 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118 QAV Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119 QAV Typical Control System Using QAV Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121 QAV Analog Input Circuits Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124 QAV Card Digital Circuits Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125 QAV Analog-to-Digital Conversion Process Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126 5/99 v Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures Figure 3-59. 3-60. 3-61. 3-62. 3-63. 3-64. 3-65. 3-66. 3-67. 3-68. 3-69. 3-70. 3-71. 3-72. 3-73. 3-74. 3-75. 3-76. 3-77. 3-78. 3-79. 3-80. 3-81. 3-82. 3-83. 3-84. 3-85. 3-86. 3-87. 3-88. 3-89. 3-90. 3-91. 3-92. 3-93. 3-94. 3-95. 3-96. 3-97. 3-98. 3-99. Title QAV Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV Card Rear-Edge Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV Card Output Data Pattern Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV Card Components (Level 6 and earlier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV Card Components (Level 8 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV Wiring Diagram (QAV Groups 1 through 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram, QAV to TSC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAV CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Typical Control System Using QAW Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Analog Input Circuits Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Digital Circuits Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Card Rear-Edge Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Card Output Data Pattern Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Card Components (Level 7 and earlier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW Card Components (Level 9 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram, QAW Groups 1,2,3,4, and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram: QAW Group 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram, QAW to TSC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAW CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Output Data Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Shield Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Recommended Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAXT Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAXT Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAX Card with R75 Jumper Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAXT Standard Half-Shell Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QAXT Remote I/O Half-Shell Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical, Multicrate, Q-Line System Using QBE Card Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . QBE Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE Timing Diagram of the Operation of the Bus Discharge Circuit . . . . . . . . QBE Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE Transmit Mode Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE Receive Mode Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE No Level Shift Mode Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3-130 3-131 3-133 3-134 3-136 3-143 3-145 3-147 3-148 3-150 3-153 3-154 3-157 3-159 3-161 3-162 3-163 3-165 3-168 3-170 3-172 3-173 3-183 3-184 3-186 3-187 3-188 3-189 3-193 3-195 3-197 3-198 3-199 3-200 3-202 3-204 3-205 3-207 3-208 3-208 3-209 M0-0053 vi Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures, Cont’d Figure 3-100. 3-101. 3-102. 3-103. 3-104. 3-105. 3-106. 3-107. 3-108. 3-109. 3-110. 3-111. 3-112. 3-113. 3-114. 3-115. 3-116. 3-117. 3-118. 3-119. 3-120. 3-121. 3-122. 3-123. Title Page 3-213 3-215 3-217 3-219 3-220 3-220 3-221 3-221 3-222 3-224 3-226 3-228 3-229 3-231 3-233 3-234 3-240 3-240 3-241 3-242 3-243 3-244 3-248 3-251 3-252 3-253 3-254 3-256 3-258 3-259 3-262 3-263 3-264 3-267 3-269 3-270 3-271 3-271 3-274 QBI Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBI Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a QBI Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical G01 and G02 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical G03, G04 and G05 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical G06, G07, G09 and G10 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . Typical G08 and G11 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBI Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Detailed Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Typical Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO CE MARK Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Channel Input Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Channel Range Adjustment Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Channel Offset Adjustment Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Output Gain Stage - Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Output Gain Stage - Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Card Outline and User Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Wiring Diagram (Group 1) (Using AMP-18 conductor 18 AWG wiring) (3A99512) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124. QCA Wiring Diagram (Group 2) (Using AMP-18 conductor 18 AWG wiring) (3A99512) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125. QCA CE MARK Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126. QCI Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127. QCI Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128. QCI Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129. Cable Length Limitations for QCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130. QCI Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131. QCI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132. QCI CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133. QDI Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134. QDI Card Address Jumper Assembly (Differential Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135. QDI Card Address Jumper Assembly, Single Ended Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136. QDI G01 Point Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137. QDI Typical Contact Input Point Wiring (G03, 05, 07, 08, 09, 10) . . . . . . . . . . 3-138. QDI Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/99 vii Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures Figure 3-139. 3-140. 3-141. 3-142. 3-143. 3-144. 3-145. 3-146. 3-147. 3-148. 3-149. 3-150. 3-151. 3-152. 3-153. 3-154. 3-155. 3-156. 3-157. 3-158. 3-159. 3-160. 3-161. 3-162. 3-163. 3-164. 3-165. Title Page Wiring Diagram: QDI Groups 2, 4, 6, and 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-275 QDT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-276 QDT Card Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-280 QIC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-283 QIC Detailed Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-289 QIC Card Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-290 QID Block Diagram, Double Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-296 QID Block Diagram, Single Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-297 QID Card Address Jumper Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-305 QID Card Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-306 QID Group 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308 QID Group 8 and Group 17 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308 QID Single Ended Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-309 QID Differential Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-309 QID Wiring for Groups 2, 4, 6, 11, 13, and 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-310 QID Card Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-311 QID Card Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-312 QID Card Connections (G10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-313 QID CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2, 4, 6, 11, 13 and 15) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-314 CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14 and 16) . . . . . . . . . 3-315 CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-316 QLI Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318 QLI Card Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-319 QLI Card Address Jumper Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-324 QLI Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-324 QLI Wiring Diagram: WDPF Powered, Local Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-327 QLI Wiring Diagram: Digital I/O-WDPF Powered Analog I/O-Self Powered with Remote Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-328 3-166. QLI CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Analog Inputs Powered at Field Side) . . . . . 3-330 3-167. QLI CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Analog Inputs Powered at WDPF System Side)3-331 3-168. QLJ Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-332 3-169. QLJ Card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-333 3-170. QLJ Card Address Jumper Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-337 3-171. QLJ Card Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-338 3-172. QLJ Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-340 3-173. QLJ Ground Inputs at System End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-341 3-174. QLJ Ground Inputs at Signal Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-341 3-175. QLJ Fused Half-Shell Extension Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-342 3-176. Loop Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343 3-177. LIM Functional Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-344 3-178. Keyboards for Group 1 and Group 2 LIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-347 M0-0053 viii Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures, Cont’d Figure 3-179. 3-180. 3-181. 3-182. 3-183. 3-184. 3-185. 3-186. 3-187. 3-188. 3-189. 3-190. 3-191. 3-192. 3-193. 3-194. 3-195. 3-196. 3-197. 3-198. 3-199. 3-200. 3-201. 3-202. 3-203. 3-204. 3-205. 3-206. Title Page 3-348 3-351 3-352 3-355 3-356 3-359 3-361 3-362 3-365 3-368 3-369 3-370 3-371 3-372 3-373 3-374 3-375 3-378 3-379 3-380 3-381 3-382 3-383 3-384 3-385 3-387 3-388 3-389 3-390 3-393 3-394 3-395 3-396 3-397 3-400 3-407 3-408 3-409 3-410 3-412 LIM Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIM Small Loop Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIM Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboards for Group 1 and Group 2 SLIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIM Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT Card Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA +48 VDC Clock Input Signal Wiring (G01, G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Control Signal (+48 VDC) Input Wiring (G01, G02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA +5 VDC Clock Input Signal Wiring (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Clock Signal Wiring (Differential Line Driver) G02 and G03. . . . . . . . . . QPA +5 VDC Control Input Wiring (G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Counter/Comparator (1 of 2) (G01, 2, 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Counter/Comparator (2 of 2) (G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA J2 Pin Connector (G01, 2 and 3) (Front View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA J3 Pin Connector (G01, 2, 3, and 4) (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Address Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Address Selection (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Address Selection (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Group Read Bit Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Used for Speed Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Card Used for Elapsed Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Used for Speed Ratio Measurement (For example, estimate stretch of materials between two rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207. QPA Used for Average Inverse Speed Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208. QPA Wiring Diagram, Groups 1 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209. QPA Wiring Diagram, Groups 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210. QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 and 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-211. QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212. QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213. QRF Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214. QRF Card Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-215. QRF Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216. QRF CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217. QRO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218. QRO Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/99 ix Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures Figure 3-219. 3-220. 3-221. 3-222. 3-223. 3-224. 3-225. 3-226. 3-227. 3-228. 3-229. 3-230. 3-231. 3-232. 3-233. 3-234. 3-235. 3-236. 3-237. 3-238. 3-239. 3-240. 3-241. 3-242. 3-243. 3-244. 3-245. 3-246. 3-247. 3-248. 3-249. 3-250. 3-251. 3-252. 3-253. 3-254. 3-255. 3-256. 3-257. 3-258. 3-259. Title QRO Safe Operating Area Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Control System Using QRT Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Output Dynamic Linear Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Bridge and I to F Circuits Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Digital Circuits Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridge Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTDs and Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Wiring Diagram: Plant Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Wiring Diagram: Cabinet Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Grounded at the B Cabinet). . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Grounded in the Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSC Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSC Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Typical QSD Card Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Card Input Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Card Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EH and MH Actuator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Card Outline and User Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Analog Output Stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Event Buffer Memory Arbitration Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE LED Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Event Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Status Byte Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Data Format for Reading Demand, Feedback, and Scale Factors . . . . . . . Read Data Format for Reading Channel Valve-Type Assignments . . . . . . . . . . Write Data Format for Sending Demands to a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3-414 3-415 3-416 3-419 3-421 3-423 3-425 3-426 3-428 3-429 3-432 3-435 3-436 3-444 3-447 3-449 3-451 3-452 3-453 3-454 3-457 3-458 3-460 3-462 3-462 3-466 3-471 3-475 3-481 3-484 3-489 3-502 3-503 3-504 3-505 3-510 3-511 3-521 3-524 3-524 3-525 M0-0053 x Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures, Cont’d Figure 3-260. 3-261. 3-262. 3-263. 3-264. 3-265. Title Page 3-526 3-530 3-535 3-536 3-537 3-539 3-540 3-541 3-542 3-543 3-546 3-548 3-550 3-551 3-553 3-556 3-558 3-559 3-559 3-562 3-564 3-565 3-566 3-568 3-569 3-572 3-578 3-580 3-582 3-583 3-584 QSR Card Outline and User Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR Analog Output Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 and 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 & 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 & 4 with B Cabinet Earth Grounding). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-266. QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 & 4 with Field Earth Grounding) 3-267. QSS Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-268. QSS Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-269. QSS Speed Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-270. QSS Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-271. QSS Wiring Diagram (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-272. QSS Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-273. QSS CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-274. QTB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-275. QTB Card Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-276. QTB Real Time Clock Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-277. QTB Output Signal Timing Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-278. QTB Card Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-279. QTO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-280. TRIAC Zero Voltage Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-281. TRIAC Operation with Load Current Below 75 mA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-282. QTO Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-283. QTO Card Address Jumper Assembly Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-284. QTO Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-285. QTO Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-286. Example of QVP DIOB Base Address Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-287. QVP Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-288. QVP Wiring Diagram (Using #6 Screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-289. QVP Wiring Diagram (Using #8 Screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-290. QVP CE MARK Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Worksheets A-1. Q-card Hardware Address Selection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Appendix B. Setting Q-Card Addresses B-1. B-2. Address Jumpers on Cable Connector (“B” Cabinet Terminations) . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Card Address Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 5/99 xi Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Figures Figure Title Page Appendix C. Card-Edge Field Termination C-1. C-2. C-3. Address Jumpers on Card-Edge Termination Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Standard Card-Edge Field Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Screw-Down Terminal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 M0-0053 xii Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Table of Contents, Cont’d List of Tables Table Title Page Section 1. Introduction 1-1. 1-2. Available Q-Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Section 2. Field Wiring Procedures 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. Noise Class Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “B” Cabinet Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Half-Shell Terminal Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half-Shell to Q-Card Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Consumption and Heat Load for Q-Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-23 2-26 2-27 2-40 Section 3. Q-Card Reference Sheets 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6. 3-7. 3-8. 3-9. 3-10. 3-11. 3-12. 3-13. 3-14. 3-15. 3-16. 3-17. 3-18. 3-19. 3-20. 3-21. 3-22. 3-23. 3-24. 3-25. 3-26. Q-Card Groups and Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 QAA Status/Command Byte Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 QAA J1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 QAA J2 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 QAA G02 Analog Position Input Circuit Plug-in Resistor Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 QAA Half-Speed Clock On and Off Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 QAA Card Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 QAA LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 QAA Potentiometers (Daughter Board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 QAA Test Points (Daughter Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 QAC Output Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 QAC G01 and G02 Contact Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 QAC G03 Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 QAC G04 Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 QAC G05 Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 QAC G06 Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 QAH Conversion Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 QAH Bipolar Conversion Dataword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 QAH Unipolar Conversion Dataword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 QAH Option Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 QAI Analog Input Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 QAM Current Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 QAM J2 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 QAM Output Demand Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 QAM J3 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 QAM DIOB Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88 5/99 xiii M0-0053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cont’d List of Tables Table 3-27. . . 3-89 QAM Manual Mode Demand Operations (G03) . . . . . . 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138 QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (Ovation System) . . . . 3-99 QAO Card Reset Switch Position (Update Period) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61. . . 3-96 QAM RS Selection of Setpoint Linear Clock Frequency. . . . . . . . . 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60. . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181 QAX Low-Level Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54. . . 3-194 QAX/QAXT Based Thermocouple Compensation Kit Group Usage . . . . . . . . . 3-135 QAV Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174 QAX Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115 QAV Card Output Data Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136 QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (WDPF System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-194 QAXT Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65. . . . . . . . 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96 QAM RE Selection of Demand Exponential Clock Frequency Sweep Rates . . . . . . . 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205 QBE +5 VDC to +11 VDC Level Shift Circuit . . . . . . . 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 QAM Manual Mode Demand Operations (G01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93 QAM RL Selected or Demand Linear Clock Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locations and Functions (Level 6 and earlier) . . . 3-30. . . . 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185 QAXD Card Groups and Capabilities. . . . 3-49. . . . 3-55. . 3-179 QAX Address Offsets (Ovation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . 3-43. . . . . . 3-196 QAXT Terminations . . . . . . . . . . 3-191 QAXT Power Supply Voltages (from QAX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196 QBE Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195 QAXT Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41. . . . . . . . 3-180 QAX Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions . . . . . .Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97 QAM Test Points . . . 3-115 QAO Analog Output Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39. . 3-183 QAX Jumper Configuration . . 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Page QAM Analog Values versus Hex Codes . . . . . . . 3-205 QBE Internal Power Supply Voltages . . . 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 QAM Watchdog Timer Switch Settings . . 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . 3-178 QAX Address Offsets (WDPF Systems) . 2. . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . 3-97 QAM Jumper Selection of Options. . . . . 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164 QAX Card Groups and Capabilities . 3-206 M0-0053 xiv 5/99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163 QAW Jumper Configuration. . . . . 3-190 QAXD Counter Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140 QAW Card Output Data Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182 QAX Low-Level Inputs with Compensation . . . 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67. . . 3-161 QAW Card Jumpers and Functions (Level 7 and earlier). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176 QAX Input Signal Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 3-183 QAX Data Pattern Range . 3-37. . . . . . . . 3-98 QAM Potentiometer Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59. . . . . . 3-44. . . 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62. . . . . 3-182 QAX High Level Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134 QAV Card Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52. . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBI QID Card Equivalents. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108. . . . Cable Length Limits for QCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QID Card Summary . Cont’d List of Tables Table Title Page 3-206 3-209 3-211 3-212 3-214 3-215 3-217 3-230 3-231 3-232 3-238 3-239 3-249 3-250 3-250 3-257 3-260 3-261 3-262 3-266 3-268 3-272 3-273 3-280 3-292 3-293 3-294 3-299 3-300 3-301 3-302 3-303 3-304 3-307 3-326 3-339 3-348 3-349 3-357 3-363 3-363 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Groups 1 and 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Length for QDI . . . . 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QIC DIOB2 (P4) for WIO . . Reference Designators for QCA Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81. . . . . . . 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79. . . . . . QBI Card Input Specifications .Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIM Serial Port Card-Edge Connector . . . . . . . . . . . QDI Input Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95. . . . . . . . . . . QID Single-Ended Input Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIM Power Card-Edge Terminal Block Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QID Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QID Allowable Cable Capacitance. . . . 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105. . . . . . . . 3-99. . . . . . . . . QCA Plug-in Scaling Resistor Reference Designators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE J2 and J3 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCI Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCI G02 DIP Switch Positions . . . 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA Test Point Reference Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDI-QID Card Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBI Card Group Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76. . . . . 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE +11 VDC to +5 VDC Level Shift Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QID G10 Input Interface. . . . . . . . . 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69. . . . . . . 3-90. . . . QBO DIP Switch Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCA DIOB Card Edge Connector Pinout . . . . . . . QDT Card Controls and Indicators . . . . . . 3-83. . . . . . QIC DIOB1 Card Edge Connector . 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT J5 (Power Monitor Relay) Pin Connections and Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . QIC DIOB2 for WDPF . . . QCA Field Front Card Edge Connector . . . . . . . . QBO Card Reset Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . QID Inputs . . . . . QBI Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDI Pin Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QMT Card Fuse Ratings and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86. . . . . QID Differential Input Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIM Serial Port Card-Edge Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBO Digital Output Contact Allocations . . . . . . 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBE J1 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCI Contact Wetting Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107. . . . . . . . 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/99 xv M0-0053 . . 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121. . . . 3-136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO Card Reset Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135. . . . . . . QSE Point ID Bit Assignment . . . . . . 3-137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Analog Output Stage Plug-in Resistors . . . . . . . . . . 3-147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141. 3-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Cable Lengths (Assume RC = 0) for QSE Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRF DIOB Address Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE J1 Connector DIOB Pin Out. . . . . . . Groups 2 and 4 (AC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector . . . . . . . . Normal Mode Voltage Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Clock Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127. . . . . . . 3-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134. . . . . . . and Output Values (Example B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug in Resistor Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Edge Pairs for QRT Card Address Bits. 3-128. . . . . . . . . . 3-126. . . . 3-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133. . . . . . . . . . 3-144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120. . . . 3-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Watchdog Timeout Selections . . . . . . . . . . Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119. . QSC Input Frequency Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug in Resistor Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3) . . . . . . . 3-139. . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Clock Select Jumper Connections . . . . . . . . . Field Signal Times (J3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132. . . . . . . . . 3-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140. . . . . and Output Values (Example A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Groups 1 and 3 (DC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Jumper Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cont’d List of Tables Table Title Page 3-376 3-377 3-380 3-406 3-406 3-417 3-417 3-426 3-430 3-433 3-434 3-434 3-441 3-442 3-455 3-469 3-473 3-473 3-474 3-476 3-478 3-479 3-480 3-488 3-490 3-491 3-493 3-495 3-496 3-497 3-499 3-518 3-519 3-520 3-522 3-523 3-531 3-531 3-533 3-533 3-534 3-109. . 3-122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPA Field Signal (J3) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Current Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Status Word Bit Assignment . . . . . QSD P + I Controller Resistors. . QSR Read Register Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . Count. 3-149. . QSR DIOB Card Edge Connector Pinout. . . . QRT Card Conversion Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE Status Word Bit Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Front-Edge M/A Station and Field Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSD Card Jumpers . QSD Direct Output Resistors . . . . . . . . 3-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Field Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131. . . . . . LVDT Calibration resistor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Address Jumpers . . . . . . Bridge. . . . . . 3-124. . . . . . . . . . . M0-0053 xvi 5/99 . . . 3-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRO Digital Output Contact Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Jumper Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3). . . . 3-145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Test Point Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QRT Front Edge Connector Pin Assignments . Bridge. . . . QRT Card RTD Bridge Modules (7380A92) . . . . 3-115. . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Signal Pins . . . QSR DIOB Address Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . 3-152. C-5 5/99 xvii M0-0053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP LEDs . . . . . Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address. . QVP Digital Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVDT Coil Drive Outputs . . . .Table of Contents. . . 3-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSS Field Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP Option Select Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card-Edge Terminal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164. . . . . . . Cont’d List of Tables Table Title Page 3-534 3-546 3-548 3-570 3-570 3-574 3-575 3-575 3-575 3-576 3-576 3-577 3-577 3-577 3-579 3-581 3-581 3-150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158. . . . . . . . . . . QVP Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162. . . . . QVP Valve Position Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Q-Card Addresses B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP Setpoint Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTO Card Reset Switch Position . . . . . . . QSS Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154. . . . . . . . . Card-Edge Field Termination C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151. . . . . . Appendix B. . . . . . 3-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP Testjacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163. . . LVDT Secondary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . 3-160. B-3 Appendix C. . QTO Digital Output Contact Allocations . . . Channel Test Point Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4) . QVP Current Loop Input (Groups 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVP Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . 3-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156. . . . . QVP Valve Coil Drive Outputs . . . . . . . . Table of Contents. Cont’d List of Tables Table Title Page M0-0053 xviii 5/99 . and additions.Summary of Changes This revision of “Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0053) includes the following changes: • • • • • • • • • • • QRF wiring diagram was changed to clarify A and B halfshells. QAV. corrections. QAW input value was changed QAI. QAX drawing number was changed. and QAX conversion values were added. and QRT had additions and changes made. QLI-7 wiring diagram was changed. QID. QBI termination numbers were changed. All sections may include additional miscellaneous reorganization. QAO. QLI-5 digital input ranges were changed. There were notes added to QLI-5 and QLI-8. Appropriate information was added to describe the Q-Line cards which are now CE Mark compliant. QPA clock rate was changed. clarifications. 5/99 Changes-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . these manuals detail the considerations and decisions that face the user before the equipment arrives at the permanent site. and I/O. These drops are connected by coaxial cable or fiber optic cable to the WDPF Data Highway. this manual is one of several which describe the installation of a WDPF system. followed by the installation of the Data Highway. This manual describes installation of Q-Line I/O.Section 1. As Figure 1-1 indicates. the individual drops. Installation of a WDPF system includes planning. earlier phases of WDPF installation must be completed. and describe installation procedures from receipt of the equipment to power-up of all drops and peripheral devices. Introduction 1-1. Note Prior to beginning the I/O installation procedures described in this volume. Refer to the applicable documents for details (see Figure 1-1). 5/99 1-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Overview The WDPF® system consists of individual processing units (called drops) which communicate over networks (called highways). including field wiring and card addressing. In combination. Phase 3A Install Data Highway Phase 3B Install Field Wiring Phase 3B. Phases of WDPF Installation M0-0053 1-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Phase 4 Receive/ Install Drops Phase 4. Install Data Highway as described in “ Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) or “Installation Manual (WEStation) ”(M0-8000). Phase 5 Start-up Highway Phase 5. Receive and install drops described in “Drop Installation Manual” (M0-0052) or “Drop Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8005). Phase 2 Prepare Site Phase 2.1-1. Prepare site as described in “ Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) or “Highway Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000). Plan system layout as described in “Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) or “ Planning and Highway Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000). Start-up highway as described in “ Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) or “ Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000). Phase 3A. Overview Phase 1 Plan System Layout Phase 1. Figure 1-1. Install field wiring as described in this manual (M0-0053) OR in “Remote Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0054) OR in “Distributed I/O Installation Manual” (NLAM-B204) and associated instruction leaflets. Section 3. Q-Card Reference Sheets describes the available Q-Cards. Setting Q-Card Addresses shows how to set card addresses on a WDPF system. Cards that are described in detail in other manuals are indicated by an asterisk (*) in front of the card name and the number of the manual after the card name 5/99 1-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .1-2. Contents of this Document The contents of this document are described below: Section 1. Appendix A. A hexadecimal to binary table is included Appendix C. and the contents and scope of this document. Appendix B. Contents of this Document 1-2. Card-Edge Field Termination shows an alternate method of wiring a WDPF system. Worksheets shows sample worksheets used to determine the wiring and addresses of the WDPF system. Field Wiring Procedures provides general information on recommended field wiring techniques. including termination information. including termination and noise minimization. Introduction describes the WDPF system installation documents. Table 1-1 lists the Q-Cards that are described in this manual. Section 2. QRF (Four Wire RTD Input Card) QRO (Relay Output Card) QRS (Redundant Station Interface Card) QRT (RTD Input Amplifier Card) QSC (Speed Channel Card) QSD (Servo Driver) QSE (Sequence of Events Recorder Card) QSR (Servo Driver with Position Readback Card) QSS (Speed Sensor Card) * QST (Smart Transmitter Interface) (see also U0-1115) QTB (Time Base Card) QTO (TRIAC Output Card) QVP (Servo Valve Position Controller Card) M0-0053 1-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Available Q-Cards Q-Card Q-Card QAA (Actuator Auto/Manual Card) QAC (Analog Conditioning Card) * QLC (Serial Link Controller) (see also U0-1100) QLI (Loop Interface Card) QAH (High-Speed Analog Input Point Card) QLJ (Loop Interface Card with output readback) QAI (Analog Input Card) LIM (Loop Interface Module) QAM (Auto/Manual Station Controller Card) SLIM (Small Loop Interface Module) QAO (Analog Output Card) QAV (Analog Input Point Card) QMT (M-Bus Terminator Card) QPA (Pulse Accumulator Card) QAW (Analog High-Level Input Point Card) * QRC (Remote Q-Line) (see also M0-0054) QAX (Analog Input Point Card) QAXD (QAX Digital Daughter Board) QAXT (Temperature Compensation) QBE (Bus Extender Card) QBI (Digital Input Card) QBO (Digital Output Card) QCA (Current Amplifier Card) QCI (Contact Input Card) * QDC (Digital Controller) (see also U0-1105) QDI (Digital Input Card) QDT (Diagnostic Test Card) * QFR (Fiber-Optic Repeater) (see also M0-0054) QIC (Q-Line DIOB Monitor) QID (Digital Input) * indicates this card is not fully described in this manual. Contents of this Document Table 1-1.1-2. Table 1-2. 518 Document Name or Source Recommended Guide for Measuring Ground Resistance and Potential Gradients in the Earth IEEE Standard Test Code for Resistance Measurement IEEE Service Center 445 Hoes Lane Piscataway. Table 1-2 lists documents and pertinent standards which may be helpful:. 81-1962 IEEE Standard No. and W. MA 02210 Distributed I/O Installation Manual M0-0051 M0-0052 M0-0054 M0-8000 M0-8005 National Electric Code NLAM-B204 Power Line Disturbances and Their Effect Hewlett-Packard Journal. Reference Documents Document Number IEEE Standard No. Reference Documents 1-3.1-3. Reference Documents In addition to this manual. 118-1978 IEEE Standard No. Vincent Roland U0-0106 U0-0131 U0-0135 U0-1100 U0-1105 U0-1115 Standard Control Algorithm User’s Guide Record Type User’s Guide DPU Introduction and Configurations QLC User’s Guide QDC User’s Guide Smart Transmitter Interface User’s Guide 5/99 1-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . August 1981 on Computer Design and Performance by Duell. NJ 08854 Data Highway Installation Manual (Standard and PCH) Drop Installation Manual (Standard and PCH) Remote Q-Line Installation Manual Highway Installation Manual (WEStation Equipped) Drop Installation Manual (WEStation Equipped) National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Avenue Boston. which describes installation of Q-Line I/O. Arthur W. Reference Documents Additional publications may be obtained by writing the following professional societies.1-3. and requesting their lists of available publications: • Electronic Industries Association Engineering Department 20011 Street NW Washington. Box 12277 Research Triangle Park. DC 20036 • • M0-0053 1-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . NC 27709 Scientific Apparatus Makers Association Process Measurement & Control Section 1101 16th Street NW Washington.O. DC 20006 Instrument Society of America 67 Alexander Drive P. Field Termination Types (Section 2-7). Using Address Selection Jumpers (Section 2-10). Field Wiring Half-Shell and Card-Edge Terminations (Section 2-12). 5/99 2-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . System Reference Documents (Section 2-3). Power Consumption (Section 2-14). Environmental Specifications (Section 2-13). Noise Minimization Techniques (Section 2-4). Additional information on each Q-card can be found in Section 3. Pre-Wiring Consideration (Section 2-11). and provides specific field wiring procedures. This section includes the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • WDPF Field Wiring (Section 2-2). defines both the field signal termination and noise minimization techniques. Thermocouple Considerations (Section 2-5). Common Input Considerations (Section 2-6). This information is designed to enable installation personnel to easily make field signal connections between the user’s process and the WDPF System. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection (Section 2-9). This section assumes that the user is familiar with the procedures given in “Data Highway Installation Manual (M0-0051) and “Highway Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000). “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing (Section 2-8).Section 2. Field Wiring Procedures 2-1. Section Overview This section describes WDPF field wiring. 2-2. field signal connections are made to drops which interface directly to the process. M0-0053 2-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . These drops are pre-assembled at the factory. WDPF Field Wiring 2-2. pre-installed field cables/wires to the respective drops’ field terminations. the process I/O interface and process point cards are contained in the Distributed Processing Unit (DPU). WDPF Field Wiring In WDPF System applications. and all internal field signal cable and wiring connections up to the field termination points are already in place. Noise minimization is discussed in Section 2-4. Section 2-5 through Section 2-12 present procedures for drop field wiring terminations. two areas should be considered: noise minimization techniques and the drop field terminations. Typically. To field-wire a WDPF System. Field-signal wiring within WDPF Systems involves connecting user-supplied. The two primary types are the sort-by-point and the sort-by-hardware lists. needed for field wiring. This list illustrates the required wiring for a DPU. Westinghouse provides the following task-related documentation to support system installation and maintenance: • • • • • Q-card descriptions Typical Q-Line or process I/O termination schematics External cabling lists Field signal termination lists Half-shell termination drawings The “Field Signal Termination Lists” are used by installation personnel for field wiring purposes. cabinet. to support maintenance and to support installation. and sorts to meet the specific user requirements. The lists are computer-generated and are compiled in a variety of forms. This list is produced from the process I/O lists developed during the installation’s planning phase (see “Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) and “Highway Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000)). System Reference Documents Each system’s specific field signal requirements determine the mix of Q-cards within the drop. An example of the sort-by-hardware list and its format is shown in Figure 2-1. The sort-by-point (or signal) type of list supports post-installation maintenance activities. The sort-by-hardware type of list is organized for easy identification of signal. the field wiring connections. column heads. System Reference Documents 2-3. and the types of cabling and/or wiring to be used. where easy point or signal identification is needed to aid diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.2-3. card. and field termination point (half-shell or card-edge connector) locations. which utilizes a termination cabinet. 5/99 2-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . it enables system addressing of a specific card. Example Sort-by-Hardware Terminations List From this list. as specified by a process I/O list. System Reference Documents User defined signal point name User defined signal description User defined signal tag Card address I/O signal point number System cabinet number Half-shell zone location Ground connection point Terminal strip connection points POINT NAME HMF506 HMF512 HMF518 BMF506 BMF512 BMF518 GQF506 GQF512 GQF518 ZRF506 ZRF512 ZRF518 CA AD RD DR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 P N I 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 C A B 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Z O N E A A A A A A A A A A A A S H H L 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 G N D A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A10 A11 A12 A13 P O S C O M DESCRIPTION REACTOR CORE INLET WATER TEMP REACTOR CORE OUTLT WATER TEMP REACTOR CORE STEAM TEMP FEEDWATER INLET TEMP FEEDWATER OUTLET TEMP FEEDWATER PRESS AT DISCHRGE RETURN STEAM TEMPERATURE STACK GAS FLOW RATE IONS PER SQUARE METER GALLONS OF WATER.This field is the number which identifies the specific signal and input or output circuits of each Q-card. PRESSURE DISCHARGE TANK OVERFLOW ALRM TAG ABCD1234 ABCD1235 ABCD1236 FGHI4567 FGHI4568 FGHI4569 QWER2222 QWER3333 QWER4444 ASDF5555 ASDF6666 ASDF7777 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 B 2 B10 B11 B12 B13 Figure 2-1.This field is the specific card address (in hexadecimal) used by the process I/O bus (DIOB) for data communications.2-3. This list also contains the following installation information provided by Westinghouse: • • Q-card Address -. M0-0053 2-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and signal tags. FEEDWATER COOLANT FLOW. card termination schematics. Point Number -. This can be used to identify specific circuits on the card schematics. the user can find the point name. or example process field wiring diagrams. signal description. 2-3. Note For card-edge termination applications. at which the signal is to be terminated. positive and common).This field identifies the specific half-shell within the termination cabinet. at which the signal is to be terminated. 5/99 2-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . this is the Q-crate/slot location. • • Ground Connection -. Half-Shell Zone Location -.This field identifies the specific half-shell terminal points where the field signal connections are to be made (in this example. System Reference Documents • • Cabinet Number -.This field identifies the specific termination cabinet within the system. Terminal Strip Connection Points -.This field identifies the specific point within the termination cabinet where signal grounds are connected (as defined by the customer). Figure 2-2 gives some of the various termination list formats and column heads used for installation purposes. System Reference Documents POINT NAME Terminations Cabinet Without Signal Conditioning S H P E S ZH CA O NT OE AD I SY C G P N C NL RD N OP A N O E O EL DESCRIPTION TAG DR T RE B D S G M R T N SIGNAL COND POINT NAME Terminations Cabinet Without Signal Conditioning H P S ZH CA O OE G AD I C P C NL N RD N A O O EL D DESCRIPTION TAG DR T B S M POINT NAME Card-Edge Terminations With Signal Conditioning Q S C P E RS CA O NT AL AD I SY C G P N TO RD N OP A N O E ET DESCRIPTION TAG DR T RE B D S G C O M SIGNAL COND POINT NAME Card-Edge Terminations Without Signal Q S C P E RS CA O NT AL AD I SY C TO RD N OP A ET DESCRIPTION TAG DR T RE B Conditioning G N D P O S C O M POINT NAME Cable Terminations With Signal Conditioning S P E C CA O NT O AD I SY C G P N N RD N OP A N O E N DESCRIPTION TAG DR T RE B D S G C O M SIGNAL COND POINT NAME Cable Terminations Without P CA O AD I C RD N A DESCRIPTION TAG DR T B Signal Conditioning C O N N G N D P O S C O M Figure 2-2.2-3. Termination List Formats M0-0053 2-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . There are low-level voltage circuits. Background A wide variety of analog and/or digital circuits are associated with the WDPF System’s installation.1. pulse trains or similar data) via inter-connected or wired circuits. 5/99 2-7 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . high-level voltage circuits. Noise Minimization Techniques 2-4. or when elimination is not possible. The recovery of correct information from a noisy signal therefore depends upon the ability to subtract the noise from the desired information.2-4. circuits that transfer information. The noise minimization techniques briefly described in this section focus on preventing errors by either eliminating the noise. current. Noise Discrimination Natural signal properties (such as the peaks of a digital signal) or conditions created during signal transmission (such as the voltage of the analog signal) are used to make the desired information in the signal appear different from the noise. The information carried by signals in such circuits may become distorted during transfer and errors may result from this distortion. Noise problems typically occur when transmitting analog (voltage. These circuits are placed into two categories: noise-producing circuits and noise-sensitive circuits. The difference between the signal of transmitted information and the signal of that information as received is called noise (see Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4). performing steps to lessen its impact. There are three components of a signal that can be used to separate the desired information from a noisy signal: • • • Energy Level Frequency Source (of both Signal and Noise) The following pages explain how each of these components can be applied to minimize errors that may occur because of a noisy signal. and circuits that transfer power. and other measured values) or digital information (on/off conditions. Noise Minimization Techniques 2-4.2. 2-4. Noise Minimization Techniques Energy Level The energy level is the total energy for the signal plus any induced noise. Figure 2-3.2-4. If there is not a significant difference between the signal and the noise. then the noise is rejected easily by thresholding techniques (as identified as Desirable in Figure 2-3). Desirable 1 threshold 0 threshold Undesirable Ideal Signal Signal plus Noise Ideal Signal Severe Noise Imposed Threshold discrimination is possible because of sufficient contrast between noise and signal amplitude. The noise and signal have insufficient amplitude contrast to permit simple threshold discrimination. If there is a significant difference between the signal and the noise. Amplitude Discrimination Example M0-0053 2-8 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . then the noise is not easily rejected (as identified as Undesirable in Figure 2-3). The analog signals are usually lower in frequency than one cycle per second. Figure 2-4 shows an example of these two types of noise. while the digital signals between plant and controller appear from zero to a few hundred cycles per second. Figure 2-4. and for recovering digital signals from transient noise. Low pass filtering is useful in recovering analog signals from either power line or transient noise.5 MHz frequency. or to switching transients.2-4. Typical Noisy Signal 5/99 2-9 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Both analog and digital signals can be discriminated easily by eliminating frequency content from external noise sources such as switching transients. mV 60 50 40 30 20 Desired Signal 10 0 -10 0 Volt Reference Transient Noise Power Line Frequency Noise The signal above is shown at a 30mV level with both 14 mV RMS (60 Hz) and transient noise. Noise Minimization Techniques Frequency Most of the noise commonly encountered in industrial plants is related either to the power line frequency and its low harmonics. since the transients do not contain appreciable energy below 0. Noise Sources The following devices and circuits are common sources of noise: • • • • • Inductive devices. Noise Class Definitions Noise Class H Level High Definition Includes all AC power circuits from household 115 VAC up to KV transmission levels. most are relatively noise-free. Noise Classes Signal and power circuits. refer to “Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) or “Highway Installation Manual (WEStation)” (M0-8000). A definition of each class of noise is given in Table 2-1. such as relays and solenoids AC and DC power circuits. M0-0053 2-10 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2-4. It also includes telephone and television circuits. data links. as well as the low-pass filtering previously mentioned. It includes all DC power circuits from 250 VDC and 15 A or less up to 500 VDC and 200 A or more. Table 2-1.4. Noise Minimization Techniques Sources (Signal and Noise) When signals are originally generated. 2-4. Includes digital signals. and conventional (relay) logic circuits. The bulk of the noise present on a received signal has been added to the signal during its transmission. This technique. serves to reduce the recovery problem to one of amplitude or energy level discrimination. wiring. and wiring Switchgear Fast-rise-time sources: thyristors and certain solid-state switching circuits Variable-frequency or variable current devices 2-4. and low-speed pulse-counting circuits.3. M Medium L Q Low Very Low For details on the selection and spacing of field wiring with respect to noise. and cables are classified as high-level or low-level sources of noise and interference. Includes analog inputs as well as pulse inputs to high-speed counting and memory circuits. Includes Contact Closure Input (CCI) and Contact Closure Output (CCO) signals. Isolation and segregation of signal sources and wiring from noise sources is highly effective as a recovery means. Note High frequency noise currents can flow using stray capacitance as part of their path. Isolation of the digital signal receiver from ground is important as a means for rejecting noise which causes both wires in a signal pair to change voltage-to-ground potentials. An optical isolator may be used to bring digital signals into the receiver.5. Digital Signal Noise Rejection The WDPF System employs three specific noise rejection measures for digital signal plant interconnections: • • • Low pass filtering (2 to 16 msec time constant) Substantial signal levels (48 VDC or 115 VAC) Isolation. or optical coupling Low pass filtering and the use of large signal level techniques provide frequency and energy level discrimination. Another example in which isolation may be required to reject ground potential difference noise would be in circuits where coupling exists between signal wires. This requires the use of low pass filtering in addition to the optical isolation.2-4. Low frequency current. which may flow as a result of equal noise voltage-to-ground potentials on both wires of the signal pair. ground potential difference appears as a voltage on both wires of the corresponding signal pair. Induced potentials can occur when signal wires are present in environments with changing electromagnetic or electrostatic fields. This is called the common-mode voltage. where transmitter and receiver grounds are not at the same voltage. inducing a potential in both wires. Noise Minimization Techniques 2-4. In this case. is eliminated if the signal wires are not grounded at more than one point. No receiver response to noise can occur unless signal line noise current flows. An example of this type of isolation is a signal source (transmitter) which is grounded at a point remote from the receiver. Isolation may be required in this case. 5/99 2-11 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . respectively. 2-4.8. Noise can be coupled into these sensitive circuits in three ways: • • • Electrostatic coupling via distributed capacitances Electromagnetic coupling via distributed inductances Conductive coupling. 2-4. Power line related noise. Resistor and capacitor circuits are placed across these contacts to control the rate of voltage rise upon turn-off. However. Output Signal Noise Rejection Digital output signals from the WDPF System to the plant are electromechanical or semiconductor outputs which are entirely isolated from ground. Analog Signal Noise Rejection Analog signal isolation is provided for the same reasons that are discussed for digital signals (as described in Section 2-4. such as circuits sharing a common return M0-0053 2-12 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . filtering and isolation noise rejection techniques are more critical for analog signals than for digital signals. and so on) are especially susceptible to noise.) generally are treated by filtering. The only additional signal treatment needed is that required by the driven plant equipment itself. etc.6. Such signal conditioning is built into the equipment. large signal level.5). Field signals from process transducers (thermocouples. Noise Minimization Techniques 2-4. Noise-Sensitive Circuit Noise Rejection All transmitting. at the power line frequency and its harmonics. Transient noise (high frequency damped ringing) has zero average value for averages taken over time periods much longer than the duration of the transients. 2-4. and other appropriate forms of noise suppression. isolation. Analog signal filtering is achieved by averaging applied signals for one cycle (or an integer multiple of cycles) of the AC power line frequency. Interconnections between various WDPF subsystems (printers.7. low-level analog and digital circuits must be assumed to be noise-sensitive and to require special protection against noise. since analog signals are typically low level. has exactly zero average value when the average is taken over exactly one cycle and is filtered out of the signal by this technique. RTDs. For this reason. and as the distance from noise sources becomes less. Twisted-pair Wiring Twisted-pair wiring suppresses noise by acting to eliminate circuit loops which are sensitive to stray electromagnetic fields. Proper Grounding and Shielding Proper grounding along with Shielding causes noise-induced currents to flow in the shield. the shield should be as continuous as possible (foil or metallized plastic) and equipped with a “drain wire” for secure single-point grounding. a twist rate of at least one to two twists per foot is recommended. This is because electrostatic and electromagnetic fields decay with increasing distance. Digital signal connections should carry a group return (or common) wired in the same cable as the signal wires. and from the shield to ground. In twisted pairs or small cables (less than 1/2 inch outer conductor circle diameter). especially avoiding multiple grounding of cable shields Proper shielding. Twisted pairs are also recommended in digital circuits where unusually noisy environments exist. To accomplish this. rather than in the corresponding signal conductors. Twisting of the signal wire and its return conductor becomes increasingly important as the length of the two becomes greater. Noise Minimization Techniques Noise suppression for these noise sensitive circuits involves one or more of the following basic measures: • • • • • Physical separation between noise-producing and noise-sensitive circuits Twisted-pair wiring for signal connection within plant Proper grounding. especially cable shielding Surge protection Circuit Separation Circuit separation is a simple and effective means of electrostatic and electromagnetic field induced noise control.2-4. producing lower amplitude noise and maintaining a good signal-to-noise ratio. 5/99 2-13 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The shield’s sole function is to decrease effective capacitance from conductors inside the shield to conductors outside. Shielding itself is useful in avoiding capacitively coupled noise. Westinghouse recommends that all analog signal circuit connections should be made with twisted pairs wire. contact inputs. shields are grounded at the same point as the signals within. Check individual card descriptions (Section 3) for availability or possible additional conditions. Noise Minimization Techniques Conductors and corresponding returns may be grouped within a shield only if capacitive coupling between them is acceptable. To be effective.and high-level analog inputs. ANSI C37.902-1974) is provided on most Q-Line cards. make sure the grounding screw on the card is clean and tight. Avoid the grouping of low. To ensure this feature works correctly. and contact outputs within a single shield. lEEE Surge Protection Surge protection to IEEE 472-1974 (Ref.2-4. M0-0053 2-14 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Shields are used as current-carrying conductors on some systems. Individually twisted and shielded pairs should be used for all analog input signal wiring. Unbroken Cable Shield A/D Guard ES A/D Drain Wire Single Point Ground Twisted Pair Figure 2-5. Use the following guidelines to shield signals: • • • • Ground the low-level analog signal shield. If the shield cannot be conveniently grounded at or near the signal source. Ideal Analog Signal Field Connection Figure 2-6 shows the typical thermocouple analog signal wiring recommended for the WDPF user. preferably to a single point at the signal source.9. Run the shield (unbroken) from the transducer to the guard terminal of the Analog to Digital (A/D) front-end at the Analog Input card. Connect the low side of the signal to the shield at the signal source. Maintain shield continuity at junction boxes when they are used. Figure 2-7 shows the recommended sensor analog signal wiring. Ground the shield only once. 5/99 2-15 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Analog Signal Shielding Techniques For noise suppression purposes. Multipair cable can be used if each twisted pair in the cable has its own insulated shield.2-4. An ideal analog signal field connection is shown in Figure 2-5. Noise Minimization Techniques 2-4. ground it at the DPU. analog signals of less than one volt are considered low-level and require shielding. Noise Minimization Techniques Half Shell Ground (+) (-) Guard Cable Drain (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard Local Junction Box (when used) Connection Head Thermocouples Field Grounded in Well Preferred Preferred Field Grounded Near Well Preferred Field Grounded at Local Junction Box Alternate Wiring for ungrounded thermocouple is installed by user. Typical Thermocouple Analog Signal Wiring by User M0-0053 2-16 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2-4. Preferred Not Grounded in Field Alternate Note: Typical Cold Junction Box Terminal Strip (or Half Shell) Shown Figure 2-6. Noise Minimization Techniques Half Shell Ground (+) (-) Guard Cable Drain (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard (+) (-) Guard Local Junction Box (when used) Voltage Sensors Field Grounded at or Near Sensor Preferred Preferred Field Grounded at Local Junction Box Alternate Preferred (+) (-) Guard Alternate Not Grounded in Field Note: Typical Cold Junction Box Terminal Strip (or Half Shell) Shown. Typical Sensor Analog Signal Wiring by User 5/99 2-17 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2-4. Figure 2-7. As shown in Figure 2-8. Ground Bar QAXT 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Half-Shell Protective Cover Figure 2-8. This isolates the terminal blocks from the rest of the cabinet and equalizes the temperature. there are three methods of compensating thermocouples for cold junction reference temperature.1.2-5. QAXT cards) Cabinet compensation (QRT card) On-board compensation (QAV card) 2-5. Thermocouple Considerations Currently. a steel cover is placed over the QAX half-shells. One channel is connected to an electronic temperature sensing module which is mounted at the B-cabinet half-shell. Half-Shell Compensation The QAX card has 12 available channels. This module provides the capability for compensating the other 11 channels on the QAX card. They are listed below in order of preference: • • • Half-Shell compensation (QAX. QAXT Half-Shell Mounting M0-0053 2-18 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the QAXT is mounted as indicated. Thermocouple Considerations 2-5. To provide compensation. A maximum of two segments can be defined for each termination cabinet.2-5. An alternate method to interface RTD signals in WDPF applications is to use an external bridge power supply. Considerations with cabinet mounted RTDs include: • • • Baffles and fans are used within the termination cabinet. Minimal impact on compensation if cabinet door is opened.FB).2. Note When using 10 ohm copper RTDs. Compatible with systems equipped with “B” cabinets. 5/99 2-19 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 2-5. Thermocouple Considerations Benefits of this method include. Refer to the QRT card section for additional information on this method of compensation. the conversion coefficients may need to be re-calibrated in the field. QRT RTD input card and external circuitry are required. RTD cabinet temperatures are fed into a QRT card at a specific address (F8 . The preferred method to interface RTD signals is to use the QRT card. and then presented to the DIOB. The lead resistance varies greatly with the size and length of wire for this type of RTD. which can have four isolated RTD bridges and A/D converters. with two RTD temperatures in each segment. • • • No baffles or fans are needed within the termination cabinet. B-Cabinet Compensation This method uses cabinet mounted Resistance Temperature Detectors(RTDs) to determine an average temperature of an entire B-cabinet or a portion (segment) of the cabinet. Preferred with Remote Q-Line I/O. The system then averages the measurement and compensates the thermocouple values terminated within that segment of the cabinet. externally mounted bridge. Compensation values are updated every 1/2 second. and a QAV card (low-level A/D converter). Refer to the QAX card section for additional information on this method of compensation. A twisted-three-conductor shielded cable is recommended for RTD signal field connections. For thermocouples that are in close proximity to a common ground. The channel is read every time the card performs an autocalibration cycle. In this case. Refer to the QAV card section for additional information on this method of compensation. M0-0053 2-20 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 2-5.2-5.4. an overall cable shield is sufficient. Thermocouples which do not share a common ground should use individually shielded twisted pairs. QAV cards equipped with a thermocouple temperature compensation feature use the seventh channel for the sensor.3. Usable with Remote I/O single crate enclosures or similar cabinets where the I/O cards and terminal blocks are housed within the same cabinet and the temperatures within the entire cabinet are equalized. In operation. Thermocouple Grounding Thermocouples used in WDPF applications should be grounded close to the well. with the shields grounded at the wells. On-Board Compensation This method can only be used with card-edge terminations and remote Q-Line I/O. An example of this type of thermocouple or voltage sensor would be a boiler-tube metal-temperature thermocouple which uses a common multi-conductor cable. on-board compensation uses an on-card temperature sensor on a QAV card. jumpers would be added at the DPU input terminals to tie all of the signal shield guard points to the cable shield. Compensation values updated every 1/2 second. This eliminates the need for external sensor cards and ensures field temperature accuracy. Thermocouple Considerations 2-5. • • • Compatible with card-edge terminations. QAXT compensation is preferred). (For most applications. 2-6. 4 to 20 mA Signal Considerations When sufficient separation from noise sources exists. Use of twisted pair cables is recommended.3. Inputs (CCI) -. A multi-conductor cable. Common Input Considerations 2-6.2-6. this standard class of control signal does not require shielded cables. in which one conductor serves as a common return and with a single overall cable shield.These circuits require no shielding if the net current in the cable is zero. 2-6.These circuits usually require no shielding. Common Input Considerations 2-6. Digital Signal Considerations The WDPF System’s digital circuits used in data transmission do not require individual twisted or shielded pair conductors unless installed in unusually noisy environments.2. 5/99 2-21 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . is sufficient for most WDPF digital signal applications. Contact Closure Signal Considerations • • Outputs (CCO) -.1. This method uses field termination edge connectors at each Q-card for user field signal connections. Multibus™ crate. and related electronics. With the Enhanced cabinets. Field Termination Types 2-7. Card-edge Termination In card-edge termination the drop is packaged in a single “A” Cabinet. there are more slots for Q-Cards. Refer to Appendix C for more information on card-edge termination. The other cabinet of this dual-cabinet package is the terminations “B” Cabinet. and more terminals per half-shell zone. more half-shell zones. Refer to Section 2-12 for more information on cabinet termination. which houses the terminal blocks for field signal connections.2-7. which houses the Q-crates. the Standard and the Enhanced. Q-Card addresses are assigned using jumper wires on the card front-edge cable connector. One of these dual cabinets is called an “A” Cabinet. M0-0053 2-22 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Field Termination Types The DPU drop utilizes one of two methods of field signal terminations: • • Cabinet termination Card-edge termination Cabinet Termination In cabinet termination the drop is packaged in dual cabinets (“A” and “B” cabinets). Note There are two types of A and B cabinets. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing 2-8. An optional. Table 2-2 illustrates some of the differences between the Standard and Enhanced Cabinets. One half-shell supports one A-block. Each half-shell is identified by “zone” and “row”. These screw terminals accept up to a No. giving a total of 48 (8 levels * 6 blocks) A-blocks for the “B” Cabinet (The Standard “B” cabinet has 36 18-point terminal blocks). 6 screw terminals (The Standard “B” cabinet uses No. Like the A-block. 10 AWG conductor.2-8. the B-block uses No. Six 20-point terminal blocks (called A-blocks) occupy each level. 20-point B-block can be added to the half-shell when auxiliary power or grounding is required (for instance. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing The Enhanced “B” Cabinet termination hardware consists of an eight-level array of barrier-type terminal blocks. Figure 2-10 shows the Enhanced “B” Cabinet termination hardware. “B” Cabinet Types Cabinet Type Item Capacity/Size Terminal Blocks Half Shell Zones Standard Terminal Points Connecting Screw Size Terminal Blocks Half Shell Zones Enhanced Terminal Points Connecting Screw Size 36 6 18 #8 48 8 20 #6 5/99 2-23 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 8 screw terminals). and identifies the zones and rows. 6 screw terminals. when contact inputs requiring 48 V power are used). 8 screw terminals). Table 2-2. 10 AWG conductor (Standard “B” cabinet uses No. Conductors carrying field signals to and from the user’s process or plant are connected to each block’s No. which can accept up to No. The term “half-shell” is Westinghouse terminology for the metal structure that supports the terminal blocks in these cabinets. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing Edge Connector for Field Terminations C A R D E D G E F U S E Q C R A T E Q1 Q2 Paddle Card for Expansion Q-Crate Slot 1 Q-Card Z O N E Q3 S C O N N E C T O R Electronics A-Cabinet Front Figure 2-9.2-8. Standard “A” Cabinet and Field Connections M0-0053 2-24 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Termination Structure 5/99 2-25 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2-8. Enhanced “B” Cabinet. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing Front View Top View of Cabinet with Half-Shells Cabinet Zones A B C D Detail of Half-Shell E 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 F G 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Figure 2-10. Standard cabinets have only 18 terminals and Zones A-F. and terminal point numbers (1 to 20 from bottom) of the Enhanced terminations cabinet. Table 2-3. M0-0053 2-26 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2-8. Enhanced Half-Shell Terminal Locations 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 2 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 Row Numbers 3 4 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 5 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 6 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 20 • • 1 Zones A B C D E F G H Notes B-Block Terminals not shown. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing Table 2-3 illustrates the half-shell zones. rows. along with the half-shell identifiers. Table 2-4. and so on. Digital points (terminated at B-Blocks). Table 2-4 shows the standard assignments of half-shells to Q-Card slots. are used to label the signals (or points). the analog signal which terminates at the bottom terminal of the half-shell A1 A-block is identified as A1 A01. a 20-point A-block may be assigned to several Q-cards. Half-Shell to Q-Card Connection Q-Crate Number 1 Q-Crate Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Card Edge 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 Identification Half-Shell Zone-Row A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 2 Card Edge 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 Identification Half-Shell Zone-Row C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4 C5 D5 C6 D6 3 Card Edge 302 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 318 320 322 324 Identification Half-Shell Zone-Row E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 E6 F6 4 Card Edge 402 404 406 408 410 412 414 416 418 420 422 424 Identification Half-Shell Zone-Row G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5 G6 H6 5/99 2-27 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . row 1). The cable labeling convention is shown in Table 2-4.2-8. have labels such as C1 B20 (which indicated the highest terminal on the B-Block of half-shell zone C. The half-shell to Q-Card cable connectors are labeled to assist in identification and placement. In some control system applications. The 48 half-shells are assigned on a one-for-one basis to 48 Q-line process I/O PC board (Q-card) locations (slots) in the associated “A” Cabinet. For example. The next terminal on that A-Block is identified as A1 A02. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing These terminal numbers. to facilitate hard M/A station field wiring. 2-8. For additional information on Q-Card address selection. “B” Cabinet Field Terminations and Addressing A cable connects each half-shell with the corresponding Q-Card in the “A” cabinet. The cable connector. incorporates nine jumpers used to select the Q-Card address (shown in Figure 2-11). PF Q. refer to Section 2-10 and Appendix B. Figure 2-11. Address Jumpers on Cable Connector (“B” Cabinet Terminations) M0-0053 2-28 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .L II i I/ n e O WD 28 (Last Address Jumper) 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 (First Address Jumper Location) Note: The first 20 locations are reserved for card wiring. which attaches to the front edge of the Q-Card. including the available hardware addresses and the number and type of cards.1. If using Westinghouse supplied termination lists (or hardware addresses have already been assigned). addresses FC-FF and 00-07 are not available. it is recommended that addressing be confined to the upper block (80-F7). Available Hardware Addresses (Enhanced) Each cabinet consists of up to four Q-crates with 12 slots per crate. Determining Q-Card Addresses Q-Card address assignment is dependent on several factors. Each of these factors is discussed below. and describe the use of the address jumpers.2-9. although the software addresses will be different. 2-9. proceed to Section 2-12. Figure 2-12 shows a worksheet that can be used when assigning Q-Card addresses. When possible. Constraints may also be imposed by the database size. This worksheet also appears in Appendix A. Within these blocks. this total is doubled to 72 per DPU. Caution Do not use restricted blocks (FC-FF and 00-07) for hardware addressing. Available Hardware Addresses (Standard) Each cabinet consists of up to three Q-crates with 12 slots per crate for a maximum total of up to 36 cards per cabinet. Note that the hardware address range is the same for A cabinets and AX cabinets. this total is doubled to 96 per DPU. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection 2-9. 5/99 2-29 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . When using an extended A (AX) cabinet. Address Blocks Two address blocks are available for Q-Card hardware addressing for each cabinet: 80-F7 and 08-7F. When using an extended A (AX) cabinet. for a maximum total of up to 48 cards per cabinet. and by the Q-Crate slot assignments (when default naming is used). Q-Card Hardware Address Selection The following Sections provide guidelines for assigning hardware addresses to Q-Cards. refer to “MAC Application Utilities User’s Guide” (U0-0136). For information on calculating software addresses. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection To use this worksheet. assign card hardware addresses (if applicable) in the following order: 1. To maximize utility. due to timing considerations. the QTB must be in the same crate as the QAI. it is assigned the same address (80) as the primary QTB.2-9. the QAV/QAW card’s point quality will be set to bad. the QTB card is optional (jumper selectable). If implementing DIOB Check. • M0-0053 2-30 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . If QTB monitoring is not selected. a QTB card must be placed in that cabinet. 2. Therefore. begin with the top block (80-F7). Assign remaining point cards in descending order by number of channels. if a QAI card is used. 4. and fill in the cards using the guidelines given below: • Reserve address F8-FB for cold junction compensation QRT card (whether currently used or possible future addition). — For QAV and QAW cards. (time base for QAI/QAV/QAW/QRT). — When a second (back-up) QTB is used within a cabinet. If selected. Reserve F8-FB for QRT (for cold junction compensation) when a QAX card is used for temperature compensation. 3 or 4. a QBE is not currently supported. • • • • No more than 30 QLI cards may be used with a DPU. The preferred layout is to place one QBO in crate 1 and one QBO in crate 2. 3. except when cold junction compensation is to be accomplished using a QAV card (level 6QAV or above) or half-shell compensation. Assign QBO cards. this address block can be used. assign hardware addresses AA and 55 (which cannot be used by any other cards) to the QBO cards. in the event of QTB failure. refer to “DPU Introduction and Configurations” (U0-0135). if both the A and the AX cabinet have AI point terminations. QSE card cannot be placed in an extended (AX) cabinet. Assign QTB cards. For additional information on DIOB Check. For example. each cabinet must have a QTB card. Refer to the QTB card description in Section 3 for additional details. Reserve address 80 for QTB (Time Base) card. if applicable: — If any AI points for QAI cards are terminated in a cabinet. — With a 486-based DPU. the QAV/QAW noise rejection rating will be lower than otherwise specified. as described in Figure 2-12. (for DIOB Check). F8-FB = QRT) Available only if QTB and/or DIOB checking is not implemented * Indicates address used with default naming feature Q-Cards with: 12 channels (QAX) must start at zero and use 2 blocks of 6 addresses 8 or 6 channels (QAH. QSE) must start at x0. x8. x8 4 channels (QAI. x2. xC 2 channels (QAA. xC. x4. QAV. QLJ) must start at x0. QSP. QLC) must start at x0. QID. QSC. QAW. xE where x = 0 through F Other cards (QBI. AA and 55 = QBO. QAM. QDI. QAO. x8.2-9. x6. QTO) may use any address Note QBI and QDI are being replaced by the QID card Figure 2-12. QRO. xA. x4. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Form 5/99 2-31 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QLI. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Worksheet A Q-Card Address Assignments *80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 *90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 *A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 *B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 *C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 *D4 D5 D6 D7 *E0 E1 E2 E3 *E4 E5 E6 E7 *E8 E9 EA EB *EC ED EE EF *F0 F1 F2 F3 *F4 F5 F6 F7 *F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF *70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 *88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 *08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F *98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F *A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF *B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF *C8 C9 CA CB *CC CD CE CF *D8 D9 DA DB *DC DD DE DF *10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 *20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 *28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F *30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 *40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 *50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 *60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 *68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F *18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F *38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F *48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F *58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F *78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Indicates restricted address – DO NOT USE Indicates reserved address (80 = QTB. QPA. QCI. 2-9. assign the digital single-channel cards. QRT. Four-channel cards (QAI. QAM must start at address x0.or eight-channel cards. refer to the individual card descriptions in Section 3. or 15 of the 12-channel cards may be included in a cabinet. because of the addressing constraints. begin with the largest channel number (eight and six) and assign those cards first. However. Note that no more than 30 of the six. Enable and Hl/LO Signals In addition to the hardware address. because of the reserved addresses (FC-FF and 00-07).or eight-channel cards. x8. Proceed with the four-channel cards and then the two-channel cards. Finally. x4. xC. QAW. For additional information. some cards require an Enable or Hl/LO signal. address blocks 80-FF and 00-7F each contain 16 starting addresses of 0 or 8. This approach will allow the smaller address assignments to be filled in around the larger assignments. When assigning Q-Card addresses. xA. QLI) must start at address x0 or x8 (where x = 0 through F). addresses F8 and 00 cannot be used for the six. x4. as illustrated in Figure 2-13. x8. QSE must start at address x0. for a total of 32. Six and eight-channel cards (QAH. Two-channel cards (QAA. Starting addresses for these cards (circuit 0) must follow these rules: • • • • • Twelve-channel cards (QAX) must start at address 0 and use two blocks of six addresses. M0-0053 2-32 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . x6. QAO. or xC (where x = 0 through F). QAV. as described in Section 2-10. x2. QPA. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Placement of Q-Cards by Number of Channels Cards which have more than one channel require more than one hardware address. or xE (where x = 0 through F). All other cards require a single address. As Figure 2-13 illustrates. This leaves 30 addresses available. Q-Card Number of Channels and Starting Address Q-Card Address Example Figure 2-14 illustrates address selections for a DPU with the following cards: 1 QRT 1 QTB 2 QBO 2 QCI 3 QSE 3 QAO 3 QLI 6 QAM 6 QAW 15 QAV 5/99 2-33 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2-9. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Starting Address 0 or 8 Starting Address 0 or 8 Starting Address 0 or 8 QAH QAV* QLI QAV* QAW 4 or C QAI QAO QPA QRT QSE Eight Channels/ Addresses Six Channels/ Addresses Four Channels/ Addresses Starting Address 0 or 8 Starting Address 0 or 8 1 or 9 Starting Address 0 or 8 Hi/Lo 1 or 9 Hi/Lo 2 or A Hi/Lo 3 or B Hi/Lo 4 or C Hi/Lo 5 or D Hi/Lo 6 or E Hi/Lo 7 or F Hi/Lo 2 or A QAA QAM 2 or A 3 or B 4 or C 5 or D QBI QBO QID QRO QTO 4 or C 6 or E 6 or E 7 or F Two Channels/ Addresses One Channel/ Addresses Eight Bits 1/2 Address Figure 2-13. 2-9. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F QTB QCI QCI QAM 90 QAW 91 92 93 94 95 96 QAM 97 98 QAW 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E QAM 9F 10 QAV 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 A0 QAW A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 QAM A7 A8 A9 AA QBO AB AC QSE AD AE AF 20 QAV 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 QAV 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F B0 QAV B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 QAV B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF 30 QAV 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 QAO 39 3A 3B 3C QAO 3D 3E 3F C0 QAV C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 QAV C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF 40 QAO 41 42 43 44 QSE 45 46 47 48 QLI 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F D0 QAV D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 QAV D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF 50 QSE 51 52 53 54 55 QBO 56 57 58 QLI 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F E0 QAV E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 QAV E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF 60 QLI 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 QAW 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F F0 QAV F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 QRT F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 70 QAW 71 72 73 74 75 76 QAM 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F QAW QAM QAV 18 QAV 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F INDICATES RESTRICTED ADDRESS Notice this example shows level 6 QAV cards. Figure 2-14. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Example M0-0053 2-34 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . which require eight addresses. Points defined by control algorithms are also allocated space within the DPU. For a multi-speed DPU: — At software level 6. A specified amount of memory space within the DPU is set aside for the database.2-9. there is 82K is available for the database and 64K is available for control. The amount of space used by each point depends on its record type (refer to “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131) for information on record types). — At software level 7. the address assigned to a Q-Card does not depend on the Q-Crate slot in which it is placed. there is 122 K is available. Database Limitations When selecting a set of Q-Cards. four areas of 64K and one of 32K are available for control. Appendix A contains two worksheets which can be copied and used to record the Q-Cards placement and addressing. Each address used by a Q-Card is associated with a point in the DPU database. The total amount of space available is as follows: • • For a single-speed DPU. However. if using the MEDIT default naming feature. To verify that a configuration is acceptable. specific addresses must be associated with the Q-Crate card slots. Worksheet B can be used for any card placement scheme. calculate the amount of memory required for the points defined. Refer to “MAC Application Utilities User’s Guide” (U0-0136) for additional information on MEDIT and default naming. there is 82K is available for the database. Q-Card Hardware Address Selection Q-Card Addresses and Q-Crate Slot Assignments In most cases. Worksheet C. to be used when default naming will be used. it is necessary to consider the database requirements as well as the addressing requirements. 5/99 2-35 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . shows the addresses assigned to each card slot. — For software levels 6 and 7. QAX. based on the setting of this jumper. the use of the jumpers is the same. and QSE. the ninth jumper (pin number 20) is used to select Hl/LO or ENABLE. Note that certain cards (QAA. When the jumper is removed. QLl. QRT. each jumper represents a 1. For example. M0-0053 2-36 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Using Address Selection Jumpers As described in Section 2-12 and Appendix C. both the termination card-edge connectors and the half-shell cable card-edge connector provide addressing jumpers. When the jumper is inserted. HI is selected (bits 8-15). As shown. Address Jumpering Example High/Low or Enable Jumpering While the first eight jumpers are used to select the address. Using Address Selection Jumpers 2-10. The jumpering for this address is shown in Figure 2-15. Jumper pin 20 is a required address enable jumper for the following cards: QAV. The QRO and QTO can address the high or low 8 bits of a 16 bit address. LO is selected (bits 0-7). This binary address is represented by jumpers 21 through 28. and QLl) use different jumpering schemes. and is removed to represent 0. For both types of termination hardware. Refer to the individual card descriptions in Section 3 for details. QPA. Refer to Appendix B for a conversion table that provides a hexadecimal address conversion. The Q-Card’s hexadecimal address is translated into binary. Refer to the individual card descriptions in Section 3 for details. the card address E9 translates into binary 1110 1001. E9 1 Top of Connector 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Jumper 20 in place = High Byte or Enabled Removed = Low Byte 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Jumper in Place =1 Jumper Removed = 0 Figure 2-15. QAW.2-10. In the typical WDPF installation. class L. Keep generator output buses with kilovolt or kiloampere power levels several feet away from trays with signal cables. • • • • Do not route computer cables near AC or DC power conductors. Tightly twist power conductors (including return or neutral) as these conductors may share a cable tray with signal cables. and in “Highway Installation Manual (WEStations)” (M0-8000). Because of the associated high-frequency noise. 5/99 2-37 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .The WDPF System’s field wiring troughs. Generally. Pre-Wiring Considerations Site Preparation and Planning -. The front-edge connector should be removed from the card and the card should be replaced before the front-edge connector is re-installed. power conductors should not be in the same trays as signal cables. Card Replacement -. Caution Power to the Multibus™ cards within the DPU must be off before the Multibus cards are removed and replaced. If the cables are not twisted. Cable Routing -. Pre-Wiring Considerations 2-11. induction heater supply cables should be far from computer cables. Most potential noise problems should have been resolved during this installation phase. in “Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051). and/or false floors should already have been planned and installed (refer to “Data Highway Installation Manual” (M0-0051) and “Highway Installation Manual (WEStations)” (M0-8000).Q-line I/O cards can be removed and replaced with the + 13 VDC power on. Use the following precautions to minimize or avoid noise and inter-circuit interferences. and class M cables when minimum spacing is maintained between dissimilar trays. Additional information on selection of signal cables and on minimum spacing between cables can be found in Section 2 of this manual. covered trays are not necessary for class Q. Spacing from such cables to any computer input or output cable should be very large (approximately 50 to 100 ft). channels. ducts.2-11. cables are routed between the plant or process and the data acquisition system via conduit and raceways (cable trays). Locate the field wires or cables to be connected to the selected block. Doing so will unpredictably switch card addresses and change the half-shell to card assignments. A shock hazard to personnel may exist on some of the higher voltage signals. Follow the procedures listed below for field wiring a WDPF System to the terminal blocks of the Enhanced termination cabinets. 10 AWG with ring terminals. Also refer to the specific card information provided in Section 3. Caution After address selection. insert the appropriate jumpers in the Q-Card’s edge connectors. Field Wiring Half-Shell Terminations When a terminations cabinet is used. 6 (Enhanced) screw terminals. When using the field terminations card-edge connectors for process I/O field signals (where connections are made directly to each Q-card. Each card’s selected address should be in compliance with the terminations list. Use the custom Termination Lists supplied for your system to locate specific termination points. do not switch connectors between cards. M0-0053 2-38 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . connections are made to its half-shell terminal strips. If not previously done at the factory. 3. Remember to leave service loops to relieve stress and/or to permit access to the cabinet when it is to be moved out of position for maintenance purposes. 8 (Standard) or the No. 12 AWG conductors or No. see Appendix C). 1. Field Wiring Half-Shell Terminations 2-12. These sheets show the “B” Cabinet terminal block connections used for most applications. 4.2-12. Only wires and/or cables which comply with each field connection’s signal and noise minimization requirements should be used. WARNING Remove drop power and use extreme caution when making field connections to terminal blocks. Repeat the procedures of Steps 1 and 2 for each remaining terminal block until all terminations to the cabinet have been completed. Connection to these terminals can be made with up to No. Installation Data Sheets have been provided in Section 3 as an aid to the installer. and make connections to the No. 2. Bundle the wires connected to the terminal block with tie wraps and then tie-wrap these cables to the cabinet frame. Vibration From 0. following a straight line change. Humidity Rating 10 to 90%. 5/99 2-39 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Environmental Specifications All Q-cards can be expected to perform as specified subjected to the following environmental specifications.7g acceleration at 10Hz.2-13. Any deviation form these specifications is noted with the affected card. noncondensing. Environmental Specifications 2-13. no forced air movement). to 10g acceleration at 40Hz. and at a constant acceleration of 10g from 40 to 50 Hz. Ambient Air Temperatures From 0°C through +60°C (32°F through 140°F) as measured approximately 1/2 inch from any point on the printed circuit card while it is mounted in its normal (vertical) position and while subject to air movements which result from natural convection only (that is. 05 0.04 0.16 0.7 11.17 0. G10 Current (A rms) @ 115V 0.14 0.2 22.7 49.3 16.12 0.008 0.1 0.22 0. G05.7 55.3 4.7 66.08 0.2 72 55.7 41.19 Current (A rms) @ 230V 0.04 0.5 12.9 22.2 13 13 8.1 16.5 21. Power Consumption 2-14.04 0.3 27.02 0.09 0.28 0.13 0.04 0.6 3.3 M0-0053 2-40 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .03 1.1 19. G07.10 0.5 7.22 0.1 12.Covered by the QAX numbers 0.Consult the EPS 0.4 44.08 0.02 8.1 4.2 41.05 0.5 11.04 0.26 0. G03.08 0.7 44.05 0.016 0.08 0.9 6.4 22.2-14.3 14 Load Dependent . Power Consumption and Heat Load for Q-Cards Card Type QAA QAC G01 QAC G02 QAC G03 QAC G04 QAC 5 QAH QAI QAM QAO QAV QAW QAX QAXD QAXT QBE QBI QBO QCA QCI QDC QDI G01.8 NONE .11 0.05 0.1 0. Power Consumption Table 2-5.08 0.17 0.05 0.11 0.2 3.2 6. GO9.2 6.09 Power (Watts) 8.3 14.16 0.4 30.6 24.5 Heat Dissipation (BTU/Hr) 27.09 0. G08. 4 10.8 22.5 38.14 0.13 0.8 19.11 0.04 0.08 0.7 24.26 0.5 19.14 Current (A rms) @ 230V 0.07 0.02 0.22 0.6 61.9 66.5 Heat Dissipation (BTU/Hr) 5.18 0.14 0.02 0.26 0.1 10.3 21.11 0.13 0.04 0.28 0. Power Consumption Table 2-5.18 0.04 0.15 3.09 0.11 0.6 66.15 0.08 0.2 71.09 0.0 6.5 8.6 2.16 0.02 0.07 0. Power Consumption and Heat Load for Q-Cards (Cont’d) Card Type QDI G02.09 0.26 0.02 0. G11 QDT QIC QID QLC QLI QLJ LIM SLIM QPA QRC QRF QRO QRS QRT QSC QSD QSE QSR QSS QST QTB QTO QVP Current (A rms) @ 115V 0. G06.5 1.9 35.9 35.5 6.5 41.7 46.4 11.04 0.8 8.5 5.3 72 66.5 13.1 55.8 5.04 0.22 0.6 22.07 0. G04.05 0.13 0.13 0.9 27.6 12.01 0.2 46.1 19.09 0.6 10.02 0.3 13.14 0.26 0.01 0.0 16.6 11.5 21.0 1.5 18.7 35.09 0.07 Power (Watts) 1.01 0.8 5/99 2-41 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2-14.04 0.2 7.5 20.5 6. there will be 20 termination points on a half-shell. the following is provided in the reference sheets: • • • • Functional Description Specifications Controls/Indicators Description Installation Data Sheet(s) The Installation Data Sheets provide card-specific termination information. When ordering new systems with the “Enhanced” cabinets. As shown. the connections from the terminal block are different for each card. these sheets are arranged alphabetically by the three-character Q-Card identifier (the exceptions are the Loop Interface Module (LIM) and the Small Loop Interface Module (SLIM) which appear immediately after the QLJ card reference sheets).Section 3. with only the first 18 terminations being used. Figure 3-1 illustrates a typical “Standard” Q-Card half-shell termination. 5/99 3-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Section Overview This section contains reference sheets for each available Q-Card. Note Many of the wiring diagrams for the Q-cards indicate the “Standard” termination of the cards with 18 posts. Table 3-1 lists the Q-Cards that are described in this section. The basic wiring for both the 18 and 20 terminal half-shells stays the same. The Q-Card identifier is shown in the upper outside corner of each page. and provides a brief description of each group of each card. except for those cards which do not require field termination. To allow easy reference. Q-Card Reference Sheets 3-1. For each Q-Card. These sheets are provided at the end of each card description. “Standard” Cabinet M0-0053 3-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Typical Q-Card Termination.Figure 3-1. Remote “B” Cabinet 5/99 3-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Typical Q-Card Termination.Figure 3-2. 24 to +10.237 VDC 0 to +5.Table 3-1.12 to +5.235 VDC -5.119 VDC -20 to +20 mVDC -50 to +50 mVDC -100 to +100 mVDC -500 to +500 mVDC -1 to +1 VDC -10 to +10 VDC 0 to +20 mA -50 to +50 mA QAC (Analog Conditioning Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 QAH (High-Speed Analog Input Point Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 QAI (Analog Input Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 M0-0053 3-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .117 VDC 0 to +10. Q-Card Groups and Ranges Name Group Range QAA (Actuator Auto/Manual Card) G01 G02 -16 to +16 mA (Velocity). +4 to +20 mA (Position) +4 to +20 mA (Standard). Voltage ranges between -10 and +10 VDC (Optional) 0 to 10 VDC +4 to +20 mA at 24/40 VDC (1 power supply) 0 to 10 VDC +4 to +20 mA at 24/40 VDC (2 auctioneered power supplies) Signal switching 1 to 5 VDC +4 to +20 mA at 24/40 VDC +120 mA at + 48 VDC 0V to 10VDC -10. 2375 VDC -10.24 to +10.5 to +50 mVDC.5 to +50 mVDC. 1KΩ source impedance -5mV to 20mV (with temperature compensation) -12.475 mA 0 to +10. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QAM (Auto/Manual Station Controller Card) G01 G02 G03 G06 0 to +10 VDC (Output) 0 to +20 mA.24 to +10.1187 VDC -5.1175 VDC -10.235 VDC -5 to +20 mVDC. 500Ω source impedance -25 to +100 mVDC.12 to +5.5 to +50 mVDC.Table 3-1. 1KΩ source impedance -12.475 mA -10.24 to +10.235 VDC 0 to +5. 500Ω source impedance -12. 500Ω source impedance -25 to +100 mVDC.235 VDC 0 to +20.5mV to 50mV (with temperature compensation) -25mV to 100mV (with temperature compensation) QAO (Analog Output Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 QAV (Analog Input Point Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 GO7 GO8 GO9 5/99 3-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 1KΩ source impedance -12. 0 to +5 VDC (Output) 0 to 5VDC 1 to 5VDC 0 to +20. 1KΩ source impedance 0 to 1V. 1KΩ source impedance 0 to +5 VDC. 1KΩ source impedance 0 to 5V. 10KΩ source impedance -5mV to 20mV -12. 10KΩ source impedance 0 to +20 mA 0 to +20 mA (self-powered) 0 to +50 mA -5mV to 20mV.5mV to 50mV -25mV to 100mV 0 to 1V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V +20mV +50mV +100mV +20mV +50mV +100mV DIOB discharging No DIOB discharging QAX (12 Point Analog Input Card) GO1 GO2 GO3 GO4 GO5 GO6 QAXD (QAX Digital Daughter Board) GO1 GO2 GO3 GO4 GO5 GO6 QAXT (Terminal Block Temperature Sensing Module) GO1 GO2 GO3 GO4 GO5 GO6 QBE (Bus Extender Card) G01 G02 M0-0053 3-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 5KΩ source impedance 0 to 10V. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QAW (Analog High-Level Input Point Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 0 to +1 VDC. 5KΩ source impedance 0 to +10 VDC.5mV to 50mV.Table 3-1. 500Ω source impedance -12. 500Ω source impedance -25mV to 100mV. ) 20 VDC at 16 mA (max. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QBI (Digital Input Card) (Superseded by QID Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 +5 (4 to 6) V Logic +12 (10 to 15) V Logic +12 (10 to 15) VDC +24 (20 to 30) VDC +48 (40 to 60) VDC +48 (40 to 60) VDC +125 (100 to 150) VDC +120 (100 to 150) VAC +12 (10 to 15) VDC +24 (20 to 30) VDC +120 (100 to 150) VAC (High Threshold) 60 VDC at 300 mA (max) 60 VDC at 300 mA (max.) 20 VDC at 16 mA (max. Voltage Output Voltage Input. Current Output 6 to 22 mA (closed contact) See “QDC User’s Guide” (U0-1105).Table 3-1.) 20 VDC at 16 mA (max.) Voltage Input. QBO (Digital Output Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 QCA (Current Amplifier Card) QCI (Contact Input Card) QDC (Q-Line Digital Controller Card) G01 G02 G02 G01 G02 5/99 3-7 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QDI (Digital Input Card) (Superseded by QID Card) G02 G04 G06 G08 G10 G11 24 VAC/VDC (8-bit differential) 48 VAC/VDC (8-bit differential 120 VAC/VDC 12 VDC (8-bit differential 48 VAC/VDC (16-bit angle-ended) 120 VAC/VDC (high threshold) (8-bit differential N/A See “Remote Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0054).Table 3-1. N/A QDT (Diagnostic Test Card) QFR (Fiber-Optic Repeater) QIC (Q-Line DIOB monitor) G01 G01 G01 M0-0053 3-8 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 8 differential 220 VAC (190 to 264). 16 single-ended 48 VAC/VDC (40 to 60). 16 single-ended 12 VDC (10 to 15) 16 single-ended 12 VAC/VDC (10 to 15) 16 single-ended 48 VDC (40 to 60). 16 single-ended 120 VAC/VDC (100 to 150). G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 +5 (4 to 6) V Logic. 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Input/Output) 0 to 5 VDC (Analog Input). 16 single-ended 5 VDC (3A99159 only) See “QLC User’s Guide” (U0-1100). 8 differential 24 VAC/VDC (20 to 30). 16 single-ended 220 VAC (190 to 264).Table 3-1. 8 differential 120 VAC (95 to 150). Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QID Q-Line Digital Input (To be used where QDI or QBI were formerly specified). 8 differential 48 VAC/VDC (40 to 60). 16 single-ended 24 VAC/VDC (20 to 30). 4 to 20 mA (Analog Output) QLC (Q-Line Serial Link Controller) QLI (Loop Interface Card) G01 G01 G02 G03 5/99 3-9 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 16 single-ended 220 VDC (180 to 264). 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Output) 0 to 20 mA (Analog Input). 8 differential 220 VDC (180 to 264). 16 single-ended 120 VAC (95 to 150). 8 differential 120 VAC/VDC (100 to 150). and timeout detection and recovery DIOB extension with 13 VDC power status indication. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QLJ (Loop Interface Card with output Readback) G01 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Input) 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Output) 0 to 10 VDC (Output Readback) 0 to 5 VDC (Analog Input) 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Output) 0 to 10 VDC (Output Readback) 0 to 20 mA (Analog Input) 4 to 20 mA (Analog Output) 4 to 20 mA (Output Readback) Four selectable operating modes One operating mode Four selectable operating modes One operating mode DIOB extension with 13 VDC power status indication. and voltage threshold detection DIOB extension with 13 VDC power status indication 48 VDC Clock Inputs 48 V Control Inputs 5 VDC Clock Inputs 48 V Control Inputs 5 VDC Clock Inputs 5 V Control Inputs 48 VDC Clock Inputs No Control Inputs See “Remote Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0054). discharge circuits. discharge circuits. G02 G03 LIM (Loop Interface Module) SLIM (Serial Loop Interface Module) QMT (M-Bus Terminator Card) G01 G02 G01 G02 G01 G02 G03 QPA (Pulse Accumulator Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 QRC (Remote Q-Line) M0-0053 3-10 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . voltage threshold detection.Table 3-1. 3.8. event tagging 1 msec DC LVDT Supply AC LVDT Supply DC LVDT Supply AC LVDT Supply QSD (Servo Driver Card) QSE (Sequence of Events Recorder Card) G01 G01 G02 QSR (Servo Driver with Position Readback Card) G01 G02 G03 G04 5/99 3-11 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 4.) Form B (closed) Non-inductive loads only. 3. event tagging 1/8 msec 7 to 21 mA.5. 1. 3.0.) Form A (open) Non-inductive loads only. or 6.0.0.6. through G06 G01 G02 G01 G02 10 mV (nominal) 33. QRS (Redundant Station Interface Card) QRT (RTD Input Amplifier Card) QSC (Speed Channel Card) G01 Consult Westinghouse for information.5.) Form A (open) 330 VDC/250 VAC (max. 1KHz sine wave (LVDT) Output: +/.8. 330 VDC/250 VAC (max.67 kHz.) Form B (closed) 330 VDC/250 VAC (max. 4. 1/8 second update 1.67 kHz.0. or 6. 3. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QRF (Four Wire RTD Input Card) QRO (Relay Output Card) G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 Range set by QRD (3A99114) plug-in module 330 VDC/250 VAC (max.3 mV (nominal) 1.Table 3-1. 1.24 mA 7 to 21 mA. 1/2 second update Input: 20 V peak-to-peak.6. 0. 1/8 second update 1.0. 1. 1.5.2 kHz.6. 3. 6.0. 280Ω (+ 50 mA) QST (Smart Transmitter Interface) QTB (Time Base Card) G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 QTO (TRIAC Output Card) QVP (Servo Valve Position Controller Card) G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 M0-0053 3-12 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 80Ω (+ 24 mA) LVDT interface. 80Ω (+ 24 mA) 4-20 mA loop interface.Table 3-1.0. 60 Hz (+2 Hz Input) 50 Hz (+2 Hz Input) 60 Hz (+2 Hz On-board) 50 Hz (+2 Hz On-board) 115 (80 to 140) VAC LVDT interface.2 kHz. 280Ω (+ 50 mA) 4-20 mA loop interface. 1/2 second update See “Smart Transmitter Interface User‘s Guide” (U0-1115). 6. 3.8. or 7. 3. Q-Card Groups and Ranges (Cont’d) Name Group Range QSS (Speed Sensor Card) G01 G02 1.6. 3. or 7.5.8. Q-Card Descriptions The following pages describe Q-card functionality. features. 5/99 3-13 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and wiring. 1. QAA G01 Block Diagram The QAA card is available in two groups (G01 and G02). Description The QAA card provides the interface between the DIOB controller. The QAA card-to-OIM interface is a group of hard-wired DIM level signals. the QAA card is still required to interface the final drive to the DIOB. QAA 3-2. Group two is used to control slow acting actuators like Beck drives which provide position feedback and limit inputs. the OIM (M/A station). and a final controlled device such as a WEMAC or a Beck drive. but do not provide velocity feedback (see Figure 3-4).3-2. Block Diagrams DIOB DIOB Interface Position Register ADC DAC + - M/A Logic Gain Gain Error Comparators Plug Braking Comparator Output Control Logic Output Buffer Input Buffer Input Buffer Position RIM Output Position RIF Input Velocity RIF Input Increase/ Decrease/ DIM Outputs DIM DIM Inputs Outputs Figure 3-3. Plug braking is used to stop the actuator. M0-0053 3-14 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . If only soft M/A stations (CRT’s) are provided. QAA Actuator Auto Manual Card (Style 7379A91G01 and G02) 3-2. Group one is for controlling fast acting actuators such as a WEMAC which provide position and velocity feedback plus limit inputs (see Figure 3-3). 2. Features The QAA card provides the following features: • • • • • • • • • • Computer (Automatic) or Local Manual mode operation Mode selection via external OIM signals Watchdog timer Two plug-in resistor variable rate clocks (G02 only) Local Manual mode selection via DIOB controller OIM indication of computer or Local Manual mode operating status OIM indication of actuator position high or low limit status Jumper selectable QAA card logic options Two external auctioneered DC power supplies On-card potentiometer parameter adjustments 5/99 3-15 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-2. QAA G02 Block Diagram 3-2. QAA DIOB DIOB Interface Position Register ADC DAC + Error Comparators M/A Logic Gain Quarter Speed Clock Half Speed Clock Output Buffer Input Buffer Output Control Logic Position RIM Output Position RIF Input Increase/ Decrease/ DIM Outputs DIM DIM Inputs Outputs Figure 3-4. 3-2. Detailed card views are shown in Figure 3-10 through Figure 3-12. QAA Card Usage Scheme M0-0053 3-16 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . An outline of the QAA card and a daughter board is shown in Figure 3-5. One card has the standard Q-line I/O card outline and serves as the mother card. rectangular daughter card that is attached to the mother board by nylon spacers. QAA Card Outline Card Usage A typical QAA usage scheme is shown in Figure 3-6. QAA The QAA card is actually two separate printed circuit cards. DIOB Controller QAW/ QAX QAW/ QAX QAA QCI QAO P P O B S S N DI’S/PB’S Meters Process Variable FEEDBACK C L DI = Digital Input PB = Push-button BIAS Demand BIAS INCR DECR Motor Drive PT Relay Panel Figure 3-6. The second card is a smaller. A fifty-conductor flat flex cable transfers signals and power from the mother board to the daughter board. J1 Connector Daughter Card Connector is under Daughter Card Figure 3-5. QAA Alive Bit Reset Local Manual Not Alive Mode QAA Healthy Bit Reset QAA Alive Bit Set Local Manual Mode OIM Comp. and Figure 3-9. QAA G01 Detailed Block Diagram 5/99 3-17 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Figure 3-8. Push-button OIM LMAN Push-button DIOB LMAN Bit Computer Mode QAA Healthy Bit Set QAA Alive Bit Reset QAA Healthy Bit Reset Figure 3-7.3-2. QAA Card State Diagram WATCHDOG TIMER COMMAND REGISTER OIM AND FIELD DIM INPUTS • • ••• OIM LAMPS (DIM OUTPUTS) M/A LOGIC STATUS REGISTER ACTUATOR ENABLE DAC + – – DIOB INTERFACE DEMAND REGISTER ERROR COMPARATORS FOUR SECOND DELAY OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC INCREASE DECREASE (DIM OUTPUTS) GAIN PLUG BRAKING COMPARATORS BUFFER VELOCITY (RIF INPUT) POSITION REGISTER ADC GAIN POSITION (RIF INPUT) BUFFER BUFFER POSITION OUTPUT TO OIM METER (RIM OUTPUT) Figure 3-8. QAA Functional block diagrams of the QAA card are shown in Figure 3-7. 3-2.3. QAA G02 Detailed Block Diagram 3-2. Specifications Inputs/Outputs G01 Analog Position Input and Analog Velocity Input Analog Position Input Signal Type Input Range Input Impedance Unipolar RIF 4 to 20 mA = 0 to 100% 250 ohms + 2% Analog Velocity Input Bipolar RIF (−) 16 mA to 16 mA 250 ohms + 2% M0-0053 3-18 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAA WATCHDOG TIMER COMMAND REGISTER OIM AND FIELD DIM INPUTS • • ••• LAMPS (DIM OUTPUTS) M/A LOGIC STATUS REGISTER DAC + – DIOB INTERFACE DEMAND REGISTER ERROR COMPARATORS OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC INCREASE DECREASE (DIM OUTPUTS) QUARTER SPEED CLOCK HALF SPEED CLOCK POSITION REGISTER ADC GAIN (RIM OR RIF INPUT) BUFFER BUFFER POSITION POSITION OUTPUT TO OIM METER (RIM OUTPUT) Figure 3-9. Operating Modes The QAA card has two modes of operation: Computer and Local Manual (LMAN). An additional jumper may be used to disable the timer. Local Manual mode has a submode that is entered when the DIOB controller has not updated the QAA card’s watchdog timer over the DIOB. selectable using various plug-in resistors Gain Adjustment: 0. This submode is called Local Manual Not Alive (LMNA). and 0 to 10V.0 seconds +20%. 1 to 5V. QAA G02 Analog Position Input • Standard factory installed range = 4 to 20 mA = 0 to 100% Note With jumper JE inserted.0 using a plug-in resistor (5k to 75k) Watchdog Timer Two jumper selected time-out periods.3-2. In addition.5V to 20V Bias Subtraction: 2. -10V to 0V. 5/99 3-19 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 0. the resultant 250 ohms +2% input impedance converts the input current into an equivalent 1 to 5V input voltage range. 0 to 8V. Each range is = 0 to 100% Allowable Span: 3.5V to (−)10V.46 to 4. • • • • Input Ranges: -10V to +10V.5 seconds +20% and 2. 3-2. Address bit UADD0 and control bit HI/LO are used to select one of the four bytes. The maximum time between the reading or writing of the Demand bytes is 0. QAA Status/Command Byte Interpretation Bit Number Status Command 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COMPUTER/LMAN LO-LIM HI-LIM QAA ALIVE QAA HEALTHY NOT USED (LOGIC 0) NOT USED (LOGIC 0) NOT USED (LOGIC 0) KEEP ALIVE GO TO LMAN RESET ACTUATOR (LATCHED) COMP MODE PERMIT (LATCHED) PRIORITY COMMAND (LATCHED) FULL SPEED (LATCHED) G02 NOT USED NOT USED M0-0053 3-20 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .1 msec. Card Addressing and QAA Word Format The QAA card occupies two continuous DIOB addresses (four bytes). the low byte must precede the high byte.4. When the QAA Card’s Demand Register is written to or read from. DIOB BASE ADDRESS PLUS 0 POSITION (READ)/STATUS (READ) OR COMMAND (WRITE) 15 MSB HIGH BYTE POSITION 8 LSB 7 LOW BYTE 0 STATUS /COMMAND 1 DEMAND (READ/WRITE) 15 MSB HIGH BYTE 8 7 6 LSB LOW BYTE 0 The Status/Command byte is as follows: Table 3-2. QAA 3-2. UCLOCK. 5/99 3-21 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Pin assignments for the J2 connector are given in Table 3-4. Table 3-3.3-2. QAA J1 Pin Assignments Solder State J1 Connector Pins Component Side PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 UADD6 HI/LO * GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND * * 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Notes 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND UADD1 UADD3 UADD5 UADD7 R/W DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY/ACK UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 * * GROUND * These pins are open. USYNC. The QAA Card does not interface to the following DIOB signals: UFLAG. and UNIT. UCAL. QAA DIOB Pin Assignments Pin assignments for the J1 connector are given in Table 3-3. 3. QAA J2 Connector Pin Assignments Component Side Signals (B) Pins Solder Side Signals (A) CA7 CA6 CA5 CA4 CA3 CA2 CA1 POSITION INPUT SIGNAL COMMON POSITION TO METER (+) SLOT OIM GO TO COMPUTER (See Note 1) RAISE (See Note 1) HIGH LIMIT (See Note 1) ACTUATOR ALIVE (See Note 1) HIGH LIMIT (See Note 2) COMPUTER (See Note 2) ACTUATOR ENABLE (See Note 2) INCREASE (See Note 2) 13 V CARD BACKUP PSC FOR SHIELD (+) 8V FOR SLIDEWIRE PSP  PSP  For Actuator and PSP  Feedback Unit PSP FOR OIM (See Note 3) SYSTEM BACKUP SYSTEM PRIMARY 1.3-2. 2. 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND DIOB GROUND VELOCITY INPUT SIGNAL COMMON POSITION TO METER (−) SLOT OIM GO TO LMAN (See Note 1) LOWER (See Note 1) LOW LIMIT (See Note 1) RESET WEMAC (See Note 1) LOW LIMIT (See Note 2) LMAN (See Note 2) DECREASE (See Note 2) PSC  PSC  For Actuator and Feedback Unit PSC PSC  PSC FOR OIM PSC FOR OIM SHIELD (See Note 3) BACKUP RETURN PRIMARY RETURN Notes DIM Inputs DIM Outputs PSC = POWER SUPPLY COMMON (SYSTEM GROUND) PSP = AUCTIONEERED 21 TO 27 VOLT POWER M0-0053 3-22 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAA Table 3-4. 3 JA J2 TP1 TP2 JS4 JS5 TP3 JS6.2 VR4 VR8 TP6 TP7 TP8 VR1 VR9 TP9-12 VR5 TP14 TP3. Indicators. QAA DWC Daughter Card Components.4 R59 R60 VR2 VR10 VR11 VR12 DWC Figure 3-11.Table 3-8. Table 3-9. Power On JA1 J1 JS1. and Table 3-10 describe them. Controls. QAA Mother Card Components. indicators. Test Points VR3 TP13 VR6 VR7 TP5 TP1. QAA 3-2.8 Status LEDs Watchdog Timer Reset JF Figure 3-10. Test Points 5/99 3-23 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .7.2. and test points.3-2. and Test Points Figure 3-10 through Figure 3-12 illustrate the locations of the QAA controls.5. QAA Tuning Depending on the application. QAA DBK Daughter Card Components. The following adjustments may be made to the QAA card: • • • • • Position feedback range (G02 only) Positioning accuracy (G01 and G02) Half-speed clock ON/OFF time (G02 only) Quarter-speed clock pulse width (G02 only) High and low limit (G02 only) Each of these adjustments are described below. Test Points 3-2.3 TP4 VR10 VR11 VR2 VR12 R59. QAA VR6 VR7 TP13 TP1 R26.17 VR4 VR8 JE J2.28 R16.3 TP7-10 VR9 TP5 TP6 VR1 VR3 TP2.3-2. 60 DBK TP11 TP12 Figure 3-12.27.6. the QAA card may require adjustments from the factory-shipped potentiometer settings and plug-in resistors. M0-0053 3-24 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The card is factory-shipped with the appropriate resistors for a 4 to 20mA range. the following test equipment is required: • • • Q-Line Extender Card (QEX) Digital voltmeter Trim potentiometer adjustment tool (or small screwdriver) Note The QAA card must be installed on the QEX to provide access to potentiometers and other components. To use a nonstandard range. use the plug-in resistors as shown. QAA Equipment and Set-up In order to adjust the QAA potentiometers.25W 1% 669A664H53 406A069549 499K 0.1% 499K 0.1% 669A664H10 45. Determine the desired range. it may be necessary to re-calibrate the card. and R28. as described below: Table 3-5. the following additional test equipment will be required: • • Precision 0 . QAA G02 Analog Position Input Circuit Plug-in Resistor Selection Position Signal Range 1V to 5V Jumpers Used J2 or J3 J2 or J3 R16 R26 R27 200K 0.1W 0.1W 0. Select Position Feedback Range (G02 Only) The valve position feedback range for the G02 QAA card is selectable using plug-in resistors R16. R26.1% 669A664H08 5/99 3-25 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . refer to the following discussion of resistor selection.1W 0.20 VDC power supply (adjustable to 0. R27.1 V) Special Q-Line card edge connector with external test leads tied to pins 21B and 20B.1% 669A664H13 – R28 – 20K 0.3-2. For the standard ranges listed in Table 3-5.25W 1% 406A069549 -10V to 10V 5K 0.3K 0.1W 0. To re-calibrate the G02 QAA (after changing the position feedback range). When the plug-in resistors are changed. and R28 are not required. Case 2: VFB(0%) < 0 V M0-0053 3-26 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .1% 669A664H44 20K 0.VFB(0%).3-2. R27. Note the following definitions: VFB(0%) = Zero percent of span position feedback voltage.3K 0.1W 0.5 V < Span < 20 V If a current position feedback signal (IFB) is used. it is necessary to calculate the values for these resistors.1% 499K 0. QAA G02 Analog Position Input Circuit Plug-in Resistor Selection Position Signal Range 0 to 10V 0 to 8V 4 to 20 mA Jumpers Used – – JE. and R28) and one gain resistor (R16). where 3. When the zero bias and gain resistors are calculated. The conversion is scaled based on the values of three zero bias resistors (R26.1% 669A664H13 R28 – – – 45. IFB is converted into an equivalent voltage VFB.1W 0. where -10 V < VFB(0%) < 2. QAA Table 3-5.25W 1% 669A664H53 406A069549 Resistor Selection for Non-Standard Position Signal Ranges The DBK card position feedback input circuit has the ability to convert a number of different input voltage or current values to a common 0 to -10 V range.1% 669A664H10 R26 – – R27 – – 200K 0. where: IFB maximum = 20mA VFB = IFB * 250 Ω Note that jumper JE must be inserted to use a current position signal. VFB(100%) = One hundred percent of span position feedback voltage Span = VFB(100%) .5 V. To select a non-standard position signal range.1W 0. J2 or J3 R16 15K 0. three cases may occur: • • Case 1: VFB(0%) = 0 V In this case. resistors R26. R27.1W 0. then turn the precision power supply on. and connect the QAA J2 to the special card-edge connector.5. Calibration of G02 QAA (DBK) The G02 QAA is factory-shipped with the appropriate plug-in resistors for a 4 to 20 mA position signal range.02 kΩ Ideally. If the resistors are changed to select a new range (as described above). using the following procedure (see Figure 3-11 for component locations).. To set-up the card for calibration. the value of R16 should be as shown below: R16 = --------------------------------..4. 10 V * 20 kΩ Span 5/99 3-27 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . install the QAA card using the QEX extension card.3-2. R16 must meet the following conditions: R16 < --------------------------------.02 kΩ The zero bias and gain may be fine tuned using the following calibration procedures. it may be necessary to re-calibrate the card. QAA R26 = 499 kΩ R27 is not used R28 = – --------------------------------- 10 V * 20 kΩ V FB ( 0% ) • Case 3: VFB(0%) > 0 V R26 = 499 kΩ R27 = --------------------------------- 10 V * 20 kΩ V FB ( 0% ) R28 is not used..02 kΩ 10 V * 20 kΩ Span 10 V * 20 kΩ Span R16 + 2 kΩ > --------------------------------. For all three cases. Connect pin 21B to the positive output terminal of the precision power supply: connect pin 20B to the negative output terminal.4. Adjust potentiometer VR4 until the voltage displayed on the voltmeter equals 0 V + 0. Adjust the output of the precision power supply to equal VFB(100%) + 0.5 mV. M0-0053 3-28 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . If the voltage cannot be adjusted to within this range. If VFB(0%) does not equal 0 V. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the power supply output voltage. then no zero bias adjustment is required. QAA The VFB(0%) of the new position feedback voltage range equals 0 V. Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to test point TP4. 2. Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to test point TP4. leave this jumper in the selected position. Adjust the output voltage of the precision power supply to equal VFB(0%) + 0. 2. and connect the negative lead to test point TP13. as described below: 1. then the amount of zero bias should be adjusted using potentiometer VR4 and jumper J2 or J3. 3. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the power supply output voltage. as described below: 1. 3. move jumper JU3 from the J2 position to the J3 position. Once the voltage is within range. Adjust potentiometer VR3 until the voltmeter displayed on the voltmeter equals -10 V + 2 mV.3 mV.1 mV. and connect the negative lead to test point TP13.3-2. The amount of gain may be adjusted using potentiometer VR3. 3-2. QAA Adjusting Positioning Accuracy of G01 QAA (DWC Daughter Board) The positioning accuracy of the G01 QAA may be adjusted using potentiometers VR8 (Negative Small Error Band), VR9 (Positive Small Error Band), VR10 (Positive Large Error Band), and VR11 (Negative Large Error Band). Test points TP9, TP10, TP11, and TP12 may be used to verify the adjustments. The usable Large Error Band adjustment range is as follows: + 1% to + 10% of span OR + 0.5V to + 5V The usable Small Error Band adjustment range is as follows: + 0.15% to + 2% of span OR + 75mV to + 1V Adjusting Positioning Accuracy of G02 QAA (DBK Daughter Board) The positioning accuracy of the G02 QAA may be adjusted using potentiometers VR8 (Negative Small Error Band), VR9 (Positive Small Error Band), VR10 (Positive Large Error Band), and VR11 (Negative Large Error Band). Test points TP7, TP8, TP9, and TP10 may be used to verify the adjustments. The usable Large Error Band adjustment range is as follows: + 3% to + 19.7% of span OR + 1.5V to + 9.85V For example, a large error deadband of approximately 5% of span is represented by a measured voltage of -2.5V at test point TP9 and 2.5V at test point TP10. The usable Small Error Band adjustment range is as follows: + 0.3% to + 5% of span OR + 0.15V to + 2.5V For example, a small error deadband of approximately 1% of span is represented by a measured voltage of 0.5V at test point TP7 and -0.5V at test point TP8. 5/99 3-29 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-2. QAA Adjusting Half-Speed and Quarter-Speed Clocks (G02 Only) On the G02 QAA, two variable duty clocks are provided to allow operation of the actuator at reduced speeds. Two plug-in resistors (R59 and R60) are used to select OFF and ON time values (respectively) for the medium speed clock (called the “Half-speed” clock). The low speed (or “Quarter-speed”) clock is synchronized with the medium speed clock. A potentiometer (VR12) may be used to adjust the pulse width of the second clock, to provide a lower speed. To adjust the Half-speed and Quarter-speed clocks, use the following procedure: 1. Set up the QAA on the QEX extender card, as described above. Use a strip chart recorder to monitor the voltages on TP11 and TP12. 2. Determine the desired ON and OFF time values for the Half-speed clock. Refer to Table 3-6 and select the appropriate resistors for R59 and R60 (49.9 kΩ resistors are factory-installed). Install the selected resistors (see Figure 3-12) for component locations). 3. Check test point TP11 voltage waveform to verify the Half-speed clock on and off times. 4. Adjust potentiometer VR12 to achieve the desired pulse width for the Quarter-speed clock. Note that if VR12 is adjusted clockwise to its limit, the Quarter-speed clock’s output pulse will match that of the Half-speed clock. As VR12 is adjusted counterclockwise, the ON time of the Quarter-speed clock is reduced. 5. Check test point TP12 to verify the Quarter-speed clock on and off times. Table 3-6. QAA Half-Speed Clock On and Off Time Selection Resistor On-Time Off-Time R60 R59 10K 20K 49.9K 100K 200K 499K On-time (seconds) Off-time (seconds) 0.12 .24 .6 1.2 2.4 5.9 0.12 .24 .6 1.2 2.4 5.9 R59 and R60 are 0.25W 1% metal film (406A069) resistors whose values may vary from 10K to 499K. 49.9K resistors are supplied in the R59 and R60 locations on the standard G02 QAA’s DBK daughter card. M0-0053 3-30 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-2. QAA Adjusting High and Low Limit (G02 Only) The Low and High Limit of the G02 QAA (DBK) may be adjusted using potentiometers VR6 and VR7. • • The nominal High Limit adjustment range is from 94% (-4.7V) to 103.2% (-5.16V) of span. The nominal Low Limit adjustment range is from -2% (+0.1V) to 7.3% (-0.365V) of span. The card is factory-shipped with the limits set at -1% and 101% of span (test points TP5 = -5.05V, TP6 = +0.05V. If a different range is desired, use the following procedure: 1. Adjust VR6 to change the High Limit, if desired. 2. Check test point TP5 voltage. 3. Adjust VR7 to change the Low Limit, if desired. 4. Check test point TP6 voltage. Note The test point TP5 or TP6 voltages multiplied by (-20%) equals the High Limit and Low Limit settings respectively as a percentage of the input position feedback span. 5/99 3-31 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-2. QAA The operations possible in each mode are summarized in Table 3-7. Table 3-7. QAA Card Operation Table QAA DIOB Status Bits State COMP Mode LMAN LMNA COMPUTER/LMAN LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT QAA ALIVE QAA HEALTHY Possible DIOB Operations 1 1/0 1/0 1 1 COMP 0 1/0 1/0 1 1 LMAN 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/03 LMNA READ DEMAND WORD WRITE DEMAND WORD TO CONTROL DRIVE POSITION READ DRIVE POSITION READ STATUS BITS WRITE KEEP ALIVE LMAN REQUEST PRIORITY COMMAND RESET ACTUATOR Possible OIM Operations Y Y Y Y Y Y N – COMP Y N1 Y Y Y −2 N/Y4 – LMAN Y N Y Y Y N N Y/N5 LMNA COMP MODE REQUEST LMAN MODE REQUEST RAISE/LOWER OUTPUT Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. −2 Y N Y5 − 2 Y8 N N Y/N7 A QAA Card option is available (via a plug-in jumper) that allows the data in the QAA Card’s Demand Register to control the card’s output while it is in LMAN mode. New values of data may be written into the Demand Register in order to change the position of the actuator. See also Note 4. It has no effect while the QAA Card is in the present mode. If the QAA HEALTHY bit is reset, the card is rejected to LMNA mode. For the card option described in Note 1 to be available, a plug-in jumper must be inserted onto the card and the PRIORITY COMMAND bit must be set. The UIOB/DIOB controller must have previously written a COMP. MODE PERMIT bit into the Command Register. The QAA ALIVE bit must be set in order to permit the actuator to be reset via a DIOB command bit. For the OIM RAISE/LOWER inputs to be operative while the QAA Card is in LMNA mode, the actuator power must be available. The OIM RAISE/LOWER inputs are ignored if the PRIORITY COMMAND bit is set and the option discussed in Notes 1 and 4 is selected. M0-0053 3-32 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-2. QAA Light Emitting Diodes QAA (7379A91) Table 3-8. QAA LEDs Group 1 POWER-OK ACTUATOR ALIVE INCREASE DECREASE Group 2 POWER-OK ACTUATOR ALIVE INCREASE DECREASE Potentiometers Table 3-9. QAA Potentiometers (Daughter Board) Group 1 DWC (7380A66) Group 2 DBK (7380A67) VR1 VR2 VR3 VR4 VR5 VR6 VR7 VR8 VR9 DEMAND GAIN ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE ADJ. VELOCITY DAMPING POSITION BIAS POSITION GAIN POSITIVE PLUG BRAKE DEADBAND NEGATIVE PLUG BRAKE DEADBAND NEGATIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE SMALL ERROR BAND DEMAND GAIN ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE ADJ. POSITION GAIN POSITION BIAS POSITION FEEDBACK GAIN HIGH LIMIT ADJUST LOW LIMIT ADJUST NEGATIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE LARGE ERROR BAND NEGATIVE LARGE ERROR BAND QUARTER SPEED CLOCK DUTY CYCLE ADJUST EIGHT VOLT SUPPLY OUTPUT ADJ. VR10 POSITION FEEDBACK GAIN VR11 POSITIVE LARGE ERROR BAND VR12 NEGATIVE LARGE ERROR BAND VR1* * located on 7379A91 mother board 5/99 3-33 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-2. QAA Test Points Table 3-10. QAA Test Points (Daughter Board) Group 1 DWC (7380A66) Test Points Group 2 DBK (7380A67) Test Points TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP1* TP2* TP3* MINUS VELOCITY MINUS ERROR TIMES FIVE POSITION VOLTAGE DEMAND VELOCITY DAMPING MINUS POSITION POSITIVE PLUG BRAKE DEADBAND NEGATIVE PLUG BRAKE DEADBAND NEGATIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE SMALL ERROR BAND NEGATIVE LARGE ERROR BAND POSITIVE LARGE ERROR BAND ANALOG COMMON ANALOG COMMON AOK POWER-UP +5.9V (TP3) MINUS ERROR TIMES FIVE POSITION VOLTAGE DEMAND MINUS POSITION HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT NEGATIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE SMALL ERROR BAND POSITIVE LARGE ERROR BAND NEGATIVE LARGE ERROR BAND HALF SPEED CLOCK QUARTER SPEED CLOCK ANALOG COMMON AOK POWER-UP +5.9V (TP3) * located on 7379A91 mother board Plug-In Jumpers JA (Both Groups) QAA (7379A91) When this jumper is connected to test points JS2 and JS3, the PRIORITY COMMAND option is available. If the PRIORITY COMMAND option is not used, the jumper is moved so that it connects test points JS1 and JS2. M0-0053 3-34 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-2. QAA JD (Group Two) QAA (7379A91) When this jumper is connected to test points JS7 and JS8, the QAA card will operate the actuator at a fraction of the nominal velocity. This is accomplished by controlling the DIM outputs, INCREASE and DECREASE, with the plus train output of the HALF SPEED CLOCK circuit. This option is only effective while the QAA card is in LMAN mode. Connecting the jumper to test points JS6 and JS7 disables this option. The INCREASE and DECREASE DIM outputs will then operate at a 100 percent duty cycle when they are activated (LMAN mode). JE (Group Two) DBK (7380A67) Out – Selects voltage position feedback In – Selects 4 to 20 mA position feedback Watchdog Timer Period Selection (Both Groups) QAA (7379A91) JA1 Jumper Pin 3 to Pin 6 Pin 2 to Pin 7 Pin 1 to Pin 8 Nominal Timer Period 2.0 seconds 0.5 seconds Timer disabled JF (Both Groups) QAA (7379A91) This jumper is not included on the board if the voltage supplied to pin 1B and/or pin 2B of the J2 connector is between 22.0 and 27.0 V. If the voltage supplied to pin 1B and/or 2B is between 12.4 and 13.1 V, jumper JF is inserted onto the board between test points JS4 and JS5 on the mother board. Warning Verify the JF jumper setting prior to tuning or installing a QAA card. Failure to perform this check may result in damage to the QAA card. 5/99 3-35 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-2. QAA J2 and J3 (Group Two) DBK (7380A67) These jumpers are used to provide different bias voltages for the position voltage gain and bias stage. Their use is dependent on the particular position voltage range that is used. DIOB Power Supply Requirements • • • Primary: 12.4 to 13.1 VDC, 13.0 VDC nominal Backup: 12.4 to 13.1 VDC Current: 500 mA maximum G02 QAA Slidewire Power Supply • • Output Voltage: 8.0V ±0.1V, user adjustable Output Current: 16 mA nominal for a 500-ohm load External Power Supply Limits • • • G01 WEMAC Primary: G01 WEMAC Backup: G02 Beck Primary and Backup: Low Voltage+12.4 VDC Minimum 13.1 VDC Maximum 22.5 VDC Minimum 27.0 VDC Maximum 22.5 VDC Minimum 27.0 VDC Maximum High Voltage+22.0 VDC Minimum 27.0 VDC Maximum M0-0053 3-36 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-3. QAC 3-3. QAC Analog Conditioning Card (Style 2840A86G01 through G06) 3-3.1. Description The primary QAC function is as an analog signal conditioner. Additionally some signal switching is provided for online testing. Automatic test versions can be used in conjunction with other Q-line cards (such as, QAI and QMD). These test versions select either process data signal inputs or test data signal inputs for a Q-line system. There are four analog points on the QAC card. Each analog point has one field contact connection, two internal contact connections which may receive input data or test data, and one field output connection. A test signal may be injected to verify operation of succeeding logic stages. Six QAC groups are available. Block Diagram Figure 3-13. QAC Block Diagram 5/99 3-37 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-3. QAC Circuit Description Functional block diagrams of the QAC groups are shown in Figure 3-14 through Figure 3-17. FRONT CARD EDGE CONNECTOR (J2) +48 V DIOB TO SIMILAR CIRCUITS AS SHOWN BELOW G02 +12 V 24/48 V CHOPPER (G01 ONLY) I VOLTAGE REGULATOR AND CURRENT LIMITING TO THREE OTHER CIRCUITS ROUT (PLUGGABLE) 250 Ω I K1 4 TO 20 mA TRANSMITTER LATCH DATA + K1 K1 − TEST INPUT FROM QAO UNIT (RESET) STROBE + − TEST PERMIT + − I 0 TO 10 V OUTPUT ADDRESS 8 COMPARE 8 CONTACT FRONT CONNECTOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENT JUMPER +12 V EITHER OPTION MAY BE USED Figure 3-14. QAC Block Diagram (Groups 1 and 2) M0-0053 3-38 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-3. QAC JUMPER DIOB TEST PERMIT + +12 CONTACT CMOS SUPPLY LATCH TO THREE OTHER CIRCUITS K1 NORMAL INPUT UNIT (RESET) LATCH K1 DATA TEST INPUT TEST OUTPUT STROBE K1 FRONT CARD EDGE CONNECTOR (J2) ADDRESS 8 COMPARE 8 FRONT CONNECTOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENT Figure 3-15. QAC Block Diagram (Group 3) 5/99 3-39 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-3. QAC DIOB TO THREE OTHER CIRCUITS +24/48 V CHOPPER ROUT I 4 TO 20 mA TRANSMITTER 250 Ω VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND CURRENT LIMITERS I − NOTE + TO QAI NO ADDRESS SPACE IS REQUIRED. G04 DOES NOT ADD TO THE 48 CARD LIMIT SPECIFIED FOR THE UIOB. Figure 3-16. QAC Block Diagram (Group 4) M0-0053 3-40 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-3. QAC DIOB +48 V.D.C. 48 VOLTS CHOPPER I I Figure 3-17. QAC Block Diagram (Group 5) DIOB TO THREE OTHER CIRCUITS +24/48 V CHOPPER ROUT (PLUG SELECTABLE) 250 Ω TRANSMITTER VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND CURRENT LIMITERS 4 TO 20 mA + 10 V PLUGGABLE 10 V 0 - 10 V OUTPUT Figure 3-18. QAC Block Diagram (Group 6) 5/99 3-41 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 Four amplifiers convert a loop current of 4 to 20 mA to a corresponding output voltage of 0 to 10 VDC. QAC Output Capabilities Group Specification G01: G02: 0 V to 10 VDC. G03 provides four DIOB-controlled DPDT. Four amplifier outputs convert a loop current of 4 to 20 mA to a corresponding output voltage of 1 to 5 VDC. There is no test provision. G06 provides one on-card power supply with four current limited voltage regulators.00 to 5.QDI..0 megaohm or more) analog input card (such as. signal selectors for relaying RS-232C and controls or other low-current signals (less than 50 mA). 4 mA to 20 mA at 24 or 40 VDC 0 V to 10 VDC. The outputs may be directly connected to a high impedance (1.3. Test relays are available to switch the field inputs off and inject a test input from a QAO. Both the 1. QAI). G05 provides one on-card +48 VDC power supply which supplies contact wetting voltage for up to ten QPA. QBI. • • • • • 3-3. Features • G01 provides one internal transmitter power supply with four current-limited voltage regulators (40 to 24 V). Test relays are available to switch the field input off. or QID field inputs. QAC 3-3. Specifications Inputs/Outputs DIOB Input Requirements Logic 0: 0 V to 3 V Logic 1: 7 V to 12 V Table 3-11. Four amplifiers convert a loop current of 4 to 20 mA to a corresponding output voltage of 0 to 10 VDC. G04 provides one internal transmitter power supply with four current-limited voltage regulators (24 or 40 V). G02 converts two +48 VDC external power supplies (auctioneered) to 24 or 40 V transmitter supplies.4 mA to 20 mA at 24 or 40 VDC M0-0053 3-42 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2. and inject a test input from a QAO.00 volt signals obtained from the 4-20 mA loop currents via 250 Ω resistors and the two proportional 0-10 volt outputs of the card on-card amplifiers are available at the card edge.3-3. 1 VDC (13 VDC typical) Backup: 12.3-3.1 VDC Current: G01 – 1750 mA (maximum) G02 – 675 mA (maximum) G03 – 400 mA (maximum) G04 – 1000 mA (maximum) G05 – 1000 mA (maximum) G06 – 1500 mA (maximum) 5/99 3-43 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .4 VDC to 13. 4 mA to 20 mA at 24 or 40 VDC 120 mA at +48 VDC 0 V to 10 VDC Output Buffer Specifications (G01 and G02 only) Accuracy: 0.2 percent (additive to a QAI with a 0 to 10 V span) Load Resistance: 4 k Ω (minimum) Temperature Coefficient: 40 PPM/°C Signal Switching (G03 Only) Form C Reed Relay Contacts Voltage: 50 VDC (maximum) Current: 50 mA (maximum) Operate Time: 7 msec (maximum) Release Time: 7 msec (maximum) Relay Coil Voltage: 12 VDC nominal Current: 310 mA (four relays energized simultaneously) Power Supply Primary: 12. QAC Output Capabilities Group Specification G03: G04: G05: G06: Signal Switching 1 V to 5 VDC.4 VDC to 13. QAC Table 3-11. 0 VDC (jumper selected) 24 V + 2. M0-0053 3-44 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Card Addressing The QAC card uses eight address lines. The first step in QAC operation involves the QAC address lines.0 + 10 Ω (output) Space is provided on the card for insertion of a resister (up to 1 W). four data lines. and four DIOB control lines.0 VDC (jumper selected) Current: 4 mA to 20 mA (nominal) 30 mA + 7 mA (short-circuit limit) Impedance: 25.4.3-3. QAC Transmitter Power Supply Voltage: 40 V + 2. 3-3. for additional loop impedance. The QAC address is selected by eight jumpers on the top. Insertion of a jumper encodes a 1 in the address line. card-edge connector. the address circuitry outputs the AOK signal and four data bits are latched onto the QAC. The address available on the DIOB is compared to the address which is physically jumpered in on the front. The analog outputs are brought out to the front. QAC Address Jumper Assembly Connectors and Terminations The QAC card interfaces the DIOB via a standard DIOB. card-edge connector instead of a voltage. rear. card-edge connector (J2). This allows ground potential to appear at the front. card-edge connector. Table 3-13 through Table 3-15 list the contact allocations for G03. The jumpered address lines and the DIOB address lines are exclusive OR’d. 5/99 3-45 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QAC card connectors and test points are shown in Figure 3-20. An address selection example is shown in Figure 3-19. card-edge connector.3-3. QAC The address lines (UADD0 through UADD7) enter the QAC card via the rear-edge connector. absence of the jumper encodes a 0 in the address line. front. Table 3-12 lists the contact allocations for G01 and G02. respectively. and G05. G04. This configuration gates the compared addresses and outputs an AOK signal from pin 13 (W319-1) if the address jumpers are opposite the DIOB address. FRONT CONNECTOR 404A037 A7 = 0 JUMPER: A6 = 1 A5 = 0 A4 = 0 JUMPER: A3 = 1 A2 = 0 A1 = 0 JUMPER: A0 = 1 CARD ADDRESS = 01001001 (49H) Figure 3-19. Once the QAC determines it has been addressed. QAC Table 3-12. QAC G01 and G02 Contact Allocations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 0 to 10 V QAI Signal Positive Negative Shield Out Return Positive Negative Primary +48 V Backup +48 V +12V TEST PERMIT 48V RETURN 5A 3A 3B 2B 2A 5B 4B 9A 7A 7B 6B 6A 9B 8B 13A 11A 11B 10B 10A 13B 12B 17A 15A 15B 14B 14A 17B 16B Transmitter Loop Test Input Power 19A G02 only 19B 20A Jumpered 20B 1A and 1B – G02 only } } M0-0053 3-46 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-3. 3-3. 19A. QAC G03 Contact Allocations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Normal Input (Normally Closed) Test Input (Normally Open) Output (Armature) Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative Shield +12V TEST PERMIT 2A 2B 5B 4A 5A 3A 3B 20A 20B 6A 6B 9B 8B 9A 7A 7B 10A 10B 13B 12A 13A 11A 11B Jumpered 14A 14B 17B 16A 17A 15A 15B Power } 19A. QAC G05 Contact Allocations Power Supply +48V +48V Return 19A. 19B. 19B 1A. 1B. 1B 5/99 3-47 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 20A. 19B 1A. 1B } No Connection Table 3-14. QAC G04 Contact Allocations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Transmitter Loop Output Out Return Positive Negative Shield 2B 2A 5A 3A 3B 6B 6A 9A 7A 7B 10B 10A 13A 11A 11B 14B 14A 17A 15A 15B No Connections 1A. QAC Table 3-13. 20B Table 3-15. QAC G06 Contact Allocations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 0 .0 . QAC Table 3-16. fused TEST PERMIT +48 Backup +48 Backup 5A 3A 3B 2B 2A 5B 4B 9A 7A 7B 6B 6B 9B 8B 20A 20B 13A 11A 11B 10B 10A 13B 12B Jumpered 19A 19 B 17A 15A 15B 14B 14A 17B 16B Transmitter Loop 1.0 V Signal Power } 3-3. QAC Card Components (Indicators and test Points) M0-0053 3-48 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2.5.3-3.5. Controls and Indicators LED G01-6 LED G01-3 Test Points G01-4. 6 LEDs G01.3 Figure 3-20.10 V Signal Positive Negative Shield Out Return Plus Minus +12V auctioneered. . QAH 3-4. This stored data is multiplexed via the DIOB to the DIOB controller when the QAH is addressed. A/D converter which interfaces to the DIOB in process control systems. providing several analog input ranges. Description Groups 01. and a system-in-operation bit and one unused bit comprise the 16-bit digital value.3-4.2. QAH High Speed Analog Input Point (Style 7379A36G01 through G04) 3-4. Each bipolar input is converted to a 16-bit digital value and stored in RAM. The analog signal value (11 bits). 03. The QAH card processes up to eight high level differential inputs from the field process points in the plant environment. an overrange bit. 04.. QAH Block Diagram 3-4. Features The QAH card is available in four groups (G01 through G04). DIOB DATA Address RAM Memory Address Selection and Control Optical Isolation A/D Converter Analog MUX Signal Conditioning 0 . 7 From Process Field Points Figure 3-21. are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAH card is a high-speed.1. The QAH card offers the following features: 5/99 3-49 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . a polarity bit. 02. 64 msec scan rate for all groups. Jumper-selectable zero checking and + and − full scale checking for both bipolar and unipolar operation.” In the “scan and hold” mode. A/D converter. Continual input scanning and RAM updating 0. Analog/digital isolation. The QAH has two jumper-select modes of scan: “Continuous Scan” and “Scan and Hold. The second method uses a group write address which triggers a group of QAH cards to provide simultaneous data snapshots. IEEE surge withstand protection on input circuits. QAH • • • • • • • Two jumper-selectable modes of operation.1 VDC Current: 800mA Maximum M0-0053 3-50 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Specifications Power Requirements • • • Primary: 12. Scan rates can be increased by truncating the number of points per card to be scanned. successive approximation.3. two. a scan can be initiated in two ways. The first method is to write to the normal DIOB address of the QAH. The QAH card multiplexes eight high-level differential inputs to a high-speed. Optical and transformer isolation separates the analog section from the digital and/or DIOB interface section (see Figure 3-21).4 to 13. four. 3-4. The input point scan period is 0. Isolated on-card power supplied.3-4. The scan rate approximately doubles for each truncation step.64 msec. or eight points can be scanned by the QAH card. One.1 VDC Secondary: 12.4 to 13. 11875 (Typ.) Volts/Step 5.5 mV 2.11875 Common Mode Range ±1.3 µs (min.0 mV 2. Source Impedance: 200 Ω max. Input Range (Volts) G01: −10.) DC Common Mode Rejection: 60dB DC Input Impedance: 5 megohm at full scale.000 Ω min. QAH Input Filter Time Constant: 0. Sustained overrange input: 30 V relative to analog common.76 V ±6V Span (Volts) 20.25 mV Isolation: Analog common to DIOB common: 500 V max.76 V ±6V ± 1. Overrange input impedance: 2.5 mV 1.2375 G04: 0 to +5.3-4.120 to +5. Note All QAH data is invalid until another complete scan has been made after the surge waveform is removed.1175 G03: 0 to +10. The analog common will withstand the IEEE surge waveform applied with respect to the DIOB common without damage to the QAH card.240 to +10.475 10.2375 5.) 10 µs (max.235 G02: −5. 5/99 3-51 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2375 10. A block diagram of the QAH is shown in Figure 3-22. the input points can be truncated to only scan 1. Temperature coefficient: 40 ppm/°C of 20. 0 V common mode M0-0053 3-52 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .7% confidence. To increase the scan rate for the continuous scan operating modes.11875 V span Linearity: 0. The scan rate is doubled for each truncated step. QAH Inputs and Outputs The QAH input consists of eight differential inputs which are multiplexed to a high speed A/D converter. This circuit allows the inputs to withstand the IEEE surge without damage. 2. The isolation is transformer-type for power and optical-type for data. This analog section is isolated from the digital and DIOB interface section. 4 640 µsec 320 µsec 160 µsec 80 µsec Input DC Accuracy Reference accuracy: ± 0. 3. +13 VDC power supply.3-4.1% of span ± 1/2 LSB at 99. QAH Conversion Scan Time Number of Points 8 4 2 1 G01.05% of span Reference condition:25°C temperature. or 4 points. Table 3-17.2375 V span 50 ppm/°C of 5. 2.475 V span 45 ppm/°C of 10. See Table 3-17. Each input contains an RLC filter with a time constant of approximately 1 microsecond and a clamp. 5/99 ANALOG COMMON INPUT CONTROL 3-53 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C STATUS ADDRESS COUNTER CLOCK CHANNEL CLOCK DATA LATCH DATA MULTIPLEXER MEMORY ADDRESS M0-0053 . QAH ADDRESS DIOB DATA DIOB ADDRESS RAM 2:1 DATA MULTIPLEXER (R/W) SERIALPARALLEL CONVERTER READ/ SCAN INITIATE CLOCK AND CONTROL CIRCUITRY SCAN/HOLD SCAN CONTROLLER CONV A/D CONVERTER POWER SUPPLY TYPICAL INPUT SIGNAL (+) SIGNAL (−) Figure 3-22. Card Addressing and Data Output Address Jumpers The QAH card address is established by five jumper fixtures which are located in the front-edge connector.3-4.4. QAH Card Functional Block Diagram 3-4. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the selected address line (ADD3 through ADD7) which when matched by the UIOB or DIOB address signals selects the QAH card by the system controller. Eight pairs of contacts exist for the eight analog input points. the system operational bit goes high during the first point conversion and stays high for at least ten milliseconds after the end of the scan. The “B” pins of the connector are located on the component side and the “A” pins are located on the solder side of the p-c card. the conversion result is the most positive or most negative result. QAH word formats are shown in Figure 3-24. QAH The optional group address for the QAH card is established by three jumpers on the front-edge connector. Field Input Connections The QAH card uses a standard Q-series front edge connector. One contact is for the signal (+) and the second is for its return (−). The overrange bit is determined by a digital comparison of the most positive or most negative conversion results. See Figure 3-23. In the scan and hold mode.3-4. The analog common is also brought out with the field inputs. If the input is overrange. Figure 3-23 shows the pin configuration of the front-edge connector. Output Data There are two status bits: overrange and system operational. the system operational bit is high if the converter is operating. This analog common should be tied to the system ground or earth ground. In the scan mode. M0-0053 3-54 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-4. QAH Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments BINARY xx SIGN xxxx xxxx x0 BIPOLAR Card OK Overrange Not Used Figure 3-24. QAH Word Formats } 0xxx xxxx xxxx x0 UNIPOLAR Card OK Overrange Not Used 5/99 3-55 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAH Solder Side 1A 2A Point 0 + Input 3A 4A Point 1 + Input 5A 6A Point 2 + Input 7A 8A Point 3 + Input 9A 10A Point 4 + Input 11A 12A Point 5 + Input 13A 14A Point 6 + Input 15A 16A Point 7 + Input 17A 18A Analog Common Group Address Line S0 Common Group Address Line S1 Common Group Address Line S2 Common 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A Address Line A3 Common Address Line A4 Common Address Line A5 Common Address Line A6 Common Address Line A7 Common 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A Component Side 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B Address Line A3 Address Line A4 Address Line A5 Address Line A6 Address Line A7 Analog Common Group Address Line S0 Group Address Line S1 Group Address Line S2 Point 7 – Input Point 6 – Input Point 5 – Input Point 4 – Input Point 3 – Input Point 2 – Input Point 1 – Input Point 0 – Input Figure 3-23. 0 V −5. See Table 3-18 Table 3-18.235 V −10.0 V +5.115 V 0.3-4.1175 V +5. QAH A bipolar conversion produces a 12-bit 2’s complement result (11 bits plus sign). QAH Bipolar Conversion Dataword High Byte Low Byte XXXX XXXX XXXX X0XX Extended Sign Sign System Operational Overrange 2’s Complement Conversion G01 Input G02 Input Result +10.230 V 0.005 V +5.0025 V 3FFB 3FF1 0001 C009 C003 FFF9 A unipolar conversion produces a 12-bit binary result. This number is left justified minus one with the MSB set to 0.11875 V +5. This number is left justified minus one with an extended sign in the MSB.1175 V −5.0 V 7FFB 7FF1 0009 0003 M0-0053 3-56 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .240 V −0.1175 V +0. Table 3-19. QAH Unipolar Conversion Dataword High Byte Low Byte 0XXX XXXX XXXX X0XX System Operational Overrange Binary Conversion G03 Input G04 Input Result +10.0025 V 0.235 V +0.120 V −0. See Table 3-19.2375 V +10.0 V -10.235 V +10.00125 V 0. 3 and 4 is 0.5 VDC Clock (Pin 8) Span VC Output TP6 TP7 TP5 Common Mode Null Negative VC Zero Offset Adj 14 Jumper Detail 1 1 2 4 S /H S/H S/H Figure 3-25. the low byte must be read first and the high byte must be read within 2 milliseconds of the low byte. Truncating the scan will increase the scan rate of the input points (see Figure 3-25 and Table 3-20).5. In the scan-and-hold mode. PS Osc (Pin 8) W339 Clock Adjust Span Jumpers Common Mode Null Positive PS Osc Adj +16. When the data is read from the card.3-4.64 milliseconds per point. the data is only written on command. The scan rate for the eight points for Groups 1. Controls and Indicators The QAH normally scans eight input points. The Continuous scan mode the RAM is continuously updated (see Figure 3-21). QAH 3-4. 5/99 3-57 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 7 8 M0-0053 .5 VDC -16.5 ADJ -16. the scan can be optionally truncated to one.5 ADJ +16. 2. QAH Card Components Jumper Settings Two operating modes: Continuous and Scan and Hold are set by inserting various jumpers in the sockets shown in Figure 3-25. The jumpers control either which points are scanned or set a scan and hold for all points. two or four input points. By positioning three jumpers. QAH Table 3-20. 6. 1. 6 -9. 7 . 6.7 Continuous Scan: Points 0.8 (All S/H jumpers in place). 2.3-4.12 2 . 1 Continuous Scan: Point 0 Scan-and-hold Points 0.10. 2. 3. 1. 4. M0-0053 3-58 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 5. 3.7 Pins Jumpered None 3 . 4. 3 Continuous Scan: Points 0.14 5 . QAH Option Jumpers QAH Operating Mode Continuous Scan: Points 0. 1. 5. 2.13 1 . QAH 3-4. Figure 3-26. Analog common used for all eight points.3-4. QAH Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-59 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD ANALOG COMMON (−) POINT 7 (+) (−) POINT 6 (+) (−) POINT 5 (+) (−) POINT 4 (+) (−) POINT 3 (+) (−) POINT 2 (+) (−) POINT 1 (+) (−) POINT 0 (+) 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A TERMINAL BLOCK HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 COMMON* (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) POINT 0 POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 POINT 4 POINT 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 B 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 INTERNAL BUS STRIP EDGE-CONNECTOR CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS * Common is connected to system ground at one point only.6. QAH For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CARD 1A 1B + POINT 0 + POINT 1 + POINT 2 + POINT 3 + POINT 4 + POINT 5 + POINT 6 + POINT 7 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A ANALOG COMMON 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE COMMON* A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 + + + + + + + + POINT 7 POINT 6 POINT 5 POINT 4 POINT 3 POINT 2 POINT 1 POINT 0 COMPRESSION-STYLE TERMINAL BLOCK EDGE-CONNECTOR * Common is connected to system ground at one point only. Analog common used for all eight points. Figure 3-27.3-4. QAH CE MARK Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-60 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-5. Data DIOB Address and Control Subtractor and Offset Check Interface Logic Point RAM Offset RAM Memory Control Logic Counter A/D Control Logic Optical Isolators Signal Conditioning Integrator Field Input Figure 3-28. and one Bus Controller. QAI 3-5. The subsystem may be expanded in increments of four points by adding QAI cards (48 QAI cards maximum).1. QAI Block Diagram 5/99 3-61 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Analog input systems consist of one or more QAI cards. Description Groups 01 through G08 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAI card contains four analog-to-digital (A/D) converters and a digital multiplexed interface to the DIOB of a process control system (see Figure 3-28). no other cards are required to perform the analog input function. a QTB card. QAI Analog Input Card (Style 2840A19G01 through G08) 3-5. Inputs are fault-voltage protected and can withstand high common mode voltages and IEEE surge The QAI card is available in eight groups (G01 through G08). and 2 error bits. QAI 3-5. providing a range of analog input parameters. with 12-bit binary resolution Fault-voltage protected inputs which withstand IEEE surge High ac normal mode and common mode rejection without any filters Open thermocouple detection Dual slope integration Line frequency tracking High conversion rate Digital auto-zeroing Auto-conversion check Isolated power supply for each point Digitized value readily available for transfer anytime Lock-out to facilitate system snap-shot The QAI card offers the following features: M0-0053 3-62 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . provided a QTB card is present. polarity. The QAI can be utilized in a system with any type of DIOB controller (such as MBU or MSQ).2. Features Each A/D converter is dedicated to a process point in the plant environment. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • G01: +20 mV analog inputs with a 700Ω source impedance (maximum) G02: +50 mV analog inputs with a 700Ω source impedance (maximum) G03: +100 mV analog inputs with a 1 kΩ source impedance (maximum) G04: +500 mV analog inputs with a 5 kΩ source impedance (maximum) G05: +1 V analog inputs with a 10 kΩ source impedance (maximum) G06:+10 V analog inputs with a 10 kΩ source impedance (maximum) G07: 0 to 20 mA of current for analog inputs G08: +50 mV analog inputs with a 1 kΩ source impedance (maximum) Accepts four bipolar signals ranging from +20 mV to +10 V. The 16-bit digital data includes the analog signal value (12 bits). converting a bipolar analog field input to a 16-bit digital output.3-5. The card will accept four bipolar signals ranging from +20 mV to +10 V with 12-bit binary resolution. overrange. Analog Input Capabilities G01: −20 mV to +20 mV G02: −50 mV to +50 mV G03: −100 mV to +100 mV G04: −500 mV to +500 mV G05: −1V to +1V G06: −10V to +10V G07: 0 mA to +20 mA G08: −50 mA to +50 mA Input Impedance (minimum) Groups 1 through 6 and 8 Below 60 percent Relative humidity: 108Ω/volt Below 90 percent Relative humidity: 107Ω/volt Overload: 103Ω Input Impedance Group 7 250Ω Point Sampling (Rate/second) 60 Hz power line frequency: 30 50 Hz power line frequency: 25 Resolution Full Scale: 12 bit 5/99 3-63 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3. Specifications DIOB Input Requirements Logic 0: 0 V to 3 V Logic 1: +8 V to +12 V The signal lines at the DIOB interface are specified by the DIOB description.3-5. QAI 3-5. power line frequency and harmonics with line frequency tracking: 120 dB At nominal power line frequency +5 percent without line frequency tracking: 100 dB Line Frequency Tracking Input Voltage: 120 VAC +10 percent (rms) Input Voltage Frequency: 60 Hz + 2Hz or 50 Hz + 5Hz Input Voltage Frequency Stability: + 0.125 percent +10 µV +1/2 LSB of full scale Reference Condition: 25°C ambient temperature.3-5.7 percent confidence:+0.6 percent/sec (maximum change) Frequency Tracking Compensation: +0.01 percent increments (hardware compensation) Open Thermocouple Detection Open thermocouple detection with a minus over-range signal is provided on the following card groups: • • • M0-0053 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 3-64 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAI Full Scale and Polarity: 13 bit Reference Accuracy 99. 0V (ac and dc) Common Mode. 0 VAC Normal Mode Normal Mode Rejection At power-line frequency and harmonics with frequency tracking: 60 dB At power-line frequency +5 percent and harmonics without line frequency tracking: 20 dB Common Mode Rejection At DC. The conversion is conducted for a full cycle of line frequency to provide high noise rejection without relying on approximations from previous readings. This enables the card to recover quickly from surges and continuous overvoltages. Out of Range Offset Card Trouble to BFFF 0000 to 7FFF X – Don’t Care 18000 may indicate either an out of range offset or an over range of at least 5%.1 V 600 mA Output Codes Output Data (Hexadecimal) C000 C001 D000 DXXX or 18000 FFFF F000 EXXX 18000 Input 0 input +1 + Full Scale + Over Range -1 .1 V + 13. QAI • Group 8 (no minus over-range) Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage: Backup Voltage: (optional) Current + 12. Functional Description All QAIs in an analog input process control system utilize one QTB card per DIOB to start continuous conversion of all four points and to establish the conversion cycle.Over Range (Open thermocouple detection).Full Scale .4 V + 12.3-5. 5/99 3-65 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .0V -550 mA Maximum + 13.4 V -Nominal + 13. RAM memory. the voltage for the open point is read by the converter. The Pre-Amp input and RAM selection is synchronized with the USYNC signal pulse. UIOB transactions (for example. The integrator output provides the offset signal when the pre-amp input is shorted. However. Each time a reading is completed. and an interface to the DIOB. The stored value is unaffected by calibration checks. Signal coupling between the isolated and non-isolated sections is through optical isolators. QAI Each QAI card contains four isolated A/D converters sharing a non-isolated digital interface to the DIOB. M0-0053 3-66 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the UCAL Lockout pulse (for taking a plant snapshot) overrides an EOC pulse and inhibits RAM updating. On cards rated up to +100 mV. Read operations) may occur at any time during these pulses.3-5. open thermocouple detection is performed by means of a high-impedance voltage source which is shorted out if the thermocouple is good. the digitized value is placed in RAM and stored until the next reading is complete. QAI Control Timing A control timing diagram is shown in Figure 3-30. Circuit Description A functional block diagram of the QAI card is shown in Figure 3-29. if a UIOB transaction occurs at the same time as an END OF CONVERSION (EOC) pulse. the EOC pulse is ignored and RAM update does not occur. If the thermocouple is open. Similarly. The digital section is composed of a counter accumulator. 5/99 CLOCK POWER DRIVE CHOPPER OFFSET CONVERSION R/W OFFSET RAM +24V RAMP CONTROL 14-BIT COUNTER R/W POINT EOC ADDR WRITE WORD ADDR R/W OFFSET POINT RAM OFFSET RAM WORD ADDR 14 BIT OUTPUT FIELD SIGNAL ANALOG POINT CIRCUITRY EOC CONVERSION RAM MEMORY CONTROL LOGIC 3-67 CLOCK RAMP CONTROL OFFSET CONVERSION SUBTRACTOR OFFSET CHECK 14 DATA BITS ENABLE Figure 3-29. QAI . QAI Card Block Diagram Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C A/D LOGIC CONTROL DIOB INTERFACE LOGIC ADDR POWER A/D CONTROL BUS CONTROL 2 ERROR BITS TRI-STATE BUS DRIVERS 8 DATA 8 UADDR BITS 8 UDATA BITS HI/LO UNIT DATAGATE DATADIR 12V GND USYNC UCAL UCLOCK DIOB M0-0053 3-5. When USYNC goes high. the SIG signal also goes high and enables the summer output signal to pass into the integrator amplifier. M0-0053 3-68 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAI Control Timing Diagram Analog Point Circuitry A general block diagram of the analog point circuitry is shown in Figure 3-31.3-5. the integrator begins ramping up as shown in Figure 3-32. Figure 3-32 shows Analog Point Timing. QAI POSITIVE FIELD INPUT NEGATIVE USYNC UCAL LOCK-OUT UIOB TRANSACTION OCCURRENCE SHORTED PRE-AMP INPUT FIELD FIELD (ZERO) OFFSET RAM SELECT POINT INTEGRATOR OUTPUT POINT END OF CONVERSION RAM UPDATE INHIBITED DUE TO DIOB TRANSACTION INHIBITED DUE TO LOCKOUT Figure 3-30. Consequently. The integrator continues to ramp up until USYNC fails. ANALOG INPUT 5/99 CHARGE POWER SUPPLY OTD BUFFERED ATTENUATOR G06. S. QAI Analog Point Block Diagram Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C CHARGE DUAL SLOPE A/D ΤΟ RAMP CONTROL CONTROL Σ SHIELD M0-0053 3-5. 7 50K HZ + PRE AMP SWC NM FILTER 1V F. INTERFACE TO NONISOLATED SECTION OFFSET CLAMP POINT/OFFSET SELECT − ANALOG FRONT END CONV 3-69 SHIELD CONNECTED TO LOW INPUT AT SOURCE SUMMER BIAS REF REF. QAI . VOLTAGE GENERATOR INTEGRATOR COMPARATOR EOC Figure 3-31. QAI USYNC (Ramp Control) 10µsec coupling delay Signal Interval Reference Interval Clamp 10V + F.4.O.3-5.C.T.S Input Integrator Output O.5 V Discharge Time End of Conversion E. Card Addressing Connectors and Terminations The QAI card interfaces with the DIOB via a standard DIOB rear.S Count Accumulation Time 0V +F. QAI Analog Point Timing Diagram 3-5.S Figure 3-32. Charge Signal Integration 1V 5.D. card-edge connector (see Figure 3-33). -F.S Input 0V Input .F. M0-0053 3-70 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The QAI inputs are three wire and use the same pin-outs for all groups. QAI Analog Input Contact Allocations Point Point 0 5A – (+ input) 3A – (− input) 3B – (shield) 9A – (+ input) 7A – (− input) 7B – (shield) Pin Out Point 1 Point 2 13A – (+ input) 11A – (− input) 11B – (shield) 17A – (+ input) 15A – (− input) 15B – (shield) Point 3 Channel 3 Channel 1 Digital Circuitry Channel 2 Channel 0 Figure 3-33. Table 3-21. QAI Card Components 5/99 3-71 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAI The analog inputs enter the QAI on the front-edge of the card. The contact allocations are shown in Table 3-21.3-5. QAI 3-5. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 CARD 19B 19A 17B (+) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (−) 17A 15B 15A 13B (+) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (−) 13A 11B 11A 9B (+) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (−) 9A 7B 7A 5B (+) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (−) 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A PLANT GROUND (+) POINT 0 TRANSDUCER (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 1 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 2 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 3 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-34. QAI Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-72 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5.3-5. QAI For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CARD 1A 1B (−) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (+) 3A 3B 5A 5B (−) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (+) 7A 7B 9A 9B (−) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (+) 11A 11B 13A 13B (−) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (+) 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 3 (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 2 (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 1 (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 0 (+) PLANT GROUND EDGE-CONNECTOR Note The QAI inputs may be grounded in the field or at the B cabinet as shown.3-5. Figure 3-35. QAI CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-73 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 1. Features The QAM card provides the following capabilities: • M0-0053 Automatic or Manual mode operation 3-74 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the M/A station and a final controlled device. The QAM card connections are shown in Figure 3-40.2.3-6. Data DIOB UIOB or DIOB Interface Logic Control Logic Demand Up/Down Counter Set Point Up/Down Counter Demand D/A Converter Set Point D/A Converter Demand Set Point I/P E/P Digital DIM Outputs Inputs M/A Interface Field Interface Figure 3-36. The QAM card is available in six groups (G01 through G06). QAM Block Diagram 3-6. QAM 3-6. a 28-pin card edge connector and a 34-pin backplane connector. QAM Automatic/Manual Station Controller (Style 7379A28G01 through G06) 3-6. Electrical connection to the QAM card is made through a 9-pin connector. A final controlled device can be a voltage to pressure (E/P) or a current to pressure (I/P) converter (see Figure 3-36). Description The Automatic/Manual (QAM) card provides the interface between the DIOB controller. and a systems application block diagram is shown in Figure 3-38. QAM Note The DIOB controller does not need to be present for Manual mode operation. WATCHDOG ALIVE. Figure 3-39 shows a typical QAM usage scheme. • • • • • • • • • • • • Ability of DIOB controller to place QAM card in Manual mode Ability to place QAM card in either mode via external reject signals Switch selectable watchdog timer which places QAM card in Manual mode if not periodically updated by the DIOB controller. 5/99 3-75 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . during Automatic mode operation. which is used as a logic input in a redundant configuration Jumper selection and deselection of the QAM card options Ability of the QAM card to auctioneer two external power sources (+13 VDC to 26 VDC). Ability to indicate the output demand and setpoint at the M/A station Ability to indicate Automatic or Manual mode selection at the M/A station Ability to indicate the demand’s high or low limit status at the M/A station Ability to input MANUAL/AUTO. POWER OKAY.3-6. and REJECT TO MANUAL status bits to the DIOB controller Ability of the QAM card to produce an ALIVE digital output. supplying this voltage to the M/A station’s lamps Three plug in resistor variable rate clocks On-card Demand and Set Point zero and gain potentiometers A QAM card functional block diagram is shown in Figure 3-37. 4: 4 .180 mA G05.5 VDC G03: 0 to 5 VDC DEMAND 2 G01: 0 . QAM Card Functional Block Diagram 2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C DEMAND UP/DOWN COUNTER DEMAND D/A CONVERTER RIM G02.20 mA G03: 0 . 6 G01: 0 . 4. 6: 0 .5 VDC 3-76 12 12 +10 VDC REF G01 Figure 3-37.10 VDC G02. 3. 2. 6: 10 . QAM M/A INTERFACE 5 CONTROL LOGIC DIGITAL OUTPUTS D I O B 8 12 12 2 DIOB INTERFACE LOGIC SETPOINT UP/DOWN COUNTER SETPOINT D/A CONVERTER SETPOINT G01.10 VDC RIF G02 FIELD INTERFACE G02. 6: 1. 5: 1 .10 VDC G04.M0-0053 DIM INPUTS 12 3-6.50 mA 5/99 . I/D A QAM CARD QAC CARD QAO CARD QAI/V CARDS DEMAND AUX. CONTROL (INFO CENTER REQUIRED) E/P OH I/P CONVERTER INFO CENTER 3-77 PROCESS VARIABLE AND FEEDBACK Figure 3-38./DEC. QAM M0-0053 .5/99 DIOB CONTROLLER DEM M/A STATION SETPOINT INC. QAM Card Systems Application Block Diagram Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C FEEDBACK (4 .20 mA) PROCESS VARIABLE 3-6. 1 VDC M0-0053 3-78 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C DI = DIGITAL INPUT PB = PUSHBUTTON MBU I P 5/99 .4 V to 13. QAM Card Usage Scheme 3-6.3. QAM QAO METERS QCI SP OIM DI’s/PB’s PV BIAS OUT C L QAM QAW BIAS P B S DEMAND (1) PT QAW D E M A N D (E) PROCESS VARIABLE MSL (OR MSQ) Figure 3-39. Specifications Power Requirements Primary Voltage: +12.3-6.1 VDC Backup Voltage: +12.4 V to 13. 06 Typical 0.3-6. QAM Current Specification Group 01. 4.48 A 0. J2 Signal Specifications (Operator Interface) Digital Inputs These signals are typically connected to the operator panel pushbuttons. • • • • • • Voltage Limits: −0. For Group 3 short circuit protection is provided by 1.0 A plug-in fuse.75 A 1.5 A plug-in fuse.5 VDC to +30 VDC VIH (Logic zero voltage): 10 VDC minimum IIH (Logic zero current): 0. The QAM card address is established by seven jumpers on the J2 card-edge connector (Table 3-23). 5. J1 Signal Specifications (DIOB Interface) The QAM occupies the high and low byte of two DIOB addresses.90 A For Groups 1. 04 03 05.0 VDC maximum IIL (Logic one current): −3 mA maximum Delay: 0. 2. 02. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line.1 mA maximum (at 30 VDC) VIL(Logic one voltage): 2.4 A 1. QAM Current: Table 3-22. QAM card short circuit protection is provided by 1.65 A Note Maximum 0.75 msec maximum 5/99 3-79 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and 6.00A 0.0 A plug-in fuse and a 1. 1 mA maximum (e + 30 VDC) VOL(Logic one voltage)*: 1. where the maximum logic 1 voltage is 1. • • • • • Voltage Limits: −0.3-6.1 VDC and the maximum logic 1 current is 50 mA.3 VDC maximum LIL(Logic one current)*: 200 mA maximum LIL(Total)(Logic zero current)*: 450 mA maximum Note These values are true with the exception of the ALIVE signal. QAM Digital Outputs These signals typically drive the operator panel lamps.5 VDC to +30 VDC LIH (Logic zero current): 0. QAM J2 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number (Solder Side) Signal Name Pin Number (Component Side) Signal Name 1A 2A* 3A* 4A* 5A* 6A* 7A* 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A** 16A 17A DIM Input Common LOWER INHIBIT RAISE INHIBIT PRIORITY LOWER PRIORITY RAISE AUX MAN AUX AUTO “CONNECTOR IN PLACE” Jumper System Common IMASHLD IMADEM − IMADEM + System Common ALIVE OUT MA PWRA MA PWRB 1B 2B* 3B* 4B* 5B* 6B* 7B* 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B** 15B** 16B** 17B** SLOT DIM Input Common DECREASE SP INCREASE SP LOWER IN**** RAISE IN*** MAIN IN AUTO IN VMASHLD VMADEM − VMADEM + SPSHLD SETPOINT − SETPOINT + LO LIMIT OUT HI LIMIT OUT MAN OUT AUTO OUT M0-0053 3-80 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Table 3-23. QAM Table 3-23. 03. 11B. 8B. 11A. indicating output demand. and 12B * = These are DIM input signals. ** = These are DIM output signals.3-6. • G01 Span: Load Resistance: Current: Common Mode Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC 2 KΩ minimum 5 mA maximum • + 10 V maximum Accuracy: + 0. *** = This signal is not connected on Group 3. 9B. **** = The signal provides a card reset on Group 3. 06 5/99 3-81 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .1 percent of span Temperature coefficient: 20 ppm of span/˚C G02. 04. Output Demand Indication Signals Voltage This signal drives the operator panel meter or bargraph. 14A. 05. QAM J2 Connector Pin Assignments (Cont’d) Pin Number (Solder Side) Signal Name Pin Number (Component Side) Signal Name 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A Where: DIOB Ground = MA RTN DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground DIOB Ground and System Common = 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B MA PWR Unused Unused ASEL1 (LS) ASEL2 DIOB ASEL3 Address ASEL4 Select ASEL5 Jumpers ASEL6 ASEL7 (MS) Notes The following J2 connector pins are connected together on the QAM card: 10A. QAM Span: Load Resistance: Current: Common Mode Voltage: Accuracy: Temperature coefficient: 1 to 5 VDC.3-6.5 mA maximum + 10 V maximum + 0. M0-0053 3-82 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .25 percent of span 50 ppm of span/˚C Note Accuracy and temperature coefficients determined with respect to the demand output. G03 = 0 to 5 VDC 2 KΩ minimum 2. QAM Current This signal drives current meter on the operator panel via a series diode on the QAM card. • Groups 02. 04:20 Ω maximum.3 VDC 450 mA maximum 0. 06 Span: Load Resistance G03: 4 to 20 mA 0 to 180 mA 10 to 50 mA 2. 05. 0 Ω minimum Common Mode Voltage: + 10 V maximum Accuracy: + 0. 06 Group 02.1 Ω maximum.0%. 0 Ω minimum Load Resistance G02. 0 Ω minimum Load Resistance G02.5 A Plug-in Fuse 5/99 3-83 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . this load may be left open. 04:8 Ω maximum. If desired.3-6.0 VDC to -1.4 VDC to +30 VDC (Input Voltage) + 0. 04. Accuracy and temperature coefficients determined with respect to the demand output. 03.2% of span Temperature coefficient: 50 ppm of span/˚C Note The load resistance is required to ensure compliance of accuracy and temperature specifications. -0. M/A Station Lamp Power • • • • Input Voltage: Output Voltage: Current: Overcurrent Protection: +12. 04 Span: Group 03 Span: Group 05. 05 percent of span Note * The J3 Demand Output can be shorted to common without damage. 02. 03.000 VDC 1. 03.000 mA M0-0053 3-84 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 05) Load Resistance: 0 to 10. 05: Common Mode Voltage: Accuracy: Temperature coefficient: 2.1 percent of span 50 ppm of span/˚C J3 Signal Specifications (Field Interface) Output Demand Voltage (G01) • • • • • • Type: Span: Load Resistance: Current*: Common Mode Voltage: Accuracy: Unipolar Direct Positive (RIM) 0 to 10 VDC 500 Ω’s minimum 20 mA maximum + 10 V maximum + 0. 06 RIF (Unipolar Direct Positive) 0 to 20. QAM Setpoint Indication Signal • • • • • • • • Span (G01.000 to 5.3-6. 06) Span (G04.000 VDC 2 kΩ’s Current (G01.000 mA G03 RIF (Unipolar Direct Positive) 0 to 20. 06): 5 mA maximum Current (G04.000 mA G05. QAM Output Demand Current Parameter Type Span G02. 02.5 mA maximum + 10 V maximum + 0. Output Demand Current Table 3-24. 04 RIF (Unipolar Direct Positive) 0 to 20. 06 0 Ω/400 Ω + 0.05% of span + 10 V maximum + 10 V maximum + 10 V maximum 50 ppm of span/˚C 50 ppm of span/˚C 50 ppm of span/˚C 5/99 3-85 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .) Common Mode Voltage Accuracy Temperature coefficient G02.05% of span G05./Max. QAM Output Demand Current Parameter Load Resistance (Min. QAM Table 3-24. 04 0 Ω/1 KΩ + 0.05% of span G03 0 Ω/111 Ω + 0.3-6. This clock provides full scale output travel (span) times of from 18 to 490 seconds (30 seconds standard). ** These are RIM output signals. Manual Clock 2 This clock is used for the RAISE and LOWER commands. QAM Table 3-25. *** These are RIF output signals. providing linear operation.3-6. providing exponential operation. Clock Timing Manual Clock 1 This clock is used for the PRIORITY RAISE and PRIORITY LOWER commands. The characteristics of this clock are as follows: M0-0053 3-86 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAM J3 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number 1 2 3* 4* 5 6 7* 8* 9 Signal Name Unused VDEM+** VDEM−** VSHLD Unused IDEM+ *** IDEM− *** ISHLD Unused 9 5 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M410 CONNECTOR Notes * These pins are connected to System Common. 0 seconds (0.8 seconds standard). Setpoint Clock This clock is used for SETPOINT INCREASE and SETPOINT DECREASE commands. providing linear operation. 5/99 3-87 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Time (T) is selected by a plug-in resistor and ranges from 0.2 to 2. This clock provides full scale output travel times of 35 to 980 seconds (90 seconds standard). QAM Time Frequency 0 to 1/2 T 1/2 T to 1-1/2 T 1-1/2 T to 2-1/2 T 2-1/2 T to 3-1/2 T 3-1/2 T to 4-1/2 T 4-1/2 T to 5-1/2 T 5-1/2 T to 6-1/2 T 6-1/2 T to Infinite fl/64 fl/32 fl/16 fl/8 fl/4 fl/2 fl 2fl Where the frequency of the Priority Linear Clock is fl (140 Hz standard).3-6. AUTO = 0 A = ALIVE when 1 MSB = Most Significant Bit LSB = Least Significant Bit M0-0053 3-88 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-6. Table 3-27 gives analog values for some of the hex codes of the DIOB data field. These DIOB data hex codes may vary from X’000’ to X’FFF’ Table 3-26. QAM DIOB Data Format Type of Operation Command Word DataDIR UADD0 HI-LO DIOB Data Word UDAT Bits 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write Automatic Demand/ Control 0 0 0 0 1 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 MSB LSB Unused R K Write* Setpoint/ Control 0 0 1 1 1 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 MSB LSB Unused R K Read Automatic Demand/ Control 1 1 0 0 1 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 MSB LSB P M R A Read Setpoint/ Status 1 1 1 1 1 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 MSB LSB P M R A * = Disable by changing field jumper. Where: K= KEEP ALIVE & reset timer when 1 R = REJECT to MANUAL when 1 P = POWER OK when 1 M = MANUAL MODE =1. QAM DIOB Data Format The DIOB data format is shown in Table 3-26. 180.009 mA 49.250 V 2. The Low Byte is received but is not loaded into the appropriate Up/Down counter (Demand or Setpoint) until the corresponding High Byte is also received.000 mA 0. QAM Software Parameters Due to the double DIOB cycle requirements for QAM card applications.001 mA 12.998 V 10.501 V 5.000 V 1.001 mA 20.003 mA 19.000 V 4.005 mA 40. QAM Analog Values versus Hex Codes Demand/ Setpoint 0-10.002 mA 16.001 V 1. during a successive DIOB cycle.011 mA 90.044 mA 22.501 V 4.007 mA 45.505 mA 45.002 mA 30.000 V 2. Table 3-27.000 mA 10.502 V 8.000 mA Demand 0 .990 mA 50.022 mA 135.03 mA 157.000 mA 8.000 mA 10.000 V 1.004 mA 6. 5/99 3-89 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .000 mA 0.000 V 4.010 mA 15.50. it is not necessary to send the High Byte to the QAM within any specific amount of time after sending the Low Byte.996 mA 20.96 mA 180.000 V Setpoint Demand 4 . However.752 V 9.20.000 V 3.000 mA 4. Two DIOB transfers to or from the QAM card must be successive.500 V 2.00 mA HEX 1-5. Note The Low Byte cannot be changed at the Up/Down counter without also sending the High Byte.001 V 4. in order to transfer the required 12-bit data words.54 mA 179.000 V 000 001 200 400 800 C00 E00 FFE FFF 0.003 mA 18. The normal order of DIOB transactions during a write to the QAM is to first write the Low Byte and then write the High Byte.3-6.00 mA Demand or Setpoint Outputs The QAM card must be written to in the proper sequence.001V 7.442 mV 1. care must be taken in programming the DIOB controller.999 V 5.000 mA Demand 10. during successive DIOB cycles. This type of programming would prevent manual manipulation of the output demand. as in the case of a write.3-6. The appropriate up/down counter (Demand or Setpoint) is prevented from counting during and following each Low Byte read until a subsequent DIOB operation. there can be a delay between reading the Low and High Bytes. Note The DIOB controller should not be programmed for continuous QAM Low Byte reads of the demand with the Watchdog timer disabled and no other DIOB activity. Again. providing these writes occur within the selected Watchdog time-out period. the QAM card’s Reject to Manual latch may be reset by the QAM RESET signal. the REJECT TO MANUAL bit of this byte is latched and held on the QAM card. this bit remains set. the Low Byte’s KEEP ALIVE bit is not latched and held. The latched state of this bit is maintained by the QAM card until the next Low Byte is written. Demand or Setpoint Inputs The QAM card must be read in the same sequence as it was written (Low Byte read first and High Byte read second). causing a continuous manual reject. other than another Low Byte read. M0-0053 3-90 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Therefore. QAM Each time the Low Byte is written to the QAM card. has taken place or a Watchdog time-out occurs. As a result. A 1 state of the KEEP ALIVE bit on each Low byte write keeps the QAM “alive”. until reset by a subsequent Low Byte write. Unlike the REJECT TO MANUAL bit. Additionally. it is not necessary to alternate this bit between 1 and 0 on successive Low byte writes. 3-6. 5/99 3-91 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .4. QAM 3-6. the QAM card increases or decreases the demand output on the RAISE or LOWER signals from the M/A station. Manual Mode In the Manual mode. The output of the QAM card’s setpoint counter/register logic is in turn provided as an input to the DIOB controller. Additionally. These commands reject the card to Manual mode and override the normal directional commands. Controls and Indicators DIOB Backplane Connector To E/P or I/P J3 J1 Power OK Manual Alive LED’s J2 Card EDGE Connector or M/A Station Figure 3-40. QAM Card Connections Automatic Mode In the Automatic mode. Commands to RAISE or LOWER the demand may also be executed by using the PRIORITY RAISE and LOWER inputs. Exponential changes in these demands are produced by a variable rate clock circuit. the QAM card provides a voltage output which tracks the 12-bit setpoint signal output from the DIOB controller. providing a constant rate of change in the demand output. which produce a constant rate of change in the setpoint signal. which tracks the 12-bit demand signal output of the DIOB controller.375 percent of span in one or both directions by using the RAISE or LOWER INHIBIT commands. while in the Automatic mode. A linear clock is provided for these options. the QAM card provides either a voltage or a current demand output. The operator can alter this signal via INCREASE or DECREASE SETPOINT commands. The operator or external device can prevent the output demand signal from changing more than 0. Table 3-28. QAM The DIOB controller can monitor the output demand when the manual mode is selected because the 12-bit demand counter/register is an input to the DIOB controller. 5.3-6. QAM Manual Mode Demand Operations (G03) Priority Lower Priority Raise Lower Raise Action Clock Rate Manual Reject Jumpers 0 0 1 1 1 X 0 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 X HOLD RAISE LOWER HOLD LOWER Reset Card: Setpoint = 0 – LINEAR LINEAR – LINEAR No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care J Installed H Removed Where: 0 = Inactive Signal 1 = Active Signal Table 3-29. 2. The demand operation variations for the Manual mode are given in Table 3-28 and Table 3-29. 4. 6) Priority Priority Lower Raise Lower Raise Action Clock Rate Manual Reject Jumpers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 HOLD RAISE LOWER HOLD LOWER RAISE RAISE RAISE RAISE – EXPONENTIAL EXPONENTIAL – EXPONENTIAL LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR No Yes* Yes* No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care G Installed G Removed Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care M0-0053 3-92 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAM Manual Mode Demand Operations (G01. This enables a bumpless transfer when the QAM card is switched from Manual or Automatic mode. 4. timeout 125 msec. QAM Manual Mode Demand Operations (G01. QAM Watchdog Timer Switch Settings Switch Segments Update Period Times D 0 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 1 1 A 0 1 0 1 62 msec. 6) (Cont’d) Priority Priority Lower Raise Lower Raise Action Clock Rate Manual Reject Jumpers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 LOWER LOWER LOWER LOWER HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD LOWER LOWER LOWER LOWER LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR – – – – LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care Don’t Care H Installed H Installed H Installed H Installed H Removed H Removed H Removed H Removed Where: 0 = Inactive Signal 1 = Active Signal * Manual Reject only if jumper F is installed. timeout 5/99 3-93 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . otherwise no manual reject occurs. QAM Table 3-29. The available update period times for the 4-bit Watchdog Timer switch settings are shown in Table 3-30. Watchdog Timer The QAM card must be periodically updated via the keep-alive bit (DIOB controller) to maintain selection of the Automatic mode. Table 3-30. If this card is not updated before a timeout of the selected watchdog time. 5. the card automatically reverts to the Manual mode. 2. timeout 250 msec. timeout 500 msec. The period within which the QAM card must be updated is selected by a 4-bit DIP switch on the QAM card.3-6. With a Group 03 card. QAM Table 3-30. Because the UNIT signal is not connected on a Group 03 card. This reset causes the card to enter the Manual Mode. A RESET causes the card to enter Manual Mode and the setpoint is defined as 00016. the LOWER signal from the M/A station will reset and provide a zero setpoint within 5 msec of activating the lower signal. a reset has no effect on the UNIT signal. however. M0-0053 3-94 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-6. All times have tolerance of +20 percent. the demand will be set to 00016 whenever the +13 VDC input voltage drops somewhat below the +9VDC level. The demand and Manual Mode operations will not be affected by the UNIT signal. timeout 4 sec. timeout 8 sec. QAM Reset The QAM card will reset under either of the two following conditions: • • When the +13 VDC input supply voltage drops below +9 VDC When the DIOB’s UNIT control is active. timeout 2 sec. QAM Watchdog Timer Switch Settings Switch Segments Update Period Times D 0 0 0 0 1 C 1 1 1 1 X B 0 0 1 1 X A 0 1 0 1 X 1 sec. timeout no timeout Where: 0 = Open switch segment 1 = Closed switch segment X = Either open or closed. goes off when timer’s timeout period expires. QAM Card Components LED Indicators The QAM card has three front edge LED’s which indicate: PWR OK MANUAL ALIVE – lights when proper DIOB power is applied to card – lights when QAM card is in Manual mode. Plug-In Resistors The QAM card contains four plug-in resistors which determine the timing for the QAM clocks and timer. • • RW – Watchdog Timeout Period – value selected to control the range of the DIP switch selected Watchdog Timeout periods. Each of these resistors is listed below. 5/99 3-95 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . – lights when Watchdog Timer is in timeout period. RL – Linear Clock Frequency – value selected to determine the linear clock frequency for demand operations (priority raise and lower).3-6. DEM Zero Pot. SP Zero Pot PWR OK MANUAL ALIVE DIP Switch Speed Selection Jumpers EFGHJK RS RW SP Gain Pot RE RL Figure 3-41. QAM Figure 3-41 illustrates the card components. Refer to Table 3-31 for suggested resistor values and corresponding clock rates. LEDs DEM Gain Pot. off during Automatic mode operation. indicating that DIOB controller has failed to update the KEEP ALIVE bit within selected period. 0 seconds M0-0053 3-96 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5 Hz 1. QAM RE Selection of Demand Exponential Clock Frequency Sweep Rates RE Values Clock Period Time Selected Frequency Frequency Sweep Period 100 kΩ 200 kΩ* 365 kΩ* 750 kΩ * Standard Value 0. Refer to Table 3-33 for suggested resistor values and corresponding clock rates.5 seconds 2.4 seconds 13. Table 3-31. RS – Setpoint Clock Frequency – value selected to determine the linear clock frequency for setpoint operations (setpoint increase or decrease). QAM RL Selected or Demand Linear Clock Frequency RL Values Selected Frequency Full Scale Ramp Change/Minute 2 kΩ 5 kΩ* 10 kΩ 20 kΩ 50 kΩ 100 kΩ 200 kΩ * Standard Value 230 Hz 135 Hz 90 Hz 60 Hz 30 Hz 16 Hz 8.45 seconds 0.2 Hz 0.5 Hz 18 seconds 30 seconds 45 seconds 70 seconds 140 seconds 260 seconds 490 seconds 340 percent 200 percent 135 percent 85 percent 43 percent 23 percent 12 percent Table 3-32.0 seconds 4. Refer to Table 3-32 for suggested resistor values and corresponding clock rates.2 Hz 1. QAM • • RE – Exponential Clock Frequency – value selected to determine the exponential clock frequency for demand operations (normal raise and lower).83 seconds 2.23 seconds 0.9 seconds 5.3-6.4 Hz 2. An option is selected when its corresponding jumper is inserted. QAM Table 3-33. Simultaneous RAISE IN and PRIORITY LOWER signals cause the output to hold instead of lower. QAM RS Selection of Setpoint Linear Clock Frequency RS Values Selected Frequency Full Scale Ramp Change/Minute 2 kΩ 5 kΩ 10 kΩ* 20 kΩ 50 kΩ 100 kΩ 200 kΩ * Standard Value 115 Hz 68 Hz 45 Hz 30 Hz 15 Hz 8 Hz 4. Activation of the LOWER will always cause a card reset. The RAISE IN or LOWER IN inputs switch card to Manual mode. The DIOB controller may set the 12-bit setpoint word. Table 3-34 lists the selected options of each jumper. QAM Jumper Selection of Options Jumper Selected Option E F* The REJECT TO MANUAL bit from the DIOB controller switches the card to Manual mode. Note Simultaneous RAISE IN or LOWER IN signals do not switch card to Manual mode unless jumper G is removed. Table 3-34. Simultaneous RAISE IN or LOWER IN signals cause output to hold instead of lower. G* H J K * On Group 03 cards.3 Hz 35 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds 140 seconds 280 seconds 515 seconds 980 seconds 170 percent 100 percent 67 percent 43 percent 21 percent 12 percent 6 percent Plug-In Jumpers The QAM card contains six plug-in jumpers for option selections. Absence of the cable to the MA station does not reject the card to Manual mode. 5/99 3-97 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-6. jumpers F and G have no effect. Table 3-36 lists each pot and its related adjustment. on each for the demand and setpoint gain adjustments (D/A converter). QAM Test Points The QAM card contains thirteen test points (TP1 through TP13) for monitoring QAM card option.3-6. M0-0053 3-98 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and one each for the demand and setpoint zero adjustments. QAM Test Points Test Point TP1 G01 – OUTPUT DEMAND Frequency G02 to 06 – V/I Converter Input Voltage TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 G02 to 06 – V/I Output Voltage SETPOINT System Common M/A OUTPUT DEMAND VREF (+10 VDC) DIOB Ground CLEAR + 12 VDC + 15 VDC + 15 VDC + 15 VA − 15 VA Potentiometers The QAM card contains four potentiometers (pots). Table 3-35 lists these test points. Table 3-35. 5/99 3-99 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Table 3-30 lists the switch settings and the timeout periods. QAM Potentiometer Adjustments Pot DEM ZERO (M128-1) DEM GAIN (H61-1) SP ZERO (M128-2) SP GAIN (H61-2) DIP Switch Adjustment Adjusted to zero the Demand D/A Converter logic. for a demand count of XFFF (see Table 3-24). for a setpoint count of X000 (see Table 3-24). QAM Table 3-36. for a setpoint count of XFA0 (see Table 3-24). The range of switch selected times is determined by plug-in resistor RW.3-6. Adjusted to set the amount of span for the Demand D/A Converter logic’s analog output. The QAM card contains a four segment DIP switch which is used to select Watchdog timeout periods. Adjusted to set the amount of span for the Setpoint D/A Converter logic’s analog output. for a demand of X000 (see Table 3-24). Adjusted to zero the Setpoint D/A Converter logic. 3-7. QAO 3-7. QAO Analog Output (Style 2840A21G01 through G08) 3-7.1. Description Groups 01 through 08 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAO card accepts four 12-bit digital signals via the DIOB and individually converts the data to analog field outputs. Each two-wire output (plus shield) has an isolated, digital-to-analog (D/A) converter. Several output ranges are provided for unipolar or bipolar voltage outputs (see Figure 3-42). The QAO interfaces to the DIOB through a rear-edge connector. The DIOB signals at this interface are defined by DIOB standards. The analog outputs are brought out to the front edge of the card. Address Data Bus Control and 4 X 12 Bit Memory Multiplexer with Optical Isolation DAC DAC DAC DAC Output Drivers (VDC or mA) Output Drivers (VDC or mA) Output Drivers (VDC or mA) Output Drivers (VDC or mA) To Field Process Figure 3-42. QAO Block Diagram M0-0053 3-100 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO Digital data from the DIOB is fed to a 4-word by 12-bit memory. The data is periodically multiplexed to the appropriate point register and presented to the D/A converter. The resultant analog value is buffered and provided at the card edge for transmission to the field process. There are four points available on the QAO Card. Each point is a three-wire output comprised of negative, positive, and shield connections. The shield is tied to the negative side of the outputs. Each D/A converter (point) converts a 12-bit digital number to a current or voltage field output. These outputs may be unipolar or bipolar. Eight QAO groups are available. • • • • • • • • G01 provides four, 0 to 20.475 mA current outputs. A 40 VDC supply voltage is supplied by the QAO Card. G02 provides four, 0 to 10.2375 VDC analog outputs. G03 provides four analog outputs with a range of −10.24 to +10.235 VDC. G04 provides four analog outputs with a range of 0 to 5.1187 VDC. G05 provides four analog outputs with a range of −5.12 to +5.1175. G06 provides one analog output with a range of −10.24 to +10.235 VDC. G07 provides four, 0 to 20.475 mA current outputs. An external 40 VDC supply is required. G08 provides one analog output with a range of −10.24 to +10.235 VDC with a high-speed update. The QAO Card is a self-contained, analog-output card. Analog output subsystems consist of one or more QAO Cards and one Bus Controller; no other cards are required to perform the analog output functions. The subsystem may be expanded in increments of four points by adding QAO Cards (48 QAO Cards maximum per DIOB controller). The QAO Card complies with DIOB interface design specifications and may be used in a Q-crate assembly. Functional block diagrams of the QAO are shown in Figure 3-43 and Figure 3-45. Point block diagrams are shown in Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-46. 5/99 3-101 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO Block Diagrams DIOB Read Chopper Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Data 12 X 4 Memory MultiPlexer Serial Data (Same to all four points) Read Control Write Drive Clear Control Strobe Address Point 1 (Clear, Strobe) Comparator Point 2 (Clear, Strobe) Point 3 (Clear, Strobe) Clock (Same to all four points) Front Connector Jumper Address Point 0 Figure 3-43. QAO Card Functional Block Diagram, 5-Level M0-0053 3-102 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO Clear Jumper To Invert Msb of Bipolar Data Groups + Strobe Jumper Range Select V/I Converter (G01 and G07 Only) MSB Optical Isolation Shift Register D/A Converter −40 VDC G01 G07 + Current − Shield 12 Latch 11 Clock Analog Offset of 1/2 Span for Bipolar Output Serial Data + Voltage − Shield Buffer (Voltage Output Groups Only) Process Output Power Supply − 40 VDC (G01 Only) + 15 VDC + 5 VDC Figure 3-44. QAO Point Block Diagram, 5- Level 5/99 3-103 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO DIOB Osc. Driver 0 Read Point 0 Driver 1 Drive Point 1 Driver 2 Point 2 Data Driver 3 Point 3 12 X 4 Memory Bits 0 - 10 MSB (Bit 11) Multiplexer Serial Data (Same to all four points) + Multiplexer Ch 3 Ch 0 Read Write Remove to invert MSB of bipolar data Latch Clear Ch 1 Ch 2 Control Clear Point 0 Strobe Address Comparator Point 1 (Clear, Strobe) Control Point 2 (Clear, Strobe) Point 3 (Clear, Strobe) Clock (Same to all four points) Front Connector Jumper Address Figure 3-45. QAO Card Functional Block Diagram, 6-Level and Later M0-0053 3-104 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO 15V Clear 10V Ref + Voltage Output Range Select Resistor -10V Current Output λ Strobe Light Bulb (Overload Protection) λ DA Converter Gain Adj. + Buffer +10 -10 Offset Adj. Voltage Output + shield Clock λ λ Serial Data Offset Adj. +10 -10 Current Output G01 Power Supply + shield φ -40 (G01 Only) ±15V +5V - 40 V G07 Process Output Surge Protected Figure 3-46. QAO Point Block Diagram, 6-Level 3-7.2. Specifications Output Capabilities G01: G02: G03: G04: G05: G06: G07: G08: 0 to 20.475 mA (internal supply) 0 to +10.2375 VDC −10.24 to +10.235 VDC 0 to +5.1187 VDC −5.12 to +5.1175 VDC −10.24 + 10.235 VDC (single channel) 0 to 20.475 mA (external supply) −10.24 + 10.235 VDC (single channel, high speed update) 5/99 3-105 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO Output Loading • • Throughput Current Outputs (G01, 7): 0 to 1KΩ resistance Voltage Outputs (G02, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8): 0 to 20 mA Output Current with 500Ω minimum load resistance, short circuit protected. • • G01 through G07: 1.4 to 7.4 msec digital delay G08: 0.5 to 1.2 msec digital delay Note G08 should not be written to again for 1.5 msec. Resolution 12-bit resolution (including polarity in bipolar group) Reference Accuracy (including polarity in bipolar groups) +0.05 percent of SPAN (SPAN = 20.475 mA for G01, 10.2375 VDC for G02, 20.475 VDC for G03, etc.) Temperature Coefficient • • Power Supply 40 ppm RMS of Span/°C for Voltage Outputs 50 ppm RMS of Span/°C for Current Outputs • • • Primary: +12.4 VDC minimum, +13.0 VDC nominal, +13.1 VDC maximum Backup: 12.4 VDC minimum, 13.1 VDC maximum Current: 1.3 A maximum Electrical Environment IEEE surge withstand capability (except G08) M0-0053 3-106 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO Common Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or peak AC (line frequency) Data Output The analog outputs result from DIOB digital data which is presented to the D/A converters. The output values and output codes are listed below for each group. G01 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 000X 001X 010X 320X 400X 800X C00X FFEX FFFX X = Any digit Output Value See Note See Note 80 µA 4.000 mA 5.120 mA 10.240 mA 15.360 mA 20.470 mA 20.475 mA Note Accuracy specifications do not apply below 4 mA. Do not operate below 80µA. G02 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 000X 001X 400X 800X C00X FFEX FFFX X = Any digit Output Value 0 VDC +2.50 mV +2.5600 VDC +5.1200 VDC +7.6800 VDC +10.2350 VDC +10.2375 VDC 5/99 3-107 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO G03 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 800X C00X FFFX 000X 001X 400X 7FFX X = Any digit Output Value −10.2400 VDC −5.1200 VDC -0.00500 VDC 0.0000 VDC +0.0050 VDC +5.1200 VDC +10.2350 VDC G04 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 000X 001X 400X 800X C00X FFEX FFFX X = Any digit Output Value 0 VDC +1.2500 mV +1.2800 VDC +2.5600 VDC +3.8400 VDC +5.1175 VDC +5.1187 VDC G05 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 800X C00X FFFX 000X 001X 400X 7FFX X = Any digit Output Value −5.1200 VDC −2.5600 VDC −0.0025 VDC 0.0000 VDC +0.0025 VDC +2.5600 VDC +5.1175 VDC M0-0053 3-108 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO G06 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 800X C00X FFFX 000X 001X 400X 7FFX X = Any digit Output Value −10.2400 VDC −5.1200 VDC −0.0050 VDC 0.0000 VDC +0.0050 VDC +5.1200 VDC +10.2350 VDC G07 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 000X 001X 010X 320X 400X 800X C00X FFEX FFFX X = any digit Output Value See Note See Note 80 µA 4.000 mA 5.120 mA 10.240 mA 15.360 mA 20.470 mA 20.475 mA Note Accuracy specifications do not apply below 4 mA. Do not operate below 80µA. 5/99 3-109 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO G08 Input Data (Data received from Controller WRITE to QAO) 800X C00X FFFX 000X 001X 400X 7FFX X = Any digit Output Value −10.2400 VDC −5.1200 VDC −0.0050 VDC 0.0000 VDC +0.0050 VDC +5.1200 VDC +10.2350 VDC Figure 3-47 shows the output value curves. The input data codes are plotted against the output voltage. This graph applies to bipolar voltage groups (G03, G05, G06 and G08). Figure 3-48 shows the output value curves for unipolar current groups (G01 and G07). The input data codes are plotted against output current. Figure 3-49 shows the output value curves for unipolar voltage groups (G02 and G04). The input data codes are plotted against output voltage. M0-0053 3-110 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-7. QAO Hexadecimal Value (Two’s Complement) FFF 1000 E00 C18 C00 A00 830 800 800 7D0 7FF 600 400 3E8 200 −10.240 V −5.120 V G03, G06 G05, G08 −10 −5 −8 −4 −6 −3 −4 −2 −2 −1 0 0 +2 +1 +4 +2 +6 +3 +8 +4 +10 +10.235 +5 +5.127 Bipolar Voltage (V) Figure 3-47. QAO Bipolar Output Voltage Curves 5/99 3-111 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-7. QAO Hexadecimal Value (Binary) FFF E00 FAO C00 A00 960 800 600 400 320 200 000 G01, G07 0 4 8 12 16 20 20.475 Unipolar Current (mA) NOTE Accuracy Specifications Do Not Apply in Shaded Area Figure 3-48. QAO Unipolar Output Current Curves M0-0053 3-112 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 Card Addressing Address Jumpers The QAO card address is established by six jumpers on the top. QAO Unipolar Output Voltage Curves 3-7.3-7. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line.2375 5. 5/99 3-113 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The update period is set by four dual-in-line (DIP) switches as given in Table 3-37. QAO Hexadecimal Value (Binary) FFF E00 FAO C00 A00 800 7D0 600 400 200 000 G02 G04 0 0 2 1 4 2 6 3 8 4 10 5 10. card-edge connector. 3-7. front. Controls and Indicators If the QAO Card is not periodically updated. the card resets. The QAO Card components are shown in Figure 3-50.1187 Figure 3-49.4.3. QAO Power LED Update Period Switch Figure 3-50. QAO Card Components M0-0053 3-114 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-7. 3-7. QAO Analog Output Contact Allocations Point Point 0 Pin Out 5A – (+ output) 3A – (− output) 3B – (shield) 9A – (+ output) 7A – (− output) 7B – (shield) 13A – (+ output) 11A – (− output) 11B – (shield) 17A – (+ output) 15A – (− output) 15B – (shield) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 5/99 3-115 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Field Connections The analog outputs are brought out to the front edge of the card. Table 3-38.5. data latched (X = 0 or 1) 3-7. and use the same pinouts for all groups. The contact allocations are shown in Table 3-38. QAO Table 3-37. The QAO outputs are three wire bundles. QAO Card Reset Switch Position (Update Period) Dip Switch A B C D Reset Time 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 62 ms + 20 percent 125 ms + 20 percent 250 ms + 20 percent 500 ms + 20 percent 1 sec + 20 percent 2 sec + 20 percent 4 sec + 20 percent 8 sec + 20 percent No time out. 6. QAO 3-7.3-7. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 3 TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW CARD 19B 19A 17B (+) POINT 3 (S) (−) 17A 15B 15A 13B (+) POINT 2 (S) (−) 13A 11B 11A 9B (+) POINT 1 (S) (−) 9A 7B 7A 5B (+) POINT 0 (S) (−) 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 0 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 1 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 2 (+) (SHIELD) (−) POINT 3 EDGE CONNECTOR CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-51. QAO Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-116 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAO CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 & 7) 5/99 3-117 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-7. QAO For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 3 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 3 (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 2 (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 1 (-) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 0 EDGE-CONNECTOR Note QAO groups 1 and 7 must have the shield and return connected together and to earth ground at the B cabinet as shown. Figure 3-52. Figure 3-53. QAO CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 through 6. & 8) M0-0053 3-118 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAO For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 3 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 3 (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 2 (−) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 1 (-) (SHIELD) (+) POINT 0 EDGE-CONNECTOR Note QAO Groups 2 through 6 and Group 8 may have the shield and return connected together and to earth ground in the field or at the B cabinet.3-7. . QAV 3-8. DIOB Data Address Control Data Buffer RAM Address Decoder µC.. . QAV Block Diagram 5/99 3-119 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 ...1. Description Groups 01through G09 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAV card converts an analog field signal to digital data (see Figure 3-54)... The digital data is the summation of a frequency that has been counted for a time period. QAV Analog Input Point (Syle 7379A21G01 through G09) 3-8.. Counter and Control Circuits Transformer Isolation . a QAX card is recommended). The time period is a multiple of the power line frequency (50 or 60 Hz).3-8. Transformer Isolation Channel 1 Voltage to Frequency Converter Channel 6 Voltage to Frequency Converter (+) (-) SHD (+) (-) SHD Six Sets of Analog Field Inputs Figure 3-54. (For new applications. The gain correction factor is compared to a 16-bit calibration constant which is programmed into the memory of the system controller at the time of factory card calibration. and so on). Cards equipped with the thermocouple temperature compensation feature use channel 6 for the on-card temperature sensor. This method yields a trimmer (or pot) -less calibrating method. The on-card temperature sensor eliminates the need for external sensor boards. which is used to determine the offset correction factor. The second calibrating potential (gain) is derived from a separate. The channel is read every time the card performs an auto-calibration cycle. stable voltage reference which is set approximately −150% of the maximum expected analog input value. Figure 3-55 shows a typical control system configuration using QAV cards. The frequency of the offset and gain calibration cycle is determined by a constant which has been programmed into the memory of the system controller. Offset and gain correction factors are calculated on a periodic basis by the QAV card microcomputer. One standard is a 0 VDC (shorted input). biasing. auto-zero and gain correction. The output of each input circuit is processed by a common microcomputer and the resulting digital data is multiplexed to the Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB) as a 13-bit word. M0-0053 3-120 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The QTB card is necessary for applications where large variations of power line frequency exist to obtain a high normal mode rejection. Each analog input circuit contains circuitry for signal conditioning. open thermocouple detection (not available on G04 and G05 QAV cards) and a clocked voltage-to-frequency converter. and ensures field temperature accuracy. Up to 30 QAV cards (180 channels) can be used with one DIOB controller.3-8. QAV Each QAV card contains six individually isolated voltage-to-frequency converter circuits (channels). The QAV card uses an electrical isolation circuit (transformer) to separate the analog input from the digital counting circuits. The calibration constant is necessary because the QAV card has no mechanical adjusting devices (such as potentiometers. Two known potentials on the analog section of the QAV card are used as standards for offset and gain calibrations. The isolation circuit provides power for each analog input channel in addition to precise timing from a stable frequency which is generated on the digital side of the QAV card circuits. The QAV microcomputer is reset at this time and conversion of data is begun when the reset control is removed and the QAV card buffer memory is updated. The length of the warm-up pause is determined by a programmed constant in the memory of the system controller. QAV Typical Control System Using QAV Cards The QAV card microcomputer is programmed to “limit check” (reasonability check) the offset correction factor for each analog input channel. Note The two-channel failure feature is available on QAV cards at levels 1QAV through 4QAV.3-8. Failure of the reasonability check causes bit 14 (offset over-range) of the output data for that channel to be set to a logical zero. QAV DIOB CONTROLLER QTB POWER LINE INPUT DIOB QAV #1 FIELD INPUTS QAV #30 FIELD INPUTS Figure 3-55. Bit 15 is also set to zero during the power-up routine of the QAV card. Bit 15 is reset to a logical 1 after a warm-up pause is completed. 5/99 3-121 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . A failure on two or more channels causes bit 15 (IMOK bit) of the output data to be set to a logical zero which indicates card trouble to the system controller. 2Reduced reference accuracy is +0. G03 and G091: −25 to +100 mVDC (−100 to +100 mVDC at reduced accuracy2).3-8. G02 and G081: −12.20 percent of the upper range value (+10 µV. G04: −12. 1 KΩ maximum source impedance. order groups 7-9 in place of groups 1-3 respectively. 1Level 8 QAV and later artwork support groups 1-3 without “On-Card” thermocouple compensation. Groups 7-9 are identical to Level 6 QAV groups 1-3 with “On-Card” thermocouple compensation.5 to +50 mVDC (−50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2). If “OnCard” thermocouple compensation is required.5 to +50 mVDC (−50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2). 500 Ω maximum source impedance (G04 is not available with the Open Thermocouple Detection feature). QAV • • • • • • G01 and G07 1: −5 to +20 mVDC (−20 to +20 mVDC at reduced accuracy 2). +1/2 LSB at 99.5 to +50 mVDC (−50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2). 1 KΩ maximum source impedance. 1 KΩ maximum source impedance (G05 is not available with the Open Thermocouple Detection feature). 500 Ω maximum source impedance. 500 Ω maximum source impedance. G05: −25 to +100 mVDC (−100 to +100 mVDC at reduced accuracy2). G06: −12.7 percent confidence. M0-0053 3-122 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-8. Features Each QAV card has the following features: • • • • • • • • • • • IEEE surge withstand capability Auto zero.2.) Common mode rejection Normal mode rejection Automatic reasonability test (shorted input) Auto-conversion check Jumper selectable 50/60 Hz operation On-card thermocouple temperature compensation (Available on QAV cards at level 6 QAV) The QAV card is designed to be mounted in a standard Q-line card cage. QAV 3-8. 5/99 3-123 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . auto gain correction Electrical isolation on all channels On-card digital memory (buffer) Open thermocouple detection (This feature is not available on G04 and G05 QAV cards. which connects to field terminals. Connection to the control system is made by a 34-pin rear-edge backplane connector which interfaces the UIOB or DIOB and a 56-pin front-edge connector. QAV Analog Input Circuits Block Diagram M0-0053 3-124 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C - - - - 5/99 . QAV Block Diagram A block diagram of one of the six analog sections of the QAV card is shown in Figure 3-56. Figure 3-58 shows a flow diagram of the QAV card analog-to-digital conversion process.3-8. Figure 3-57 shows a block diagram of the QAV digital circuits. ANALOG INPUT (VIN) + − LOW PASS FILTER CLAMP VBIAS R1 R2 R3 R4 PREAMPLIFIER I1 C1 - VIN (MULTI PLEXER SOLID STATE SWITCH) SH VOLTAGE REFERENCE VREF +12V (−) - −12V (+) INTEGRATOR POWER SUPPLY MULTIPLEXER CONTROLLER - - SYNCHRONOUS COMPARATOR CLOCK +12V X1 - I REF - CAPACITOR DISCHARGE D1 1 T1 PSD (250 KHZ) FREQUENCY INPUT (FI1-FI6) - R5 C2 - - - - Figure 3-56. QAV ADDRESS JUMPERS PSD POWER SUPPLY DRIVE-250 KHZ ANALOG POWER CONTROL CL P15 RAM LOAD ENABLE TADD0-2 HI-LO AOK ADDRESS DECODER UADD0-7 DATA-DIR USYNC HI-LO DATA GATE UDAT0-7 DEV BUSY DOUT I/O TUSYNC P24 to P27 MICROCOMPUTER CL WR SS BUFFER RAM LOAD CONTROLLER P13 LEVEL SHIFT AND BUFFER RD0-7 BUFFER RAM ADDRESS BUS (DB0-7) LEN WD0-7 PSEN P20 PROGRAM MEMORY ADDRESS LATCH CONTROL ADDRESS BUFFER LATCH D I O B I/O A0 A1 P10-12 P14 TRESET +5V COUNTERS (6) POWER UP AND RESET 5 VOLT REGULATOR +12V (FI1-FI6) Figure 3-57. QAV Card Digital Circuits Block Diagram 5/99 3-125 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-8. QAV RESET TEST WARM-UP CTR SET “IMOK” TEST CALIBRATION CTR READ OFFSET (COS) READ* INPUT (CX) READ REF (COS) (CX − COS) [COS − CREF] LIMIT OVERRANGE RESET CALIBRATION (COUNTER) A(CX − COS) INITIALIZE COS OFFSET CONVERSI ON = VBIAS CONVERSI ON DATA TEST REASONABILITY SET FLAG(S)S OUTPUT TO BUFF RAM CALCULATE SLOPE (A) *TIME BASE CORRECTION Figure 3-58. QAV Analog-to-Digital Conversion Process Flowchart 3-8.3. Specifications Inputs Point Sampling Rate (samples/second): M0-0053 3-126 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-8. 5 percent without QTB card 30 dB at 50 Hz +5 percent or 60 Hz +5 percent without QTB card line frequency tracking Note The input (peak-to-peak) AC voltage must not exceed 100 percent of the upper range value for specified accuracy and normal mode rejection.24 seconds at a power line frequency of 50 Hz Normal Mode Voltage • • Surge: Meets IEEE/SWC test specifications without damage. auto gain and auto zero calibration are performed. and 9.2 seconds for both 50 or 60 Hz operation. a sustained overrange can affect subsequent data for several minutes following the removal of the overrange voltage.4 at a power line frequency of 50 Hz Note Once every 32 conversion.3-8. 8 seconds apart in 60 Hz systems.20 seconds at a power line frequency of 60 Hz 0.4 seconds apart in 50 Hz systems. 5/99 3-127 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . after the removal of the surge. Normal Mode Rejection • • 60 dB at 50 or 60 Hz using QTB card line frequency tracking or at 50 or 60 Hz +0. Resolution: 13-bits (includes polarity bit) Input Channel Sample Period: • • 0. The sampling rate is 4 per second and the sample period is 0. • • 4 at a power line frequency of 60 Hz 3. and up to 10 secs. however. Continuous: An overrange of +120 VDC or 120 VAC rms at 50 or 60 Hz will not damage the input channels. QAV Note QAV cards with prefixes of 5 or greater are selected for 50 or 60 Hz operation by jumper. however. the accuracy of data is reduced during. Input Impedance • • • • Drift 107 Ω/Volt 103 Ω in overload Reference Accuracy (per SAMA Standard PMC 20) +0. 50 percent +2 percent of relative humidity.10 percent of the upper range value (+10 µV). 0 V normal mode • • 0. 0 V common mode.3-8.7 percent confidence. the accuracy of data is reduced during. +1/2 of the Least Significant Bit (LSB) at 99. Reference Conditions: 25°C + 1°C Ambient Temperature. Continuous: A maximum of +500 VDC or peak AC can be applied without damage.5 percent without QTB card 100 dB for nominal line frequency at +5 percent and harmonics without QTB card line frequency tracking Note Common mode rejection does not apply if the peak AC value exceeds 200.000 % of upper range value. QAV Common Mode Voltage • • Surge: Meets IEEE/SWC test specifications without damage. however.02 percent long term (typical) M0-0053 3-128 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and up to 10 seconds following the removal of the surge. Common Mode Rejection • • 120 dB at DC and power line frequency and its harmonics with QTB card line frequency tracking or at 50 or 60 Hz +0.002 percent per month (typical) 0. The DIOB address and DIOB address protection jumpers are also located in this connector. QAV Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage: Optional Backup: 12.3-8.7 Watts Input Signal Requirements • • • • • • G01 and G07 1cards: −5 to +20 mVDC.20 percent of the upper range value (+10 µV.1 VDC 13. 5/99 3-129 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .5 to +50 mVDC.4 VDC Nominal + 13.7 percent confidence. −50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 Field signals are input to a standard Q series front-edge connector (see Figure 3-59).2 ADC 15. −100 to +100 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 G06 cards: −12. 1Level 8 QAV and later artwork support groups 1-3 without “On-Card” thermocouple compensation.4 VDC 12.0 VDC -Maximum 13. +1/2 LSB at 99.1 VDC Nominal Power Supply Current: Power Used: 1.5 to +50 mVDC.0 Watts Maximum 1. −50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 G05 cards: −25 to +100 mVDC.5 to +50 mVDC. Groups 7-9 are identical to Level 6 QAV groups 1-3 with “On-Card” thermocouple compensation. minus and shield pin. −20 to +20 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 G02 and G081 cards: −12. Each field signal input requires a plus. −100 to +100 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 G04 cards: −12.0 ADC 13. order groups 7-9 in place of groups 1-3 respectively 2Reduced reference accuracy is +0. −50 to +50 mVDC at reduced accuracy2 G03 and G091 cards: −25 to +100 mVDC. If “OnCard” thermocouple compensation is required. QAV Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments Output Signal Requirements Output signal requirements are specified for DIOB requirements. M0-0053 3-130 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . DIOB connection is made to the QAV card through the Q-card backplane connector to connector pins located on the rear-edge of the card (see Figure 3-60).3-8. QAV SOLDER SIDE UNUSED UNUSED POINT 0 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 1 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 1 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 2 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 3 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 3 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 4 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 5 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 5 + INPUT DIOB ADDRESS PROTECTION GROUND UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED ADDRESS LINE A3 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A4 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A5 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A6 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A7 GROUND 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A COMPONENT SIDE 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B POINT 0 – INPUT SIGNAL UNUSED POINT 0 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 1 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 2 – INPUT UNUSED POINT 2 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 3 SHIELD UNUSED POINT4 – INPUT UNUSED POINT 4 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 5 SHIELD UNUSED UNUSED DIOB ADDRESS PROTECTION UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED ADDRESS LINE A3 ADDRESS LINE A4 ADDRESS LINE A5 ADDRESS LINE A6 ADDRESS LINE A7 JUMPER MUST BE IN PLACE FOR PROPER CARD OPERATION Figure 3-59. COMPONENT SIDE +V PRIMARY +V BACKUP GROUND UADD1 UADD3 UADD5 UADD7 DATA-DIR DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 UFLAG* USYNC GROUND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 SOLDER SIDE +V PRIMARY +V BACKUP GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 UADD6 HI-LO UNIT* GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND UCAL* UCLOCK* CONTROL BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS CONTROL CARD ADDRESSING POWER * NOT USED ON QAV CARD Figure 3-60. The “B” pins of the connector are located on the component side and the “A” pins are located on the solder side of the card. and address 8 is used during card calibration.3-8. QAV Card Rear-Edge Connector Pin Assignments QAV card addresses are programmed in groups of eight addresses in order to maintain the address recognition circuits at a minimum.4. QAV 3-8. However. cards equipped with the thermocouple temperature compensation feature use all eight addresses. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the selected address line (ADD3 through ADD7) which when matched by the DIOB address signals selects the QAV card by the system controller. Card Addressing and Data Output Address Jumpers The QAV card address is established by five jumper fixtures which are located in the front-edge connector. Address 7 provides the temperature data. 5/99 3-131 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Figure 3-59 shows the pin configuration of the front-edge connector. Data from the precision voltage network is used to adjust the converted analog input (digital data) for offset and gain correction before it is output to the DIOB as point data. This contact has been machined to be shorter than the other front-edge contacts so that it disconnects before the other contacts when the front card-edge connector is removed from the QAV card. QAV The addressing method allows up to 30 QAV cards to be used which means that 180 analog input channels can be provided (30 possibilities at a maximum of 6 channels per card yields 180 channels per DIOB controller). A logical zero at bit 12 indicates that the count data is in the negative overrange when bit 13 is a logical one and in the positive range when bit 13 is a logical zero. QAV card output data pattern format. M0-0053 3-132 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 16-bit. Output Data Figure 3-61 shows a general.3-8. A logic one signal at bit 12 indicates that the count data is in the positive overrange when bit 13 is at a logic zero and that the count data is in the negative range when bit 13 is a logical one. The actual binary data that is sent to the system controller over the DIOB is calculated by the microcomputer using data from a precision voltage network and from an analog-to-digital converter circuit. Bit 12 is an overrange bit and bit 13 is a sign bit. The first 12 bits (0 through 11) are binary data obtained through a software routine in the QAV card microcomputer circuit. Address protection is provided by a jumper insert on the front-edge connector pin pair (20A and 20B). A logical one at bit 13 indicates the count is in the negative range and a logical zero at bit 13 indicates that the count is in the positive range. Note Multiple channel offset errors will not set bit 15 on QAV cards with prefixes of 5 or greater.3-8. A logical zero at bit 15 indicates hardware trouble or that the offset factors from the auto-zero calibration are unreasonable on more than one input channel. QAV 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVERRANGE BIT BINARY DATA 1 = COUNT IS IN POSITIVE OVERRANGE WHEN SIGN BIT 13 = 0. A logical one at bit 14 indicates that the offset factor data that was obtained during the auto-zero calibration microcomputer routine is within reasonable limits and a logical zero indicates unreasonable auto-zero data. QAV Card Output Data Pattern Format Bits 14 and 15 are flag bits. AND IN NEGATIVE RANGE WHEN SIGN BIT 13 = 1 SIGN BIT 1 = COUNT IS NEGATIVE FLAG BIT SET BY QAV CARD MICROCOMPUTER 1 = OFFSET DATA OBTAINED DURING AUTO CALIBRATION IS WITHIN REASONABLE LIMITS FLAG BIT (SET BY MICROCOMPUTER) 1 = HARDWARE IS OPERATING PROPERLY Figure 3-61. 5/99 3-133 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and the controller is operating). A logical one at bit 15 (called IMOK bit) indicates that the hardware is operating properly (power is present. warm-up is complete. QAV Card Components (Level 6 and earlier) Light Emitting Diodes (LED) The QAV card has one LED which is used to indicate power “on”.J2 J3. therefore. Table 3-39. QAV Card Output Data Ranges Data Classification Zero Input Positive Range Positive Full Scale Positive Overrange Negative Overrange Negative Full Scale Negative Range Out of Range Offset Card Hardware Trouble C000 Output Data Hexadecimal Code C001 to CFFF D000 D001 to DFFF E001 to EFFF F000 F001 to FFFF 8000 to BFFF 0000 to 7FFF 3-8.J4 Figure 3-62. Note that bits 14 and 15 are set by QAV card microcomputer. LED J1.3-8.5. Controls and Indicators (Level 6 and earlier) The (Level 6 and earlier) QAV components are shown in Figure 3-62. M0-0053 3-134 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the positive range to negative transitions occurs in 14 bits. QAV Table 3-39 shows the nomenclature and the hexadecimal ranges for the QAV card output data. 2 J41. J6 is not shown on cards with prefixes lower than 5. QAV Card Jumpers. QAV card operates on its own time base when jumpers J3 or J4 are not inserted. QAV Jumpers Table 3-40 lists the jumper numbers. Locations and Functions (Level 6 and earlier) Jumper Number J1 J2 J31.2 J51 J63 1 Jumpers 2 The Function (Jumper in Place) For future use ORs signal IMOK (P13) to W274-2 Inverter Installed for 50 Hz systems Installed for 60 Hz systems For future use For future use J3. J4 and J5 are not used on QAV cards with prefixes lower than 5. Table 3-40. locations and functions of the jumpers used on the QAV card. 3 Jumper 5/99 3-135 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-8. The QAV also has several factory preset jumpers. no changes are recommended.6. The definitions of the switches are as follows: Table 3-41. QAV Jumper Configuration Configuration 50Hz operation 60Hz operation No QTB1 1The 1 2 3 4 SW1 X X X SW2 ON OFF ON SW3 OFF ON ON SW4 X X X QTB card is necessary in installations where large variations of the power line frequency exist to provide for large normal mode rejection.3-8. Changing these jumpers will affect calibration. QAV 3-8. Controls and Indicators (Level 8 and later) LE1 LE2 SW Figure 3-63. QAV Card Components (Level 8 and later) Switches The (Level 8 and later) QAV card uses a four-position DIP switch (see Figure 3-63 for the location of the switch). therefore. M0-0053 3-136 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . X = Reserved (Don’t Care) Notes Any other switch combination is not valid and the QAV card will not operate. 5/99 3-137 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . LE1 indicates that power is applied to the board. Should this LED remain on or flash. QAV LEDs The QAV card has two LED’s (see Figure 3-63). check the following: 1. LE2 will illuminate for about 1/2 second during power-up and will remain off thereafter. 2. return the board to Westinghouse for repair. Ensure that the DIP switch is set according to the valid configurations in the previous tables. Notes Before returning the board for repair. For on-line applications. LE2 is used during the initial calibration of the board.3-8. Ensure that the DIOB power supplies are in tolerance. 1206254E + 01 C4 = −0.3516470E + 03 C1 = 0.3972783E − 05 C3 = −0.3330646E − 04 S T M0-0053 3-138 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3167283E + 02 C1 = 0.1615839E + 00 C3 = 0. QAV Thermocouple Information Table 3-42 shows the standard WDPF thermocouple coefficient definitions. For additional information on selecting these coefficients. Coefficients may also be user-defined.6849588E − 02 C4 = −0.6138849E + 03 C2 = −0.4669328E + 02 C2 = −0.1899300E − 02 C3 = −0.3344949E + 00 C0 = 0.5174379E − 03 C5 = 0.3034473E + 02 C1 = 0.2261382E − 01 C4 = −0.8362848E + 02 C1 = 0. Table 3-42.2003933E + 00 E C0 = 0.1325739E + 01 C3 = 0.1616257E − 01 C4 = 0.3607027E + 02 C2 = −0.1180344E + 03 C1 = 0.6975349E − 04 C5 = 0.4401109E − 03 C5 = −0. QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (WDPF System) Thermocouple Type B 70% Platinum + 30% Rhodium or 94% Platinum + 6% Rhodium 427-1093°C 800-2000°F Chromel/Constantan −18-982°C 0-1800°F Iron/Constantan −96-760°C −140-1400°F Coefficients C0 = 0.1985918E + 03 C2 = −0.3189224E + 02 C1 = 0.7422128E − 01 C5 = 0.6962067E − 01 C4 = −0.2327808E − 02 C5 = 0.4110488E − 01 C5 = −0.2273716E + 03 C2 = −0.1155794E − 02 C3 = 0.3599650E − 05 J Chromel/Alumel −18-1093°C 0-2000°F (The upper range may be extended to 2500 with less accuracy) R Platinum + 13% Rhodium 260-1093°C 500-2000°F Platinum + 10% Rhodium 399-1093°C 750-2000°F Copper/Constantan 46-399°C −50-750°F K C0 = 0. refer to the CI record field discussion in “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131).4403191E + 02 C2 = 0.1539774E + 03 C3 = 0.3-8.3359373E + 02 C4 = −0.3112531E + 02 C1 = 0.2923653E − 06 C3 = 0.4051826E + 01 C5 = 0.1248286E + 02 C0 = 0.4288617E + 00 C0 = 0.3030628E + 02 C2 = −0.1973096E − 01 C0 = 0.5009329E + 00 C4 = 0. 1C31113G02/1C31116G04. 50. This range limitation exists for Ovation I/O modules 1C31113G01/1C31116G04. and 1C31113G03/1C31116G04 as well as Q-Line I/O cards: QAI. The information shown below provides the millivolt (MV) to temperature range for 20. G02 or G03 card. QAV. the group that provides a better fit. 5/99 3-139 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . you need to select the proper card/group number to ensure an accurate reading. you could use a G01. but better accuracy is obtained by using a G01. Do not use lower millivolt cards for the higher temperature (millivolt) readings.3-8. The coefficients listed in Table 3-42 are the recommended coefficients for the ranges shown for WDPF systems. and QAX. The coefficients listed in Table 3-43 are the recommended coefficients for the ranges shown for Ovation systems. Note that for a low millivolt reading. and 100 mv cards. QAV When selecting a Q-card or Ovation I/O module for a thermocouple. 0E-06 COEF_8 = 0.3593730E+10 COEF_5 = -4.057E-05 M0-0053 3-140 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .0 Actual range in MV / TEMP -9.358 -9. QAV Table 3-43.3449490E+05 COEF_4 = 6.923653E0+08 COEF_7 = -1.1672830E+01 COEF_2 = 3.5543000E+07 COEF_6 = 1.6242517E+08 COEF_7 = -1.814 (0 to 1820) (0 to 3308) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card B or TB Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 3.0E-06 COEF_8 = 0.835 to 76.9753490E+07 COEF_6 = 2.5164700E+02 COEF_2 = 6.992 -9.358 (-270 to 286) (-450 to 548) (-270 to 661) (-450 to 1221) (-270 to 1000) (-450 to 1832) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card 50 mv card 50 mv card 100 mv card 100 mv card E or TE Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 3.5543000E+07 COEF_4 = -8.8583050E+05 COEF_4 = 3.0306280E+04 COEF_3 = -3.835 to 49.000 to 13.1132961E+14 COEF_7 = -2.835 to 19.945 -9.814 0.835 to 76.945 -9.956 -9.7758167E+02 COEF_2 = 3.5543000E+07 COEF_5 = -8.3-8. QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (Ovation System) Thermocouple Type Standard Temperature Range 400 to 1100 Degrees C 800 to 2000 Degrees F Actual range in MV / TEMP 0.0939E-03 COEF_8 = 3.5397740E+08 COEF_4 = 3.6836822E+04 COEF_3 = -1.835 to 19.8176111E-01 COEF_2 = 1.8751939E+07 COEF_6 = 1.8495880E+06 COEF_5 = -6.1388490E+05 COEF_3 = -1.006 to 13.8053267E+06 COEF_5 = -3.835 to 49.0518260E+12 COEF_6 = 2.365E-05 Centigrade COEF_1 = -1.0 Thermocouple Type Standard Temperature Range -18 to 286 Degrees C 0 to 550 Degrees F -18 to 661 Degrees C 0 to 1200 Degrees F -18 to 1000 Degrees C 0 to 1832 Degrees F Centigrade COEF_1 = 1.4104717E+05 COEF_3 = -8.71E-05 COEF_8 = 6.0039330E+14 COEF_7 = -2. 2886170E+05 COEF_4 = 2.456 to 19.2613820E+07 COEF_5 =-5.4031910E+04 COEF_3 = 1.112531E+01 COEF_2 = 3.3825650E+05 COEF_4 = 1. QAV Table 3-43.259E-04 COEF_8 = 2.616257E+07 COEF_5 = 4.875 -6.8746550E+08 COEF_6 = 2.0374E-05 5/99 3-141 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .096 to 42.2071017E+09 COEF_7 = -9.6070270E+04 COEF_3 = -4.922 (-210 to 366) (-350 to 691) (-210 to 760) (-350 to 1400) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card 50 mv card 50 mv card Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 3.977 -8.4462172E+04 COEF_3 = 8.137 to 19.8593889E-01 COEF_2 = 2.1516E-05 Actual range in MV / TEMP -6.456 to 49.615839E+05 COEF_4 = -1.9998056E+09 COEF_7 = -8. QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (Ovation System) (Cont’d) Thermocouple Type J or TJ Standard Temperature Range -18 to 365 Degrees C -140 to 700 Degrees F -18 to 760 Degrees C -140 to 1400 Degrees F Actual range in MV / TEMP -8.862E-05 Thermocouple Type K or TK Standard Temperature Range -18 to 480 Degrees C 0 to 900 Degrees F -18 to 1230 Degrees C 0 to 2250 Degrees F -18 to 1370 Degrees C 0 to 2500 Degrees F Centigrade COEF_1 = -4.4450606E+08 COEF_6 =.2563233E+07 COEF_5 = -2.1743790E+08 COEF_6 = 3.76E-06 COEF_8 = 5.0344730E+01 COEF_2 = 4.922 -8.9768833E+04 COEF_4 = -8.978 6.456 to 54.14E-06 COEF_8 = 4.971 -8.9792056E+06 COEF_5 = 2.4011090E+08 COEF_6 = -3.9727830E+09 COEF_7 =-9.096 to 19.458 to 49.458 to 19.1959444E-01 COEF_2 = 2.256E-04 COEF_8 = 2.137 to 42.845 (-270 to 484) (-450 to 904) (-270 to 1232) (-450 to 2250) (-270 to 1372) (-450 to 2500) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card 50 mv card 50 mv card 100 mv card 100 mv card Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 3.0039039E+04 COEF_3 = -2.1.243E-05 Centigrade COEF_1 = -9.458 to 54.599650E+09 COEF_7 = -7.988 6.996 -6.3-8.959 6. 998 0.9730960E+04 COEF_4 = -5.2737160E+05 COEF_3 = -1.6693280E+04 COEF_3 = -1.7829606E+08 COEF_5 = 2.3333E-04 COEF_8 = 2. QAV Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions (Ovation System) (Cont’d) Thermocouple Type R or TR Standard Temperature Range 260 to 1100 Degrees C 500 to 2000 Degrees F Actual range in MV / TEMP 0.9620670E+07 COEF_5 = -2.4210778E+11 COEF_7 = -4.9866667E+02 COEF_2 = 2.254 to 19.832E-06 Actual range in MV / TEMP 0.1557940E+12 COEF_7 = -1.24E-06 Thermocouple Type S or TS Standard Temperature Range 400 to 1100 Degrees C 750 to 2000 Degrees F Centigrade COEF_1 = 2.084E-04 COEF_8 = 3.0961644E+04 COEF_4 = -2.3278080E+09 COEF_6 = 3.1104880E+10 COEF_6 = -1.9859180E+05 COEF_3 = -1.698 -0.7014111E+08 COEF_5 = -4.0093290E+08 COEF_5 = 4.1892240E+01 COEF_2 = 4.092 to 18.8682489E+01 COEF_2 = 1.55700E-05 COEF_8 = 4.89930000E+12 COEF_7 =-1.0847E-04 COEF_8 = 3.0551667E+12 COEF_7 = 4.089 to 19. QAV Table 3-43.8678150E+-7 COEF_5 = -1.979 (-270 to 385) (-450 to 726) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 3.000 to 19.2062540E+09 COEF_5 = -7.2482860E+07 COEF_4 = 1.3306460E+10 COEF_7 = -7.2932267E+09 COEF_6 = 1.3628480E+01 COEF_2 = 2.7796889E+01 COEF_2 = 1.15E-06 COEF_8 = 5.5940711E+04 COEF_3 = -7.243E-05 Centigrade COEF_1 =-5.1032878E+05 COEF_3 = -1.9349222E+06 COEF_4 = 6.8503589E+10 COEF_7 = -1.2631756E+05 COEF_3 = -6.2836044E+10 COEF_6 = -6.868E-06 Actual range in MV / TEMP -6.258 to 19.000 to 18.3652167E+05 COEF_4 = 3.945 -6.26E-06 Thermocouple Type T or TT Standard Temperature Range -46 to 400 Degrees C -50 to 750 Degrees F Centigrade COEF_1 = 4.1803440E+02 COEF_2 = 1.4221280E+10 COEF_6 = 1.72E-06 COEF_8 = 5.0374E-05 M0-0053 3-142 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .1234044E+10 COEF_6 = 1.3-8.696 (0 to 1768) (0 to 3214) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 1.3257390E+06 COEF_4 = 6.997 (0 to 1684) (0 to 3063) Best Fit 20 mv card 20 mv card Fahrenheit COEF_1 = 8. 8. 5/99 3-143 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . & 17. QAV Wiring Diagram (QAV Groups 1 through 5) Installation Notes: QAV Groups 1 through 5 (Refer to Figure 3-64) 1. 14.3-8. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end. have been drilled for this purpose. insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A. QAV 3-8. POINT 4 POINT 5 EDGE CONNECTOR PLANT GROUND Figure 3-64. Then add two jumpers as shown below. Six holes. 11. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 3 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD 20B 20A 19B (+) POINT 5 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 4 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (−) 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 #8-32 SCREW (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 0 TRANSDUCER (−) POINT 1 POINT 2 NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS POINT 3 FOR PLANT GROUNDED TRANSDUCERS. located next to terminals 2.7. 5. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source.3-8. QAV A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW (+) TRANSDUCER (−) 2. A (+) S (−) (+) TRANSDUCER (−) M0-0053 3-144 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below. have been drilled for this purpose. QAV Installation Data Sheet 2 of 3 Required Enable Jumper Terminal Block #8-32 Screw TB1 or TB2 UIOB/DIOB 13 V Power Supply Card 20B 20A 19B A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 2 1 S1 (-)1 (+)1 S2 (-)2 (+)2 S3 (-)3 (+)3 S4 (-)4 (+)4 S5 (-)5 (+)5 S6 (-)6 (+)6 Point5 (+) Shield (-) (+) 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A C + TB3 TB1 or TB2 S1 (-)1 (+)1 S2 (-)2 (+)2 S3 (-)3 (+)3 S4 (-)4 (+)4 S5 (-)5 (+)5 S6 (-)6 (+)6 Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Point5 Point4 Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Point4 Point3 Point3 Point2 Point2 Point1 Point1 Point0 Shield (-) Point0 TSC Card Edge Connector Note: This drawing is for plant grounded transducers. 5. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end. Terminal Block #6-32 Screw Figure 3-65. 14. 5/99 3-145 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Wiring Diagram. insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A.3-8. located next to terminals 2. & 17. Six holes. 8. 11. QAV to TSC Card Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-65): 1. Then add two jumpers as shown below. QAV A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW (+) TRANSDUCER (−) 2.3-8. ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below. A (+) S (−) (+) TRANSDUCER (−) M0-0053 3-146 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source. QAV CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-147 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-8. Figure 3-66. QAV For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 3 CARD 1A (−) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (+) (−) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (+) (−) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (+) (−) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (+) (−) POINT 4 (SHIELD) (+) (−) POINT 5 (SHIELD) (+) 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) PLANT GROUND (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 0 (+) POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 4 (+) POINT 5 EDGE-CONNECTOR Note The QAV inputs may be grounded in the field or at the B cabinet as shown. 1. ... DIOB Data Address Control Data Buffer RAM Address Decoder µC. The digital data is the summation of a frequency that has been counted for a time period which is a multiple of the power line frequency (50 or 60 Hz). QAW 3-9.3-9.. . (For new applications.. Transformer Isolation Channel 1 Voltage to Frequency Converter Channel 6 Voltage to Frequency Converter (+) (-) SHD (+) (-) SHD Six Sets of Analog Field Inputs Figure 3-67. Description Groups 01through G06 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAW card is designed to convert an analog field signal to digital data (see Figure 3-67). QAW Block Diagram M0-0053 3-148 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 ... QAW Analog High Level Input Point (Style 7379A31G01 through G06) 3-9. a QAX card is recommended). Counter and Control Circuits Transformer Isolation . 17 to the 2-3 position. One standard is a 0 VDC (shorted input). auto-zero and gain correction. Up to 30 QAW cards (180 channels) can be used with one DIOB controller. The gain correction factor is compared to a 16-bit calibration constant which is programmed into the memory of the system controller at the time of factory card calibration. The output of each input circuit is processed by a common microcomputer and the resulting digital data is multiplexed to the Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB) as a 13-bit word. On a Level 9 or later QAW. Only card Group 5 provides an on-board current loop power supply. and so on). Figure 3-68 shows a typical control system configuration using QAW cards. The QAW card microcomputer is programmed to “limit check” (reasonability check) the offset correction factor for each analog input channel. a separate power supply is not needed. The frequency of the offset and gain calibration cycle is determined by a constant which has been programmed into the memory of the system controller. The calibration constant is necessary because the QAW card has no mechanical adjusting devices (such as potentiometers. 5/99 3-149 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QAW card uses an electrical isolation circuit (transformer) to separate the analog input from the digital counting circuits. On a Level 7 or earlier QAW. The second calibrating potential (gain) is derived from a separate. The QTB card is necessary for applications where large variations of power line frequency exist. A failure on two or more channels causes bit 15 (IMOK bit) of the output data to be set to a logical zero which indicates card trouble to the system controller. This method yields a trimmer (or pot) -less calibrating method. Offset and gain correction factors are calculated on a periodic basis by the QAW card microcomputer. Each analog input circuit contains circuitry for signal conditioning.3-9. Two known potentials on the analog section of the QAW card are used as standards for offset and gain calibration. and a clocked voltage-to-frequency converter. biasing. The isolation circuit provides power for each analog input channel in addition to precise timing from a stable frequency which is generated on the digital side of the QAW card circuits. the power supply is activated by setting jumpers 7 . which is used to determine the offset correction factor. to obtain a high normal mode rejection. Failure of the reasonability check causes bit 14 (offset over-range) of the output data for that channel to be set to a logical zero. By using Group 5 cards for current transducers requiring 4-20 mA. QAW Each QAW card contains six individually isolated voltage-to-frequency converter circuits (channels). stable voltage reference which is set to approximately 100 percent of the maximum expected analog input value. the power supply is activated by installing jumper number 6. The QAW microcomputer is reset at this time and conversion of data is begun when the reset control is removed and the QAW card buffer memory is updated. QAW DIOB CONTROLLER QTB DIOB POWER LINE INPUT QAW NO. and input voltage range are as follows: • • • • G01: 0 to +1 VDC 1 KΩ maximum source impedance. Bit 15 is also set to zero during the power-up routine of the QAW card.2. The group numbers. QAW Typical Control System Using QAW Cards Note The two-channel failure feature is available on QAW card with prefixes of 1 and 2.3-9. G03: 0 to +10 VDC. 30 FIELD INPUTS Figure 3-68. 1 FIELD INPUTS ~ ~ QAW NO. Features The QAW card is available in six design groups (G01 through G06) to accommodate a variety of analog input voltages. G04: 0 to +20 mA M0-0053 3-150 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Bit 15 is reset to a logical 1 after a warm-up pause is completed. The length of the warm-up pause is determined by a constant which is programmed into the memory of the system controller. maximum source impedance. 3-9. 10 KΩ maximum source impedance. G02: 0 to +5 VDC 5 KΩ maximum source impedance. QAW • • • • • • • • • • • • G05: 0 to +20 mA.3-9.2 seconds for both 50 or 60 Hz operation. Connection to the control system is made by a 34-pin rear-edge backplane connector which interfaces to the DIOB. 3-9. Inputs Point Sampling Rate (samples/second): Note QAW cards with prefixes of 3 or greater are selected for 50 or 60 Hz operation by jumper. Specifications Figure 3-69 and Figure 3-70 show block diagrams of the QAW analog and digital circuits. which connects to field terminals. auto gain correction Electrical isolation on all channels On-card digital memory (buffer) Common mode rejection Normal mode rejection Automatic reasonability test (shorted input) Auto-conversion check Jumper selectable 50/60 Hz operation On-board current loop power supply (G05 only) The QAW card is designed to be mounted in a standard Q-line card cage.3. • • 5/99 4 at a power line frequency of 60 Hz 3. and a 56-pin front-edge connector.4 at a power line frequency of 50 Hz 3-151 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The sampling rate is 4 per second and the sample period is 0. on-board current loop power supply G06: 0 to +50 mA Each QAW card has the following features: IEEE surge withstand capability Auto zero. 3-9. and 9.20 seconds at a power line frequency of 60 Hz 0. Resolution: 13-bits (includes polarity bit) Input Channel Sample Period: • • 0. 8 seconds apart in 60 Hz systems. auto gain and auto zero calibration are performed.4 seconds apart in 50 Hz systems.24 seconds at a power line frequency of 50 Hz M0-0053 3-152 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAW Note Once every 32 conversions. 5.3-9. QAW Analog Input Circuits Block Diagram 5/99 3-153 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C - M0-0053 . QAW RD (FOR GROUPS 4. & 6) + VIN LOW PASS FILTER CLAMP V0 R1 R2 − (MULTI PLEXER SOLID STATE SWITCH) SH GROUP 5 ONLY R4 VOLTAGE REFERENCE R3 SURGE PROTECTION VREF PREAMPLIFIER - I1 CURRENT LIMITER 18V (NORMAL) - +15V −15V 18 V (NOM) (−) (+) POWER SUPPLY MULTIPLEXER CONTROLLER - - INTEGRATOR - - SYNCHRONOUS COMPARATOR - CLOCK +12V X1 - I REF CAPACITOR DISCHARGE 1 T1 D1 R5 PSD (250 KHZ) FREQUENCY INPUT (FI1-FI6) - C2 - Figure 3-69. however. QAW Digital Circuits Block Diagram Normal Mode Voltage • • Surge: Meets IEEE/SWC test specifications without damage. however. Continuous: An overrange of +120 VDC or 120 VAC rms at 50 or 60 Hz will not damage the input channels. QAW ADDRESS JUMPERS PSD POWER SUPPLY DRIVE-250 KHZ ANALOG POWER CONTROL CL P15 RAM LOAD ENABLE TADD0-2 HI-LO AOK ADDRESS DECODER UADD0-7 DATA-DIR USYNC HI-LO DATA GATE UDAT0-7 DEV BUSY DOUT I/O TUSYNC P24 to P27 MICROCOMPUTER CL WR SS BUS (DB0-7) BUFFER RAM LOAD CONTROLLER P13 LEVEL SHIFT AND BUFFER RD0-7 BUFFER RAM ADDRESS LEN WD0-7 PSEN P20 PROGRAM MEMORY ADDRESS LATCH CONTROL ADDRESS BUFFER LATCH D I O B I/O A0 A1 P10-12 P14 TRESET +5V COUNTERS (6) POWER UP AND RESET 5 VOLT REGULATOR +12V (FI1-FI6) Figure 3-70. a sustained overrange can affect subsequent data for several minutes following the removal of the overrange voltage.3-9. the accuracy of data is reduced during. M0-0053 3-154 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and up to 10 seconds after the removal of the surge. 5. the accuracy of data is reduced during. Common Mode Voltage • • Surge: Meets IEEE/SWC test specifications without damage. Continuous: A maximum of +500 VDC or peak AC can be applied without damage.3-9. and up to 10 seconds following the removal of the surge. 5/99 3-155 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAW Note This specification does not apply to Group 4. Normal Mode Rejection • • 60 dB at 50 or 60 Hz using QTB card line frequency tracking 25 dB at 50 Hz +5 percent or 60 Hz +5 percent without QTB card line frequency tracking Note The input (peak-to-peak) AC voltage must not exceed 50 percent of the upper range value or 2V. Common Mode Rejection • • 120 dB at DC and power line frequency and its harmonics with QTB card line frequency tracking 100 dB for nominal line frequency at +5 percent and harmonics without QTB card line frequency tracking Note Common mode rejection does not apply if the peak AC value exceeds 200. and 6 cards. for specified accuracy and normal mode rejection. however.000 percent of upper range value. 0 ADC 13.4 VDC 12.4 VDC) Minimum Transducer Operating Voltage: 12 VDC with no load Input Signal Requirements • • • M0-0053 G01 cards: 0 to +1 VDC G02 cards: 0 to +5 VDC G03 cards: 0 to +10 VDC 3-156 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . +1/2 of the Least Significant Bit (LSB) at 99.2 ADC 15. 0 V normal mode Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage: Optional Backup: 12. 50 percent +2 percent of relative humidity.3-9.1 VDC 13.7 Watts On-Board Power Supply for Each Channel (G05 Only) • • • • Current Limit: 60 mA Loop Resistance (excluding transducer): not greater than 60 ohms Worst Case VDC Output: 14 VDC (for a 7 level and earlier QAW). or 20 VDC (for 9 level and later QAW) @ 20 mA (DIOB power supply @ 12. QAW Input Impedance 250Ω Reference Accuracy (per SAMA Standard PMC 20) • • +0.7 percent confidence. 0 V common mode.0 VDC -Maximum 13.10 percent of the upper range value (+10 µV).0 Watts Maximum 1.4 VDC Nominal + 13.1 VDC Nominal Power Supply Current: Power Used: 1. Reference Conditions: 25°C + 1°C Ambient Temperature. COMPONENT SIDE +V PRIMARY +V BACKUP GROUND UADD1 UADD3 UADD5 UADD7 DATA-DIR DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 UFLAG* USYNC GROUND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 SOLDER SIDE +V PRIMARY +V BACKUP GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 UADD6 HI-LO UNIT* GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND UCAL* UCLOCK* CONTROL BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS CONTROL CARD ADDRESSING POWER * NOT USED ON QAW CARD Figure 3-71. Each field signal input requires a plus. DIOB connection is made to the QAW card through the Q-card backplane connector to connector pins located on the rear-edge of the card (see Figure 3-71). QAW • • • G04 cards: 0 to +20 mA G05 cards: 0 to +20 mA (on-board current loop power supply) G06 cards: 0 to +50 mA Field signals are input to a standard Q series front-edge connector. QAW Card Rear-Edge Connector Pin Assignments 5/99 3-157 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-9. minus and shield pin. The DIOB address and DIOB address protection jumpers are also located in this connector. Output Signal Requirements Output signal requirements are specified for DIOB requirements. 4. however. Two addresses are not used by the QAW card since each card contains six analog input channels. the unused address can be used by other cards when required.3-9. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the selected address line (ADD3 through ADD7) which when matched by the DIOB address signals selects the QAW card Figure 3-72 shows the pin configuration of the front-edge connector. Address protection is provided by a jumper insert on the front-edge connector pin pair (20A and 20B). The “B” pins of the connector are located on the component side and the “A” pins are located on the solder side of the p-c card. This contact has been machined to be shorter than the other front-edge contacts so that it disconnects before the other contacts when the front card-edge connector is removed from the QAW card. QAW card addresses are programmed in groups of eight addresses in order to maintain the address recognition circuits at a minimum. M0-0053 3-158 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The addressing method allows up to 30 QAW cards to be used which means that 180 analog input channels can be provided. Card Addressing and Data Output Address Jumpers The QAW card address is established by five jumper fixtures which are located in the front-edge connector. QAW 3-9. QAW card output data pattern format. QAW Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Assignments Output Data Bit Patterns Figure 3-73 shows a general. QAW SOLDER SIDE UNUSED UNUSED POINT 0 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 1 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 1 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 2 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 3 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 3 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 4 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 5 − INPUT UNUSED POINT 5 + INPUT DIOB ADDRESS PROTECTION GROUND UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED ADDRESS LINE A3 ADDRESS LINE A4 ADDRESS LINE A5 ADDRESS LINE A6 ADDRESS LINE A7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A COMPONENT SIDE 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B POINT 0 – INPUT SIGNAL UNUSED POINT 0 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 1 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 2 – INPUT UNUSED POINT 2 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 3 SHIELD UNUSED POINT 4 – INPUT UNUSED POINT 4 + INPUT UNUSED POINT 5 SHIELD UNUSED UNUSED DIOB ADDRESS PROTECTION GROUND UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED ADDRESS LINE A3 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A4 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A5 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A6 GROUND ADDRESS LINE A7 GROUND JUMPER MUST BE IN PLACE FOR PROPER CARD OPERATION Figure 3-72. The first 12 bits (0 through 11) are binary data that is obtained through a software routine in the QAW card microcomputer circuit. 16-bit. 5/99 3-159 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-9. A logical zero at bit 12 indicates that the count data is in the negative overrange when bit 13 is a logical one and in the positive range when bit 13 is a logical zero. and the controller is operating). Note Multiple channel offset errors will not set bit 15 on QAW cards with prefixes of 5 or greater. A logical one at bit 15 (called IMOK bit) indicates that the hardware is operating properly (power is present. A logical one at bit 14 indicates that the offset factor data that was obtained during the auto-zero calibration microcomputer routine is within reasonable limits and a logical zero indicates unreasonable auto-zero data. QAW The actual binary data that is sent to the system controller over the DIOB is calculated by the microcomputer using data from a precision voltage network and from an analog-to-digital converter circuit. Data from the precision voltage network adjusts the converted analog input (digital data) for offset and gain correction before it is output to the DIOB as point data. Bits 14 and 15 are flag bits. A logical one at bit 13 indicates the count is in the negative range and a logical zero at bit 13 indicates that the count is in the positive range. M0-0053 3-160 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . A logical zero at bit 15 indicates hardware trouble or that the offset factors from the auto-zero calibration are unreasonable on more than one input channel. A logic one signal at bit 12 indicates that the count data is in the positive overrange when bit 13 is at a logic zero and that the count data is in the negative range when bit 13 is a logical one. Bit 12 is an overrange bit and bit 13 is a sign bit. warm-up is complete.3-9. QAW Card Output Data Ranges Data Classification Zero Input Positive Range Positive Full Scale Positive Overrange Negative Full Scale C000 Output Data Hexadecimal Code C001 to CFFF D000 D001 to DFFF F000 5/99 3-161 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Table 3-44. QAW Bit Number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVERRANGE BIT 1 = COUNT IS IN POSITIVE OVERRANGE WHEN SIGN BIT 13 = 0. therefore. the positive range to negative transitions occurs in 14 bits. AND IN NEGATIVE RANGE WHEN SIGN BIT 13 = 1 0 = COUNT IS IN POSITIVE RANGE BINARY DATA SIGN BIT 1 = COUNT IS NEGATIVE FLAG BIT SET BY QAW CARD MICROCOMPUTER 1 = OFFSET DATA OBTAINED DURING AUTO CALIBRATION IS WITHIN REASONABLE LIMITS FLAG BIT (SET BY MICROCOMPUTER) 1 = HARDWARE IS OPERATING PROPERLY Figure 3-73. QAW Card Output Data Pattern Format Table 3-44 shows the nomenclature and the hexadecimal ranges for the QAW card output data. Note that bits 14 and 15 are set by QAW card microcomputer.3-9. a short in the circuit causes the lamp to turn on. J1. QAW Table 3-44. During normal operation. Jumpers Table 3-45 lists the jumper numbers.J2 J6. QAW Card Components (Level 7 and earlier) Light Emitting Diodes (LED) The QAW card (Level 7 and earlier) has one LED which indicates power “on”. M0-0053 3-162 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . However. the lamp is off. QAW Card Output Data Ranges Data Classification Negative Range Out of Range Offset Card Hardware Trouble Output Data Hexadecimal Code F001 to FFFF 8000 to BFFF 0000 to 7FFF Controls and Indicators (Level 7 and earlier) Figure 3-74 shows the card components for 7 level and earlier QAW. For Group 5 QAWs.J4 Figure 3-74.3-9. locations and functions of the jumpers used on the QAW card. a current limiting lamp is part of each current loop.J7 G05 Only LED J3. QAW card operates on its own time base when jumpers J3 or J4 are not inserted. QAW Card Components (Level 9 and later) 5/99 3-163 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3 Jumper 4 Jumper 3-9. QAW Card Jumpers and Functions (Level 7 and earlier) Jumper Number J1 J2 J31. LE1 JS13 JS11 JS15 JS9 JS17 SW 1 2 3 4 JS14 JS12 JS16 JS10 JS18 JS8 LE2 JS7 Figure 3-75. QAW Table 3-45.5.3-9.2 J51 J63 J74 1 Jumpers 2 The Function (Jumper in Place) For future use ORs signal IMOK (P13) to W274-2 Inverter Installed for 50 Hz systems Installed for 60 Hz systems For future use Selects on-board current loop supply for Group 5 only Selects external current loop supply for Group 5 only J3. J7 is not shown on cards with prefixes lower than 5. J4 and J5 are not used on QAW cards with prefixes lower than 5. J6 is not shown on cards with prefixes lower than 3.2 J41. Controls and Indicators (Level 9 and later) Figure 3-75 shows the card components for 9 level and later QAW. LE2 is used during the initial calibration of the board. and jumpers J13 and J14 (channel 5) MUST BE in the 2-3 position to enable on-card loop Power Supply. therefore. jumpers J11 and J12 (channel 4). jumpers J17 and J18 (channel 1). jumpers J7 and J8 (channel 0). Refer to Figure 3-75 for the jumper locations. LE2 will illuminate for about 1/2 second during power-up and will remain off thereafter. X = Reserved (Don’t Care) Notes Any other switch combination is not valid and the QAW card will not operate. Changing these jumpers will affect calibration.3-9. QAW Jumper Configuration Configuration 50Hz operation 60Hz operation No QTB1 1The SW1 X X X SW2 ON OFF ON SW3 OFF ON ON SW4 X X X QTB card is necessary in installations where large variations of the power line frequency exist to provide for large normal mode rejection. LE1 indicates that power is applied to the board. QAW Switches The (Level 9 and later) QAW card uses a four-position DIP switch (see Figure 3-75 for the location of the switch). M0-0053 3-164 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . jumpers J15 and J16 (channel 3). Jumpers On Group 5 QAW cards. Should this LED remain on or flash. LEDs The QAW card has two LED’s (see Figure 3-75). The QAW also has several factory preset jumpers. no changes are recommended. For on-line applications. jumpers J9 and J10 (channel 2). return the board to Westinghouse for repair. The definitions of the switches are as follows: Table 3-46. Wiring Diagram. QAW Notes Before returning the board for repair. check the following: 1. POINT 4 POINT 5 EDGE CONNECTOR PLANT GROUND Figure 3-76. 2.3-9.4.3.2. 3-9. Ensure that the DIP switch is set according to the valid configurations in the previous tables. and 6 5/99 3-165 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .6. Installation Data Sheets 1 of 4 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD 20B 20A 19B (+) POINT 5 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 4 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (−) 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 0 TRANSDUCER (−) POINT 1 POINT 2 NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS POINT 3 FOR PLANT GROUNDED TRANSDUCERS. QAW Groups 1. Ensure that the DIOB power supplies are in tolerance. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end. & 17. 3. 4. 14. 5. A (+) S (−) (+) TRANSDUCER (−) Installation Notes: QAW Groups 4. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source. Then add two jumpers as shown below. located next to terminals 2. inputs are grounded as follows: 3. 6 (Refer to Figure 3-76) 1. Six holes. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end. have been drilled for this purpose. ground as described in Note 1 and as shown below: A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW − + (−) TRANSDUCER (+) POWER SUPPLY M0-0053 3-166 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A. 2. 11. A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW (+) TRANSDUCER (−) 2. 6 (Refer to Figure 3-76) If loop power is supplied by the customer but is external to the transducer. QAW Installation Notes: QAW Groups 1. 8. ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below.3-9. ground as described in Note 2 and as shown below: A (+) S (−) − POWER SUPPLY + (−) TRANSDUCER (+) 5/99 3-167 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAW 4.3-9. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source. Wiring Diagram: QAW Group 5 Installation Notes: QAW Group 5 (Refer to Figure 3-77) 1. Six holes. 5. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end.3-9. M0-0053 3-168 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . POINT 2 POINT 1 EDGE CONNECTOR PLANT GROUND Figure 3-77. insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A. QAW Installation Data Sheet 2 of 4 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD 20B 20A 19B (+) POINT 5 SHIELD (−) (+) POINT 4 SHIELD (−) (+) POINT 3 SHIELD (−) (+) POINT 2 SHIELD (−) (+) POINT 1 SHIELD (−) (+) POINT 0 SHIELD (−) 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW RTN SHIELD SRC RTN SHIELD SRC RTN SHIELD SRC RTN SHIELD SRC RTN SHIELD SRC RTN (−) POINT 0 SRCTRANSDUCER (+) POINT 5 POINT 4 NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS POINT 3 FOR PLANT GROUNDED TRANSDUCERS. & 17. located next to terminals 2. 14. Then add two jumpers as shown below. 8. 11. have been drilled for this purpose. QAW A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW SOURCE RETURN (−) TRANSDUCER (+) 2. ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below.3-9. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source. A (+) S (−) SRC RTN (−) TRANSDUCER (+) 5/99 3-169 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 11. Then add two jumpers as shown below. Wiring Diagram. A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW (+) TRANSDUCER (−) M0-0053 3-170 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . located next to terminals 2. QAW to TSC Card Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-78): 1. have been drilled for this purpose. Six holes. Terminal Block #6-32 Screw Figure 3-78.3-9. QAW Installation Data Sheet 3 of 4 Required Enable Jumper Terminal Block #8-32 Screw TB1 or TB2 UIOB/DIOB 13 V Power Supply Card 20B 20A 19B A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 2 1 S1 (-)1 (+)1 S2 (-)2 (+)2 S3 (-)3 (+)3 S4 (-)4 (+)4 S5 (-)5 (+)5 S6 (-)6 (+)6 Point5 (+) Shield (-) (+) 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A C + TB3 TB1 or TB2 S1 (-)1 (+)1 S2 (-)2 (+)2 S3 (-)3 (+)3 S4 (-)4 (+)4 S5 (-)5 (+)5 S6 (-)6 (+)6 Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Shield (+) (-) Point5 Point4 Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Shield (-) (+) Point4 Point3 Point3 Point2 Point2 Point1 Point1 Point0 Shield (-) Point0 TSC Card Edge Connector Note: This drawing is for plant grounded transducers. 5. 8. 14. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end. insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A. & 17. A (+) S (−) (+) TRANSDUCER (−) 5/99 3-171 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAW 2.3-9. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source. ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below. Figure 3-79. QAW CE MARK Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-172 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . This diagram is shown for Group 5 QAWs. QAW For CE MARK Certified System 4 of 4 CARD 1A (+) POINT 0 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 1 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 2 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 3 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 4 (SHIELD) (−) (+) POINT 5 (SHIELD) (−) 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) (−) (SHIELD) (+) PLANT GROUND (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 0 (+) POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 (−) TRANSDUCER POINT 4 (+) POINT 5 EDGE-CONNECTOR Note The QAW inputs may be grounded in the field or at the B Cabcabinet as shown.3-9. 1. DIOB Data Address Control Data Buffer RAM Address Decoder µC. . . Transformer Isolation Channel 1 Voltage to Frequency Converter Channel 12 Voltage to Frequency Converter (+) (-) SHD (+) (-) SHD Twelve Sets of Analog Field Inputs Figure 3-80.... QAX 12 Point Analog Input Card (Style 4256A64G01 through G06) 3-10. QAX Block Diagram 5/99 3-173 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . representing various input ranges.. Counter and Control Circuits Transformer Isolation . Up to 15 QAX cards (180 points) may be used with one DIOB controller. Description G01 through G06 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAX card converts an analog field signal to digital data. The QAX is the recommended functional replacement for two QAV (or QAW) cards..Time periods are a multiple of the nominal power line frequency (50 or 60Hz).3-10. QAX 3-10.. The digital data is a summation of a frequency that has been counted for a period of time. There are six possible card groupings. and installation. QAX Card Groups and Capabilities Group Range Low-Level Groups Resistance (Maximum Source Impedance) 500 Ω 500 Ω 1K Ω 1K Ω 5K Ω 10K Ω Note GO1 GO2 GO3 -5mV to 20mV (-20mV to 20mV at reduced accuracy) -12. Features Each QAX card has the following features: • • • • • • • • M0-0053 IEEE surge withstand capability Auto zero . jumper settings.Auto gain correction Electrical isolation on all channels On card buffer memory for DIOB data transfers Open thermocouple detection (low level cards only) Common mode noise rejection Normal mode noise rejection Automatic reasonability test on the offset 3-174 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5mV to 50mV (-50mV to 50mV at reduced accuracy) -25mV to 100mV (-100mV to 100mV at reduced accuracy) High-Level Groups GO4 GO5 GO6 0 to 1V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V The kit drawing which comes with each of the specified groups lists additional details on cabling. QAX The design groups are as follows: Table 3-47.3-10.2. 3-10. Connection to the control system is made by a 34 pin rear edge backplane connector for the DIOB interface. and data processing. 5/99 3-175 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . One standard is 0 volts (shorted input) which is used for offset calibration. On low-level cards. The mother board provides for the DIOB interface. Each daughter board handles one A/D channel and contains the circuitry for an independent voltage to frequency converter. the second standard is derived from a stable voltage reference and is approximately -150% of the maximum analog input reading. The QAX card features electronic (non-mechanical) auto-calibration which behaves as follows: • • • • Two known potentials on the analog daughter boards are used as standards for offset and gain calibration. the second standard is derived from a stable voltage reference and is approximately 100% of the maximum analog input reading. The QAX card uses a transformer based electrical isolation circuit on each daughter card which separate the 12 cards from each other and from the mother board. In addition. Interface to the field wiring is made by a 56 pin front edge connector. daughter board control. On high-level cards. the isolation circuit provides power for each daughter board and precise timing from a stable frequency generated on the mother board. The QAX card is designed to be mounted in a standard Q-line card cage. The daughter boards interface to the mother board via 30 pin SIMM connectors. Each QAX card consists of a mother board and 12 Surface Mount Technology daughter boards. field interface. Offset and gain calibration factors are calculated approximately every 8 seconds for each daughter board channel by the microprocessor on the mother board.3-10. QAX • • • • • • • Operation with a QTB timebase (in 50 or 60 Hz) or without a QTB Each daughter board features: Signal conditioning Biasing Auto-zero and auto-gain correction Open thermocouple detection (low-level configurations only) Synchronous voltage to frequency converter. 4VDC Nominal 13.9 A DC 11.4VDC 12.7 Watts 1.3-10. auto zero and auto gain calibration are performed.1VDC 0. One feature is a reasonability check for the offset calibration factor. 3-10.20 seconds M0-0053 3-176 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QAX • The gain calibration value is compared against a calibration constant loaded into an EEPROM on the mother board during initial calibration. When the card is warmed up (about 15 seconds after power up).3. bit 15 of the data package is set to logic one to indicate the card is ready.0VDC Maximum 13. any one channel can fail while the others are still active and accurate.5 Watts Inputs Point Sampling rate (samples/second): 4 Once every 32 conversions. The QAX processor also provides on-card diagnostics. Specifications Power Supply Voltage Table 3-48.1VDC 13. Failure of the reasonability check causes bit 14 (offset-out-of-range) in the data package to be set to logic 0. Resolution: 13 bits (including polarity bit) Input Channel Sample Period: 0. Note All daughter boards located on a given mother board MUST be of the same design group. This calibration constant is necessary in order to provide a non-mechanical (no potentiometer) calibration system. With this feature.1 A DC 14. QAX Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage Backup Power supply current Power dissipation 12. Normal Mode Rejection 60 DB at 50 or 60 Hz using QTB line frequency tracking or at 50 or 60 Hz +0. Common Mode Rejection 120 DB at DC and power line frequency including harmonics with QTB line frequency tracking. Continuous: An overvoltage of ±120 VDC or VAC RMS at 50 or 60 Hz will not damage the card.5 percent without QTB line frequency tracking. however.5% w/o QTB line frequency tracking. 25 DB at 50 HZ ± 5% or 60 Hz ± 5% without QTB line frequency tracking. 100 DB for nominal line frequency ±5% including harmonics with QTB line frequency tracking or at 50 or 60 Hz ±0.000% of the upper range value. Note The input peak to peak AC voltage must not exceed 100% of the upper range value for specified accuracy and normal mode rejection. Note Common mode rejection does not apply if peak AC input exceeds 200. the accuracy of the reading is reduced during. a sustained overvoltage can affect subsequent data for several minutes following the removal of the overvoltage.3-10. the accuracy of the data is reduced for up to 10 seconds following the removal of the surge. Continuous: A maximum of 500 VDC or peak AC can be applied without damage. and up to 10 seconds following the removal of the surge. however. Input Impedance: 10 MΩ 4 KΩ in overload or powered down 5/99 3-177 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . however. Common Mode Voltage Surge: Meets IEEE test specification without damage. QAX Normal Mode Voltage Surge: Meets IEEE test specification without damage. 0V common mode noise. 0 to 1 V 1KΩ max source impedance. This contact has been machined to be shorter than the other front edge contacts so that it disconnects before the other contacts when the front edge connector is removed.3-10.4. 0 to 10 V 10KΩ max source impedance. QAX Reference Accuracy: ± 0. 0 to 5 V 5KΩ max source impedance. QAX Input Signal Requirements Group G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 Signal Requirements -5 to 20 mV (-20 mV to 20 mV at reduced accuracy) 500Ω maximum source impedance.1% of the upper range value ±10µV ±1/2 LSB @ 99. M0-0053 3-178 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . GO2: -12.02% long term (typical) Table 3-49. -25mV to 100mV (-100mV to 100mV at reduced accuracy) 1KΩ max source impedance. 0V normal mode noise. The front edge connector pin pair 24A-B. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line.5mV to 50mV (-50mV to 50mV at reduced accuracy) 500Ω max source impedance. Card Addressing The QAX card address is established by four jumpers on the top. This gap eliminates the possibility of a momentary false address while the card is being removed. card-edge connector. 50 ±2% relative humidity. 3-10. The fifth jumper is used for Address Protection.7% confidence. front. This addressing method allows up to 15 QAX cards or a total of 180 analog points. Reference conditions: Drift: 25 ±1°C ambient temperature.002% per month (typical) 0. 0. 72. QAX Address Offsets (WDPF Systems) = = = = point's hardware offset card address (in hexadecimal) relative point number on card MBU offset Input Identification ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG INPUT 3 ANALOG INPUT 4 ANALOG INPUT 5 ANALOG INPUT 6 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Hexadecimal Address 100H 102H 104H 106H 108H 10AH 10CH 10EH Input Identification ANALOG INPUT 7 ANALOG INPUT 8 ANALOG INPUT 9 ANALOG INPUT 10 ANALOG INPUT 11 ANALOG INPUT 12 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Hexadecimal Address 110H 112H 114H 116H 118H 11AH 11CH 11EH Note that if thermocouple compensation is selected (CD = 71. Since there can only be a maximum of 12 points per QAX. QAX Point Addressing on the QAX Card (WDPF System) To specify the desired grouping. Each QAX requires a block of 16 DIOB addresses. so that it can read the temperature of the terminal block from the QAXT. 73) on any of the analog inputs. It is reserved by the QAX. 5/99 3-179 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-10. the following addresses must be used for the Hardware Offset (HW) field of each analog input: Table 3-50. the Card Type Index (CD) and the Hardware Offset (HW) fields of the analog input point record must be initialized with the proper values to ensure that the point will be processed correctly by the analog scan routines of the DPU. but 16 DIOB addresses taken. ANALOG INPUT 12 must not be used as a field input. The following illustrates point addressing on the QAX card: Each point's hardware offset calculation is as follows: For analog points 1 though 6: HW = 2 [ADD + (PN-1)] + MBU For analog points 7 though 12: HW = 2[ADD + (PN-7)] + 10H + MBU where: HW ADD PN MBU Example For a QAX at card address (ADD) of 80H. 4 of the 16 addresses are not used. The QAX card allows for as many as 12 analog inputs per card. ANALOG INPUT 12 must not be used as a field input. QAX Point Addressing on the QAX Card (Ovation System) To specify the desired grouping.3-10. so that it can read the temperature of the terminal block from the QAXT. It is reserved by the QAX. the Card Type Index (CD) and the Hardware Offset (HW) fields of the analog input point record must be initialized with the proper values to ensure that the point will be processed correctly by the analog scan routines of the Controller. M0-0053 3-180 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . However. Ovation automatically assigns the correct addresses and adjusts for the spare addresses (identified as AVAILABLE in Table 3-51 shown below). but 16 DIOB addresses taken. if needed. QAX Address Offsets (Ovation System) Input Identification ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG INPUT 3 ANALOG INPUT 4 ANALOG INPUT 5 ANALOG INPUT 6 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Hexadecimal Address 100H 102H 104H 106H 108H 10AH 10CH 10EH Input Identification ANALOG INPUT 7 ANALOG INPUT 8 ANALOG INPUT 9 ANALOG INPUT 10 ANALOG INPUT 11 ANALOG INPUT 12 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Hexadecimal Address 110H 112H 114H 116H 118H 11AH 11CH 11EH Note that if thermocouple compensation is selected (CD = 71. the four AVAILABLE addresses can still be used by other Q-Line cards. The QAX card allows for as many as 12 analog inputs per card. Since there can only be a maximum of 12 points per QAX. 4 of the 16 addresses are not used. 73) on any of the analog inputs. Example For a QAX at card address (ADD) of 80H. Each QAX requires a block of 16 DIOB addresses. 72. the following addresses must be used for the Hardware Offset (HW) field of each analog input: Table 3-51. 2923653E − 06 C3 = 0.3034473E + 02 C1 = 0.3972783E − 05 C3 = −0.3189224E + 02 C1 = 0.6138849E + 03 C2 = −0.1155794E − 02 C3 = 0.1180344E + 03 C1 = 0.4401109E − 03 C5 = −0.5174379E − 03 C5 = 0.1325739E + 01 C3 = 0.3599650E − 05 J Chromel/Alumel −18-1093°C 0-2000°F (The upper range may be extended to 2500 with less accuracy) R Platinum + 13% Rhodium 260-1093°C 500-2000°F Platinum + 10% Rhodium 399-1093°C 750-2000°F Copper/Constantan 46-399°C −50-750°F K C0 = 0.6849588E − 02 C4 = −0.1973096E − 01 C0 = 0.3112531E + 02 C1 = 0.6962067E − 01 C4 = −0.2327808E − 02 C5 = 0.5009329E + 00 C4 = 0.1248286E + 02 C0 = 0.6975349E − 04 C5 = 0. For additional information on selecting these coefficients.7422128E − 01 C5 = 0.3607027E + 02 C2 = −0.4110488E − 01 C5 = −0.3167283E + 02 C1 = 0.2261382E − 01 C4 = −0.3344949E + 00 C0 = 0.1616257E − 01 C4 = 0.2003933E + 00 E C0 = 0. Table 3-52. refer to the CI record field discussion in “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131). QAX Thermocouple Information Table 3-52 shows the standard WDPF thermocouple coefficient definitions.3516470E + 03 C1 = 0.1985918E + 03 C2 = −0.4051826E + 01 C5 = 0. Coefficients may also be user-defined.1899300E − 02 C3 = −0.4403191E + 02 C2 = 0.3359373E + 02 C4 = −0.4288617E + 00 C0 = 0.3330646E − 04 S T 5/99 3-181 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .1539774E + 03 C3 = 0.1615839E + 00 C3 = 0. QAX Thermocouple Coefficient Definitions Thermocouple Type B 70% Platinum + 30% Rhodium or 94% Platinum + 6% Rhodium 427-1093°C 800-2000°F Chromel/Constantan −18-982°C 0-1800°F Iron/Constantan −96-760°C −140-1400°F Coefficients C0 = 0.4669328E + 02 C2 = −0.2273716E + 03 C2 = −0.3-10.8362848E + 02 C1 = 0.1206254E + 01 C4 = −0.3030628E + 02 C2 = −0. 3-10. and using a Card Type of 68.50 to + 50 -100 to +100 Units mV mV mV Special Considerations with Card Types 71.50 to + 50 -100 to +100 Units mV mV mV Low-Level Analog Inputs with QAXT Thermocouple Compensation The following card type indices must be used when low-level analog inputs are to be read from the QAX card and thermocouple compensation using the QAXT Temperature Sensor Board is to be performed: Table 3-54. QAX Low-Level Inputs Group/ Rev. 72. Values for CI are listed in the “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131). M0-0053 3-182 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .20 to + 20 . When Card Types 71. G01 G02 G03 Index 71 72 73 Input/Output Input Input Input Voltage Range . 73: 1. 3. The CI field of the analog must be initialized according to the thermocouple type and temperature range. 69. QAX Low-Level Analog Inputs The following card type indices must be used when low-level analog inputs are to be read from the QAX card: Table 3-53. The temperature can be read by using an analog input point addressed to channel 12 of the QAX. 2. QAX Low-Level Inputs with Compensation Group/Rev. or 70. 72.20 to + 20 . The 12th input is reserved for sensing the thermocouple temperature from the QAXT. 73 are used the QAX is limited to handling only 11 analog inputs. The CV field of the analog input record must be initialized to 7 to indicate that a thermocouple conversion is to be done.Range G01 G02 G03 Index 68 69 70 Input/Output Input Input Input Voltage Range . Offset Quality. Logic 0 represents negative overrange if sign bit “S”=1. QAX High-Level Analog Inputs The following card types must be used when high-level analog inputs are to be read from the QAX card: Table 3-55. Sign bit. Logic 1 represents positive overrange if sign bit “S”=0. Logic 1 indicates a negative value. QAX Data Pattern Range Classification Zero Input Positive range Output Data C000 C001 to CFFF 5/99 3-183 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . G04 G05 G06 Index 74 75 76 Input/Output Input Input Input Voltage Range 0 to + 1 0 to + 5 0 to + 10 Units V V V Output Data The analog signal is converted to the output data pattern below and sent to the DIOB as: PCSO DDDD DDDD DDDD Binary digital data representing the analog input voltage. QAX High Level Inputs Group/Rev. Logic 1 indicates that a reasonable offset or zero was read during auto-calibration. Set if the card is warmed up (15 seconds after power up) and the hardware is operating properly.3-10. I’m OK bit. Figure 3-81. QAX Output Data Pattern The following chart shows the data pattern ranges for each of the two channels of output data Table 3-56. as computed by the A/D converter on the QAX Overrange bit. QAX Table 3-56. the resistor provided in the QAXT kit must be installed.3-10. QAX Data Pattern Range Classification Positive Full Scale Positive Overrange Negative Overrange and Open Thermocouple Detect Negative Full Scale Negative range Offset out of range Card Trouble or Not Warmed Up Output Data D000 D001 to DFFF E000 to EFFF F000 F001 to FFFF 8000 to BFFF 0000 to 7FFF 3-10. Controls and Indicators LE1 LE2 Spring sockets for QAXT with half-shell thermocouple compensation SW1 Figure 3-82.5. QAX Card Components Note If the QAXT card is to be used to provide thermocouple compensation. M0-0053 3-184 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Should this LED remain on or flash. 2. LED The QAX card has two LED’s (see Figure 3-82). Ensure that the DIOB power supplies are in tolerance. Changing these jumpers will affect calibration.3-10. return the board to Westinghouse for repair. Ensure that the DIP switch is set according to the valid configurations in the previous tables. LE1 indicates that power is applied to the board. X = Reserved (Don’t Care) Notes Any other switch combination is not valid and the QAX card will not operate. 5/99 3-185 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . LE2 will illuminate for about 1/2 second during power-up and will remain off thereafter. QAX Jumper Configuration Configuration 50Hz operation 60Hz operation No QTB1 1The SW1 X X X SW2 ON OFF ON SW3 OFF ON ON SW4 X X X QTB card is necessary in installations where large variations of the power line frequency exist to provide for large normal mode rejection. For on-line applications. The definitions of the switches are as follows: Table 3-57. therefore. Notes Before returning the board for repair. QAX Switches The QAX card uses a four-position DIP switch (see Figure 3-82 for the location of the switch). The QAX also has several factory preset jumpers. LE2 is used during the initial calibration of the board. check the following: 1. no changes are recommended. QAX Wiring Diagram Figure 3-83 shows inputs grounded at the signal source. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 24A 24B 23B 22B 21B 23A 22A 21A 19B 18B 17B 19A 18A 17A 15B 14B 13B 15A 14A 13A 11B 10B 9B 11A 10A 9A 7B 6B 5B 7A 6A 5A 3B 2B 1B 3A 2A 1A 6 Pair Twisted Shielded Cable (Dotted line indicates shielding) Point 11 Point 10 Point 9 Point 8 Point 7 Point 6 sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + sh + 17 16 18 14 “A” 13 Block 15 Halfshell 11 #2 10 12 8 7 9 5 4 6 2 1 3 17 16 18 “A” 14 Block 13 Halfshell 15 #1 11 10 12 8 7 9 5 4 6 2 1 3 6 Pair Twisted Shielded Cable Point 5 Point 4 Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Point 0 Transducer (-) (+) Figure 3-83. Six holes on each halfshell block have been drilled for this purpose. M0-0053 3-186 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-10. If signals are to be grounded at the system end. insert a #6 screw in the hole located near the shield terminal on halfshell block “A” and add two jumpers as shown in Figure 3-84. QAX 3-10.6. If it is necessary to interface to current loops. 3. and shield pin. R = 5/0.02 = 250Ω. 5/99 3-187 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . (+) (S) (-) (-) (+) (+) (-) Transducer Power Supply Jumpering to shield for loop power by customer but external to transducer. -. Each input requires a +. 2. (Using Ohm’s law of V=IR. rearranging to V/I = R. with a Group 5 card at 5V and 20mA current. QAX (+) (S) (-) (+) Transducer (-) Jumpering to shield for loop power developed internal to transducer. For example. Figure 3-84. The DIOB address and address protection jumpers are located on this connector. QAX Shield Wiring Notes 1.3-10. a 250Ω resistor is used. appropriate termination resistors will be required to be placed across to (+) and (-) inputs on the “A” terminal block to convert the current to the proportional voltage. The QAX requires the use of the Enhanced Q-line B cabinet and terminations (2 halfshell termination blocks per card) (see Figure 3-83). The density of the card requires unique cabling to the field termination half shells. Field Signals interface to the standard 56 pin Q-line front edge connector. QAX Recommended Configuration M0-0053 3-188 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C Q416 Zone H Q422 Q324 Zone F QAX #14 . QAX Recommended Standard B-Cabinet Configuration The following Q-Crate configuration is recommended when using 15 or less QAX cards. B-Cabinet 1 Zone A 5 0 Halfshell Terminal Blocks 2 11 3 4 5 6 QAX #1 Q102 QAX #2 Q104 QAX #3 Q110 QAX #4 Q112 QAX #9 Q210 QAX #10 Q212 QAX #15 Q310 Q312 Q316 QAX #5 Q118 QAX #6 Q120 QAX #11 Q218 QAX #12 Q220 Q318 Q320 Q418 Q420 Q322 Q424 5/99 6 Channel Number Zone B Zone C Q-Crate Location QAX #7 Q202 Zone D Slot Number QAX #8 Q204 Zone E QAX #13 Q302 Q304 Q402 Q406 Zone G Q410 Q414 Q404 Q408 Q412 Figure 3-85.3-10. 3-10. QAX For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CARD 2A 3A 1A 2B 3B 1B 6A 7A 5A 6B 7B 5B 10A 11A 9A 10B 11B 9B EDGE-CONNECTOR A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) (SHIELD) POINT 1 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 2 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 3 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 4 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 5 (+) (−) POINT 0 TRANSDUCER (+) A 14A 15A 13A 14B 15B 13B 18A 19A 17A 18B 19B 17B 22A 23A 21A 22B 23B 21B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) (SHIELD) POINT 7 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 8 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 9 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 10 (+) (−) (SHIELD) POINT 11 (+) (−) POINT 6 TRANSDUCER (+) Note The QAW inputs may be grounded in the field or at the B cabinet as shown. Figure 3-86. QAX CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-189 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The daughter boards contain the A/D circuitry. The features of each daughter board are provided by the custom resistor network. Description The 12 point analog input module may consist of the mother board (referred to as the QAX) with a set 12 low level daughter boards (referred to as QAXD boards). M0-0053 3-190 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5mV to 50mV (-50mV to 50mV at reduced accuracy) -25mV to 100mV (-100mV to 100mV at reduced accuracy) High-Level Groups GO4 GO5 GO6 0 to 1V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V Note All daughter boards on the configured module must be the same voltage range. The QAX mother board contains the DIOB interface.3-11. The resistor networks are used to generate calibration voltages from the precision voltage reference and to scale the preamplifier so that the output of the preamplifier provides the same voltage swing for all groups. Table 3-58. QAXD Card Groups and Capabilities Group Range Low-Level Groups GO1 GO2 GO3 -5mV to 20mV (-20mV to 20mV at reduced accuracy) -12.1. the timing and power control for the daughter boards and the termination and signal conditioning for the field interface. QAXD 3-11. QAXD QAX Digital Daughter Board (Style 4256A65G01 through G06) 3-11. The daughterboards attach to the mother board via SIMM connectors located on the QAX mother board. the processor for data manipulation and buffering. this resistor is absent. pulled-up. A 1 Ω resistor is installed on the high-level board between pin 6 at the SIMM connector and logic ground. Therefore. QAXD Counter Nodes Node Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 VIN High Level VIN Low level REF (+100% full scale) ZERO (0% full scale) N/A OTD (-150% full scale) BIAS (0% full scale) REF (+100% full scale) Since the low-level card has the OTD (open thermocouple detect node) and the order of the other nodes is slightly different. All 12 “pin sixes” on the mother board are daisy chained. The +/-15 volt power supply on each daughter board uses shunt regulation to provide a low input to output voltage dropout.) and the counter is reset by longer stoppages of PSD (~194 µ sec. To provide a load for the discharge circuit (FET and Schottkey diode on the mother board). The counter nodes are different depending on whether the card is high-level or low-level as shown in the Table 3-59: Table 3-59.). As mentioned in the QAX reference sheets. Also the capacitor discharge circuit used to generate the frequency input pulse for the 12 counters on the mother board operates similar to the QAV/ QAW. 5/99 3-191 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . the PSD signal has a 25% duty cycle which necessitates the need for a transformer discharge circuit. When bit 4 of the status register is logic 1/0. a 150 Ω resistor is provided between the transformer primary and pin 4 of the SIMM connector. low/ high-level boards are present. The integrator/synchronous comparator circuit used to generate the voltage to frequency conversion operate essentially the same as the corresponding circuit on the QAV/QAW. QAXD The input multiplexer switches between the input voltage and the calibration voltages provided by the precision voltage reference and the resistor network. On the low-level board. and routed to bit 4 of the mother board’s status register. it is necessary for the QAX mother board’s processor to know which type of daughter board is installed. pin 6 is essentially grounded on the high-level board and left floating on the low-level board. Like the QAV/QAW the counter is incremented by short duration stoppages of PSD (~13 µ sec.3-11. While the high-level boards can read negative values. The approximate counts for each QAXD as a percentage of full scale over a 200 msec sampling time is as follows: Percent of full scale +100 0 -100 Counts 12.600 8.400 4.3-11. no accuracy specification is provided at this time. QAXD The QAXD cards provide consistent counts among all groups on a % full scale basis.200 M0-0053 3-192 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the “B” and “A” cabinet “PG” grounds must be tied together. The power return is via the “B” cabinet’s “PG” ground. +12V Voltage Reference Zero Adjust Gain Adjust Common Sensor (Temperature to current conversion) Common -12V J1 +12V Common Switched Capacitor Converter Voltage Divider Output Op Amp Common Figure 3-87. With this configuration. QAXT Terminal Block Temperature Sensing (Style 4256A86G01) 3-12. QAXT Block Diagram 5/99 3-193 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QAXT facilitates “Cold Junction” or “Reference Junction” compensation in a QAX based thermocouple input temperature measuring system.1. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QAXT printed circuit board provides temperature sensing of the terminal block (at the point where the thermocouple wire is terminated). QAXT 3-12. The QAXT printed circuit board complements the QAX card when used to measure temperatures with thermocouple inputs. The QAX card powers the QAXT via the Channel #12 (Shield) (+12V).3-12. The QAX senses the QAXT output between the (+) and (-) input terminals. QAXT 3-12. Note Due to operating limits of the QAXT. • • • + 20 mV +50 mV +100 mV The output of the QAXT is automatically scaled to Engineering Units. M0-0053 3-194 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . +0.2.8 V 10.0 V Nominal 13.0°C over the ambient temperature range of 0 . This means that in any of the three configurations. 3-12. QAXT Accuracy Parameter Absolute error Drift Specification* +1. QAXT Power Supply Voltages (from QAX) Minimum 10. the “0” output from the QAXT represents 0°C and the (+ Full Scale) output equals 100°C. (For a listing of thermocouples and their temperature ranges see “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131) or QAX card reference pages in this manual).1 V Maximum Table 3-61. Features The QAXT provides half-shell temperature compensation for the QAX card.1°C . the temperature output is limited to the range of 0°C to 60°C.3-12. Specifications Table 3-60.3. The QAXT can be configured to match the input ranges of any of the following three “low level” QAX scales.60 °C.typical *Does not include errors introduced during initial card calibration and errors of the QAX card. Controls and Indicators Header (JS1) 150% of Full Size 6 4 2 5 3 1 Jumper (J1) (+) SHLD (-) Figure 3-88.3-12.Remote I/O Assembly ± 50 mV .Remote I/O Assembly ± 100 mV -Remote I/O Assembly 3-12. QAXT Card Components 5/99 3-195 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAX/QAXT Based Thermocouple Compensation Kit Group Usage QAX/QAXT Based Thermocouple Compensation Kit 3A99722 G01 3A99722 G02 3A99722 G03 3A99722 G04 3A99722 G05 3A99722 G06 Range ± 20 mV .4.Standard half-shells ± 20 mV .Standard half-shells ± 100 mV . QAXT Table 3-62.Standard half-shells ± 50 mV . The jumper selects one of the three possible ranges (20. The cable shield supplies power from the QAX. not vertically) Point Number 1 12 Termination Point Terminal 1. 2.position header (JS1) (see Figure 3-88). 3-12. Scales to 0.0 mV/°C for Group 03 and 06 QAX cards. Scales to 0. QAXT Jumpers Header Reference Designator JS1 JS1 JS1 Posts Shorted *1-2 3-4 5-6 Result Scales to 1. jumper selectable. QAXT Terminations Terminal Indicator (+) SHLD (-) Signal Output +12V Common Description 20 mV. 50 or 100 mV) to match the QAXT to the corresponding QAX Group: Table 3-63. Half shells for QAX cable must be adjacent (side-by-side. Wiring Table 3-64. The “B” type cabinets must be equipped with an isolated bus bar (1B29912 Sub 2 or later) (see Figure 3-90). QAXT Jumpers The QAXT board contains a dual row.5. top of the adjacent (right) half-shell M0-0053 3-196 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . B-Cabinet Installation 1. *Default QAXT jumper configuration. Output reference. A program jumper (J1) is used to short posts on the adjacent rows of the header. This bus bar must be connected to the “A” cabinet PG ground to facilitate the power return for the QAXT. 18.3-12. 17. 50 mV. bottom of left half-shell Terminals 16. 3 . or 100 mV Full Scale.5 mV/°C for Group 02 and 05 QAX cards.2 mV/°C for Group 01 and 04 QAX cards. 3-12. WESTINGHOUSE MADE IN U. This QAX card (with R75 jumper installed) is no longer exchangeable with a standard QAX card. QAX Card with R75 Jumper Installed 5/99 3-197 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .A. R75 R76 Install Jumper R69 LE1 POK R70 LE2 CAL REMOVING MODULES WILL VOID CALIBRATION QAX Card Figure 3-89.S. with the QAXT card. QAXT Installing R75 Jumper A jumper must be installed across R75 on the QAX card (as shown in Figure 3-89) when using the 12th input point on a QAX card. QAXT Standard Half-Shell Cabinet Installation M0-0053 3-198 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-12. QAXT Ground Bar Note: Component side of QAXT towards terminal block. QAXT Card 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Half-Shell Protective Cover Figure 3-90. QAXT Remote I/O Half-Shell Cabinet Installation 5/99 3-199 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QAXT Ground Bar Note: Component side of QAXT towards terminal block.3-12. QAXT Card 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Half-Shell Protective Cover Figure 3-91. DIOB Clamp Circuit Level Shift and DMA Clamp “UCLOCK” On-Card Power Supplies Bus Discharge Circuit “G01” MBU Power DIOB Bus Expansion To/From Adjacent QBE cards +12 VDC Common Figure 3-92. QBE Q-Line Bus Extender (Style 7379A84G01 through G02) 3-13.3-13. The QBE card. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QBE card links DIOB backplanes between different card cages. This card provides DIOB extension within the microprocessor-based or WDPF process control systems while reducing transient potential differences between card crate grounds to a safe level. QBE Block Diagram M0-0053 3-200 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .1. QBE 3-13. provides a continuous DIOB for multiple card-cage system configurations (see Figure 3-92). together with compatible flat-flex cable assemblies. and transfer the power to the printed circuit backplane DIOB power conductors. The problems that occur are data errors and driver latchup. or card insertion. When a DIOB is extended beyond a single printed circuit backplane. The thirty-four conductor Distributed I/O Bus (DIOB) is the protocol and structure for Q-Line I/O data collection and distribution. The QBE card is designed to link the printed circuit DIOB backplanes in different card cages together and at the same time reduce transient potential differences between card crate ground to a safe level (see Figure 3-93).3-13. thus providing a continuous bus for multiple card cages. Studs mounted on the rear of each DIOB printed circuit backplane receive power from the 13 VDC power supply. These transient ground potential differences may be due to industrial noise. A DIOB may be extended beyond a single card cage backplane by transferring the 25 DIOB signals to adjacent card cage backplanes via the QBE card and compatible flat-flex cable assemblies. byte-oriented digital exchange of information between a multiplexing controller and a variety of Q-line point cards. the DIOB consists of a number of printed circuit backplanes (one per card cage) which are linked together by interposing paddle cards and flat-flex cable assemblies. QBE 3-13. A two-point terminal block located near the upper front edge of the QBE card is used to supply power to the Multibus-to-DIOB interface card (MBU/MSQ). it becomes susceptible to problems caused by transient differences between card cage DIOB ground potentials.2. The DIOB permits an eight-bit. but has no provision for distributing or transferring power to the DIOB. 5/99 3-201 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . IEEE surge. Signal-level clamping for all DIOB signals. Signal-level shifting for signal UCLOCK. Features The QBE card provides the following functions for Q-line applications: • • • • Signal transfer from one Q-line card crate to another with provision to eliminate driver latch-up Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB) discharge to eliminate data errors. Physically. The QBE card also links the DIOB grounds in each cage together. Q-Line System Using QBE Card Interfacing The QBE card’s 34-pin J1 backplane connector is normally inserted into the DIOB backplane’s right-most card-edge connector. To 50-pin DIOB Edge Connector of the MBU/MSQ Card (Redundant DPU Only) Figure 3-93. On the front edge of the QBE. the DIOB is controlled by a Multibus controller card. transferring the 25 DIOB signals via the cable assemblies to QBE cards located in adjacent card cages (see Figure 3-94). The DIOB grounds of adjacent card crates are linked together by the same QBE cards and cable assemblies. two 50-pin connectors (J2 and J3) interface with 50-conductor flat-flex cable assemblies.3-13. Multicrate. The MBU or MSQ card serves as an interface between the DIOB and the Multibus. M0-0053 3-202 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Note The QBE card will not interface to the front edge connectors of the QMT. QBE 13 VDC Primary Supply 13 VDC Backup Supply DIOB Backplane To 50-pin DIOB Edge Connector of the MBU/MSQ Card G01 QBE Card J2 Connector J3 Connector Q-Line Card Crate 50-conductor Flat-Flex Cable Assembly G01 QBE Card J2 J3 DIOB Backplane To MBU/MSQ Card Power Terminals (Redundant DPU Only) DIOB Backplane G01 QBE Card J2 J3 Note: In this configuration. or QPP cards. Typical. QPD. the QBE card “pulls down” the DIOB if the frequency of DIOB word cycles is less than 200/sec. The QBE card is available in two assembly groups: • • Group 1 provides DIOB signal transfer and clamping. level shifted to a +5 VDC level (UCLOCK) and is transferred to the card cage’s DIOB backplane via the QBE card’s J1 connector. The card cage that houses the UCLOCK signal source has a QBE mounted in it that takes the +5 VDC UCLOCK signal off the card cage DIOB backplane. and distributes twelve volt power to the MBU/MSQ card (see Figure 3-95). UCLOCK is a nominal +5 VDC logic signal which is inverted and level shifted to a +11 VDC logic level for transmission over the flat-flex cable assemblies that link the QBE cards of adjacent crates together. 5/99 3-203 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . UCLOCK is transferred to the QBE card’s J2 and J3 front edge connectors where it is transmitted to other QBE cards on the same DIOB. A word cycle involves the transfer of two-bytes of data between the controller and a point card. UCLOCK level shifting. inverts it. QBE If the QBE card’s fuse blows. bus discharging of the DIOB data lines (UDAT 0-7) and the DEV-BUSY line. All DIOB signals except UCLOCK are nominally +11 VDC logic signals. The user may use jumpers to select what type of UCLOCK level shift is required for a specific QBE card.3-13. Group 2 provides the same functions as Group 1 minus the DIOB discharging feature. UCLOCK is then inverted. These QBE cards receive the +11 VDC UCLOCK signal via their J2 and J3 front edge connectors. and shifts it to +11 VDC level (UCLOCK). M0-0053 3-13. QBE Figure 3-94. QBE Card Functional Block Diagram To DIOB Crate Backplane 25 24 J1 24 Level Shift and Clamp Circuits MBU/ MSQ Card Power 25 +12 VDC DIOB Common Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C UCLOCK Clamp Circuit (All DIOB Signals Except UCLOCK) UCLOCK DIOB Signals and Common to and from Adjacent QBE Card Data-gate R/W Bus Discharge Circuit (Group 1 Only) 9 3-204 5/99 J2 15 Volt Supply 0.8 Volt Supply 5 Volt Supply UDAT0-7 and DEV-BUSY J3 . 20 VDC 5/99 3-205 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .1 VDC Table 3-66. Specifications Power Requirements Table 3-65.0 VDC -- Maximum 13.3.4 VDC 12.3-13. QBE Read Existing Point Card Read Missing Point Card Write to a Point Card Data Gate Input Output R/W Data line voltage without bus discharging Read “One” Typical DIOB Data line (UDAT 0 -7) Read “Zero” UDAT 0-7 BUS CLAMP ENABLE Signal (TP1) Clamp Initiation Delay Figure 3-95.80 VDC Maximum 5.4 VDC Nominal + 13. QBE Timing Diagram of the Operation of the Bus Discharge Circuit 3-13.1 VDC 13. QBE Power Supply Voltage Minimum Primary Voltage: Optional Backup: 12. QBE Internal Power Supply Voltages Minimum 5 VDC Supply 4. 6 VDC 10.6 VDC 2.2 VDC Condition IOL = 5 mA IOH = 0 mA M0-0053 3-206 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5 VDC Maximum 1.2 mA IOH = 5.0 VDC −0. QBE Table 3-66.4 VDC 5.6 watts UCLOCK Signal Static Parameters 0.20 mA VI = 2.10 mA −1.5 VDC Table 3-68.0 mA 0.3-13.0 VDC Max. Voltage Output VOL Low Voltage Output VOH High Voltage Input VIL Low Voltage Input VIH High Input Current IIH High Input Current IIL Low -0.0 VDC Condition IOL = 15.6 watts Group 2: 4.60 VDC 13.00 VDC 16.50 VDC Table 3-67. 0. 1.0 VDC VI = 0. QBE +11 VDC to +5 VDC Level Shift Circuit Min.6 VDC Max. QBE Internal Power Supply Voltages (Cont’d) Minimum Clamp Voltage Supply 15 VDC Supply Current (Supplied by the DIOB) Group 1: 500 mA maximum Group 2: 350 mA maximum Maximum Power Required Group 1: 6.8 VDC 5. Voltage Output VOL Low Voltage Output VOH High −0.2 VDC 0. QBE +5 VDC to +11 VDC Level Shift Circuit Min. Figure 3-97 through Figure 3-99 show the required jumper configurations.5 VDC −0. Controls and Indicators LEDs QBE PWR MBU PWR Jumpers Figure 3-96. Voltage Output VOH High Voltage Input VIL Low Voltage Input VIH High 2.5 VDC Max.0 VDC 3-13. The MBU PWR LED indicates (when lit) that the MBU/MSQ card is intact and that DIOB power for the MBU/MSQ card is available. QBE +11 VDC to +5 VDC Level Shift Circuit Min. Receive Mode. QBE Table 3-68.4. Jumpers Jumpers are used to select the Transmit Mode.3-13.6 VDC 8. The QBE PWR LED indicates (when lit) that the QBE card fuse is intact and that the card is receiving power from the DIOB power supply. QBE Card Components Light Emitting Diodes (LED) The QBE card uses two LEDs shown in Figure 3-96. Condition IOH = −8 mA 3. 5/99 3-207 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . or No Level Shift Mode for the DIOB signal UCLOCK. QBE O G NO LEVEL SHIFT UCLOCK O H JU5 (ITEM 54) C XMIT A O E F RECV XMIT D F O D XMIT 3-208 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C JU5 (ITEM 54) RECV O B Figure 3-97. QBE Transmit Mode Jumper Configuration O G NO LEVEL SHIFT UCLOCK O H JU5 (ITEM 54) E RECV C XMIT O A RECV JU5 (ITEM 54) B Figure 3-98.3-13. QBE Receive Mode Jumper Configuration M0-0053 5/99 . Figure 3-94 shows the location of the J1. QBE J1 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names Solder Side Signals PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND UADD 0 UADD 2 UADD 4 UADD 6 HI-LO UNIT GROUND Card-Edge Pin Numbers 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Component Side Signals PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND UADD 1 UADD 3 UADD 5 UADD 7 R/W** DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY 5/99 3-209 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Table 3-69. Signals are output from the QBE card on the J2 and J3 connectors. J2 and J3 connectors.3-13. Table 3-69 gives the J1 connector pin assignments and signal names and Table 3-70 gives the J2 and J3 connector pin assignments and signal names. QBE No Level Shift Mode Jumper Configuration Signal Interface DIOB signals are input to the QBE card through the DIOB backplane to the J1 connector. QBE NO G LEVEL SHIFT UCLOCK JU5 H O C RECV XMIT O A O E RECV O E XMIT O D O B Figure 3-99. 3-13. M0-0053 3-210 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QBE Table 3-69. QBE J1 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names (Cont’d) Solder Side Signals UDAT 0 UDAT 2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND UCAL UCLOCK* Card-Edge Pin Numbers 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Component Side Signals UDAT 1 UDAT 3 UDAT 5 UDAT 7 UFLAG USYNC GROUND *UCLOCK is a +5 VDC TTL level signal **Formally signal DATA-DIR. 3-13. QBE J2 and J3 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names Solder Side Signals GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND Card-Edge Pin Numbers 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 Component Side Signals UADD 0 UADD 1 UADD 2 UADD 3 UADD 4 UADD 5 UADD 6 UADD 7 HI-LO R/W** UNIT DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT 0 UDAT 1 UDAT 2 UDAT 3 UDAT 4 UDAT 5 UDAT 6 UDAT 7 UFLAG UCAL USYNC UCLOCK* *UCLOCK is a +11 VDC CMOS level signal **Formally signal DATA-DIR. 5/99 3-211 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QBE Table 3-70. Description The QBI card had been superseded by the QID card.3-14.1. refer to the following table to determine the equivalence between QID and QBI cards: Table 3-71. QBI QID Card Equivalents QBI Group G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 Equivalent QID Group G01 G08 G09 G03 G05 G05 G07 G07 G09 G03 G12 Input Level 5 VDC 12 VDC 12 VAC/DC 24 VAC/DC 48 VAC/DC 48 VDC 125 VDC 120 VAC/DC 12 VAC/DC 24 VAC/DC 120 VAC Inputs 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 M0-0053 3-212 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . For new applications. QBI Digital Input (Style 2840A80G01 through G11) 3-14. QBI 3-14. Eleven different QBI groups (G01 through G11) provide a variety of input voltage ranges (Table 3-72). Features The QBI has the following features: • • • • • • • IEEE surge-withstand protection. The common wire can be connected to either + or − input supply voltage 5/99 3-213 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Optional 5V. 48V or 120V input ranges. Any DIOB controller card can read the QBI. 500 VDC common mode voltage. QBI The QBI card provides signal conditioning for 16 digital voltage process inputs.3-14. Optical isolation for each input. Figure 3-100. and interfaces these signals to the DIOB (see Figure 3-100). 24V. Separate status indicating LED’s for each input. QBI Block Diagram 3-14. The 16 single-ended (one-wire) inputs share a common line. 12V.2. Table 3-72. latched into a buffer.1 msec 0. The signal is conditioned. QBI Card Group Specifications Group Number G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 Input Level 5 V Logic 12 V Logic 12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC 120 VAC 12 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC Propagation Time (Typical) 0. Each signal is rectified and turns on an optical isolator. a LED lights to indicate the digital input status. and upon request. As data appears at the latch inputs. QBI The field signals enter the card through the 16 single-ended inputs.1 msec 4 msec 4 msec 4 msec 4 msec 4 msec 11 msec 4 msec 4 msec 17 msec Common Line Connection +5 VDC +12 VDC +12 VDC +24 VDC +48 VDC 48 VDC RETURN 125 VDC RETURN – 12 VDC RETURN 24 VDC RETURN – IEEE SWC No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes M0-0053 3-214 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . transferred to the DIOB.3-14. 1 0. DIOB Select 1 Hi-lo Optical Coupling And R-c Filtering Point 15 Signal Conditioning (16) 16 2:1 Multiplexer Point 0 16 Circuit Common Card Edge Indicators Enable 1 Data-dir Jumper Address Selection Address Comparator DIOB Ground Figure 3-101.25 16.1 1.2 0. Table 3-73.0 7. Specifications Input specifications are defined in Table 3-73.1 1.6 9.19 0.3-14.2 7.0 8.5 8.75 7.0 1 2. (Nominal Voltage) Min/Max (Watts) – – 1.75 Power In Propagation Front End-All with Time Units (msec) On.19 0.5 2.2 5/99 3-215 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C Address Data 16 8 Bus Drivers M0-0053 .3.0 7. QBI Block Diagram A functional block diagram of the QBI is shown in Figure 3-101.35 ON Input Current (mA dc) Min/Max 7.0 16.19 2.25 16.5 3 4 0.5 16.3 4.0 16. QBI Card Input Specifications Group G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 ON Input Voltage (VDC) Min/Max 4 10 10 20 40 6 15 15 30 60 OFF OFF Input Input Voltage Current (VDC) (mA dc) 2 2.5 7.3 2.0 0. QBI Card Functional Block Diagram 3-14. 75 16.0* 0.0 1. 120 VAC high threshold (17 msec propagation).2 Power In Propagation Front End-All with Time Units (msec) On.2 19.5* Notes * VAC RMS or mA ac RMS as indicated Group Characteristics Refer to the following table.0* 14.1 VDC M0-0053 3-216 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .0 19. 120 VAC (11 msec propagation).3 4.6 19.0* 16.35 0.0 7.0 0.0 7.8* 0. 12 VDC logic with +12 VDC common line connection (4 msec propagation). 48 VDC logic with +48 VDC common line connection (4 msec propagation).2* 7. (Nominal Voltage) Min/Max (Watts) 1. Power Supply Primary: +13 VDC + 0.0 16.0 9.5 7.0 30.1 1.0 43. 24 VDC logic with +24 VDC common line connection (4 msec propagation).0 2.1 msec propagation).5 7.0 7. 24 VDC with 24 VDC return common line connection (4 msec propagation). QBI Card Input Specifications (Cont’d) Group G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 ON Input Voltage (VDC) Min/Max 40 100 100* 10 20 100* 60 150 150* 15 30 150* OFF OFF Input Input Voltage Current (VDC) (mA dc) 4 6 6* 2. QBI Table 3-73.0 6.6 3 26.3-14.25 8.1 5.17 2.0 2. Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description 5 VDC logic with +5 VDC common line connection (0.0 7. 12 VDC logic with +12 VDC common line connection (0.1 2.5 1. 48 VDC with 48 VDC return common line connection (4 msec propagation) 125 VDC with 125 VDC return common line connection (4 msec propagation).8* ON Input Current (mA dc) Min/Max 8.75 14. 12 VDC with 12 VDC return common line connection (4 msec propagation).5 0.1 msec propagation). 4.3-14. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line.2 VDC Current: 200 mA (maximum) supplied by DIOB Electrical Environment IEEE Surge withstand capability (not available on G01 and G02). QBI Backup: +12.6 VDC +0. Example of a QBI Card Address Jumper Assembly Connections and Field Cabling The digital inputs enter the QBI card on the front-edge connector. QBI Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Allocations Input Digital Bit Number B15 PC Card Edge Pin 17B Field Terminal Block Terminal Number 17 5/99 3-217 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Blank: Blank: Jumper: Blank: Blank: Blank: Card-edge Connector (Front View) Card Address = 00100011 (X' 23') Jumper: Jumper: A7 = 0 A6 = 0 A5 = 1 A4 = 0 A3 = 0 A2 = 0 A1 = 1 A0 = 1 Figure 3-102. Card Addressing and Data Output The QBI card address is established by eight jumpers on the front card-edge connector as shown in Figure 3-102. Table 3-74. Common Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or peak ac (line frequency) 3-14. The pin assignments for the connector are listed in Table 3-74. 3-14. and G05 is tied to the positive supply voltage. M0-0053 3-218 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . G08 and G11 are used for AC inputs and the common terminal is tied to one of the 120 VAC supply leads. G02. Note The common terminal (terminal 1) for G01. QBI Table 3-74. G07. G04. QBI Card Front-Edge Connector Pin Allocations (Cont’d) Input Digital Bit Number B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Common or Return PC Card Edge Pin 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1A and 1B Field Terminal Block Terminal Number 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Figure 3-103 through Figure 3-106 show typical wiring to the various groups of the QBI card. G09 and G10. G03. The common terminal (terminal 1) is tied to the negative supply voltage for G06. Typical G01 and G02 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-219 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QB1 G01 and G02 POINT 15 16 POINT 0 COMMON + Logic Voltage G01 5V G02 12 V Logic Voltage Figure 3-103. cable length is limited by: Cable Stray Capacitance: 15. (typical) Maximum Cable Length: 250 ft. QBI Field Cable Length When 120 VAC is used to wet contacts (G08 and G11).000 pF (maximum) Stray Capacitance: 50 pF/ft.3-14. G04 and G05 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram Figure 3-105. G09 and G10 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-220 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Typical G03.3-14. Typical G06. QBI Figure 3-104. G07. QBI Figure 3-106. Typical G08 and G11 QBI Card – Point Wiring Diagram 3-14. Controls and Indicators Separate status-indicating LEDs for each input are located at the front of the card (see Figure 3-107). LED Detail LEDs PWR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 3-107.5. QBI Card Components 5/99 3-221 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-14. QBI Wiring Diagram Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-108): Group 3 4 5 TP Bus .Black (QBI -1A) + 12 V + 24 V + 48 V TP Bus . Installation Data Sheet 1 of 1 CARD 20B 20A 19B 19A BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 3/4 A B 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 INTERNAL BUS STRIP 5A 1A EDGE-CONNECTOR BLACK CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS RED TP BUS + ~ − Figure 3-108.6.Red (QBI -19B) + 12 V Return + 24 V Return + 48 V Return M0-0053 3-222 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-14. QBI 3-14. Black (QBI -1A) 48 V Return 125 V Return 120 VAC (Hot) 12 V Return 24 V Return 120 VAC (HOT) TP Bus .Red (QBI -19B) + 48 V + 125 V 120 VAC (Neutral) 12 V 24 V 120 VAC (Neutral) 5/99 3-223 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QBI Group 6 7 8 9 10 11 TP Bus .3-14. stepping motors. RTN 0 15 Source Field Process Outputs Figure 3-109. QBO 3-15. field-level signals for relay coils..1. QBO Digital Output (Style 2840A79G01 through G05) 3-15. etc. DIOB Data Address Data Latch Bus Drivers Address Decoder Optical Isolators Card-Edge LED Indicators Flash/ Non-Flash Select Current Sinking Drivers . within the plant environment (see Figure 3-109).. QBO Block Diagram M0-0053 3-224 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . An on card read/write latch provides an 8-bit memory function. Description G01 through G05 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QBO card receives DIOB signals and provides up to 48 VDC.. 300 mA. lamps.3-15. This card contains 16 current sinking transistor outputs with a common return line. This card also contains switch-selectable dead-computer time-out and flasher circuitry. • • • • • G01 provides a high-voltage output and a capability of flashing the output and varying the dead computer timeout G02 has high-voltage outputs with steady operation (no flash) and a set value of 62 msec for timeout G03 provides logic outputs and is capable of flashing the output and varying the timeout G04 has logic level outputs with steady operation (no flash) and a set value of 62 msec for timeout G05 is the same as G03 except that a 10 kΩ on card pull-up resistor is connected between pins 19A and 19B. 5/99 3-225 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QBO Card complies with the DIOB interface design specifications. bus. offering a variety of output parameters.2. QBO 3-15. Features This card provides the following features: • • • • • • • • IEEE surge-withstand protection Read/write output data operation On-card power-up. and dead-computer time-out resets Card-edge LED indicator for each output Optional flashing output to drive field process lamps Switch-selectable time-out periods Switch-selectable flasher periods Compatible with any DIOB controller The QBO card is available in five groups (G01 through G05).3-15. This card may be used in a Q-crate assembly. QBO Block Diagram A functional block diagram of the QBO is shown in Figure 3-110. QBO Detailed Block Diagram M0-0053 3-226 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C UNIT OR RESET LATCH 5/99 .3-15. TWO BITS RATE ONE BIT DUTY CYCLE POINT 0 SUPPLY LED’s OPTICAL ISOLATORS (16) (16) THREE BITS RATE SELECT. POINT 15 (CLAMP) CURRENT SINKING DRIVERS RETURN ONE BIT ENABLE. ONE BIT DISABLE/ENABLE POWERUP CARD REFRESH 4 FLASH/ NON-FLASH SELECTION FRONT CONNECTOR EIGHT JUMPER ARRANGEMENT 4 DRIVERS LATCH COMPARE ~ ~ EIGHT DATA ADDRESS Figure 3-110. 3.3-15.1 mA (maximum) .2 VDC Current: 250 mA (maximum) supplied by DIOB Electrical Environment IEEE Surge withstand capability Common Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or peak AC (line frequency) 5/99 3-227 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .6 V + 0.5 VDC (maximum) 16 mA (maximum) Power Supply • • • Primary: +13 V +0. Specifications Output Capabilities Parameter OFF Voltage OFF Current ON Voltage ON Current G01 and 2 60 VDC (maximum) .5 mA (maximum) 2 VDC (maximum) 300 mA (maximum) G03. QBO 3-15. 4.1 VDC Backup: +12. and 5 20 VDC (maximum) . The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line (Figure 3-111).4. QBO Card Address Jumper Assembly M0-0053 3-228 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QBO 3-15.3-15. card-edge connector. CARD ADDRESS = 11001010 (X ‘CA’) JUMPER: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: A7 = 1 A6 = 1 A5 = 0 A4 = 0 A3 = 1 A2 = 0 A1 = 1 A0 = 0 CARD EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) Figure 3-111. front. Card Addressing The QBO card address is established by eight jumpers on the top. These relay contacts may be connected to the AC mains. QBO Supply Io Load 15 + − Power Supply Io Point 15 (16) Load 0 Point 0 Return Ir (Max) = 16 X Io Figure 3-112.3-15. The digital outputs are brought out on the front edge of the card. field wiring that carries the AC mains must have double insulation. 5/99 3-229 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C ~ ~ M0-0053 . For CE Mark certified systems. QBO Field Connections Figure 3-112 shows typical field wiring for a QBO card. QBO Typical Point Wiring Note The QBO may be used to drive the coils of interposing relays. The contact allocations are listed in Table 3-75. QBO Digital Output Contact Allocations Output Digital Bit No. Field Terminal Block Terminal No. P-C Card Edge Pin No. QBO Table 3-75.3-15. SUPPLY CLAMP B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 RETURN 19A and B 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1A and B 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M0-0053 3-230 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . G03. QBO Card Components Separate LEDs for each output are located at the front of the card to indicate the status of each output. G02 and G04 cards have a steady only operation If the QBO card is not periodically updated. QBO 3-15.3-15. the card resets. QBO Card Reset Switch Position Dip Switch A B C D Reset Time 62 ms + 20% 125 ms + 20% 250 ms + 20% 500 ms + 20% 1 sec + 20% 2 sec + 20% 4 sec + 20% 8 sec + 20% No time out. data latched (X = don’t care) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5/99 3-231 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The update period is set by four DIP switches as given in Table 3-76 and shown in Figure 3-113. Table 3-76. Controls and Indicators LEDs A B C D Output Flash Switch Update A B C D Period Switch Figure 3-113. and G05. The flash option is available on G01.5. 25 flashes/sec 1 = 0.5 flashes/sec 0 = 1. C = Result Switch A Switch B Switch C Switch D 0. 33% OFF M0-0053 3-232 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QBO For the QBO card groups that have optional output flashing. Table 3-77.3-15. open = output steady 1. 67% OFF 1 = 67% ON. DIP switches select the rate at which the outputs are turned on and off. Table 3-77 lists the DIP switch positions and available selections.625 flashes/sec 0 = 33% ON. QBO card components are shown in Figure 3-113. closed = output flashing 0 0 1 1 0 = 5 flashes/sec 1 = 2. QBO DIP Switch Positions Switch B. 6. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 External Power Supply - + Terminal Block #6-32 Screw Half Shell Extension (B-block) Card 20B 20A 19B 19A Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Load B 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 3/4 A Common Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Customer Connections Edge-connector Internal Bus Strip Figure 3-114.3-15. QBO Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-233 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QBO 3-15. QBO For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR 19 20 PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 .3-15.75A 19 20 PE 19 20 External Power + A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Figure 3-115. QBO CE MARK Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-234 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 02 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-Line Current Amplifier (QCA) card provides variable offset and current amplification stages for Q-line servo driver cards used to drive EH actuators. Two channels are available on the QCA. redundant outputs on each channel 0 to -10V 0 to 12.5V 400mA 250mA 50 ohms 500mA voltage input. QCA 3-16. nonredundant channel outputs Group 2 0 to -10V 5/99 3-235 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . true current output. only one of the channel outputs (Coil Drive A) is necessary to drive the actuator. For an actuator having redundant coils. voltage output. The current boosting stage for each channel of the QCA is powered by + 21V and . QCA Current Amplifier (Style 3A99118G01 through G02) 3-16. Description Groups 01.1. both channel outputs (Coil Drive A and B) are used to drive the coils. Otherwise. Before a QCA channel can drive an actuator. the appropriate offset and current amplification is applied to the input signal to produce the desired coil drive signal range.3-16. two channels. Two outputs are available for each QCA channel. it must be calibrated according to the actuator position request coming from a Q-line servo driver card that is to be amplified by the QCA. two channels. The QCA is assembled to provide two groups: Group 1 Input Voltage Output Voltage Maximum Output Current Drive (per coil drive) Maximum Load Resistance (per coil drive) Maximum Total Current Drive (all channels combined) Channel Configuration 800mA voltage input. By adjusting potentiometers and selecting resistors. The input to each channel is another Q-card's actuator position request (Coil Drive Output) wired into the front-edge connector.21V on board DC-DC converters derived from the +13V backplane supply. The two on-board supplies are not isolated from DIOB ground. The card is strictly an analog card where the DPU does not interact with the card's function or status. 1 VDC Current (supplied by DIOB): 2. all channels combined • Outputs are NOT isolated from DIOB ground 3-16. Specifications Power Requirements DIOB Supply Voltage: +12. Features The QCA card is available in two groups and provides the following features: • • • • Two channels configured as voltage inputs Redundant voltage outputs (Group 1) Non-redundant true current outputs (Group 2) Maximum current drive capability: — 400mA per Group 1 channel — 250mA per Group 2 channel — 800mA total.3.5A typ 3. QCA 3-16. Offset Adjustment Stage (See Figure 3-116 and Figure 3-119) Resistor Ladder: RC2 + RD ≥ 2KΩ Offset Voltage Range: adjust V3 to fall within 0 to -12V Output Voltage Range: adjust V4 to fall within -12V to +12V M0-0053 3-236 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .0A max for Groups 1 and 2 under maximum load conditions Input Stage (See Figure 3-116 and Figure 3-117) Actuator Position Request Range (Vin): -12V to +12V Range Adjustment Stage (See Figure 3-116 and Figure 3-118) Resistor Ladder: RA2 + RB ≥ 2KΩ Output Voltage Range: adjust V2 to fall within -12V to +12V.2.3-16.4 VDC to 13. use precision resistors: Westinghouse drawing number .Group 2 (See Figure 3-116 and Figure 3-121) Tolerance: may be adjusted to desired value initially Current Output Temperature Coefficient: ±400 ppm/oC (±0.669A664.3% between a channel's redundant outputs at room temperature Tracking Temperature Coefficient: 30 ppm/oC between redundant output over the temperature range 0 . each coil drive can drive up to 200mA each. keeping as close to unity gain as possible.60oC Maximum Load Current: ±400mA per channel (If redundant drives are used. QCA Output Gain Stage (See Figure 3-116.Group 1 (See Figure 3-116 and Figure 3-120) Tolerance: may be adjusted to desired value initially Voltage Output Temperature Coefficient: ±200 ppm/oC (±0.12 to + 12V Output Voltage of Booster Amp: ±15V max Closed Loop Gain (Group 1 only): Choose Rf-B so that the overall loop gain (Vout/V4) is 1 to 5 V/V. Output Coil Drives .02%/oC) over the temperature range 0-60oC Maximum Load Current: ±250mA per channel 5/99 3-237 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and Figure 3-121) Output Voltage of Control Amp: adjust gain of booster amp so that V5 falls within .3-16. When selecting Rf-B.02%/oC) over the temperature range 0-60oC Tracking Accuracy: ±0.) Output Coil Drives . Figure 3-120. 4. All wires to the front-edge connector must be of 18 AWG wiring to support potentially high current draw. M0-0053 3-238 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-16. no points on the half-shell or in the field at the actuator coil should be tied to earth ground. QCA 3-16. QCA DIOB Card Edge Connector Pinout Signal Name Component Side PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection GROUND Pin # 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Pin # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Signal Name Solder Side PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection GROUND No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Field/Addressing Connector The front card edge of the QCA provides the connections to the field devices. Table 3-78. There are no card addressing pins since the card is not accessed by the DPU. All GROUND points in Table 3-79 are DIOB ground. Note For the QCA. Signal Interface DIOB Connector The QCA draws power from the DIOB bus through a 34 pin card-edge connector on the DIOB backplane. The card-edge DIOB signal assignments are given in Table 3-78. 1B = redundant outputs of channel 1 (1B available only on Group 1 boards) COIL DRIVE 2A. 2B = redundant outputs of channel 2 (2B available only on Group 1 boards) Pin # 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B Pin # 28A 27A 26A 25A 24A 23A 22A 21A 20A 19A 18A 17A 16A 15A 14A 13A 12A 11A 10A 9A 9A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A Signal Name Solder Side No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection GROUND No Connection No Connection No Connection GROUND No Connection COIL DRIVE 2A No Connection GROUND No Connection COIL DRIVE 1B * No Connection GROUND No Connection VIN1 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection * For Group 2 (True Current Output) these signals are No Connection. QCA Field Front Card Edge Connector Signal Name Component Side No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection COIL DRIVE 2B * No Connection GROUND No Connection VIN2 No Connection GROUND No Connection COIL DRIVE 1A No Connection GROUND No Connection No Connection No Connection GROUND VIN = Actuator Position Request COIL DRIVE 1A.3-16. QCA Table 3-79. 5/99 3-239 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Rin is 20kΩ. M0-0053 3-240 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . it is sent out to the field through the front-edge connector as the coil drive signal. QCA 3-16. Operation QCA Channel Vin Input Stage V1 Range Adjustment Stage V2 Offset Adjustment Stage V4 -10Vref V4 Output Gain Stage Coil Drive A (voltage or current output) Coil Drive B (voltage output only) Figure 3-116. QCA Channel Figure 3-116 shows a block diagram of the stages in a QCA channel. Input Stage Vin Rin + 10K + 10K Invert Input Jumper Disable Enable V1 Unity Gain Inverter Figure 3-117. For example. the input inverting jumper should be enabled to achieve an output of correct polarity (see Figure 3-122). For voltage level Vin signals. and the desired output voltage range may be 0 to 12V. Once the signal is adjusted to the voltage and current levels needed to drive the actuator. The actuator position request (Vin) comes to the QCA from servo driver cards through the frontedge connector.3-16. Input inversion is used when the actuator position request range is unipolar and opposite in sign of the desired unipolar output drive range. In this case.5. drawing minimal current from the input and keeping the input from floating if Vin is not connected to the channel. QCA Channel Input Stage Figure 3-117 shows the input stage in a QCA channel. the actuator position request range may be 0 to -10V. QCA Range Adjustment Stage RA1 V1 1K RA2 V2 + RB Figure 3-118. An adjustable voltage divider determines the signal range. for the gain stage magnifies the base range by an adjustable gain multiplier. The range adjust stage sets the base range of the output drive signal and allows the input position signal range to be converted to meet any current driving range (within card specs) for a variety of actuators. The final output signal range is a result of the range and gain stages combined. QCA Channel Range Adjustment Stage Figure 3-118 shows the range adjustment stage in a QCA channel. RA1 is a potentiometer which enables precise adjustment of signal range according to the following equation: V2 = V1 * (RB/(RA1 + RA2 + RB)) 5/99 3-241 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-16. Adjustment of the potentiometer RC1 enables precise adjustment of the offset to be added to the signal according to the following equation: V3 = -10Vref * (RD/(RC1 + RC2 + RD)) The offset adjustment stage has unity gain resulting in the following equation: V4 = V3 .3-16. RC2. QCA Offset Adjustment Stage 10K 10K V4 + 10K 10K RD Unity Gain Differential Amplifier RC1 -10Vref 50K RC2 + Offset Jumper V2 Disable Enable V3 Figure 3-119.V2 M0-0053 3-242 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The offset adjust stage handles bipolar and unipolar signal adjustments. offset addition to the signal is bypassed by installing the channel's Offset jumper in the DIS (disable) position (see Figure 3-122). If no offset is required. Do NOT pull out RC1. This stage may also be configured to add in small offsets to unipolar signals to ensure the signal does not cross over 0V to an undesired signal polarity. This stage adds an adjustable offset which can translate a bipolar input signal into a unipolar servo drive signal (required by certain valves). or RD to disable offset. QCA Channel Offset Adjustment Stage Figure 3-119 shows the offset adjustment stage in a QCA channel. 3-16.Voltage Output Configuration (Group 1 only) Rf Rf-A 10K 20K 10K Ri V4 10K + V5 + Rout Coil Drive A 2Ω Vout Rf-B Control Amp Booster Amp To Coil Drive B Circuitry (same as Coil Drive A above) Figure 3-120.Group 1 The following closed loop gain equation applies to the output stage of Group 1 boards illustrated in Figure 3-120: Vout = -V4 * Rf/Riwhere Rf= Rf-A + Rf-B 5/99 3-243 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QCA Output Gain Stage . QCA Output Gain Stage . QCA Output Gain Stage .Current Output Configuration (Group 2 only) Rf 10K 20K 10K Ri V4 10K Ri’ 10K + Control Amp Rf’ 10K V5 + Rout 8.5V Load Resistance: 50 ohms 1.Unipolar Voltage Out (Group 1) This section contains calculations for selecting resistors for the following channel specifications: • • • Input Voltage: 0 to -10V Output Voltage: 0 to 12. QCA Output Gain Stage . M0-0053 3-244 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .25Ω Iout Vout Coil Drive A Booster Amp Figure 3-121. Enable the invert jumper (shown in Figure 3-122) since the input voltage sign is opposite from the output voltage sign.Group 2 The following closed loop gain equation applies to the output stage of Group 2 boards illustrated in Figure 3-121: Iout = -(V4/Rout)*(Rf/Ri) = -V4/Rout Ri = closely matched input resistors Rf = closely matched feedback resistors Rout = 8.25 ohms Channel Configuration Examples Unipolar Voltage In .3-16. Enable the invert jumper (shown in Figure 3-122) since the input voltage sign is opposite from the output current sign.001 to 0.0008 and 0. QCA 2. the desired 10 to 50mV offset is added to the signal. The offset adjustment stage may be used to add a small offset to the valve position request to make sure the output voltage is always positive.Unipolar Current Out (Group 2) This section contains calculations for selecting resistors for the following channel specifications: • • • Input Voltage: 0 to -10V Output Current: 0 to 250mA Load Resistance: 50Ω 1. and RB = 7. the output gain stage will need a gain greater than 1.5V + (Rout)*(Iout) = 12. the ratio of resistors falls between 0. If the output stage has a gain of 2. Since V2 = 0 to 6. Assume no offset is needed (Offset jumper in DIS position).625 Let RA1 = 1k potentiometer.5V Vout. Since the magnitude of the input must be gained up to get the full output voltage range.25V and V1 = 0 to 10V (after the actuator position request has been inverted). 2.76k.25V. 3. 4. 6.25V.625*V1.637 which includes the desired 0. RC2 = 9. Referring to Figure 3-120: Vout MAX = 12. Referring to Figure 3-121: 5/99 3-245 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and RD = 50 ohms. Set the output gain stage to a gain of 2.3-16.625 ratio.005 Let RC1 = 50k potentiometer.53K. V2 = 0. By adjusting the 50k potentiometer. When multiplied by 10Vref.96k. so the offset adjustment stage is a unity gain inverting stage which means V2 = 0 to 6.0051.590 and 0. 5. RA2 = 4. the ratio of resistors falls between 0. booster amp MAX = 12. This means Rf-B is 10KΩ (see Figure 3-120). Unipolar Voltage In . This implies that: RB/(RA1 + RA2 + RB) = 0. If a 10 to 50 mV offset is desired: RD/(RC1 + RC2 + RD) = 0.5V + (2Ω)*(250mA) = 13V which is less than the maximum 15V allowed. By adjusting the 1k potentiometer. V4 in Figure 3-119 has the range: 0 to -6. This implies that: RB/(RA1 + RA2 + RB) = 0.625 ratio. By adjusting the 1K potentiometer. M0-0053 3-246 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QCA Vout (booster amp MAX) = (Rload + Rout)*(Iout) = (50Ω + 8.206 Let RA1 = 1K potentiometer. The output stage has unity gain where Rf = Ri.5K.206*V1.3-16.25Ω) * 250mA = 14. it is suggested that outputs be disconnected from the actuators initially. Disable the offset jumper (see Figure 3-122). a resistor (approximately equal to coil load resistance) of sufficient power rating may be connected to the output at the halfshell on power-up. Since channel output drives cannot be disconnected on power-up and potentiometer settings may be unknown initially.06V. RA2 = 7.06V 3. The following calibration steps apply to unipolar voltage input to unipolar voltage or current output QCA boards. Note Group 2 boards which have true current outputs. and the potentiometers may be adjusted to safe operating values. so the offset adjustment stage is a unity gain inverting stage which implies V2 = 0 to 2. Assume no offset is needed (Offset jumper in DIS position). If no load is present and V4 (see Figure 3-119) has a slight voltage present due to the input voltage or the offset voltage.56V which is less than the maximum 15V allowed.25 ohms and Iout = 0 to 250mA: V4 = 0 to -2. V2 = 0.267. the output will saturate because the channel is trying to drive a preset current into an infinite load. Steps are included to add in a small offset which keeps the output coil drive from crossing over the 0V or 0A boundary and switching polarities. Calibration To calibrate a QCA card. Since V2 = 0 to 2. and RB = 2K. adjust the range and offset potentiometers on the front card edge while the output voltage or current is monitored. should have a load on the output when powered up. 4. Instead. 1. the ratio of resistors ranges between 0.190 and 0. Since Rout is 8. if this is a necessary constraint.06V and V1 = 0 to 10V (after the valve position request has been inverted). which includes the desired 0. If the output is satisfactory. Send the bottom of scale actuator position request and check if Vout (Group 1) or Iout (Group 2) is at the desired bottom of scale. then calibration is done. If offset is needed. 3. enable the offset jumper and adjust the offset potentiometer until Vout (Group 1) or Iout (Group 2) is acceptable and return to Step 2.3-16. 4. 5/99 3-247 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QCA 2. Send the full scale actuator position request. and adjust the range potentiometer on the front card edge for the channel being calibrated until Vout (Group 1) or Iout (Group 2) equals the desired full scale output for the channel. QCA Card Outline and User Controls TP8 EN +15V Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C JS1 JS2 DIS INVERT2 INVERT1 JS3 JS4 POWER(+) +VS TP6 VBOOST1 GND R54 R60 R47 R44 TP2 TP5 RANGE1 GND TP10 5/99 .M0-0053 LEDS -15V 3-16. Controls and Indicators R39 RV1 R162 R159 R163 R160 R43 JS9 JS10 RV2 VCOIL 2B RG2 OFFSET2 OFFSET1 DIS TP11 RV3 OS1TP12 CHAN2 TP7 TP4 VBOOST2 GND GND TP13 RV4 RG1 CHAN1 TP3 RANGE2 R50 R57 TP1 GND TP9 3-248 VCOIL 1B Figure 3-122. QCA LE1 LE2 OS2 EN +Vs -Vs JS5 JS8 POWER(-) -VS 3-16.6. Channel 1 . (x = 1.test jack providing signal ground. Label OS1 Channel 2 . Label RG1 Channel 2 .R44 DriveB .R43 DriveB . Label RG2 Offset Adjustment Potentiometer RC1: used to adjust the signal offset of a channel during calibration.2) Reference Designators: TP13 (channel 1).Reference Designator RV3. QCA Plug-in Scaling Resistor Reference Designators Channel Range Adjust Resistors Offset Adjust Resistors *Gain Adjust Resistors (Rf-B) #1 #2 * Group 1 Only RA2: R54 RB: R60 RA2: R50 RB: R57 RC2: R160 RD: R163 RC2: R159 RD: R162 DriveA . Channel 1 .Reference Designator RV2.Reference Designator RV4. Reference Designator: TP12 5/99 3-249 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .Reference Designator RV1.R39 Potentiometers Range Adjustment Potentiometer RA1: used to adjust the signal range of a channel during calibration.test jack providing Vcoil Drive A output voltage of channel x to be monitored during calibration.3-16. QCA LED Indicators +VS: lit when +21V on-board supply is alive -VS: lit when -21V on-board supply is alive Plug-in Resistors Table 3-80.R47 DriveA . TP11 (channel 2) GND . Label OS2 Test Jacks CHANx . DEFAULT Group 1 and 2: EN position Table 3-81. TP2.3-16. DEFAULT Group 1 and 2: +15V position POWER(-): Always set jumpers to -15V position. DEFAULT Group 1 and 2: DIS position INVERT: If jumper is set to EN. QCA Test Point Reference Designators Channel #1 #2 Range Adjust Stage Output TP5 TP3 Offset Adjust Stage Output TP6 TP4 Gain Adjust Stage Output DriveA: TP13 *DriveB: TP8 DriveA: TP11 *DriveB: TP7 Ground TP1. Table 3-82. offset is added to the channel’s actuator position request. These test points plus the ground test points with their reference designators are listed in Table 3-82 for each channel. no offset is added. TP12 * Group 1 Only M0-0053 3-250 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .Groups 1 and 2 Channel #1 #2 Offset JS10 JS9 Invert JS2 JS1 *Power(+) JS3 JS4 *Power(-) JS5 JS8 * Note: Power (+) and (-) jumpers are not channel specific Test Points Test points appear at the output of those stages denoted by V2. QCA Jumpers POWER(+): Always set jumpers to +15V position. V4. the channel actuator position request is inverted in the input stage. TP10. and Coil Drives in Figure 3-116. When set to DIS (disable). TP9. Reference Designators for QCA Jumpers . DEFAULT Group 1 and 2: -15V position OFFSET: If jumper set to EN (enable). 3-16.7. QCA Wiring Diagram (Group 1) (Using AMP-18 conductor 18 AWG wiring) (3A99512) 5/99 3-251 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Installation Data Sheets 1 of 3 QCA Card TERMINAL BLOCK Vcoil 2B Vcoil 2A Vin 2 Vcoil 1B Vcoil 1A Vin 1 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 + + + + + + Channel 2 Redundant Voltage Output Coil Drive Channel 2 Primary Voltage Output Coil Drive Channel 2 Voltage Input Channel 1 Redundant Voltage Output Coil Drive Channel 1 Primary Voltage Output Coil Drive Channel 1 Voltage Input EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-123. QCA 3-16. 3-16. QCA Wiring Diagram (Group 2) (Using AMP-18 conductor 18 AWG wiring) (3A99512) M0-0053 3-252 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QCA Installation Data Sheet 2 of 3 QCA Card TERMINAL BLOCK Vcoil 2A Vin 2 Vcoil 1A Vin 1 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 + + - Channel 2 True Current Coil Drive Channel 2 Voltage Input + + Channel 1 True Current Coil Drive Channel 1 Voltage Input EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-124. the shields and grounds must be connected together and to earth ground at the B cabinet. QCA CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-253 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Figure 3-125. The A and B cabinets MUST be bolted together to use the QCA in CE Mark Certified Systems.3-16. QCA For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 3 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE Vin1 Ground Ground Coil drive 1A Coil drive 1B Ground Ground Vin2 Coil drive 2A Ground Ground Coil drive 2B EDGE-CONNECTOR Notes 1. 2. As shown. Description Group 02 is applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QCI provides 16 digital contact inputs and a +48 V contact-wetting supply voltage (see Figure 3-126). This contact-wetting voltage provides supply isolation and reduced current power consumption due to the current limiting capability of the supply.3-17. QCI Contact Input (Style 7379A06G02) 3-17. The QCI digitally filters the contact-input signals and provides the option of inverting the polarity of any data bit. QCI 3-17. Figure 3-126.1. QCI Block Diagram M0-0053 3-254 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 2. 5/99 3-255 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QCI 3-17. Features The QCI card is available in two groups and provides the following features: • • • • • • Dual on-card contact-wetting power supply for low power consumption Separate status-indicating LEDs for each input Compatible with any DIOB controller IEEE surge-withstand protection Optical isolation for each input Optional digital switch selectable polarity of each bit The Group 2 QCI provides 16 digitally-filtered contact inputs sharing a common return line with the ability to invert data-bit polarity (G01 does not have this option and is no longer manufactured).3-17. 0 msec Input Signal Rejection Input signal duration <2. QCI Card Block Diagram Input Requirements Digital Filter Delay:2.0 msec is always passed. Input signal duration >6. M0-0053 3-256 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C ADDRESS DATA POWER 5/99 .6 msec is always rejected. GND POWER SUPPLY PWR ON LED RET POINT 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • (16) • • • • • • • +12 DIOB +10 +48 SELECT HI-LO OPTICAL SIGNAL CONDITIONING 2:1 MULTIPLEXER DIGITAL FILTERING ISOLATION 16 8 BUS DRIVERS POINT 15 ENABLE RET 16 CARD EDGE INDICATORS LOCAL OSCILLATOR LED DATA-DIR 1 ADDRESS COMPARATOR UIOB GROUND JUMPER ADDRESS SELECTION Figure 3-127.6 msec to 6. QCI 3-17. Specifications A functional block diagram of the QCI is shown in Figure 3-127.3.3-17. 3-17.6 V + 0.1 Vdc Backup: +12.2 Vdc Current: 500 mA (maximum) supplied by DIOB Power Consumption: 6. 5/99 3-257 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Power Supply Primary: +13 V +0. Contact leakage resistance:50 KΩ minimum. QCI Contact Wetting Voltage Parameter Minimum Nominal Maximum Open Circuit Voltage Closed Contact Current 42V 6mA 48V 14mA 56V 22mA Input Capabilities The signal lines at the DIOB interface are specified by the DIOB specifications description. QCI Note The elapsed time between the contact’s opening and its subsequent closure must be >15 msec.3 W (maximum) Electrical Environment IEEE Surge withstand capability Common Mode Voltage: 500 Vdc or peak ac (line frequency) Card Addressing and Data Output The QCI card address is established by eight jumpers on the front card-edge connector as shown in Figure 3-128. Table 3-83. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line. A resistance of 50 KΩ (minimum) is required to maintain the high-level contact-wetting voltage. the contacts are recognized as open with a shunt resistance of 10 KΩ (minimum). Up to 1. no current can flow from the +10V supply due to reverse-biased diodes).2 mA may flow through any contact shunt resistance from the +48V supply (with open contacts. QCI Card Address Jumper Assembly The binary data that is sent to the system controller over the DIOB are the 16 data bits from the 16 contact inputs divided into two eight-bit bytes. However. Connections and Field Cabling Refer to Figure 3-129 for details regarding the following discussion. To ensure that closed contacts are always recognized as closed.3-17. the following equation must be applied: RC + RLINE + 16RR ≤ 60 Ω M0-0053 3-258 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QCI DIOB CARD ADDRESS = 00100011 = 2316 BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: JUMPER: A7 = 0 A6 = 0 A5 = 1 A4 = 0 A3 = 0 A2 = 0 A1 = 1 A0 = 1 CARD-EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) Figure 3-128. the elapsed time between a contact opening and its subsequent closure must be greater than 15 msec.3-17. Cable Length Limitations for QCI Card Contact Cycle Time If the maximum QCI on card generated voltage is to be applied to plant contacts that interface to the QCI card. 5/99 3-259 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QCI ONE OF 16 INPUTS RC + RLINE + 16RR < 60 Ω RC RS RLINE RR COMMON RETURN PIN FROM OTHER CONTACTS RS = CONTACT SHUNT RESISTANCE RC = RESISTANCE ASSOCIATED WITH A CLOSED CONTACT RR = RESISTANCE OF A COMMON RETURN LINE (IF ANY) RLINE = RESISTANCE OF NON-COMMON CABLE LENGTH TO AND FROM CONTACTS Figure 3-129. 2 16.140 1. The length given is the length to the contact only. QCI Table 3-84 gives the cable length limits for various gauges of wire.400 2.654 1.9 3.7 5.64 10.66 2. 2The M0-0053 3-260 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .0 5. The length of the return is equal to the length of the cable to the contact.04 1.3-17.18 6.400 3.27 4. The length given is the sum of the lengths to and from the contacts.560 845 530 345 215 maximum cable length for a 16-common/card assumes that RR = 0 and RC = 0. maximum cable length for a 1-common/card assumes that RC = 0. Table 3-84. Cable Length Limits for QCI Card Ohms/ thousand ft 16 Commons/Card (thousand ft) (maximum)1 1 Common/ Card (ft) (maximum)2 Gauge 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 1The 0.2 92 58 36 26 14 9. QCI Pin Assignments Connection Pins 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RET RET B1 B0 B3 B2 B5 B4 B7 B6 B9 B8 B11 B10 B13 B12 B15 B14 B Side (Component Side) A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 A Side (Solder Side) GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 5/99 3-261 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . These pins are located on the front-edge connector.3-17. QCI The QCI pin assignments are given in Table 3-85. Table 3-85. 3-17. QCI Controls and Indicators QCI Group 2 (G02) provides the ability to reverse the polarity of the data bits depending on switch setting. Table 3-86 gives the data bit values for switch positions. QCI G02 DIP Switch Positions Switch Position Contact State Digital Value OPEN CLOSED Open Closed Open Closed 0 1 1 0 M0-0053 3-262 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . OSC PWR 15 14 13 12 10 11 9 8 LEDs 7 6 5 4 3 2 9 0 DIP Switches (Only on G02) Figure 3-130. Table 3-86. QCI Card Components Separate status-indicating LEDs for each contact input are located at the front of the card (see Figure 3-130). 3-17. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 +48VDC OPTO ISO CARD 20B 20A 19B 19A TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 B 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 +10VDC BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 +V OPTO ISO 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS EDGE-CONNECTOR INTERNAL BUS STRIP Figure 3-131.4. QCI Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-263 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QCI 3-17. 3-17. QCI For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 15 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 COMPRESSION-STYLE TERMINAL BLOCK EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-132. QCI CE MARK Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-264 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 1.3-18. QDC Q-Line Digital Controller (Style 4256A15G01 through G11) 3-18. supplementing DPUs. 5/99 3-265 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QDC 3-18. The QDC has an on-board processor which controls outputs based on user-defined algorithms. Description G01 and G02 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-Line Digital Controller (QDC) printed circuit board provides an additional level of control capability. Full details on the configuration and use of the QDC are contained in the “QDC User’s Guide” (U0-1105). M0-0053 3-266 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Description The QDI card had been superseded by the QID card. or sixteen single-ended inputs which share a common return line. The QDI has two different kinds of voltage-sensing input circuits available. For new applications. Cards can have eight two-wire (differential) inputs without electrical connections to other points. refer to the following table to determine the equivalence between QID and QDI cards: Table 3-87. QDI Digital Input (Style 2840A13G01 through G11) 3-19. The QDI card provides signal conditioning for 16 digital voltage process inputs. QDI-QID Card Equivalents QDI Group G02 G04 G06 G10 G11 Equivalent QID Group G02 G04 G06 G10 G11 Input Level 24 VAC/DC 48 VAC/DC 120 VAC/DC 48 VDC 120 VAC Inputs* 8 8 8 16 8 * 16 means single-ended inputs. QDI 3-19. and it interfaces these signals to the DIOB (see Figure 3-133).1. 8 means differential inputs.3-19. QDI Block Diagram 3-19.3-19. Features The QDI card is available in 11 groups and provides the following features: • • • • • • • 5/99 G01 provides 16 single-ended 5 VDC inputs G02 provides eight 24 VAC/VDC differential inputs G03 provides 16 single-ended 24 VAC/VDC inputs G04 provides eight 48 VAC/VDC differential inputs G05 provides 16 single-ended 48 VAC/VDC inputs G06 provides eight 120 VAC/VDC differential inputs G07 provides 16 single-ended 120 VAC/VDC inputs 3-267 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QDI Block Diagram Figure 3-133.2. 2 21 2.3 4.2 11.0 2.3 2.6 9.0 2. (Nominal Voltage) (Watts) Group G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 4 20 20 40 40 100 100 10 10 40 100 6 30 30 60 60 150 150 15 15 60 150 VDC 145 VAC (rms) 0.0 V +0.1 VDC/− 0.1 Power Supply Primary: +13.3-19. QDI Input Requirements ON Input Voltage (VDC or VAC rms) Min/Max OFF Input Voltage ON (VDC or Input Current VAC rms) (mA) (max) Min/Max Propagation Time (msec) Min/Max Power In Front End with All Units On.1 43 1.6 VDC Current: 200 mA (maximum for single-ended cards) 100 mA (maximum for differential cards) M0-0053 3-268 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .2 10.5 23.9 3 3 4 4 6 6 2 2 4 31 VDC 25 VAC (rms) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 – 5 5 5 5 5 5 – 5 5 5 0. +12 VDC inputs G09 provides 16 single-ended non-logic (filtered). 12 VDC inputs G10 provides 16 single-ended 48 VDC inputs with filter circuitry for pulse input applications G11 provides eight 120 VAC/VDC differential inputs (high threshold) 3-19.3. Specifications Input Requirements Table 3-88.6 4.0 V + 0.2 21 21 21 21 21 21 0.1 VDC/− 0.6 VDC Backup: +13. QDI • • • • G08 provides 16 single-ended logic-oriented.3 9. QDI Card Address Jumper Assembly (Differential Input) 5/99 3-269 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . (X ‘C8’ HIGH BYTE) Figure 3-134. two bytes of data are sent over the DIOB (Figure 3-135). HIGH BYTE ~ ~ CARD ADDRESS = 1100 1000. For differential inputs. Card Addressing and Data Output The QDI card address is established by eight jumpers on the front card-edge connector as shown in Figure 3-134 and Figure 3-135.e. For single-ended inputs.4. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line. one byte of data is sent over the DIOB (Figure 3-134). JUMPER: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: CARD-EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) A7 = 1 A6 = 1 A5 = 0 A4 = 0 A3 = 1 A2 = 0 A1 = 0 A0 = 0 HI-LO = 1 (i.3-19. This parameter defines the color for the value when the point is in alarm. The binary data that is sent to the system controller over the DIOB are the 8 or 16 data bits from the field inputs. QDI Electrical Environment IEEE Surge withstand capability Common Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or peak AC (line frequency) 3-19. M0-0053 3-270 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QDI Card Address Jumper Assembly. Figure 3-136 shows the wiring for point inputs to a G01. The pin assignments for this connector are listed in Table 3-89. Figure 3-137 shows the typical wiring for the single-ended input groups.3-19. Single Ended Input Connections and Field Cabling The digital inputs enter to the QDI Card on the front-edge connector. QDI CARD ADDRESS = 00100011 (X ‘23’) BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: JUMPER: CARD-EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) A7 = 0 A6 = 0 A5 = 1 A4 = 0 A3 = 0 A2 = 0 A1 = 1 A0 = 1 Figure 3-135. 07. QDI G01 Point Wiring QDI Single-Ended Length Field Contact Point 15 16 points Point 0 Return Field Contact Contact wetting voltage supply Figure 3-137. QDI G01 POINT 15 Up to 16 points POINT 0 RETURN − + 5 VOLTS Figure 3-136. 10) 5/99 3-271 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 05. QDI Typical Contact Input Point Wiring (G03. 09. QDI The cable length to field contacts is limited by cable capacitance when AC is used to wet contacts. See Table 3-90. 08.3-19. G08.3-19. G05. G10) Input Digital Bit Return Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC Card Edge Pin 1A and 1B 17B 15A 13B 11A 9B 7A 5B 3A 17A 15B 13A 11B 9A 7B 5A 3B Field Terminal Block Terminal Number 1 17 14 13 10 9 6 5 2 16 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 M0-0053 3-272 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . G03. G07. QDI Table 3-89. G09. QDI Pin Allocations (G01. 3-19.000 pF 30. G11) Input Digital Bit Return Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PC Card Edge Pin 1A and 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B Table 3-90. QDI Pin Allocations (Cont’d) (G02. QDI Table 3-89. Cable Length for QDI Field Terminal Block Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Group G02 (24 VAC) G04 (48 VAC) G06 (120 VAC) G11 (120 VAC) Maximum Capacitance 60. 250 ft. G06.000 pF At 50 pF/Ft typical capacitance Maximum Cable Length 1000 ft.000 pF 15. 500 ft. 250 ft. G04. 5/99 3-273 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .000 pF 15. Controls and Indicators Separate status-indicating LED’s for each input are located at the front of the card (see Figure 3-138).5. QDI 3-19. QDI Card Components M0-0053 3-274 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . LEDs LED Detail PWR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 3-138.3-19. and 11 5/99 3-275 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-19. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 1 Terminal block #8-32 Screw Card 19B 19A 17B Bit 7 17A 15B Bit 6 15A 13B Bit 5 13A 11B Bit 4 11A 9B Bit 3 9A 7B Bit 2 7A 5B Bit 1 5A 3B Bit 0 3A 1B 1A A 18 17 Bit 7 16 15 Bit 6 14 13 Bit 5 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Edge-connector Customer Connections Figure 3-139. QDI 3-19. 6.6. 4. Wiring Diagram: QDI Groups 2. To do this. The QDT card provides for diagnostic testing of this interface. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-line Diagnostic Test (QDT) card is a DIOB testing device which verifies that a system’s DIOB functions properly (see Figure 3-140).1.3-20. this card verifies that the DIOB controller can drive the DIOB and related point cards mounted on it. address and control lines. In a process control system. Q-line point cards interface to a controller via the DIOB. this card verifies the integrity of the DIOB data. Additionally. QDT Block Diagram M0-0053 3-276 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Data DIOB Address Simulation Circuit Address Decoder & Select Display Control Circuit Card-edge Displays Figure 3-140. These point cards convert analog or digital field signals from a process into equivalent digital signals that are compatible with the supervising controller. QDT Diagnostic Test (Style 7379A29G01) 3-20. QDT 3-20. the Q-line point cards are used for signal conditioning. which provides a byte oriented digital exchange of process information. On-card 512 byte RAM to test the DIOB controller’s addressing and bus driving ability.3. Automatic Display mode selection on power-up to protect an active DIOB from overloading.2.3-20. Electrical connection to the QDT card is made through a 34-pin DIOB backpanel connector. displaying any data written to or read from the selected address. Note In the display mode. via the card edge Data Direction switch. Simulates DC loading for 48 point cards. QDT 3-20. Specifications Power Requirements • 5/99 Voltage from DIOB: 3-277 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . the user selects whether output or input data is to be displayed. The QDT card may be housed as follows: • • Operation In the standard Q-line card crate Mounted to crate with a M4X6MM screw (not provided with QDT card) The QDT card provides two modes of operation: • Simulator Mode – used to test DIOB and controller Note All point cards must be removed from the DIOB prior to Simulator mode operation. • Display Mode – used to monitor a user selected DIOB address. Features The QDT card is available in one group and provides the following features: • • • • • Card-edge switches for mode selection and diagnostic testing. Card-edge LED’s for data display. 3-20. 1 VDC • • Current from DIOB: 750 mA maximum 5 VDC Power Supply: Derived internally on QDT card from 12 VDC supplied from DIOB Voltage: 4.8 VDC to 5. when a QDT card is powered up or inserted into an active DIOB. the QDT card checks that the controller is able to address all possible DIOB locations and can generate the basic DIOB control signals.4 VDC to +13. to prevent any mishaps.2 VDC Current: 400 mA maximum Simulator Mode In the Simulator mode. DIOB signals must drop below 3 VDC to be recognized as a logic 0 or rise above 9 VDC to be recognized as a logic 1.1 VDC Secondary: +12. The QDT card’s 512-byte RAM simulates the entire DIOB address space. QDT Primary: +12. These QDT input circuits contain voltage comparators with hysteresis to reject input DIOB signals with voltage levels between 3 and a 9 VDC.4 VDC to +13. Additionally. The user then removes all other point cards from the DIOB before switching the QDT card into its Simulator mode. M0-0053 3-278 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Therefore. In this mode. simulate the DC loading of the point cards and the capacitance of the longest permissible DIOB (50 feet). The loading circuits. Due to the fact that the QDT card simulates every DIOB point card address and the loading of a DIOB full of point cards. at the QDT card’s DIOB signal inputs. the QDT card tests that the DIOB controller is able to drive a DIOB of maximum length and with the maximum number of point cards plugged in.3-20. it automatically powers up in the Display mode. no other point card should be present on the DIOB/ controller combination being tested. the QDT card (via the 512-bytes of RAM) tests the DIOB controller’s DIOB addressing capability and the controller’s ability to drive the DIOB. Two edge mounted LED’s are provided to inform the user as to which mode the QDT card is in. When this occurs. in this mode. the QDT card generates a DEVICE BUSY pulse during every DIOB cycle. This DEVICE BUSY pulses generation may be disabled by the user via the card edge Device Busy enable switch. QDT Caution Failure to remove all point cards from the DIOB. However. This latch’s contents are updated every time the selected DIOB address and direction of data (input or output) matches actual DIOB address and data direction. data or control signal transfers. while in the Simulator mode.3-20. Also. 3-20. the appropriate LED’s flash for approximately 0. Sixteen of the QDT card’s LED’s are used to display the contents of a 16-bit DIOB data latch on the QDT card. Controls and Indicators The QDT card’s controls and indicators are shown in Figure 3-141. 5/99 3-279 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . can cause DIOB loading. In this way. it does not occupy any DIOB addresses and it appears to be transparent to the DIOB controller. Note The QDT card displays DIOB data. The DEVICE BUSY pulse is automatically disabled and not generated in the Display mode. the exchange of digital data between the Q-line point cards and the DIOB is monitored.1 seconds. All of the QDT logic. Display Mode In the Display mode. the QDT logic does not interact with the DIOB address. generating a failed condition. Table 3-91 gives a description of these controls and indicators. prior to switching to the Simulator mode. the QDT card simply monitors the DIOB lines and displays data on sixteen card edge LED’s.4. In this mode. is isolated from the DIOB in the Display mode. When the QDT card operates in the Display mode. no other point cards are permitted on the DIOB. utilized for the Simulator mode. 3-20. These sixteen LED’s are arranged in two rows of eight each. QDT Card Controls and Indicators Control/Indicator Power-on LED Data Display LED’s Simulator LED Display LED Description Lights when QDT card is receiving power from DIOB. QDT Power-On LED 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Data Display LEDs Lamp Test Switch Simulator LED Mode Select Switch SIML DISP Display LED Address Select Switch High Byte ADR Address LED Address Select Switch Low Byte Dev. Lights when QDT card is operating in the Simulator mode. Busy Data Dir. The row closest to the card edge displays the lower byte of DIOB data and the other row displays the higher byte of DIOB data. M0-0053 3-280 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QDT Card Controls and Indicators Table 3-91. DIS EN OUT IN Device Busy Enable Switch Data Direction Switch Figure 3-141. Lights when QDT card is operating in the Display mode. Pressing this switch to OUT. can cause DIOB loading. Caution The Simulator mode should not be selected unless all point cards are removed from the DIOB and the appropriate DIOB controller diagnostic programming exits. Device Busy Toggle Enables or disables the generation of the DEVICE BUSY signal while Switch the QDT card is operating in the Simulator mode. prior to switching to the Simulator mode. Failure to remove all point cards.1 seconds each time the DIOB address and data direction matches the address and data direction selected on the QDT card. Mode Select Toggle Selects the QDT card’s operating mode. all LED’s should light. Lamp Test Pushbutton Simultaneously tests all twenty QDT card LED’s.3-20. QDT Table 3-91. Additionally. Note When the addresses and data directions of the DIOB and QDT card repeatedly match. displays data that is input to the DIOB controller. Pressing this switch Switch (momentary toward DISP displaces the QDT card into the Display mode contact) and lights the Display LED. When pressed. Pressing this switch toward SIML places the QDT card into the Simulator mode and lights the Simulator LED. the QDT card’s Simulator mode is of no use unless the necessary controller diagnostic programs are present. displays data that is written to a point card. Address Select Rotary Selects the upper and lower bytes of the DIOB address that is to be Switches (hex) monitored by the QDT card’s display logic. Data Direction Toggle Selects the direction of DIOB data (input or output) that is to be Switch displayed by the QDT card’s Display LED’s. Pressing this switch to IN. 5/99 3-281 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QDT Card Controls and Indicators (Cont’d) Control/Indicator Address LED Description Lights for approximately 0. this LED appears to constantly light. generating a failed condition. 609 meters).3-21. QFR 3-21. The card provides signal conversion from electrical to optical and optical to electrical (one unit sends and receives). QFR Remote I/O Fiber-Optic Interface (Style 4256A51G01) 3-21.1.280 feet or 1. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QFR printed circuit board links master to remote nodes for long range communication (up to 5. Full details on the configuration and use of the QFR are contained in the “Remote Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0054). M0-0053 3-282 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Monitoring is typically a requirement when upgrading from a W2500 system to a WDPF system. QIC 3-22. This function is often used in WDPF systems where DIOB operations driven by one DIOB controller must be monitored by a second computer. Two connectors for a W2500 I/O subsystem. Control DIOB Connector Monitor DIOB Connector1 Interface Interface Monitor DIOB Connector 2 Dual Port RAM State Machine State Machine Figure 3-142. The monitor DIOB may originate from one of three connectors on the QIC. in addition to the normal DIOB controller.1. The second computer may be a WDPF DPU or a W2500 I/O subsystem. The card stores data transferred during read or write operations on the control DIOB and allows this data to be read by the second. Logic on the QIC card prevents memory contention from occurring. DIOB. monitor. QIC Block Diagram 5/99 3-283 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QIC card contains a second (monitor) DIOB port which allows read-only operations of the shared memory. QIC Q-Line DIOB Monitor (Style 4256A83G01) 3-22.3-22. The data transferred over the bus is stored in shared memory on the card. There are two types of connectors: • • One WDPF DPU connector. Description The Q-Line DIOB Monitor (QIC) card adds the capability to monitor DIOB operations. no Data will be written into the shared RAM.2. The jumper is shown in Figure 3-142. DIOB 2 Writes are ignored. double-byte (word) operations must be accessed Low byte. On DIOB Write operation. On Q-Line I/O cards which do not support Device-Busy. This prevents data-tearing. Device-Busy is checked on DIOB Read operation. • • DIOB 2 Operating Characteristics • • • • DIOB 2 Reads of any location in the 512-byte DIOB address space causes the data in the Dual Port RAM addressed by the DIOB 2 address lines to be driven onto the DIOB 2 data lines. The QIC will not drive the DIOB 1 data lines.3-22. Device-Busy is ignored. M0-0053 3-284 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . DIOB 2 cycles are NOT extended. Device-Busy is supported by the QIC. Features DIOB 1 Operating Characteristics • • • A DIOB 1 Read or Write operation to any location in the 512-byte DIOB address space causes the data present on the DIOB 1 data lines to be written into the Dual Port RAM at the address specified by the DIOB 1 address lines. For double-byte (word) operations. DIOB specification. in order to prevent data-tearing. the second (High) byte of data will be written to the RAM before the other (Read-only) port of the RAM may be accessed. in order to prevent the possibility of datatearing. QIC 3-22. double-byte (word) operations must be accessed Low byte. If Device-Busy is not present at the proper time. then High byte. In compliance with the DIOB specification. there is a jumper which to allow the Data be written to shared Ram on DIOB Read operation without valid Device-Busy. regardless of whether a Read or Write operation is occurring. then High byte. if one is connected to DIOB 2. MSQ. The DPU or W2500 computer power grounds (PG) of the cabinets that are connected to the QIC card must be connected together by a minimum 4 AWG wire. MSQ.3-22. Note This current does not include the current drawn by an MBU. There is no current drawn by the WIO. MSX Maximum Length: 50 ft Connectors P3 or P4: W2500 -style Compatible with WIO Maximum Length: no longer than the present WIO-QPD or WIO-QPP cables System Grounding Restriction The 2 DIOB ports on the QIC are not isolated from each other. or MSX card if it is connected to DIOB 2. It is recommended that the cabinet containing the monitor DIOB controller be adjacent to the cabinet containing the QIC card. 5/99 3-285 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QIC DIOB 2 Cable Restrictions Connector P2: WDPF-style Compatible with MBU. P3. P4 of DIOB 2 are tied together so that. The signals from these ports are buffered and level-shifted to +5V levels. there are two DIOB ports on the card. essentially. M0-0053 3-286 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . two for a W2500) for the monitor DIOB. Note. because the QIC responds to Read operations of all DIOB addresses. The two state machines (Figure 3-142) resolve any Shared RAM access contentions when two DIOB ports attempt to access the Shared Ram at the same time. P3. P2. the DPU DIOB controllers and the WIO both meet this requirement.3-22. only one connector may be connected to a DIOB controller at any one time. the signals coming from connectors P2. However. Although three connectors exist (one for a DPU. The monitor DIOB cannot contain any other I/O cards that need to be read. It is recommended that the cabinet containing the monitor DIOB controller be adjacent to the cabinet containing the QIC card. Double-byte (word) Read and Write operations of both the monitor and control DIOBs must be in Low byte. Card Usage The QIC card contains four DIOB connectors P1. then High byte order to prevent data tearing. and P4 (see Figure 3-144). QIC Operating Restrictions The following restrictions apply when using the QIC card: • • • • • The power grounds (PG) of the cabinets containing the control and monitor DIOB controllers must be connected together by a minimum 4 AWG wire. The 10 µs timer is used to determine whether a low byte operation is part of a word operation. the incoming data and address are latched. the Write State Machine immediately writes both the low and high bytes to their respective Dual Port RAMs If there is data in the low byte latch that must be transferred to RAM and the 10 µs timer has expired. The data is not written to RAM in case this new low byte is part of a word operation.3-22. the following occurs. If HI. This ensures that a single low byte operation will be transferred to RAM as soon as possible. and there is data in the low byte latch that still must be written to RAM. a word operation is occurring. If the timer expires without another occurrence of DATA-GATE. the data is written to the RAM. For a word operation. 2. Note If more than 10 µs occurs between DATA-GATE pulses. the incoming data and address are latched immediately. The timer is turned on at the falling (inactive) edge of DATA-GATE. If the address is the same as the previous (latched) address. 3. QIC The following occurs when a Read or Write operation occurs on DIOB 1: 1. the Write State Machine immediately writes the data into the High Byte Dual Port RAM. it will also be written at this time. If there is data in the low byte latch that still must be transferred to RAM. the Write State Machine will write the low byte of data to the Dual Port RAM. For a byte operation. If HI. in case another DIOB operation does not occur. If there is no data in the latch to be written. For a word operation. Data tearing can occur for an assumed word operation if the DATA-GATE pulse of the high byte write follows the DATA-GATE pulse of the low byte write by more than 10 µs.LO/. Immediately afterward. HI.LO/ is High. The rising edge of DATA-GATE signals the Write State Machine that a DIOB operation is occurring. the maximum time between pulses is 10 µs. The Write State Machine examines the output of the address comparator.LO/ is high. depending on the state of HI. Otherwise. 5/99 3-287 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .LO/ is low and there is data in the low byte latch. the data in the low byte latch is transferred to RAM. the low byte operation must have been a byte operation. a byte operation is occurring. and whether there is data in the low byte latch that still must be written. QIC The following occurs when a Read operation occurs on DIOB 2: 1.3-22. M0-0053 3-288 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . regardless of whether the address matched the previous address. This prevents data tearing. the Read State Machine reads the High Byte Dual port RAM and transfers the data to the DIOB drivers. 5.LO/ is low. the DATA-GATE pulse of the high byte write should follow the DATA-GATE pulse of the low byte write by less than 10 µs. 3. 4. The low byte of data is transferred immediately to the DIOB drivers. the 10 µs timer in the Read State Machine determines whether a High Byte Read may be part of a word operation or not. If the address is the same as the previous (latched) address and the 10 µs timer has not expired. the high byte read is part of a word operation. Similar to the 10 µs timer used with the Write State Machine. to prevent data tearing from an assumed word Read operation. the following action occurs. The rising edge of DATA-GATE signals the Read State Machine that a DIOB operation is occurring. If HI. the latch is read in this case because it contains the data that was read at the same time as the low byte of the word was read. 6. 2. if the DATA-GATE pulse occurs more than 10 µs after the previous DATA-GATE pulse. If the operation is a write. the Read State Machine reads the High Byte Latch and transfers the data to the DIOB drivers.LO/ is high. no action takes place. If HI. Therefore. the high byte read is a byte operation. the Read State Machine examines the output of the address comparator. the Read State Machine latches the address. For a word operation. It then reads BOTH Dual port RAMs and latches the high byte of data. Otherwise. For a byte operation. Otherwise. Note. Note For a high byte read operation. a single high byte Read operation is assumed and the data will be transferred from the RAM. Specifications 3-289 Arbitration State Machine Figure 3-143. Add. QIC Detailed Block Diagram Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 3-22.5/99 Level Shift 12V → 5V HB Data Latch HB Data Latch Level Shift 5V → 12V P2 P1 DIOB1 (Control) Port Shared RAM Add. Match DIOB Controls Level Shift 5V ←12V DIOB2 (Monitor) Port 3-22. QIC M0-0053 . Comp. Match DIOB Controls Add.3. Comp. Latch Level Shift 5V ←12V P4 LB Data Latch D D LB Data Latch P3 Add. Latch A A Add. Add. 3-22.1V Maximum 13.1V Power Requirements DIOB 1 supply voltage: +12. QIC Power Supply Voltage Minimum Primary Voltage Backup Voltage 12. M0-0053 3-290 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Controls and Indicators Power Connection P1 JS1 Status LEDs Activity Flag Select Switch (SW1) P2 JS2 P4 JS3 P3 Figure 3-144. JS1 Control-DIOB Watch-dog Timer.supplied by DIOB 1 Typical 250 mA Maximum 550 mA 3-22. Their approximate location is shown in Figure 3-144).4V 12.4 VDC to 13. If activity ceases on the control DIOB bus longer than the setting time.4V Nominal 13. QIC Card Outline There are three jumpers on the card.4. bits 0 and 8 of the status word are reset.1 VDC Current: . The settings are 1 or 20 Seconds.0V 13. The +12VDC is received from DIOB 1 port. 5/99 3-291 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . there is +12VDC at TB1 connector of DIOB 2 port. The +5VDC is generated by a linear regulator on board. LED2 QIC PWR. This jumper is used for card production testing only. there is +12VDC and +5VDC power on QIC board. the QIC will write data from the Control DIOB Read operation to shared RAM with or without valid DeviceBusy. The JS2 jumper must be installed for normal operation of the QIC. QIC The address of the status word is set by DIP switch SW1. The address of the status word must be an unused Monitor (and control) DIOB address. If lit. If installed. Their location is shown in Figure 3-144. If lit. data from Control DIOB Read operation will not be written to shared RAM without a valid Device-Busy. If not installed. Device-busy disabled. It indicates the DIOB controller connected to DIOB 1 port access the DIOB 1 at least once in 1 second or 20 second depending on the setting of JS1. Status LEDs There are three status LEDs. JS2 JS3 Clock Enable. The Status word can be read in word or single byte operation from the Monitor DIOB 2. Their meanings are as follows: LED1 OUTPUT PWR. LED3 ALIVE. bit 0 and bit 8 of the status word is set. This +12VDC is provided by DIOB 1 port. If lit.3-22. UADD5 Side UADD7 R. The pinout and signal assignment are shown in Table 3-92 below.5. UCLOCK. UNIT.LO/ UNIT GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND UCAL/ UCLOCK M0-0053 3-292 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . DEV-BUSY. Table 3-92. The QIC does not use the following signals from this connector: UCAL/.3-22.W/ DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 UFLAG/ USYNC GROUND Pin Number 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Pin Number 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Signal Name (Solder Side) PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 Solder UADD6 Side HI. QIC 3-22. USYNC. QIC DIOB1 Card Edge Connector Signal Name (Component Side) PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD1 UADD3 Comp. UFLAG/. Signal Interface DIOB P1 Connector The QIC interfaces to the control DIOB through a 34 pin card-edge connector on the DIOB backplane (P1 on Figure 3-144). The pinout and signal assignment are shown in Table 3-93. QIC DIOB2 for WDPF Signal Name (Component Side) GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND Pin Number 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 Pin Number 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 Signal Name (Solder Side) UADD0 UADD1 UADD2 UADD3 UADD4 UADD5 UADD6 UADD7 HI. This cable connects to the WDPF DPU that drives the DIOB signals.LO/ R. Table 3-93. The QIC does not use the following signals from this connector: UCAL/. UFLAG/.3-22. USYNC. QIC DIOB 2 P2 Connector (WDPF style) The QIC interfaces to the WDPF monitor DIOB through a 50 pin card-edge connector (see P2 on Figure 3-144). UCLOCK. UNIT.W/ UNIT DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT0 UDAT1 UDAT2 UDAT3 UDAT4 UDAT5 UDAT6 UDAT7 UFLAG/ UCAL/ USYNC UCLOCK 5/99 3-293 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . which drives the DIOB signals.LO/ UNIT GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND UCAL/ UCLOCK Pin Number 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Pin Number 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 NC NC Signal Name (Solder Side) GROUND UADD1 UADD3 UADD5 UADD7 R.W/ DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 UFLAG/ USYNC GROUND Note: The QIC does not use the following signals from this connector: PRIMARY +V. UCLOCK.3-22. QIC DIOB 2 P3 Connector The QIC interfaces to the W2500 monitor DIOB through a 34 pin card-edge connector P3 (WIO QPD style) or a 34-pin header connector P4 (WIO QPP style). UCAL/. QIC DIOB2 (P4) for WIO Signal Name (Component Side) NC NC GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 UADD6 HI. USYNC. The pinout and signal assignment for both connectors are shown in Table 3-94. UNIT M0-0053 3-294 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . A cable connects to the W2500 I/O subsystem’s WIO board. BACKUP +V. Table 3-94. UFLAG/. 5/99 3-295 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QIC DIOB 2 Power Connector The QIC card contains the same 2 position terminal block +12V connector that is on the QBE. There is board status word.3-22. DIOB 2 Addressing The QIC responds to any DIOB 2 Read of any location in the 512-byte DIOB address space by driving the DIOB 2 data lines with the Dual Port RAM data addressed by the DIOB address lines. not the shared RAM. DIOB 1 Addressing The QIC responds to any DIOB 1 Read or Write to any location in the 512-byte DIOB address space by writing the data present on the DIOB data lines into its Dual Port RAM at the address specified by the DIOB address lines. The location of this word is selected with the DIP switch SW1 (see Figure 3-144). This is used to power the DIOB interface circuitry on the MSQ or MSX card. The QIC ignores DIOB 2 Writes. Any Read by Monitor DIOB of this address will read the status word. 1.G17 (surface mount PC boards) 3-23. Description Groups 4256A84G01-G05. QID Block Diagram. new systems should employ the QID cards for all digital input applications where QDI or QBI cards were formerly used. Table 3-96 provides a list of equivalent cards for QDI and QBI. (see Table 3-101 for a list of allowable lengths). QID 3-23. For some applications. Because of the increased cable length.(A8) . The QID can be used for up to 8 differential (Figure 3-145) or 16 single-ended (Figure 3-146) inputs.3-23.000 ft.(A0) HI-LO Figure 3-145.G08-G10 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-Line Digital Input Card (QID) provides an interface to 220 VAC and 220 VDC digital inputs. DIOB Data R/W Address HI-LO Bus Driver 8 8 1 Address Comparator Opto-Couplers R-C Filters 8 Signal Conditioning (8) Point 0 Point 7 LED Indicators Jumper Address Selection (A7) . the QID allows field wiring cable length of up to 2. Double Input M0-0053 3-296 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QID Style 4256A84G01 .G16 (through-hole PC boards) Style 3A99159G01 . 600 VDC on-card isolation between each differential input channel. May be read by any DIOB compatible controller card. * Inputs include: 5. 12. 48. Field inputs and DIOB bus isolation using optical couplers. or 220 Volts IEEE Surge Withstand Capability (except Groups 01. QID DIOB Data R/W Address Hi-Lo 1 Bus Driver 8 2:1 Multiplex 16 16 Opto-Couplers R-C Filters 16 Signal Conditioning (16) Point 0 Point 15 Common (A7) . 08. 120.(8) . 500 VDC common mode rating. Features • • • • • • • • • 8 differential (two-wire) inputs or 16 single-ended inputs. and 17). QID Block Diagram.(A0) LED Indicators Jumper Address Selection 1 Address Comparator Figure 3-146. 500KΩminimum leakage resistance of field wiring cable allowed. 24. Single Input 3-23. Status LED for each input. * The type of field wiring and style of terminations may restrict the design limit of the card.2. 5/99 3-297 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-23. 500 VDC or peak AC (line frequency) common mode voltage. QID • • • • • QID Field input voltages equal to or less than the maximum OFF INPUT VOLTAGE. or currents equal to or less than the maximum OFF INPUT CURRENT. QID Field input voltages within the range of the ON INPUT VOLTAGE will guarantee a logic one to be read via the card. ON INPUT CURRENT gives the range of input current for the specified ON INPUT VOLTAGE range.3-23. Minimum ON INPUT CURRENT does not guarantee that a logic one will be transfer via the card. guarantee a logic zero to be read via the card. M0-0053 3-298 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 000 ft cable 500 ft cable 500 ft cable No input filters QDI G02 QBI G04.10 QDI G04 QBI G05. QID Card Summary Group G01 Input Level 5 VDC Inputs* 16 Surge** No Comments No input filters Common line connected to 5VDC Replaces QBI G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17*** 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC/DC 48 VAC/DC 48 VAC/DC 120 VAC/DC 120 VAC/DC 12 VDC 12 VAC/DC 48 VDC 120 VAC 120 VAC 220 VAC 220 VAC 220 VDC 220 VDC 5VDC 8 16 8 16 8 16 16 16 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No input filters Common line can be connected to +5V or 5V RTN. 5/99 3-299 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . ** ANSI Std.000 ft cable 1.3-23.08. 8 means differential inputs. 11 QBI G02 QBI G03.000 ft cable 1. Pulse Inputs 1.11 QBI G01 * 16 means single-ended inputs. C37.09 QDI G10 QDI G11 QBI G08. QID Table 3-95.90A 1974 (or IEEE 472-1974) for surge withstand *** Style 3A99159 only.000 ft cable 1.06 QDI G06 QBI G07. 0 G12 95 150 60 16 27 8.0 0.5 G02 20 30 7 5 10 3.1 G07 100 150 40 6 10 3.0 1 14 3.5 G09 10 15 3 5 10 2.2 G08 10 15 3 5 10 2.8 1 14 7.0 --0.8 G17 2.8 1 14 14.supplied by DIOB bus.4 1 14 10.8 1 14 12.4 VDC to 13. the maximum number of the QID G14 that can be used in the DPU cabinet is 24 cards.2 0.6 G06 100 150 40 6 10 3.0 1 14 7. All Units On (Watts) Typical MIN MAX MAX MIN MAX (mA) MIN MAX (TYP) G01 2. Specifications Inputs/Outputs Table 3-96. Power Requirements Control DIOB supply voltage: +12.5 2.9 2 10 0.0 1 14 3.0 1 14 1.4 G16 180 264 110 6 10 3.8 7 0.5 --0.2 0.0 G04 40 60 17 7 12 5.0 G13 190 264 120 30 43 11.5 --0.4 1 14 20. QID Inputs Power In Front End.4 7 0.4 1 14 46. Typical: 100 mA OFF ON Input Input Voltage Voltage ON OFF (VDC or VAC (VDC or Input Current Input Propagation Group RMS) VAC RMS) (mA) Current Time (msec) M0-0053 3-300 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .8 G05 40 60 17 7 12 5.1 VDC Current: .1 7.2 G14 190 264 120 30 43 11. QID 3-23.2 1.5 G03 20 30 7 5 10 3.3.5 G10 40 60 24 7 12 5.5 * Note: Due to high power in front end.6 G11 95 150 60 16 27 8.9 2 10 0.8 1 14 24.0 1 14 1.3-23.4* G15 180 264 110 6 10 3.4 1 14 23. QID Maximum: 200 mA DIOB Connector The QIC interfaces to the DIOB bus through a 34 pin card-edge connector on the DIOB backplane. Table 3-97.3-23. spaced 0.1” apart.W/ DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 GROUND Pin # 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Pin # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Signal Name PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 Solder UADD6 Side HI.LO/ GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 GROUND 5/99 3-301 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The pinout and signal assignment are shown in Table 3-97. UADD5 Side UADD7 R. QID Pinout Signal Name PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD1 UADD3 Comp. The QID contains 17 gold fingers on the component and solder sides of the board. 3-23. QID There are three type of input signal interfaces selectable by groups: • • • Differential Input Interface-- provided in QID 8 differential input groups (QID G02, 04, 06, 11, 13, and 15) and is the same as that provided in any QDI 8 differential input cards. See Table 3-98. Single Ended Input Interface --provided in QID 16 differential input groups (QID G01, 03, 05, 07-09, 12, 14, 16, and 17) and is the same as that provided in any QBI 16 Single-ended input cards. See Table 3-99. Group 10 Input Interface -- equivalent to the QDI 16 single-ended input cards. See Table 3-100. Table 3-98. QID Differential Input Interface Input Digital Bit Number Chassis Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 PC Card Edge Pin 1A and 1B 1A and 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B Field Block Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 M0-0053 3-302 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID Table 3-99. QID Single-Ended Input Interface Input Digital Bit Number Common Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 PC Card Edge Pin 1A and 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B Field Block Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 5/99 3-303 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID Table 3-100. QID G10 Input Interface Input Digital Bit Number Common Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 15 DIOB Control PC Card Edge Pin 1A and 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B Field Block Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The QID Single-ended Input groups occupy a 16 bit word in the DIOB address field. The address of the QID is selected by jumpers at the top of the front-edge connector. Insertion of a jumper encodes a “one” on each address line. Absence of a jumper encodes a “zero”. The QID Differential Input groups occupy one byte (8 bits) in the DIOB address field. When selecting address of the QID, the HI-LOW address line at the front-edge connector must also be used. M0-0053 3-304 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID Input Circuit Each input circuit of the QID is inherently a voltage input device. A two-wire differential input will produce a logic “one” at the DIOB if the voltage between the two wires is greater than the minimum ON INPUT VOLTAGE specified for that QID group. A Logic “zero” will be produced if the voltage between two wires is less than the maximum OFF INPUT VOLTAGE. Single-ended input cards operate in a similar manner except that voltage is sensed between the one input wire per bit and the common terminal. Contact inputs are provided by placing a field contact in series with the QID input voltage supply. Contact closure produces a logic “one” at the DIOB. Contact inputs may also be used on differential cards where isolation between two or more sets of wetting voltage supplies is required. Card Address = 11001000 (Hex “C8” Low Byte) Card Address = 00100011 (Hex “23”) Jumper : A7 = 1 Jumper : A6 = 1 Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank : A5 = 0 : A4 = 0 : A2 = 0 : A1 = 0 Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank : A7 = 0 : A6 = 0 : A4 = 0 : A3 = 0 Jumper : A5 = 1 Jumper : A3 = 1 : A0 = 0 Jumper : HI-LO = 0 Differential Inputs : A2 = 0 Jumper : A1 = 1 Jumper : A0 = 1 No Jumper required at HI-LO Single-Ended Inputs Figure 3-147. QID Card Address Jumper Example 5/99 3-305 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID 3-23.4. Controls and Indicators LEDs LED Detail PWR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 3-148. QID Card Outline Power LED POWER LED indicates whether there is +12VDC on the QID board. Input status LEDs For each input to the QID card, an LED indicates input status (ON for logic “one”, OFF for logic “zero”). M0-0053 3-306 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID 3-23.5. Wiring Field Wiring Cable Length When using AC supply voltage to wet contact inputs, some limits exist on cable lengths due to stray capacitance in the cables. The maximum capacitance which can be tolerated by the QID is listed below. Table 3-101. QID Allowable Cable Capacitance Group Number Voltage Capacitance Maximum Length 1 G02 (24VAC) 100,000 PF 2,000 FT G03 (24VAC) 100,000 PF 2,000 FT G04 (48VAC) 75,000 PF 1,500 FT G05 (48VAC) 75,000 PF 1,500 FT G06 (120VAC) 25,000 PF 500 FT G07 (120VAC) 25,000 PF 500 FT G11 (120VAC) 50,000 PF 1,000 FT G12 (120VAC) 50,000 PF 1,000 FT G13 (220VAC) 50,000 PF 1,000 FT G14 (220VAC) 50,000 PF 1,000 FT 1 Based on standard cable with stray capacitance of 50 PF/FT. A longer length cable can be used if a cable with lower capacitance is used. Note For CE Mark certified systems, field wiring that carries the AC mains must have double insulation. 5/99 3-307 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID ' QID G01 Point 15 (16) Point 0 Common + Logic Voltage Figure 3-149. QID Group 1 Connections ' QID G08 and G17 Point 15 (16) Point 0 + Logic Voltage Common Common line can be connected to Logic Voltage (+) or Logic Voltage (-). Figure 3-150. QID Group 8 and Group 17 Connections M0-0053 3-308 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID QID Single-Ended Inputs Length (see Table 3-101) Field Contact Point 15 16 points Field Contact Point 0 Return Contact wetting voltage supply Figure 3-151. QID Single Ended Inputs QID Differential Input Length (see Table 3-101) Field Contact Point 7 (8) 8 points Field Contact Point 0 Return Chassis Contact wetting voltage supply Contact wetting voltage supply Figure 3-152. QID Differential Inputs 5/99 3-309 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID 3-23.6. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 7 Terminal Block Card 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13A 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Edge Connector Customer Connections Note: For G13 (220 VAC) and G15 (220 VDC) used with #6 screw terminal blocks, all neutral returns of wetting voltages must be connected to even terminals of terminal blocks (terminals 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16). Figure 3-153. QID Wiring for Groups 2, 4, 6, 11, 13, and 15 M0-0053 3-310 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID Installation Data Sheet 2 of 7 Figure 3-154. QID Card Connections 5/99 3-311 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID Installation Data Sheet 3 of 7 Figure 3-155. QID Card Connections M0-0053 3-312 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-23. QID Installation Data Sheet 4 of 7 Figure 3-156. QID Card Connections (G10) 5/99 3-313 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-23. QID For CE MARK Certified System 5 of 7 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 PE + + + + + + + + BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 Figure 3-157. QID CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2, 4, 6, 11, 13 and 15) M0-0053 3-314 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 9. 7. 14 and 16) 5/99 3-315 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 5. 3. QID For CE MARK Certified System 6 of 7 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 15 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR 19 20 PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1A * 19 20 PE 19 20 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 15 BIT 0 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ~ AC or DC + * 2A in Groups 14 and 16 Figure 3-158. 12. 8. CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1.3-23. CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 10) M0-0053 3-316 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-23. QID For CE MARK Certified System 7 of 7 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 15 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 .75A 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR PE 19 20 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 15 BIT 8 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ~ AC or DC + Figure 3-159. 1.3-24. Description Groups 01and 02 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QLC printed circuit board is a single-board computer which interfaces to the WDPF DPU (Distributed Processing Unit). see “QLC User’s Guide” (U0-1100). 5/99 3-317 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QLC Q-Line Serial Link Controller (Style 4256A01G01) 3-24. For additional information on the QLC. QLC 3-24. The QLC. installed in a Q-Crate communicates with the DPU through the DIOB. The QLI’s I/O capability consists of three analog inputs. two digital inputs. 03 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-Line Loop Interface Card (QLI) handles the analog and digital inputs and outputs associated with a single or cascaded control loop executing in a Distributed Process Unit (DPU).1. Data Latches Serial Port Circuit E P R O M RS 422 Serial Port MEMORY R A M E E P R O M Processor Isolation Barrier G03 40V A/D A/D A/D D/A + Two Optical Isolators Two Optical TWO OPTICAL Isolators ISOLATORS Two Drivers Two Signal Conditioners (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) or G01.02 RTN Two Digital Outputs Two Digital Inputs Analog Inputs Analog Output Figure 3-160. QLI Functional Block Diagram M0-0053 3-318 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . one analog output. and two digital outputs. 02. Description Groups 01.3-25. QLI Q-Line Loop Interface Card (Style 7381A10G01 through G03) 3-25. QLI 3-25. Jumpers DIOB Bus Arbitration. Communications to and from the card are through a Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB). DIOB DIOB Interface Timing Control Switches Switches. Digital inputs are read five times per second and digital outputs fixed at the same rate.10 V 4 .10 V 0 . used for monitoring and manual control of the QLI’s control loop (see Figure 3-161). Binary numbers from the DPU are converted to output voltages or currents at a rate greater than 10 times/second.10 V 0-5V 0 . They are stored by the QLI until they are read by the DPU. QLI The QLI may be linked to a Loop Interface Module (LIM) or Small Loop Interface Module (SLIM). TCP Data Highway D P U D P U Q-Crate Q B E Q T B Q L I #1 Flat Flex (Up to 12 QLI’s on chain) Twisted Pair LIM or SLIM LIM or SLIM Q L I #2 Q L I #3 Q L I #4 Q L I Q L I Q L I #28 #29 #30 Transition Panel Multiple QLIs (LIM or SLIM) Twisted Pair (One QLI/LIM or SLIM) Figure 3-161.3-25.20 mA 5/99 3-319 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . distinguished by their analog input and output value ranges: Version Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Analog Input 0 .20 mA Analog Output 0 . QLI Card Usage Analog input voltages or currents are converted by the QLI to binary numbers at a rate of four times per second. Three versions of the QLI are available. The QLI automatically checks for 13-volt power supply malfunctions as well as many of its own malfunctions. Automatic diagnostic program detects 13V power supply and QLI malfunctions.and under-range conditions. Both analog and digital circuitry are isolated from the logic circuitry.3-25.2%. Choice of analog input and output ranges. Additional information related to the installation and operation of the QLI can be found in “Q-Line Loop Interface Module (QLI/LIM) User’s Guide” (NLAM-B200). Changing the resistor to 100 ohms introduces an error of 0. This is the power for all logic and communications on the card. Automatic adjustment for gain and offset temperature coefficients of analog inputs. The Q crate delivers 13 VDC at the rear edge pin connectors. Features • • • • • • • • • • • Three analog input circuits and one analog output circuit. Interfaces with the DPU through a Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB). M0-0053 3-320 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . This power is for I/O functions. Also two digital input and two digital output circuits. Each QLI card must have an external power supply which delivers 500 mA at 24 VDC to the card edge connector. RS-422 and up to 1000 feet long. Configuration switches to customize operation.1% Digital scan rate of five times per second. Malfunctions are displayed by the program running in the DPU. IEEE/SWC surge withstand protection for both digital and analog inputs and outputs. Serial port connection to Loop Interface Module (LIM) or Small Loop Interface Module (SLIM). Detects and flags over. 3-25. Analog-to-digital conversion rate of four times per second with an accuracy of 0.2. QLI Group 3 QLIs may be modified to accept 10-50 mA input by changing a 250 ohm input resistor on the card to a 100 ohm resistor. 500 Ohms minimum for voltage 12 bits. the range can be changed to 10-50 mA by changing a resistor on the card. 5/99 3-321 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-25. Accuracy will then be 0.5mA at 60VDC Note Only Group 3 can be used for pulse digital outputs. QLI 3-25. 1000 ohms in overload 12 bits A/D conversion type Conversion rate Accuracy Impedance Resolution Analog Output: Output ranges Loading Resolution Digital Input Ranges Group 1 0-10 VDC Group 2 0-10 VDC Group 3 4-20 mA* 0-1000 Ohms for current. unipolar Min ON voltage – 18VDC Max ON voltage – 60VDC Max OFF voltage – 6VDC Max OFF current – 0.2%. 3VDC at 200mA Max ON current 200mA Max OFF current 0.5mA Digital Output Ranges Min ON voltage 2VDC at 150mA. Specifications Analog Input: Input ranges Group 1 0-10 VDC Group 2 0-5 VDC Group 3 0-20 mA* voltage-to-frequency 4/sec 0. *With Group 3 cards.3.1% 100 megohms/volt. The terminal block itself is rated at 5A maximum. Incoming analog and digital values to the DPU are stored in DIOB data latches on the QLI and accessed by the DPU for processing. QLI 3-25. Negative inputs are flagged as an under-range condition. 3. each of which has its own circuitry including an A/D converter. The QLI also has two digital inputs and two digital outputs. This not only grounds the card through its rack but also allows the IEEE Surge Protection circuitry to function and allows the LIM (Loop Interface Module) to function properly. Recommended ratings for replacement fuses are shown in the installation diagram. 1. digital. Incoming analog currents are first converted to a voltage signal and then to a frequency. D/A Converter: Converts binary signals from the DPU to an analog voltage or current. but most applications require a fuse of less than 1A.5. Components Figure 3-160 shows a functional block diagram of the QLI. Outgoing analog and digital values from the DPU are also stored in data latches on the QLI. Circuit Description The QLI contains three analog input channels. An on-board microprocessor sends and receives serial I/O data for manual loop control through this port. Interface Specifications Field wiring to the QLI is through the card edge connector.3-25. A/D Converters: (Three converters: One for each analog channel) Convert incoming analog signals to a digital value. 2. Prefabricated cable connections are made with the terminal blocks in the adjacent “B” cabinet. Analog inputs are converted to binary numbers. Analog inputs are protected up to 120 VDC continuous. Serial Port Control: An RS-422 serial port for communication with a Loop Interface Module (LIM). M0-0053 3-322 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Both analog and digital input and output circuits meet IEEE/SWC Surge Withstand Standards. The QLI itself is grounded by a grounding screw at the bottom front corner of the card (see Figure 3-163). up to 150 VDC continuous. The QLI has one analog output with a D/A converter which converts binary numbers to an analog voltage or current value. 3-25.4. The card edge connector contains the fuse for both the 24 VDC power supply and the digital inputs and outputs. 11. Memory Controller: Allows the microprocessor to read configuration data from the on-board memories and to write configuration data sent to it from the DPU to the On-board EEPROM. Switches: Settings of the configuration and EEPROM switches and the configuration jumper clips allow the microprocessor to follow the correct control procedures for the configuration chosen. DIOB Interface: Places data from the output data latches onto the DIOB data lines and takes data from the DIOB data lines and stores it in the input data latches. These outputs are also powered through the card edge connector. and output and configuration data written by the DPU via the DIOB interface for the microprocessor to read. The last three bits are always zero. Addresses begin at 08 and end at F0 and follow the standard Q-Line addressing scheme. stores configuration data. 12. and input. This data will then be available for the microprocessor to read on the next power-up cycle.3-25. Digital Output Circuits: Digital outputs from the DPU go to the microprocessor and then through optical isolators. 7. 6. signal conditioners. default configuration data and control programming is stored in the 32K EPROM. and filters before leaving the circuit. Card Addressing Card addressing is in hexadecimal. filters. and optical isolators before being read by a microprocessor. Coordinates reading of new data by both the microprocessor and the DPU. DIOB Bus Arbitration: Controls access to the DIOB data latches. DIOB Data Latches: Store input data written by the microprocessor for the DPU to read via the DIOB interface. QLI 4. adjusts analog inputs for gain and offset error. 8. 10. and performs control functions dictated by the configuration data. Microprocessor: Controls serial port communication.6. output. and calculation data is stored in the 2K Static RAM. 9. Digital Input Circuits: Digital inputs pass through signal conditioners. 3-25. 5. Memories: Current configuration data is stored in the 1K EEPROM. 5/99 3-323 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . only the first five bits are set with jumpers. Installing a jumper encodes a Card Configuration BIT = 0. Controls and Indicators QLI card components are shown in Figure 3-163. QLI Note Installing a jumper encodes a DIOB address BIT = 1. QLI Card Components M0-0053 3-324 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .7. 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Jumper: A7=1 Jumper: A6=1 Blank Blank A5=0 A4=0 DIOB Address Jumper: A3=1 Jumper: 0 Jumper: 0 Jumper: 0 Jumper: Address Enabled This jumper must be present for the QLI to respond to the DPU. EEPROM Switch Serial Port Connector Switches 1-3 POWER OK CALIBRATION LEDs Figure 3-163. Card Configuration Figure 3-162. QLI Card Address Jumper Example 3-25.3-25. configuration constants previously written to the QLI (while the switch was ON) are read from EEPROM on power-up and any new configuration data written to the QLI will be stored in EEPROM for the next power-up. any configuration data written to the QLI will not be stored in EEPROM. Open = enable timeout. If the switch is OFF. 5/99 3-325 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Open = 50 Hz. This feature is available on QLI cards at sub X and later. Switch No. EEPROM Switch Controls access to the on-board EEPROM (see Figure 3-163). Open = ON state. EEPROM is ignored on power-up and the configuration constants receive default values from EPROM. Disable DPU Timeout: Controls whether or not QLI will enter a timeout mode if DPU has not written to QLI for more than 3 seconds. If the switch is ON. 2 Switch No.3-25. 1 For all cards configuration types except Digital Positioning type: Digital Output Default: Controls whether to hold digital outputs at their current values during DPU timeout or to go to zero values. Also. For Digital Positioning type configurations only: Initial State Selection: Controls whether the output pulses start with the ON or OFF state. Open = Hold. 3 Power Line Frequency: Choose between 50 and 60 Hz power line frequency. QLI Configuration Switches Switch No. CALIBRATION . It is ON in normal operation.LED is lit if the card is calibrating or is initializing.3-25. DIGITAL POSITIONING WITH RAISE/LOWER OVERRIDE Digital positioning only available for group 3. Configuration Jumpers Slots on the card edge connector allow insertion of jumpers for card configuration and addressing (see Figure 3-162). Configuration Jumpers State Jumper 23 Jumper 22 Jumper 21 NORMAL NORMAL WITH RAISE/LOWER OVERRIDE MASSFLOW MASSFLOW WITH RAISE/ LOWER OVERRIDE DIGITAL POSITIONING Digital positioning only available for group 3. Choices for card configuration are as follows: Table 3-102. QLI LED Indicators POWER OK LED is lit if proper power to the card is provided. Not Used Not Used In In In In Out In In Out Out In In Out In Out In Out In Out Out Out Out Out In Out M0-0053 3-326 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . It is OFF in normal operation. QLI 3-25. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 4 TERMINAL BLOCK REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A (+) ANALOG OUTPUT (−) (+) ANALOG SHIELD INPUT 1 (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 2 SHIELD (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 3 SHIELD (−) 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B DIGITAL INPUT 1 DIGITAL INPUT 2 3A 1B 1A (AT HALF-SHELL) EDGE-CONNECTOR 24 VDC Return (Customer grounding) +24 VDC HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 DIGITAL INPUT 1 DIGITAL INPUT 2 (−)ANALOG INPUT 3(+) (−)ANALOG INPUT 2(+) (−)ANALOG INPUT 1(+) B I/O DEVICES DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 (+) ANALOG OUTPUT 1 (−) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/32A CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-164. Local Grounding 5/99 3-327 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-25.8. QLI Wiring Diagram: WDPF Powered. For QLI cards at level 3QLI22 and higher (drawing number 7381A10 sub “L” or higher). For earlier versions of the QLI. QLI Wiring Diagram: Digital I/O-WDPF Powered Analog I/O-Self Powered with Remote Grounding Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-165) 1. perform the following steps: a. QLI Installation Data Sheet 2 of 4 TERMINAL BLOCK REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A (+) ANALOG OUTPUT (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 1 SHIELD (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 2 SHIELD (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 3 SHIELD (−) 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B DIGITAL INPUT 1 DIGITAL INPUT 2 3A 1B 1A A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 DIGITAL INPUT 1 DIGITAL INPUT 2 + S + S + S ANALOG INPUT 3 ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG INPUT 1 HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) B I/O DEVICES DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 (+)ANALOG OUTPUT 1(−) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/32A EDGE-CONNECTOR 24 VDC Return (Customer grounding) +24 VDC CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-165. the card is not connected to pin 15A and a jumper is present. Remove pin 15A from the card edge connector and tie back the wire. M0-0053 3-328 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . connecting pin 1A to 3B.3-25. 4. 8. 2. Add a jumper between pin 1A and pin 3B on the card edge connector.3-25. 5/99 3-329 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . DC power return must be grounded 4. 10 and 11 must be added. Analog input devices should be connected with shielded twisted pair cables. Shield drains and negatives from QLI must be connected to DC power return. 3. Jumpers between terminal block screws 3. 5. QLI b. 7. 3-25. QLI For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 4 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PE (+) (+) (-) ANALOG OUTPUT (+) (-) POINT 1 (+) (-) POINT 2 (-) POINT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 R1 R0 EDGE-CONNECTOR 18 19 20 1 2 6 9 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 .25A .25A (−) (+) 24 VDC FUSE SIZE DEPENDENT ON RELAY AND APPLICATION Figure 3-166. QLI CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Analog Inputs Powered at Field Side) Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-166) 1. The digital outputs must use shielded cable, unless the cabinets are bolted together and interposing relays are used (as shown above). The actual relay wiring depends on the relay style used. 2. The analog output must NOT have the shield tied to the return. However, the shield must be connected to earth ground at the B cabinet, as shown. 3. The analog inputs may be grounded at the B cabinet or in the field, as shown. M0-0053 3-330 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-25. QLI For CE MARK Certified System 4 of 4 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PE (+) (+) (-) ANALOG OUTPUT (+) (-) POINT 1 (+) (-) POINT 2 (-) POINT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 R1 R0 EDGE-CONNECTOR 18 19 20 1 2 6 9 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 .25A .25A 1/32A 1/32A (−) (+) 24 VDC FUSE SIZE DEPENDENT ON RELAY AND APPLICATION Figure 3-167. QLI CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Analog Inputs Powered at WDPF System Side) Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-167) 1. The digital outputs must use shielded cable, unless the cabinets are bolted together and interposing relays are used (as shown above). The actual relay wiring depends on the relay style used. 2. The analog output must NOT have the shield tied to the return. However, the shield must be connected to earth ground at the B cabinet, as shown. 3. When powering the analog inputs at the WDPF side, the analog inputs should be grounded at the B cabinet or in the field, as shown. 5/99 3-331 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ 3-26. QLJ Q-Line Loop Interface Card with Output Readback (Style 7381A76G01 through G03) 3-26.1. Description The Q-Line Loop Interface Card (QLJ) handles the analog inputs and outputs associated with a single or cascaded control loop executing in a Distributed Process Unit (DPU). The QLJ’s I/O capability consists of three analog inputs, and one analog output with readback. Communications to and from the card are through a Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB). DIOB DIOB Interface DIOB Bus Arbitration, Data Latches RS 422 Serial Link Memory R A M EE PROM E P R O M Processor Timing Control Jumpers, Switches A/D A/D A/D D/A (+) A/D (−) Internal Readback (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) Analog Inputs Analog Output Figure 3-168. QLJ Functional Block Diagram M0-0053 3-332 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-26. QLJ The QLJ may be linked to a Loop Interface Module (LIM) used for monitoring and manual control of the QLJ’s control loop (see Figure 3-169). TCP Data Highway D P U D P U Q-Crate Q B E Q T B Q L J #1 Flat Flex (Up to 12 QLJ’s on chain) Twisted Pair Q L J #2 Q L J #3 Q L J #4 Q L J Q L J Q L J #28 #29 #30 Transition Panel Multiple QLJs (LIM or SLIM) Twisted Pair (One QLJ/LIM or SLIM) LIM LIM Figure 3-169. QLJ Card Overview Analog input voltages or currents are converted by the QLJ to binary numbers at a rate of four times per second. They are stored by the QLJ until they are read by the DPU. Binary numbers from the DPU are converted to output voltages or currents at a rate greater than 10 times/second. 5/99 3-333 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ Three versions of the QLJ are available, distinguished by their analog input and output value ranges: Version Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Analog Input 0 - 10 V 0-5V 0 - 20 mA Analog Output 0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V 4 - 20 mA Group 3 QLJs may be modified to accept 10-50 mA input by changing a 250 ohm input resistor on the card to a 100 ohm resistor. Changing the resistor to 100 ohms introduces an error of 0.2%. The Q crate delivers 13 VDC at the rear edge pin connectors. This is the power for all logic and communications on the card. The QLJ automatically checks for 13-volt power supply malfunctions as well as many of its own malfunctions. Malfunctions are displayed by the program running in the DPU. Additional information related to the installation and operation of the QLJ can be found in “Q-Line Loop Interface Card and Loop Interface Module (QLI/LIM) User’s Guide” (NLAM-B200). 3-26.2. Features • • • • • • • • • Three analog input circuits and one analog output circuit with internal readback and range checking. Analog circuitry is isolated from the logic circuitry. Choice of analog input and output ranges. Analog-to-digital conversion rate of 4 times per second with an accuracy of 0.1% Automatic adjustment for gain and offset temperature coefficients of analog inputs. IEEE/SWC surge withstand protection for analog inputs and outputs. Interfaces with the DPU through a Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB). Configuration switches to customize operation. Serial port connection to Loop Interface Module (LIM). RS-422 and up to 1000 feet long. Automatic diagnostic program detects 13V power supply and QLJ malfunctions. M0-0053 3-334 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-26. QLJ • Analog Input Detects and flags over- and under-range conditions. 3-26.3. Specifications Input ranges Group 1 0-10 VDC Group 2 0-5 VDC Group 3 0-20 mA * A/D conversion type voltage-to-frequency Conversion rate 4/sec Accuracy 0.1% Impedance 100 megohms/volt, 1000 ohms in overload Resolution 12 bits Analog Output Output ranges Group 1 0-10 VDC Group 2 0-10 VDC Group 3 4-20 mA ** 0-1000 Ohms for current 500 Ohms minimum for voltage 12 bits, unipolar 0.1% A/D resolution 8 bits Accuracy of readback 3.125% (5 bits) Loading Resolution Accuracy AO Readback Circuit Specifications Field wiring to the QLJ is through the front card edge connector. Prefabricated cable connections are made with the terminal blocks in the adjacent “B” cabinet. The QLJ itself is grounded by a grounding screw at the bottom front corner of the card (see Figure 3-171). This not only grounds the card through its rack but also allows the IEEE Surge Protection circuitry to function and allows the LIM (Loop Interface Module) to function properly. Analog inputs are protected up to 120 VDC continuous; digital, up to 150 VDC continuous. Analog input and output circuits meet IEEE/SWC Surge Withstand Standards.With Group 3 cards *With Group 3 cards, the range can be changed to 10-50mA by changing a resistor on the card. Accuracy will then be 0.2%. ** AO is totally isolated from the rest of the card. The shield can be connected to earth ground in the field. 5/99 3-335 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ 3-26.4. Circuit Description The QLJ contains three analog input channels, each of which has its own circuitry including an A/D converter. Analog inputs are converted to binary numbers. Negative inputs are flagged as an under-range condition. The QLJ has one analog output with a D/A converter which converts binary numbers to an analog voltage or current value. This analog output is read back and converted to linear numbers, and can be read by the DPU. Incoming analog values to the DPU are stored in DIOB data latches on the QLJ and accessed by the DPU for processing. Outgoing analog values from the DPU are also stored in data latches on the QLJ. Components Figure 3-168 shows a functional block diagram of the QLJ. 1. Serial Port Control: An RS-422 serial port for communication with a Loop Interface Module (LIM). An on-board microprocessor sends and receives serial I/O data for manual loop control through this port. 2. A/D Converters: (Three converters: One for each analog channel) Convert incoming analog signals to a digital value. Incoming analog currents are first converted to a voltage signal and then to a frequency. 3. AO Readback: A/D converts analog output signal directly to a digital value. 4. D/A Converter: Converts binary signals from the DPU to an analog voltage or current. 5. Switches: Settings of the configuration and EEPROM switches and the configuration jumper clips allow the microprocessor to follow the correct control procedures for the configuration chosen. 6. Microprocessor: Controls serial port communication, adjusts analog inputs for gain and offset error, stores configuration data, and performs control functions dictated by the configuration data. 7. Timing and Control Circuitry: Generates the signals needed for the input and output circuits and the microprocessor. Based on an 11.0592-MHz clock. 8. Memories: Current configuration data is stored in the 1K EEPROM; default configuration data and control programming is stored in the 32K EPROM; and input, output, and calculation data is stored in the 2K Static RAM. 9. DIOB Bus Arbitration: Controls access to the DIOB data latches. Coordinates reading of new data by both the microprocessor and the DPU. M0-0053 3-336 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-26. QLJ 10. DIOB Data Latches: Store input data written by the microprocessor for the DPU to read via the DIOB interface, and output and configuration data written by the DPU via the DIOB interface for the microprocessor to read. 11. DIOB Interface: Places data from the output data latches onto the DIOB data lines and takes data from the DIOB data lines and stores it in the input data latches. 3-26.5. Card Addressing Card addressing is in hexadecimal. Addresses begin at 08 and end at F0 and follow the standard Q-Line addressing scheme. The last three bits are always zero; only the first five bits are set with jumpers. Note Installing a jumper encodes a DIOB address BIT = 1. Installing a jumper encodes a Card Configuration BIT = 0 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Jumper: A7=1 Jumper: A6=1 Blank Blank A5=0 A4=0 DIOB Address Jumper: A3=1 Jumper: 0 Jumper: 0 Jumper: 0 Jumper: Address Enabled This jumper must be present for the QLJ to respond to the DPU. Card Configuration Figure 3-170. QLJ Card Address Jumper Example 5/99 3-337 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ 3-26.6. Controls and Indicators QLJ card components are shown in Figure 3-171. EEPROM Switch POK CAL Switches 1-3 Serial Port Error Jumper LEDs Figure 3-171. QLJ Card Components Configuration Switches (Four Position DIP Switch) Switch Pos. No. 1 Switch Pos. No. 2 Switch Pos. No. 3 Not used. Power Line Frequency: Choose between 50 and 60 Hz power line frequency. Open = 50 Hz. Disable DPU Timeout: Controls whether or not QLJ will enter a timeout mode if DPU has not written to QLJ for more than 3 seconds. Open = enable timeout. Not used. Switch Pos. No. 4 EEPROM Toggle Switch Controls access to the on-board EEPROM. If the switch is OFF, EEPROM is ignored on power-up and the configuration constants receive default values from EPROM. Also, any configuration data written to the QLJ will not be stored in EEPROM. If the switch is ON, configuration constants previously written to the QLJ (while the switch was ON) are read from EEPROM on power-up and any new configuration data written to the QLJ will be stored in EEPROM for the next power-up. M0-0053 3-338 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-26. QLJ Serial Port Error Jumper Determines how the absence of a serial port is reported to the DPU. Position 1-2 installed jumper – Report serial port errors Position 2-3 installed jumper – Do not report serial port connector off as an error to the DPU. Configuration Jumper Clips Slots on the card edge connector allow insertion of jumper clips for card configuration and addressing. Choices for card configuration are as follow: Table 3-103. Configuration Jumpers State Jumper 23 Jumper 22 Jumper 21 NORMAL MASSFLOW All other configurations are invalid. In In In Out In In LED Indicators POWER OK LED is lit if proper power to the card is provided. It is ON in normal operation. CALIBRATION - LED is lit if the card is calibrating or is initializing. It is OFF in normal operation. 5/99 3-339 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ 3-26.7. Installation Data Sheet 1of 2 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER TERMINAL BLOCK CARD 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) (+) (SHIELD) (−) ANALOG INPUT 3 ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 (+) ANALOG OUTPUT (SHIELD) (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 1 (SHIELD) (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 2 (SHIELD) (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 3 (SHIELD) (−) 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A EDGE CONNECTOR Figure 3-172. QLJ Wiring Diagram Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-172) A. If inputs are to be grounded at the system end, insert a #6 screw and nut in the hole located near the shield terminal on Terminal Block A. Then add two jumpers as shown below. Six holes, located next to terminals 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, & 17, have been drilled for this purpose. M0-0053 3-340 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 3-26. QLJ A (+) S (−) #6 SCREW (+) TRANSDUCER (−) Figure 3-173. QLJ Ground Inputs at System End B. If inputs are to be grounded at the signal source, ground both the (−) side of the signal and the cable shield as shown below. A (+) S (−) (+) TRANSDUCER (−) Figure 3-174. QLJ Ground Inputs at Signal Source 5/99 3-341 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 3-26. QLJ Installation Data Sheet 2 of 2 TERMINAL BLOCK REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A (+) ANALOG OUTPUT (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 1 SHIELD (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 2 SHIELD (−) (+) ANALOG INPUT 3 SHIELD (−) 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 (−)ANALOG INPUT 3(+) (−)ANALOG INPUT 2(+) (−)ANALOG INPUT 1(+) (+)ANALOG OUTPUT 1(−) HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) B 20 19 I/O DEVICES 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/32A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/4A FUSE 1/32A EDGE-CONNECTOR CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-175. QLJ Fused Half-Shell Extension Wiring Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-175) 1. Jumper 1A - 3B is connected only for QLJ’s sub D and later. For earlier versions, this jumper should be added. 2. Analog input devices should be connected with shielded twisted pair cables. Shield drains and negatives from QLJ must be connected to DC power return. 3. DC power return must be grounded. 4. Jumpers between terminal block screws 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, and 11 must be added. M0-0053 3-342 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 LIM 3-27. Loop Interface Module 5/99 3-343 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . numeric displays and alphanumeric displays on the front panel of the LIM. Figure 3-176. and accompanying logic needed for the operator to monitor and control the I/O functions of a QLI (Q-Line Loop Interface). LEDs. LIM Loop Interface Module (Style 1D54561G01 through G02) 3-27. Description The Loop Interface Module (LIM) provides the displays.1. Information is presented to the operator by various bargraphs. The keyboard allows the operator to send control information to the QLI to control the process (see Figure 3-176).3-27. keyboards inputs. 3-27. the operator has the following capabilities: • • • • • • • • • M0-0053 Raise output Lower output Raise setpoint Lower setpoint Change LIM mode (Group 1 only) Change alphanumeric and numeric displays Change to different QLI (with different loop number) (Group 1 only) Change QLI mode to Cascade (Group 1 only) Change QLI mode to Auto 3-344 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Features Through keys on the front of the LIM panel. LIM Keyboard Interface MicroProcessor Display Controller Bargraph Display 7 1 Status Leds 8 6 Numeric Display To/from Qli Serial Port Input/ Output 9 2 Timing And Control 3 Alpha Numeric Display 10 4 From User Supply User Power Interface Power Ok To All Components 5 Figure 3-177. LIM Functional Block Diagram 3-27.2. Sends and receives information to and from the QLI through a serial port. LIM • • • Change QLI mode to Manual Change QLI mode to Local Change QLI tuning constants (Group 1 only) Additional information on the installation and use of the LIM can be found in “Q-Line Loop Interface Card and Loop Interface Module (QLI/LIM) User’s Guide” (NLAM-B200). MONITOR. LEDs.3-27. Group 2 operates in CONTROL mode only. Additional Features • • • • • • • • Runs bargraphs. Scans keypad to control QLIs Monitors and communicates with up to 12 QLIs Group 1 LIMs operate in four modes: CONTROL. and alphanumeric and numeric displays to monitor QLI I/O activities. Flags a break in the communication link with the QLI Allows loop control even if DPU is down Displays: two 40-segment bargraphs one 30-segment bargraph one 4-digit numeric one 4-digit alphanumeric thirteen status LEDs • Control keys: 5/99 3-345 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . TUNING. LOOP. although the PROMs will have been burned differently. it always operates in the CONTROL mode. the setpoint. and displays PV. or OUT with proper engineering units on an alphanumeric display. and output value for the QLI on a bargraph. MONITOR MODE: (Group 1 only) TUNING MODE: (Group 1 only) LOOP MODE: (Group 1 only) M0-0053 3-346 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . displays the process variable. They keyboards are the same except Group 2 does not have the LOOP. reset. SP. The card is the same for both assemblies. Offers no choice of modes for the LIM. The four modes of operation for the LIM are as follows: CONTROL MODE: Allows the operator to send control information to the QLI through a keyboard. Displays the gain.3-27. rate. Offers three choices of operation of the QLI. CASC. Displays the Loop Number of the QLI the LIM is currently communicating with and allows the operator to change to another QLI. the setpoint. LIM four keys to raise and lower setpoint and outputs seven function keys Groups The LIM card is packaged in one of two assemblies (see Figure 3-178). Group 1 Group 2 Allows the operator to choose from among four modes of operation for the LIM and four for the QLI. and derivative gain values for the QLI it is communicating with and enables the operator to change the values. and MODE buttons. Displays the process variable. and output values for the QLI on a bargraph and displays the analog input values on an alphanumeric display. Requires a password. 3-27. LIM DISP LOOP DISP MODE CASC AUTO AUTO MAN MAN LOC LOC GROUP 1 GROUP 2 Figure 3-178. Keyboards for Group 1 and Group 2 LIMs 5/99 3-347 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . A backup power supply is optional. Specifications Power cables to the LIM must be single stranded #16 AWG copper conductors with ring lugs on both ends.3. Power required at the black terminal block of the LIM is 1. LIM Wiring Table 3-104. If LIMs are connected in parallel.3-27. conductors must be able to accommodate the total current requirement for all LIMs. +12V A (8) +12V B Signal “-” Signal “-” (1) Serial Port Figure 3-179. M0-0053 3-348 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . voltage must measure 12 VDC at the last LIM in the line.5A at 12 VDC (see Table 3-104). LIM 3-27. No shielding is required. LIM Power Card-Edge Terminal Block Connector Component Side Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Chassis (Earth) Ground Chassis (Earth) Ground Chassis (Earth) Ground Chassis (Earth) Ground Signal (“–”) Signal (“–”) +12V B +12V A In installations with more than one LIM. each LIM should have its own pair of conductors directly from the power supply. and microprocessor. Also provides the voltages needed by the various displays. Circuit Description The LIM card contains the logic to send and receive information from the QLI to allow the operator to monitor and control the QLI’s I/O activities. The LIM must enter Loop Mode to change the QLI with which it is communicating. 4. Timing and Control: Generates the signals needed to coordinate the serial port.0592-MHz-clock. Table 3-105. and maintains the various displays. Keyboard Interface: Allows the operator to control the I/O activities of the QLI. The operator can monitor the activities on three bargraphs.5. Based on a 11. 1. 2. Also sends operator inputs from the keyboard to the QLI. 5/99 3-349 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . LIM Serial Port Card-Edge Connector Component Side Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 through 10 Transmit + Transmit − Description Shield (Signal Ground) Receive + Receive − Not Used 3. User Power Interface: Provides the regulated voltages needed by the logic circuitry and provides the POWER OK signal for the microprocessor. Can communicate with only one QLI at a time.4.3-27. formats outgoing serial port messages. 5. keyboard scans. a 4-digit numeric display. LIM 3-27. a 4-character alphanumeric display. The I/O activities can be controlled through an 11-key keyboard for Group 1 assemblies or an 11-key keyboard for Group 2 assemblies. Serial Port (see Table 3-105): Receives display and status data from the QLI. 3-27. Components A functional block diagram of the LIM card is shown in Figure 3-177. displays. interprets incoming serial port messages. Microprocessor: Scans the keyboard and determines what action (if any) should be taken. and 13 status LEDs. and high-limit and low-limit alarm conditions. The setpoint and process variable are on 40-segment bargraphs. process variable. which value is currently being displayed by the numeric display. Numeric Displays: Shows a numeric value for the setpoint. 8. The alphanumeric display has its own multiplexing circuitry. the QLI mode. 10. the output is on a 30-segment bargraph. Bargraph Displays: Can display either the setpoint. or can give status or mode information. M0-0053 3-350 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and the numeric display. Status LEDs: Thirteen status LEDs display the LIM mode. Display Controller: Provides multiplexing control for the status LEDs. Alphanumeric Display: Can give the name of the engineering units for the value of the numeric display. bargraphs. LIM 6. and output values. output. or analog inputs. process variable. This value will be scaled to the appropriate engineering units for the value of the numeric display. 7.3-27. 9. SLIM Small Loop Interface Module 5/99 3-351 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . keyboards inputs.1. WDPF II PV 100 SP Out Reject to Local Disp 80 60 Auto SP/Bias 40 Man 20 Out Loc SLIM Enclosure 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 SLIM Figure 3-180. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Small Loop Interface Module (SLIM) provides the displays. The keyboard allows the operator to send control information to the QLI to control the process (see Figure 3-180). SLIM 3-28. numeric displays and alphanumeric displays on the front panel of the SLIM. SLIM Small Lop Interface Module (Style 4D33741G01 through G02) 3-28.3-28. Information is presented to the operator by various bargraphs. and accompanying logic needed for the operator to monitor and control the I/O functions of a QLI (Q-Line Loop Interface). LEDs. the operator has the following capabilities: • • • • • • • • Raise output Lower output Raise setpoint Lower setpoint Change SLIM mode (Group 1 only) Change alphanumeric and numeric displays Change to different QLI (with different loop number) (Group 1 only) Change QLI mode to Cascade (Group 1 only) M0-0053 3-352 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . SLIM Block Diagram Keyboard Interface MicroProcessor 1 Display Controller Bargraph Display 7 Status Leds 8 6 Numeric Display To/from QLI Serial Port Input/ Output 9 2 Timing And Control 3 From User Supply User Power Interface 5 Power Ok To All Components Alpha Numeric Display 10 4 Figure 3-181.3-28. Features Through keys on the front of the SLIM panel. SLIM Functional Block Diagram 3-28.2. • • • • • • • • Runs bargraphs. and alphanumeric and numeric displays to monitor QLI I/O activities.3-28. Group 2 operates in CONTROL mode only. MONITOR. Sends and receives information to and from the QLI through a serial port. Flags a break in the communication link with the QLI Allows loop control even if DPU is down Displays: two 40-segment bargraphs one 30-segment bargraph one 4-digit numeric one 4-digit alphanumeric thirteen status LEDs • Control keys: four keys to raise and lower setpoint and outputs seven function keys 5/99 3-353 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . LEDs. Scans keypad to control QLIs Monitors and communicates with up to 12 QLIs Group 1 SLIMs operate in four modes: CONTROL. LOOP. TUNING. SLIM • • • • Change QLI mode to Auto Change QLI mode to Manual Change QLI mode to Local Change QLI turning constants (Group 1 only) Additional information on the installation and use of the SLIM can be found in “Q-Line Loop Interface Card and Loop Interface Module (QLI/LIM) User’s Guide” (NLAM-B200). The card is the same for both assemblies. They keyboards are the same except Group 2 does not have the LOOP. or OUT with proper engineering units on an alphanumeric display. and displays PV. displays the process variable. and output value for the QLI on a bargraph. Displays the gain. and MODE buttons. MONITOR MODE: (Group 1 only) TUNING MODE: (Group 1 only) LOOP MODE: (Group 1 only) M0-0053 3-354 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . rate. the setpoint. the setpoint. Offers three choices of operation of the QLI. SLIM Groups The SLIM card is packaged in one of the two assemblies (see Figure 3-178). Displays the process variable. SP.3-28. it always operates in the CONTROL mode. Displays the Loop Number of the QLI the SLIM is currently communicating with and allows the operator to change to another QLI. Offers no choice of modes for the SLIM. The four modes of operation for the SLIM are as follows: CONTROL MODE: Allows the operator to send control information to the QLI through a keyboard. although the PROMs will have been burned differently. and derivative gain values for the QLI it is communicating with and enables the operator to change the values. Group 1 Group 2 Allows the operator to choose from among four modes of operation for the SLIM and four for the QLI. reset. Requires a password. CASC. and output values for the QLI on a bargraph and displays the analog input values on an alphanumeric display. SLIM WDPF II AI1 AI2 AI3 Out Disp 80 Mode 60 Auto SP/Bias 40 Man 40 SP/Bias Loop M C T 80 Casc 60 Reject to Local PV SP 100 Out Disp WDPF II PV SP 100 Reject to Local Auto Man 20 Out 0 20 Loc 20 Out 0 20 Loc 0 40 60 80 100 0 40 60 80 100 Figure 3-182. Keyboards for Group 1 and Group 2 SLIMs 5/99 3-355 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-28. conductors must be able to accommodate the total current requirement for all SLIMs. each SLIM should have its own pair of conductors directly from the power supply.3.4.5. SLIM 3-28. and 13 status LEDs. a 4-digit numeric display.3-28. The I/O activities can be controlled through an 11-key keyboard for Group 1 assemblies or an 11-key keyboard for Group 2 assemblies. SLIM Wiring In installations with more than one SLIM. Keyboard Interface: Allows the operator to control the I/O activities of the QLI. Specifications Power cables to the SLIM must be single stranded #16 AWG copper conductors with ring lugs on both ends. 3-28. 1. Power required at the black terminal block of the SLIM is 0. The operator can monitor the activities on three bargraphs. voltage must measure 12 VDC at the last SLIM in the line. a 4-character alphanumeric display. 3-28. Components A functional block diagram of the SLIM card is shown in Figure 3-181. +12A +12B RTN RTN Serial Port Figure 3-183. No shielding is required. M0-0053 3-356 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Circuit Description The SLIM card contains the logic to send and receive information from the QLI to allow the operator to monitor and control the QLI’s I/O activities. A backup power supply is optional.5A at 12 VDC (see Figure 3-183). If SLIMs are connected in parallel. User Power Interface: Provides the regulated voltages needed by the logic circuitry and provides the POWER OK signal for the microprocessor. 6. Numeric Displays: Shows a numeric value for the setpoint.0592-MHz-clock. Also sends operator inputs from the keyboard to the QLI. Alphanumeric Display: Can give the name of the engineering units for the value of the numeric display. 5/99 3-357 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . or analog inputs. Also provides the voltages needed by the various displays. Display Controller: Provides multiplexing control for the status LEDs. The alphanumeric display has its own multiplexing circuitry. process variable. or output values. Bargraph Displays: Can display the setpoint. 5. displays. This value will be scaled to the appropriate engineering units for the value of the numeric display. The SLIM must enter Loop Mode to change the QLI with which it is communicating. formats outgoing serial port messages. Serial Port (see Table 3-106): Receives display and status data from the QLI. keyboard scans. and maintains the various displays. and the numeric display. 10. The setpoint and process variable are on 30-segment bargraphs. Table 3-106. interprets incoming serial port messages. Based on a 11. or can give status or mode information. and high-limit and low-limit alarm conditions. 7. process variable. 4. SLIM 2. SLIM Serial Port Card-Edge Connector Component Side Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 through 10 Transmit + Transmit − Description Shield (Signal Ground) Receive + Receive − Not Used 3. 8. 9. output. Status LEDs: Thirteen status LEDs display the SLIM mode. bargraphs. and microprocessor. Timing and Control: Generates the signals needed to coordinate the serial port. which value is currently being displayed by the numeric display.3-28. Can communicate with only one QLI at a time. the output is on a 20-segment bargraph. the QLI mode. Microprocessor: Scans the keyboard and determines what action (if any) should be taken. 3-28. The following rules apply: • A transition panel kit (Westinghouse drawing number 3A59353) is used inside the DPU to provide an earth grounding point for the shields of the QLI/SLIM cable (Westinghouse drawing number 5A26130) and the internal QLI transition panel cable (Westinghouse drawing number 5A26127). Cable 5A26130 (SLIM to transition panel) provides the connection between the SLIM and the transition panel. SLIM SLIM use in the CE MARK Certified System The SLIM is applicable for use in the CE MARK certified system. It is connected to (internal) cable 5A26127. Cable 5A26127 (QLI/SLIM transition panel) provides the connection from the transition panel to the QLI. • • M0-0053 3-358 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . It is connected to cable 5A26130. The QMT card is available in three design groups (G01. QMT M-Bus Terminator Card (Style 7379A79G01 through G03) 3-29. Description The QMT card provides a variety of support functions for the Q-line Memory Bus (M-bus) and Distributed Input/Output Bus (DIOB) (see Figure 3-184). G02.3-29. and G03). QMT 3-29.2.1. DIOB 120Ω Terminators Bus Discharge and Clamp Read. and G01) provide the following Q-line support functions: • Voltage threshold selection for the following power supplies: — +V Primary (+13V) 5/99 3-359 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QMT Block Diagram 3-29. and DMA Interrupt Recovery Dead Computer Recovery On-Card Power Supplies UIOB or DIOB Power Status Monitor Power Supply Monitor Optional Q-line M-bus DIOB Bus Extension Figure 3-184. G02. Features All QMT cards (G03. Write. dry-circuit relays indicating primary and secondary DIOB power status Voltage threshold detection for the following power supplies: — +12 Auctioneered (+12 VDC) — +5 Internal (+5 VDC) — +15 (+15 VDC DIOB clamp supply) The G02 QMT cards add the following Q-line support functions: • • • • • DIOB discharge The G01 QMT cards include all of the G02 functions and add the following Q-line support functions: 120 Ω termination to +5 VDC for 33 M-bus signals +5 VDC at 2A for microcomputer termination and bus transceiver power Voltage threshold detection for the following power supply: — +5T (M-bus) (+5 VDC) Time-out detection and recovery for the following M-bus conditions: — Missing READY on READ cycle — Missing READY on WRITE cycle — Incomplete Direct Memory Access (DMA) cycle — Missing READY on INTERRUPT OPCODE cycle — “Dead Computer” reset (optional) — Sequence fault (READY•REL↑) — All DIOB signals are diode clamped to +15 VDC and 0 VDC The QMT card is designed to be installed in a standard Q-line card cage in the vertical position and it occupies card slot number 25 in all M-bus card cages.3-29. M0-0053 3-360 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QMT — +V Backup (+13V) • • • • All DIOB signals are diode clamped to +15 VDC and 0 VDC DIOB extension through two front-edge connector Two form-C. 3-29. QMT Block Diagram J1 CONNECTOR (DIOB) DIOB DISCHARGE AND CLAMP J3 CONNECTOR DIOB EXTENSION (WITHOUT POWER) J4 CONNECTOR MBUS TERMINATION (120 Ω 5 V) J2 CONNECTOR (M-BUS) READ WRITE DMA INTERRUPT RECOVERY DEAD COMPUTER RECOVERY POWER SUPPLY MONITOR +5 VDC AT 2A INTERNAL LOGIC (VCC) POWER SUPPLY J5 CONNECTOR M-BUS TERMINATION POWER SUPPLY +5 VDC AT 2A +15 VDC AT 10 MA DIOB CLAMP POWER SUPPLY CHASSIS POWER MONITOR RELAYS Figure 3-185. QMT Card Functional Block Diagram 5/99 3-361 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-29. The J1 connector plugs into the backplane of a standard 19 inch Q-line card cage.1 VDC 3A 39.4 VDC Nominal + 13. The J2 connector plugs into the backplane of a standard 19 inch. Q-line card cage. QMT Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage Backup Current Power Consumption 12.3 watts Signal Interface The QMT card interfaces with the Q-line system through five electrical connectors.4 VDC 12. J2 Connector: The J2 connector is a 50-pin M-bus signal interface to the QMT card. QMT Card Connectors • • J1 Connector: The J1 connector is a 34-pin DIOB signal interface to the QMT card. M0-0053 3-362 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The connector names and locations are shown in Figure 3-186.1 VDC 13. Descriptions of individual connector functions are provided following Figure 3-186: J5 J1 J3 J2 J4 Figure 3-186.0 VDC -2A 26 watts Maximum 13. QMT Card Fuse Ratings and Locations Fuse Name M192-1 M196-1 M196-2 Rating (Amperes) 1 2 2 Function +12V Auctioneered Out to J5-3 +5T Power Supply Output +5 Power Supply Output 5/99 3-363 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Table 3-108 shows the name. QMT • • J3 and J4 Connectors: The J3 and J4 34-pin connectors are used to extend the DIOB signals to other card crates. QMT J5 (Power Monitor Relay) Pin Connections and Signal Names Pin No. J5 Connector: The J5 connector is a 9-pin connector that is used as an application interface for the QMT card power monitor relays. Female front-edge connectors with flat-flex ribbon cable are used to transfer the DIOB signals. Table 3-107 shows the pin connections and signal names for the J5 connector.3. The J5 connector is a board mounted connector that transfers the relay signals to any desired location. Input/Output Signal Requirements M-bus signals: Complies with M-bus interface requirements DIOB signals: Complies with DIOB interface requirements Fuses The QMT card uses six fuses for over current protection. rating and function of each fuse. Table 3-107. Table 3-108. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name PCOM BCOM +12 AX BNC GROUND PNO BNO PNC (Not Connected) 3-29.3-29. two front-edge connectors (J3 and J4) and a side mounted (component side) connector (J5) (see Figure 3-186).25 . The J5 connector provides connection to the primary and backup power monitor relay contacts.3-29. QMT Card Fuse Ratings and Locations Fuse Name M272-1 H60-1 H60-2 Rating (Amperes) 3 . The J1 and J2 connectors are.25 Function +12 Auctioneered Main Input +V Primary Comparator Input +V Backup Comparator Input Wiring Electrical connection to the Q-line system is made by two backplane plug-in connectors (J1 and J2). QMT Table 3-108. the DIOB and M-bus connectors while the J3 and J4 connectors provide for DIOB cable extension. respectively. M0-0053 3-364 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Description Groups 01 through 04 are Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QPA card accumulates the pulse inputs that are normally counted by the system controller. This configuration allows the system controller to perform other control and data acquisition tasks and permits higher rates of pulse inputs. The QPA performs average speed measurements.1. QPA 3-30. QPA Block Diagram 5/99 3-365 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QPA Pulse Accumulator (Style 7379A13G01 through G04) 3-30. elapsed time measurements and speed ratio measurements (see Figure 3-187). tachometers and flow-rate meters.3-30. Data DIOB Data Register MSB 2:1 MUX Latch G04 Only DIOB Data Compare 2:1 MUX Latch Control Up/Down Counter Status Read Field Control Logic PHA Up/Down Counter PHB Field Clock Inputs PHA Status PHB Field Clock Field Control Inputs Inputs Figure 3-187. These pulse inputs may originate from devices such as position encoders. average inverse speed measurements. J1. Each counter/comparator consists of a 15-bit bidirectional counter. The J2 connector is used to interface QPA comparator register output signals to QPA counter control inputs. J3. RESET OPTION. Compare – This signal is active only when a comparison is valid.3. The pulse inputs (process or time base) are fed into one of two counter/comparators. The counter’s value may be read at any time and the comparator’s output is available to the bus as status. The G01 through G04 QPA cards contain two separate counter/comparators circuits. Groups are described below: M0-0053 3-366 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . both counters may be reset to zero. It will deactivate on the next counter clock. The DIOB also supplies power to the Q-Line point cards. FLAG – This signal is set by an exact comparison of the counter and the compare register. 3-30. It also permits various options to be selected. The data. It is reset by a power-up or a status read command. For the G01 through G03 cards. Ten field inputs are brought onto the card via a front-edge connector. a start/stop bit. By insertion of a jumper from a J2 connector pin. counter reset or write command to the compare register. Definitions Frozen – This signal indicates that the counter is still counting. and snap-shot or released from snap-shot by a command word. A 25-pin “D” type connector is located on the top front-edge of the card (J2). Group addressing gives the system the ability to perform a plant snap-shot. DIOB – (DISTRIBUTED INPUT/OUTPUT BUS) – This bus interfaces Q-Line I/O point cards to a multiplexing bus controller and permits a byte-oriented digital exchange of information between the bus controller and the point cards. address and control signals on the DIOB are twelve volt CMOS logic level signals. started or stopped. counter reset will immediately follow the snap-shot of the counter value. then immediately refreezing it. Features There are four QPA card groups available. 3-30. a snap-shot bit. but the last counter value before freezing is stored in the latch that is read by the DIOB. Running – This signal indicates that the counter has been enabled to recognize clock inputs and may increment/decrement accordingly.3-30. Snap-Shot – This signal takes an instantaneous sample of the counter’s value by unfreezing the bus input latch.2. QPA The QPA interfaces with the Distributed Input Output Bus (DIOB) through a rear-edge connector. Its state is affected by the START and STOP inputs and the START/STOP bit in the command word. and a comparator. The command may be sent to one specific card (jumper selected address) or to many cards (jumper selected group address). to one of its ground pins. See Figure 3-189. START. single-ended inputs as stated in G01. and STOP inputs are single-ended. The SNAP-SHOT. The common return line may be tied to a positive or negative polarity (+48 VDC). G04 provides Phase A and Phase B inputs that are identical to Group one inputs (Figure 3-188). +48 VDC differential voltage inputs that employ on-card digital filtering (Figure 3-188). The control inputs of SNAP-SHOT. The common return line must be tied to +5 VDC +5% voltage source. The control signals and the J2 connector are absent. The clock plus input should be tied to a +5 VDC +5% voltage source and the clock minus input to the output of a +5 VDC line driver.3-30. optically-coupled inputs without filtering. See Figure 3-192. The line driver must be capable of sinking 40 mA while maintaining an output voltage (VOL) of +0. +5 VDC differential inputs (with no filtering). START and STOP are +5 VDC. 48 VDC. START and STOP inputs are +48 VDC. See Figure 3-190 and Figure 3191. optically coupled inputs with digital filters (identical to that of Phase A and Phase B inputs). • • • 5/99 3-367 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . G03 provides Phase A and Phase B inputs that are +5 VDC differential inputs as described in G02. QPA • G01 provides Phase A and Phase B inputs that are optically coupled. See Figure 3-189.5 VDC or less. The SNAP-SHOT. G02 provides Phase A and Phase B inputs that are optically coupled. single-ended. PH.+ PH(+) 48VDC Contact Wetting Voltage Supply Clock Inputs PH.B0(+).PH.A0(+).A1(+). PH. G04) Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .A1(-) Two methods of wiring the contact wetting voltage supply to the field contacts and the QPA clock inputs are shown.M0-0053 Each clock signal should be transmitted over a twisted conductor pair as shown.B0(-) 3-30.B1(-) PH.B1(+).PH. QPA 3-368 Figure 3-188.PH.A0(-) PH. An outer shield should surround all the cable’s twisted pair conductors. The cable containing the twisted pair should only carry QPA field signals. QPA Group One or Four 48VDC Contact Wetting Voltage Supply + PH(+) Field Contacts PH(-) PH(-) Field Contacts . QPA +48 VDC Clock Input Signal Wiring (G01. QPA Figure 3-189. QPA Control Signal (+48 VDC) Input Wiring (G01. G02) 5/99 3-369 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-30. G03) M0-0053 3-370 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C +5VDC ±5% 5/99 .3-30. QPA +5 VDC Clock Input Signal Wiring (G02. QPA Figure 3-190. 3-30. QPA Clock Signal Wiring (Differential Line Driver) G02 and G03 5/99 QPA-4 3-371 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C QPA-4 M0-0053 . QPA +5VDC ±5% Figure 3-191. 1 STOP 0. QPA +5 VDC Control Input Wiring (G03) Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C QPA CONTROL INPUTS START 0.1 5/99 .1 SNAPSHOT 0. QPA GROUP THREE J3 CONNECTOR CONTROL INPUT COMMON SINGLE ENDED INPUTS + 5 VOLTS D. +5% THE OPEN COLLECTOR TRANSISTOR MAY BE REPLACED BY TTL OPEN COLLECTOR GATES OR STANDARD TTL GATES CAPABLE OF SINKING 16 MA OR CURRENT 3-30. QPA 3-372 Figure 3-192.C.M0-0053 WIRING IS RESTRICTED TO WITHIN THE CABINET IN WHICH THE QPA IS LOCATED. Time Base Counter/Comparator #0 (CC0) Field Signals from Terminal Block Figure 3-193. QPA Functional Block Diagram 5/99 3-373 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Specifications A functional block diagram of the QPA card is shown in Figure 3-193.2. .3-30. QPA 3-30.3) 25 pin “D” Connector Power On 1 MHz Osc. The counter/ comparator is shown in Figure 3-194 and Figure 3-195. J1 Bus Interface Counter/Comparator #1 (CC1) J2 (G01.4. COMPARE AND (=) CLOCK SELECT TIME BASE DIRECTION BIT (1=DOWN) COMPARE MSB 15 15 L A T C H MUX 2:1 8 DATA HIGH SPEED 100 KHZ 10 KHZ X4 BUS COMMAND OR P.U. UNFREEZE LATCH. START START STOP STOP RESET OPTION SNAP-SHOT OR OR SNAP-SHOT SNAP-SHOT LEGEND J3 CONNECTION J2 CONNECTION P.U. Figure 3-194. QPA Card Counter/Comparator (1 of 2) (G01. 2.U. AND “RUNNING” BUS COMMAND FREEZE S R “FROZEN” Q BUS COMMAND OR P.U. QPA DIOB “FLAG” P.U. THEN FREEZE LATCH. 3) M0-0053 3-374 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C RESET Internal Timebase + PHB − + PHA − MUX 4:1 UP/DOWN COUNTER BUS COMMAND 5/99 .U. RESET COUNTER IF RESET OPTION INPUT IS GROUNDED.3-30. = POWER UP = STATUS BIT = OPTICAL ISOLATION LOGIC BUS COMMAND OR S Q OR R 15 External Clocks ENABLE COUNT P. UFLAG FLAG Q R STATUS READ REGISTER S MSB 15 1 UFLAG 8 DATA RESET ON P. = POWER UP = STATUS BIT = OPTICAL ISOLATION “FROZEN” Figure 3-195. S Q BUS COMMAND OR P. LEGEND J3 CONNECTION P.U. BUS COMMAND R BUS COMMAND “RUNNING” S Q R BUS COMMAND OR P. QPA DIOB DIRECTION BIT MSB 15 L A T C H MUX 2:1 8 DATA PHB + EXTERNAL CLOCKS PHA + CLOCK (X1) (DIRECTION) UP/DOWN COUNTER R CE BUS COMMAND OR P.U.U.U.3-30. QPA Card Counter/Comparator (2 of 2) (G04) 5/99 3-375 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 7 40 4.953 kHz + 2% Vin is measured directly across the QPA input pins for external clock inputs (see Table 3-109). M0-0053 3-376 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3 Nom.3-30. 4 G02. 11.45 QPA field input voltages equal to or less than the maximum OFF voltage will guarantee a logic zero to be transferred to the QPA logic circuitry via the optical isolator. QPA Internal Timebase Clocks and External Inputs’ Digital Filter Clock Frequency Internal Low Speed Time Base Clock Internal High Speed Time Base Clock Digital Filter Clock 10 kHz + 1% 100 kHz + 1% 1.3 0.25 42.7 – Max 15. 0. QPA field input voltages equal to or greater than the minimum ON voltage will guarantee a logic one to be transferred to the QPA logic circuitry via the optical isolator. Vin is measured directly between the specified QPA input pin and the common return pin for control inputs.35 3.0 8. Table 3-109.0 25.2 Vin OFF Max. 2.5 8.9 Vin ON Nom. 60 5.35 0. 48 – Max. 40 3.8 Min.0 0. 8. QPA Field Signal (J3) Specifications VDC External Phase A & Phase B Clock Inputs G01. 2 G03 2.0 Iin OFF Max.6 15.0 16.0 mA(DC) Iin ON Min. Iin is the current measured at the QPA input pin that flows into the input circuit.0 0.1 48 – 60 5. 3 Control Inputs G01.9 – 11. 2 G03 1 Off Time (Min) 2.0 None Max. The UFLAG (pin #1) of the J2 connector is tied directly to the QPA card-DIOB pin 30 (UFLAG). IinOFF may be due to driver/cable leakage or coupling capacitance between cables. limited with a 0.7 – Nom. The START. Table 3-110.4 Current: 100 mA (max).1 Assumes a two-phase (quadrature) input clock.1 3-30. 3 Control Inputs G01. 4 G02. When Vin OFF(MAX) is applied to a QPA field input. See Figure 3-196 for pin locations of J2. 2.7 – 1. the resulting input current may exceed Iin OFF (MAX) but the input current will still transfer a logic zero to the logic circuitry.36 – 2. Field Signal Times (J3) msec External Clock On Time Inputs (Min.0 None 2.5 0.5. Power Supply Voltage (VDC) Minimum Primary Voltage: +12. The maximum clock frequencies are still 200 KHz for G01 and G04 or 100 KHz for G02 and G03.5 0. QPA Iin OFF (MAX) is the maximum leakage current allowed to flow into a QPA field input (J3) that still ensures that a logic zero will be transferred to the QPA logic circuitry via the optical isolator (see Table 3-110).0 Maximum +13. 2. SNAP-SHOT is available on two separate pins to aid in daisy chaining. HIGH SPEED and RESET OPTION are select lines which may be tied to ground at the connector or left open (inactive). 1.5 Amp fuse Nominal +13. STOP and SNAP-SHOT inputs may be tied to a QPA output (COMPARE) or left open (inactive).5 0.005 2. Count Rate CLKX1 CLKX41 200 kHz 100 kHz – – 800 kHz 400 kHz – – msec Digital Filter Delay Min. 5/99 3-377 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Addressing and Field Pins J2 Connector signals (Figure 3-196) • INPUTS: the TIME BASE.005 2.36 – 2.3-30.1 Max.5 0.) G01. FLAG0 TIME-BASE0 HIGH-SPEED0 RESET-OPTION0 START0 STOP0 FLAG1 TIME-BASE1 HIGH-SPEED1 RESET-OPTION1 START1 STOP1 DIOB UFLAG 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 COMPARE0 GND GND GND SNAP-SHOT0 SNAP-SHOT0 COMPARE1 GND GND GND SNAP-SHOT1 SNAP-SHOT1 Counter/Comparator 0 Counter/Comparator 1 4260A10G02 Figure 3-196. QPA J2 Pin Connector (G01. The FLAG output may also be used to drive the UFLAG input if the DIOB Controller uses UFLAG. 2 and 3) (Front View) M0-0053 3-378 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . FLAG is an open collector output which may be wired into an interrupt subsystem or similar receiver. QPA • OUTPUTS: The COMPARE output may be used to drive the QPA inputs described in the above section.3-30. a status read should be part of an interrupt service routine. To clear the FLAG. Each of the six signals will be single wire sharing a common with the other five inputs (see Figure 3-197). The selection is to be by group. 3. 5/99 3-379 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 2. ONLY) PHA0 (+) 9B 9A PHB0 (−) 7B 7A PHA0 (−) POINT 0 SNAP-SHOT 0 5B (OPEN) START 0 3B 3A STOP 0 CONTROL RETURN 1B 1A 0 CONTROL RETURN A = CIRCUIT SIDE B = COMP. QPA J3 Connector Signals (Figure 3-197) • CONTROL INPUTS: THE SNAP-SHOT. SIDE 404A037H01 (CARD EDGE) Figure 3-197. 2. (SLOT) PHB1 (+) 17B 17A PHB1 (−) PHA1 (+) 15B 15A PHA1 (−) POINT 1 SNAP-SHOT 1 13B (OPEN) START1 11B 11A STOP1 PHB0 (+) (GROUPS 1. 3. and 4) (Front View) • CLOCK INPUTS: Phase A and Phase B are both two wire inputs with either +48 volt wetted contacts (external supply required) or +5 VDC line driver compatible. STOP and START inputs may be either the +48 volt wetted contacts (external supply required) type or the +5 volt TTL current sinking type.3-30. QPA J3 Pin Connector (G01. QPA Clock Select Jumper Connections Jumper TIMEBASE N N J J HIGH SPEED N J N J Counter Clock 1 count per external clock cycle* 4 counts per external clock cycle** 1 count per 100 µs (internal 10kHz timebase) 1 count per 10 µs (internal 100kHz timebase) J = Jumper Inserted.3-30. **If the X4 clock is selected. a one or two phase clock may be used. Table 3-111 shows the clock select jumper connections (see Figure 3-196). QPA Card Connectors Table 3-111. N = No Jumper *When the X1 external clock is selected. J1 Power On LED J2 J3 Figure 3-198. QPA QPA card connectors are shown in Figure 3-198. If Phase B is left open. a two-phase clock must be used. the counter will only up-count. M0-0053 3-380 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . A DIOB write operation is performed to one of the two comparator registers. XX + 3). Refer to Figure 3-200 for QPA Data Formats. where a double type operation is required. The two upper QPA DIOB addresses (which address four data bytes) are used to address the QPA card Status or Command byte (Figure 3-199). the Command byte must be in the lower data byte and be repeated in the upper data byte. When double byte data transfers are used. the card command byte may be written into the upper or lower byte of the QPA addresses (XX + 2. DIOB ADDRESS HIGH BYTE LOW BYTE XX16 COUNTER 0 WORD OR COMPARATOR 0 WORD (XX + 1)16 COUNTER1 WORD OR COMPARATOR1 WORD (XX + 2)16 COMMAND BYTE OR STATUS BYTE (XX + 3)16 COMMAND BYTE OR STATUS BYTE COMMAND BYTE OR STATUS BYTE COMMAND BYTE OR STATUS BYTE Figure 3-199. If single byte data transfers are used. XX + 3) may be read to obtain the QPA status byte. the Status byte appears in the lower data byte and is repeated in the upper data byte. Either of the upper or lower bytes of the QPA addresses (XX + 2. QPA Card Address Format 5/99 3-381 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QPA DIOB Addressing and Field Pins A QPA card occupies four successive DIOB addresses (Figure 3-199). Figure 3-201 for Card Address Bit Positions and Figure 3-202 for Card Address Selection.3-30. The lowest of the four DIOB addresses (XX) is occupied by the Counter/Comparator 0 word while the next higher DIOB address (XX + 1) is occupied by Counter Comparator 1 word. If double byte DIOB Read operations are required. 3-30. QPA High Byte D MSB Low Byte LSB 15 Bit Counter Value D= Direction Bit: 0 = Last Count Was Up 1 = Last Count Was Down -AHigh Byte Low Byte Input Data from QPA (Read Counter) E MSB 15 Bit Comparator E= Enable Bit: 0 = Comparator Disarmed 1 = Comparator Armed -BMSB X High Byte X X Low Byte X LSB Output Data to QPA (Set Comparator) LSB Input Data from QPA (Read Status Byte(S)) Counter 1 Flag 1 Running 1 Frozen 1 Flag 0 Running 0 Frozen 0 Counter 0 -CMSB X High Byte X X Low Byte X LSB Output Data to QPA (Write Command Byte(S)) Counter 1 Reset 1 Start/Stop 1 Freeze/Unfreeze 1 Reset 0 Start/Stop 0 Freeze/Unfreeze 0 X = Don’t Care Counter 0 -D- Figure 3-200. QPA Card Data Format M0-0053 3-382 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . S1. CA4 determines which byte (upper or lower) a QPA’s flags are located in. Bits CA5 and CA6 determine the QPA’s particular DIOB group read address. QPA UADD2-7 UADD1 0 0 UADD0 0 0 1 1 X HI-LO 0 1 0 1 X OR OR OR OR OR Read counter 0 low byte: Write comparator 0 low byte. Read counter 0 high byte: Write comparator 0 high byte. These bits determine the QPA’S group write byte address. Bits CA2 and CA3 determine the flag bit positions within that byte. Read card status byte(s) Write command byte(s) Card DIOB Address* (CA2-CA7) 0 0 1 Same Data Format **111111 ***111111 (X) = Don’t care * S2 CA6 S1 CA5 S0 CA4 Write command byte Read flags on bits determined by CA2. Read counter 1 low byte: Write comparator 1 low byte. Read counter 1 high byte: Write comparator 1 high byte. J3. QPA Card Address Selection (Example) 5/99 3-383 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . See Figure 3-202. Group reads and writes are not available with Group 4 QPA’s. **Address bits S0. Figure 3-201. CA3. The Pulse Accumulator Card Occupies Four Addresses In The DIOB. *** Bits CA2 through CA6 are the card address bits described above (*). (Individual QPA cards cannot be assigned DIOB addresses FC16 to FF16).3-30. S2 are jumper selectable (see Figure 3-202). The card address bits are jumper selectable on the front connector. The DIOB group read address contains two bytes of data which contain the status of eight QPA’s flags. A 25B.3-30. A 22B. QPA Card Address Selection (Example) QPA DIOB Group Read Bit Format The upper half of the DIOB address range (80-FF) is mapped into 64 Group Read bits that occupy four DIOB addresses (FC-FF. A QPA card occupies four successive DIOB addresses which means that two successive DIOB Group Read bits are available to each QPA card. no point card may occupy these addresses) (Figure 3-203). The QPA card DIOB address determines which two Group Read bits are assigned to it. A 24B. A 21B. S0 Select Card DIOB Address for example. Figure 3-203 may be used to determine the bit positions of a particular QPA card’s FLAGS within the eight bytes of Group Read data (DIOB Group Read Address. 101101XX (B416-B716) [FE16(High Byte)] Jumper Inserted = Logic One Figure 3-202. A CA7 = 1 CA6 = 0 CA5 = 1 CA4 = 1 CA3 = 0 CA2 = 1 S2 = 1 S1 = 0 S0 = 1 Select Group Write Byte Address 10 High Byte 111111 FIxed Selected by S2. S1. high or low byte and bit positions within the particular byte). QPA J3 Card Edge Connector 28B. A 26B. A 20B. M0-0053 3-384 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Example: Bits 0 and 1 of the low bytes of DIOB address FF16 contain the status of FLAGS 0 and 1 of QPA card that is occupying DIOB addresses E016 to E316. A 23B. Each Group Read bit has two successive DIOB addresses mapped into it. A 27B. QPA M0-0053 .5/99 HIGH BYTE 7(F) OPEN DIOB FF ADDRESS F8-FB F4-F7 F0-F3 EC-EF E8-EB OPEN FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #31 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #30 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #29 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #28 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #27 FLAG 1 QPA 6(F) 5(D) 4(C) 3(B) 2(A) 1(9) 0(8) 7 6 5 4 3 2 FLAG 0 #26 LOW BYTE 1 FLAG 1 QPA 0 FLAG 0 #25 E4-E7 E0-E3 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #24 FLAG 0 #23 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #22 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #21 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #20 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #19 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #18 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #17 DC-DF FE D8-DB D4-D7 D0-D3 CC-CF C8-CB C4-C7 C0-C3 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #15 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #14 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #16 FLAG 0 #13 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #12 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #11 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #10 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #9 BC-BF FD B8-BB B4-B7 B0-B3 AC-AF A8-AB A4-A7 A0-A3 3-385 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #8 FLAG 0 #7 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #6 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #5 FLAG 1 QPA 9C-9F FC 98-9B 94-97 90-93 Figure 3-203. QPA Card Group Read Bit Format Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C FLAG 0 #4 FLAG 1 QPA 8C-8F FLAG 0 #3 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #2 FLAG 1 QPA FLAG 0 #1 88-8B 84-87 80-83 3-30. QPA QPA Applications By using the control signals on the J2 and J3 connectors.3-30. With the field input wired to PHASE A (PHA +) and PHASE A (PHA −) (and PHASE B and PHASE B if necessary) and the control pins left open. Devices included in this category are position encoders (where rotation in one direction increments the counter and rotation in the opposite direction decrements the counter). several derived QPA functions are possible. Shown in the following figures (Figure 3-204 through Figure 3-207) are four circuit configurations utilizing the QPA card. M0-0053 3-386 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The most straight forward use of the QPA card is pulse accumulation. the bus controller may read the counter value at any time. This allows the counter to contain a value that is proportional to rotary position. QPA Card Used for Speed Measurement 5/99 3-387 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C J3 Connection M0-0053 . QPA J2 Connection Figure 3-204.3-30. SELECT 10 KHZ CLOCK Figure 3-205.M0-0053 LIMIT SWITCHES START A STOP B + 48V RTN READ VALUE (WHEN STOPPED) COUNTER/COMPARATOR 0 HIGH SPEED TIME BASE E. QPA OR 3-388 SNAP-SHOT + 48V RTN RESET OPTION HIGH SPEED TIME BASE E.G. SELECT 100 KHZ CLOCK 3-30.G. QPA Card Used for Elapsed Time Measurement COUNTER/COMPARATOR 1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C READ VALUE (AT ANY TIME) J2 Connection J3 Connection 5/99 . estimate stretch of materials between two rollers 5/99 3-389 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C J3 Connection M0-0053 . QPA J2 Connection Figure 3-206.3-30. QPA Used for Speed Ratio Measurement (For example. QPA Used for Average Inverse Speed Measurement 3-30. Implementation Example In the following example. QPA J2 Connection Figure 3-207. a QPA card is set up as a counter for one pulsed input. The number of megawatts per pulse will be accounted for in the coefficients that have to be calculated.6. M0-0053 3-390 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C J3 Connection 5/99 .3-30. The parameter being counted in this case is a POWER VALUE (MWH): contact closures from a megawatt meter. CNTR = EW1.0. LS = 0. FRZ0 = 0. DG = 2500. SCHG = SECND QPACMD/111. DM.3-30. RST1 = 0. 1. the conversion coefficients for this point would be: COEF/LT.60 + 0. This is the second point on the card. 2 = (0. HL = 0. If the CI and CV fields are left blank. the coefficient would give a value of 3 * 10 KW * 0.00) This means. IL = 0.0 INIT/PMIN. RUN = DX1PASS QPACMD/112. RST1 = 0.600. An example follows: INIT/EW1. LL = 0.0. HW = 258. In this example. The QPA point must be initialized as an analog input point in the DPU. EU = ‘MWH ‘. RST0 = 0.0. DB = 0. 1. DM. CI = 2 CHARST/EW1 . AP = 0. 1. STRO = 0.0 INIT/EW1TOT.0 ‘ (OPTIONAL) This point may have non-zero values for parameters such as TOPBAR. CJ = 0. As an example.0. the value of EW1 will be the actual pulse count from the QPA card. 1. GADR = 0. if 1 pulse from a KWH meter is equal to 10 KW. BB = 0. just as any other analog process input point. EV = 0. 1.0 INIT/SECND. FRZ1 = 2. AM. FRZ1 = 0. even though there are only 2 inputs per card. The first point is point 0. BOTBAR and LIMITS as desired. ‘A INIT/HOURS.0.0. Care should be taken when selecting hardware addresses for QPA cards. CD = 36. 1. 0. STR1 = 1. if 3 pulses came in a one minute period. The algorithms required to control the QPA card are as follows: TIMECHG/110. ED = ‘MWH TO PHOS 1E − ACB NO1 ‘.00 = 1. AM. STRO = 0. RUN = PMIN 5/99 3-391 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .0. EW1 is point 1 on the card.80 MWH. LC = 0. DM.0. since they require 4 consecutive addresses each. CV = 1. QPA The QPA card is located in the first slot of crate 1 in a DPU (zone/halfshell = A1) and its address is 80H. EWIR. STR1 = 0. RST0 = 0. MCHG = PMIN. CNTR = EW1. HS = 0. and EW1 is to be equivalent to MEGAWATTS PER HOUR. AI. TB = 0. GADR = 0. FM = 0. IV = 0. A gain can then be used in the RESETSUM algorithm to get MW per hour. (The remaining two addresses are used for control and status word transfer). HCHG = HOURS. FRZ0 = 0.0 INIT. rather than immediately. M0-0053 3-392 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QPA QPACMD/113.0. These algorithms. GADR = 0. DX1PASS is a point generated by the standard system in every DPU which is set to 1 only during the first pass through the DPU control program. PMIN and SECND must be initialized as digital points (for example. RSET = HOURS(F). RST1 = 1. RCNT = 0. A description of each individual algorithm and required parameters can be found in “Control Algorithms” (U0-0106). which is a flag denoting a change in minutes. By unfreezing the QPA value only on the next 1-minute pass after freezing. start the QPA data collection (that is. STRO = 0. OUT = EW1R. FRZ1 = 1. The command words as described here may be field-wired if the availability of the QPA count is to be controlled by hardware rather than software. to be used by the QPACMD and RESETSUM algorithms. In this example the output EW1R is an hours accumulation of MW. and resetting the counter once that reading has been obtained. These 4 algorithms will only run when the digital flag PMIN is true. AREC = EW1 RESETSUM/115. FFLG = HOURS(F). GAIN = 1. STR1 = 0. IN1 = EW1. AIN (algorithm 114) is used to convert the value EW1 to engineering units as required by RESETSUM. PMIN may be generated any number of ways. RST0 = 0. This is accomplished by first freezing the counter to get the new value from the QPA. RUN = PMIN. Output EW1TOT which is triggered by HOURS will be an hourly total. CNTR = EW1. therefore. DM record type). HOURS. count upon DPU startup). FRZ0 = 0. a valid QPA reading is present on the DIOB during the entire 1-minute period. The two algorithm pairs (112 and 113) provide for the reading of data from the QPA channel 1.3-30. PMIN is set as an output flag from the algorithm TIMECHG every minute. which is a flag denoting a change in hours. Algorithm 111 sends a control command of START to channel 1 of the QPA when the digital input DX1PASS is set. RESETSUM (algorithm 115) is used to totalize the value read from the QPA. FOUT = EW1TOT Algorithm 110 (TIMECHG) generates PMIN. the freeze/unfreeze operation only causes the current value to be placed on the DIOB or removed from the DIOB. RUN = PMIN AIN/114. Only the reset operation will affect the actual QPA count. The values are summed based on the state the out flags PMIN and HOURS generated by TIMECHG. and HOURS.0. but in this system. 7. QPA 3-30. Group 1 contains all signals and circuits shown. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 5 TERMINAL BLOCK CARD 20B 20A 19B 19A CLOCK 1 COUNTER 1 (+) PHB (−) (+) (−) HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) 3/4 A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 START STOP SNAP-SHOT PHA * START STOP PHB * SNAP-SHOT PHA * PHB * 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A * PHA SNAP-SHOT START STOP 11B 11A (+) CLOCK 0 COUNTER 2 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A PHB (−) (+) (−) * PHA SNAP-SHOT START STOP 3B 3A 1B 1A EDGE-CONNECTOR BLACK CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS RED (+) INTERNAL BUS STRIP TP BUS RETURN 48 VOLT POWER Figure 3-208. Groups 1 and 4 Installation Note: Group 4 consists of counters only and no control signals. 5/99 3-393 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-30. QPA Wiring Diagram. * Group 2 utilizes standard 48V supply. QPA Installation Data Sheet 2 of 5 Terminal Block Card 20B 20A 19B 19A Clock 1 Counter 1 (+) PHB (−) (+) PHA (−) Half Shell Extension (B-Block) * 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 * (+) (−) (+) (−) PHA PHB (+) (−) (+) (−) PHA PHB 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A SNAP-SHOT Start Stop Clock 0 Counter 2 (+) PHB (−) (+) PHA (−) Snap-shot Start Stop Edge-connector BLack Red (+) Customer Connections Internal Bus Strip (+) (−) * TP BUS Return 48 Volt Power (Group 2) Customer 5V POWER (Group 3) Figure 3-209. Groups 2 and 3 Installation Notes: Group 3 uses customer supplied 5V power. QPA Wiring Diagram. M0-0053 3-394 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . This cards TP Bus will be live when customer 5V is on.3-30. The control signals are absent from the Group 4 QPA. Individually-shielded cables are not mandatory. QPA For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 5 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR 19 20 PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B 01 STOP 0 A 1 2 START 0 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 . The shield may be connected to earth ground at the B cabinet or in the field. 5/99 3-395 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 and 4) Installation Notes: 1. All field wiring must use shielded cables.3-30. 2. A single overall shield is acceptable.75A 19 20 PE PHB 1 PHA 1 SNAP SHOT 1 PHB 0 STOP 1 START 1 PHA 0 SNAP SHOT 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 48 VDC + Figure 3-210. Figure 3-210 shows two shielded cables with shields connected at the B cabinet. A single overall shield is acceptable. Individually-shielded cables are not mandatory. The shield may be connected to earth ground at the B cabinet or in the field. QPA For CE MARK Certified System 4 of 5 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR 19 20 PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 . 2. QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 2) Installation Notes: 1.3-30. Figure 3-211 shows the shields connected to earth ground in the field. All field wiring must use shielded cables. M0-0053 3-396 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Twisted-pair wiring is recommended for the clock inputs (PHA and PHB) due to the high frequencies.75A 19 20 PE 19 20 48 VDC + SNAP SHOT 1 STOP 1 START 1 SNAP SHOT 0 START 0 STOP 0 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PHA 1 + PHB 1 + PLANT EARTH GROUND PHB 0 + PHA 0 + PLANT EARTH GROUND Figure 3-211. QPA For CE MARK Certified System 5 of 5 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EDGE-CONNECTOR 19 20 PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 .3-30. 2. 5/99 3-397 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .75A 19 20 PE 19 20 5 VDC + SNAP SHOT 1 STOP 1 START 1 SNAP SHOT 0 START 0 STOP 0 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PHA 1 + PHB 1 + PHB 0 + PHA 0 + Figure 3-212. QPA CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Group 3) Installation Notes: 1. Individually-shielded cables are not mandatory. Figure 3-212 shows all shields connected to earth ground at the B cabinet. Twisted-pair wiring is recommended for the clock inputs (PHA and PHB) due to the high frequencies. All field wiring must use shielded cables. The shield may be connected to earth ground at the B cabinet or in the field. A single overall shield is acceptable. M0-0053 3-398 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QRC (Remote Q-Line Controller) printed circuit board serves as a DIOB controller in the WDPF Remote Q-Line I/O subsystem. Full details on the configuration and use of the QRC are contained in the “Remote Q-Line Installation Manual” (M0-0054). Located in the remote stations. QRC 3-31. the QRC handles the communications between the remote station and the MRC (which is housed in the master station (DPU)).3-31.1. QRC Remote Q-Line Controller (Style 4256A26G01) 3-31. QAX. using four-wire Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's) (see Figure 3-213). In addition to providing power to each channel. QRF 3-32. As part of the calibration. reasonability checks are performed on the errors to monitor the integrity of the hardware. and to convert the result to a percent of the full scale input voltage. Periodic calibration is performed by the microcontroller to obtain offset and gain errors from each input channel.1. The resulting data is formatted to conform to the data package used on the QAV. The data is processed to compensate for offset and gain errors. 5/99 3-399 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . precise timing is also transmitted by using a stable frequency to drive the power supplies. To provide electrical (transformer) isolation for the analog input channels. individual (one per channel). QRF Four-Wire RTD Input Amplifier (Style 3A99109G01) 3-32. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QRF card provides an addition to the family of Q-line I/O cards.3-32. to provide filtering for 50/60 Hz. noise. Six isolated analog input channels are provided along with six isolated reference current sources to accommodate six four-wire RTD's. QAW. and QRT cards. It provides an integrated solution to measure temperature. The input analog signals on each channel are converted to digital data and transferred to the on-board microcontroller. The formatted data is read via the Distributed Input/ Output Bus (DIOB). on-card power supplies are used. QRF Block Diagram M0-0053 3-400 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Counter and Control Circuits Transformer Isolation Transformer Isolation Channel 1 Voltage to Frequency Converter ...3-32. S H I E L D (+) Channel 6 Voltage to Frequency Converter (+) (-) S O U R C E R E T U R N (-) .. S O U R C E R E T U R N S H I E L D Six Sets of 4-wire RTD Analog Field Inputs Figure 3-213.. QRF DIOB Data Address Control Data Buffer RAM Address Decoder µController. 2.3-32. 5/99 3-401 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Reasonability test. Auto Conversion Check Both Normal and Common-Mode Rejection are provided Low power consumption is achieved by the extensive use of CMOS circuitry and the use of a switching regulator to generate the +5V (Vcc). RTD operational range monitoring. QRF 3-32. Open Input and Current Loop Detection Four groups provided as follows: Plug-on QRD Module 3A99114G01 3A99114G02 3A99114G03 3A99114G04 Group G01 G02 G03 G04 Temperature Range 0 oC to 370 oC using a 200 ohm Platinum RTD at 0 oC 180 oC to 230 oC using a 100 ohm Platinum RTD at 0 oC 268 oC to 342 oC using a 200 ohm Platinum RTD at 0 oC 0 oC to 290 oC using a 100 ohm Platinum RTD at 0 oC Note The groups are determined by the group of the Plug-on QRD Module (3A99114). Features The QRF card provides the following features: • • • • • • • • • • • IEEE Surge Withstand Capability Auto Offset Auto Gain corrections Electrical Isolation (all channels) On-Card Digital Memory (buffer) 50 or 60 Hz time-base using a QTB card or internal time-base without a QTB. 0 VDC -- Maximum 13.92mV * The actual Vspan values are the function of the excitation current.4 VDC Nominal + 13. for50 Hz. Normal Mode Voltage The IEEE surge may be applied without permanent damage to the QRF card.3-32. Current: 0.04mV 216.3.4 VDC 12. 0. Reduced accuracy is to be expected if reading are taken during the surge and up to 10 seconds following the surge. 5 during auto calibration Resolution: 12 bits Input Impedance: 107 Ohm 6000 Ohms in Overload or power-down Input Channel Sample Period (four cycles of the power line frequency): 0. M0-0053 3-402 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 1. QRF 3-32.72mV 54.3mV 36.8 A typical.1 VDC 13. Specifications Ratings • • • • • • Power Supply Number of Analog Inputs: 6 Point Sampling Rate (Rate/Second): 10.0 A maximum Minimum Primary Voltage Optional Backup 12.080 sec.1 VDC Input Signal Temperature Ranges Group Temperature Range G01 G02 G03 G04 0 oC to 370 oC 180 oC to 230 oC 268 oC to 342 oC 0 oC to 290 oC Platinum RTD’s Value 200 ohm at 0 oC 100 ohm at 0 oC 200 ohm at 0 oC 100 ohm at 0 oC Excitation Current 1mA+5% 2mA+5% 1mA+5% 2mA+5% Vspan* 273.066 sec. for 60 Hz. or until the next calibration. Reduced accuracy is to be expected if readings are taken during the surge and up to 10 seconds following the surge. readings taken following sustained over-range can be affected for several seconds. However.3-32. or until the next calibration.02mV for G03 and 108. Normal Mode Rejection • • 60 dB at exactly 50 and 60 Hz (and harmonics) with line frequency tracking 30 dB at 50 and 60 Hz + 5% without line frequency tracking For specified accuracy and normal mode rejection. Common Mode Voltage The IEEE surge may be applied without permanent damage to the QRF card. readings taken following sustained over-range can be affected for several seconds. QRF A continuous over-range input up to 10 VAC or 10 VDC can be sustained without damaging the QRF card. However. A continuous over-range input up to 10 VAC or 10 VDC can be sustained without damaging the QRF card. Common Mode Rejection • • 120 dB at DC and the power line frequency and its harmonics with line frequency tracking 100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency +5% and harmonics without line frequency tracking Note Common mode rejection is not applicable if peak value of AC exceeds 200. 18.36 mV for G02.000% of the input span 5/99 3-403 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 67 VAC maximum for G02).46mV for G04). 27. A continuous maximum of + 500 VDC or peak AC with respect to system ground is allowable.65 mV for G01. The common mode reject ratio is not applicable if the AC peak value exceeds 200.000 percent of the full-scale input scan (20 VAC maximum for G01. the input peak-to-peak AC is not to exceed 50% of the input span (136. 7 confidence. over the temperature range of 0oC to 60oC. thus the data is never more than 0.02% M0-0053 3-404 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Other Applicable Specifications Once every 80 conversions (8 seconds apart) auto gain and auto offset calibration is performed. 0 V Common Mode 0 V Normal Mode (ac) Temperature Coefficient: Maximum variation of reading is + 0. the QRT card’s temperature rate of change must not exceed + 10°C per hour.25% of span.Analog Inputs: +0.3-32. Reference Conditions: 25oC +1oC Ambient Temperature 50% +1% RH. Long Term Stability: 0.2 second old. Reference Accuracy . Calibration and input conversion cycles are alternated. QRF Temperatures Stability For accuracy specifications to apply.20% of span +10 uV +1/2 LSB @ 99. Note The temperature characteristics of the instrument are determined mainly by the characteristics of the reference resistors. From 0 oC through +70 oC. Storage: Humidity: From 10 to 90% relative humidity through an ambient temperature range of 0oC through 60oC. Card Addressing The card address is programmed by five jumpers on the top of the front card-edge connector. Since the all-zero card address is excluded. 8 addresses (16 bytes) are lost. When the pattern of the jumpers matches the bit pattern of the DIOB (UADD 3-7). the card is selected. an unused “finger” (20B) is shortened on the card. In order to keep the address recognition circuit to a minimum size. no forced air movement). Insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on each address line (Add 3-7). card addresses will be programmed in groups of 8 (16 bytes). Bit patterns on UADD 0-2 determine which of the eight (or six using the option) channels on the card is selected. An “address” jumper must be in this position on the I/O connector. but with maximum wet bulb temperature not over 35oC (95oF). Half of the address range is usable when the QRF is mixed on the same DIOB with other cards that use the short “MSB” finger. To provide address protection during card-pull and still retain the full address range. 5/99 3-405 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QRF Operating and storage temperature: Operating: From 0oC through +60oC as measured approximately 1/2 inch from any point on the printed circuit card while it is mounted in its normal vertical position and while subject to the air movements which result from natural convection only (that is. Since there are only six analog channels on the card. 3-32.4. The “DIOB” can address 31 cards (186 channels). two addresses (4 bytes) are used to obtain diagnostic data from the QRF card.3-32. the two addresses are disabled on the QRF and can be used by other cards. As an option. 3-32. QRF DIOB Address Selection ADDRESS LINE ADDRESS PIN GROUND PIN A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 Address Protect A .Solder Side B .Component Side 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 20A 28A 27A 26A 25A 24A 20B Table 3-113.Component Side M0-0053 3-406 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The DIOB cycle is extended during a valid card address. Field Signal Pins Input (+) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 1A 5A 9A 13A 17A 21A (-) 2A 6A 10A 14A 18A 22A Shield 3A 7A 11A 15A 19A 23A Excitation Current Source 1B 5B 9B 13B 17B 21B Return 2B 6B 10B 14B 18B 22B Shield 3B 7B 11B 15B 19B 23B A . QRF The QRF will use the feature where the DEV-BUSY line is pulsed (-when addressed-) to detect card presence.Solder Side B . Table 3-112. Jumper JS3 Jumper JS2 Figure 3-214.3-32. No QTB (internal time-base) (Default) 60 HZ operation.) . No QTB (internal time-base) 50 HZ operation. QRF Card Jumpers Jumpers JS1 (Three Pos.) . JS4 . (Default) The first six addresses are used by the QRF. This is an option used to facilitate the grounding of the shields on some Jobs. With QTB 60 HZ operation. QRF 3-32.not installed.5.used to set the 50/60 hz operation according to the following table: JS2 (1-2) JS2 (3-4) Function OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 60 HZ operation.) .only the first position (on each channel) is used to connect the shields for all six channels. 5/99 3-407 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .JS9 (Three Pos.used to select the number of addresses used by the QRF card as follows: JS3 (1-2) JS3 (3-4) ON OFF OFF ON Function All eight addresses are used by the QRF. With QTB JS3 (Three Pos.) . JS2 (Three Pos.used for other RAM sizes . Controls and Indicators User configurable QRF card jumpers are shown in Figure 3-214. QRF Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-408 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 24A 24B 23B 22B 21B 23A 22A 21A 19B 18B 17B 19A 18A 17A 15B 14B 13B 15A 14A 13A 11B 10B 9B 11A 10A 9A 7B 6B 5B 7A 6A 5A 3B 2B 1B 3A 2A 1A Point 6 Point 5 Point 4 sh Return Source sh + sh Return Source sh + sh Return Source sh + sh Return Source sh + sh Return Source sh + sh Return Source sh + 17 16 18 14 “B” 13 Block 15 Halfshell 11 10 12 8 7 9 5 4 6 2 1 3 17 16 18 “A” 14 Block 13 Halfshell 15 11 10 12 8 7 9 5 4 6 2 1 3 Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Figure 3-215.3-32.6.module receiving power from backplane 3-32. QRF LEDs LE1: POK . 3-32. Figure 3-216. QRF For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CARD 2A 3A 1A 2B 3B 1B 6A 7A 5A 6B 7B 5B 10A 11A 9A 10B 11B 9B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE EDGE-CONNECTOR A 14A 15A 13A 14B 15B 13B 18A 19A 17A 18B 19B 17B 22A 23A 21A 22B 23B 21B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (Source) (+) (Return) POINT 6 (Source) (-) (+) (Return) POINT 5 (Source) (-) (+) (Return) POINT 4 (-) 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (Source) (+) (Return) POINT 3 (Source) (-) (+) (Return) POINT 2 (Source) (-) (+) (Return) POINT 1 (-) NOTE: MOVs (Westinghouse Part # 4258A79H06) must be connected from the cable shields to earth ground at the B cabinet. QRF CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-409 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-33. Data DIOB Address Data Latch Bus Drivers Address Decoder On-Card Relays Card-Edge LED Indicators Field Process Relay Contact Outputs Figure 3-217. This card consists of eight mercury-wetted relays energized under DIOB control. QRO 3-33. An on-card read/write latch provides an 8-bit memory function.1. QRO Relay Output (Style 2840A18G01 through G04) 3-33. Description The QRO Card provides a method of interfacing DIOB controllers with field process points that require relay switching within the plant environment (see Figure 3-217). QRO Block Diagram M0-0053 3-410 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . providing normally-open or normally-closed relay contact operations to field processes. This card also contains a switch-selectable dead-computer time-out circuit to reset the card when not periodically updated by the controller. (Inductive loads cannot be driven). and dead-computer time-out resets Switch-selectable time-out periods Read/write output data operation Card-edge LED indicator for each relay‘s state Compatible with any DIOB controller Features common to all cards include: • • • • • • • • During a write operation. The read/write register may be reset by the DIOB controller. Contacts may be individually jumper selected to be Form A (normally open) or Form B (normally closed). or by on-card resets from the power-up and time-out circuits. G02 provides eight contacts (SPST) which may drive resistive or inductive loads. IEEE surge-withstand protection 330 VDC common mode rating On-card power-up. During a read operation. depending on user applications. All G03 contacts are factory shipped as Form A (normally open). This latched write data energizes or de-energizes the appropriate relays via transistor relay drivers. Features The QRO card groups provides the following features: • • • • G01 provides eight contacts (SPST) which may drive resistive or inductive loads. 5/99 3-411 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . where “ON” is energized and “OFF” is de-energized. bus. All G02 contacts are factory shipped as Form B (normally closed). All G01 contacts are factory shipped as Form A (normally open). for use by the system controller. the QRO card receives and latches data from the DIOB into an on-card read/write register. G03 provides eight contacts (SPST) which are limited to resistive loads.3-33. (Inductive loads cannot be driven). The card should not be mounted more than 30 degrees from vertical. card-edge LED’s indicate the state of each relay. Additionally. All G04 contacts are factory shipped as Form B (normally closed). G04 provides eight contacts (SPST) which are limited to resistive loads. QRO 3-33. the state of each of the eight relays is read from the read/ write register and driven to the DIOB.2. Specifications A functional block diagram of the QRO is shown in Figure 3-218.C.5 Adc at peak AC (maximum) 100 VA (maximum) DC at peak AC M0-0053 3-412 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .1µF N.3. Address Data DIOB Unit Power Up 9 8 ~ ~ Card Time Out Compare 8-bit Latch DRIVERS Or 9 8 Relay Coils Reset Latch Front Connector Jumpers 8 Identical Relays LED’s MOV N.1µF AT 60 Hz = 26 KΩ Impedance 0.3-33.1µF AT 50 Hz = 31 KΩ Impedance Figure 3-218. QRO Functional Block Diagram Output Capabilities Voltage: Current: Power: 330 VDC (maximum) 250 VAC (maximum) RMS at line frequency 0. QRO 3-33. MOV 68Ω . On-Card Jumper *0.O.5w . 6V + 0. QRO Speed: Contact Impedance: Duty Cycle: 2ms typical (operate) 10ms typical (release) Closed – 6Ω (maximum) Open (G01. G02) – 25 kΩ (minimum) Open (G03.1 VDC +12.3-33. G04) – 300 kΩ (minimum) The contact should not open more than once every 10 ms (at rated voltage) Power Supply Primary: Backup: Current: +13V + 0.2 VDC 400 mA (maximum) supplied by DIOB Electrical Environment IEEE Surge withstand capability (G01 and G02 only) Common Mode Voltage: 330 VDC 250 VAC (rms) 5/99 3-413 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-33.2 .4 Closed Circuit Current (Amps) DC Safe Operating Area . These graphs may be referenced for safe operation specifications. .1 100 200 250 300 Open Circuit Voltage (VAC RMS) Figure 3-219.2 AC Safe Operating Area .3 . QRO Safe Operating Area Figure 3-219 shows graphs for both DC and AC operation.1 100 200 300 Open Circuit Voltage (VDC) . QRO Safe Operating Area Diagrams M0-0053 3-414 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3 Closed Circuit Current (Amps RMS) 100 VA .5 100 VA . . Card Addressing The QRO card address is established by eight jumpers on the top.4. card-edge connector.e. The insertion of a jumper encodes a “1” on the address line (Figure 3-220).3-33. QRO 3-33. Address Selection Example Jumper: Card Address = 1100 1000 (C8 High Byte) Jumper: Blank: Blank: Jumper: Blank: Blank: Blank: Jumper: A7 = 1 A6 = 1 A5 = 0 A4 = 0 A3 = 1 A2 = 0 A1 = 0 A0 = 0 HI-LO = 1 (i. High byte) Card-edge Connector (Front View) Figure 3-220. front. QRO Card Address Jumper Assembly 5/99 3-415 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . If the QRO card is not periodically updated. the card resets. G01 and G03 are factory shipped with all jumpers in the normally open position. Separate LED’s for each output are located at the front of the card to indicate the status of each output. Eight jumpers are provided to select the form of each contact (normally open or normally closed). Controls and Indicators The location of the QRO LEDs and DIP switches are shown in Figure 3-221.3-33. The update period is set by four DIP switches as given in Table 3-114. QRO Card Components M0-0053 3-416 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . G02 and G04 are factory shipped with all jumpers in the normally closed position. LEDs DIP Switches Figure 3-221. QRO 3-33.5. QRO Digital Output Contact Allocations Output Digital Bit No.6. data latched (X = 0 or 1) 3-33. Installation The relay outputs are brought out on the front edge of the card. The contact allocations are listed in Table 3-115. QRO Card Reset Switch Position Dip Switch Reset Time A 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X B 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X C 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 X D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 62 ms + 20% 125 ms + 20% 250 ms + 20% 500 ms + 20% 1 sec + 20% 2 sec + 20% 4 sec + 20% 8 sec + 20% No time out. B7 17B 17A 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 B6 15B 15A B5 13B 13A B4 11B 11A B3 9B 9A B2 7B 7A 5/99 3-417 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . PC Card Edge Pin No. Table 3-115.3-33. Field Terminal Block Terminal No. QRO Table 3-114. QRO Table 3-115. B1 5B 5A 5 4 3 2 B0 3B 3A M0-0053 3-418 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QRO Digital Output Contact Allocations (Cont’d) Output Digital Bit No.3-33. Field Terminal Block Terminal No. PC Card Edge Pin No. QRO Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-419 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Installation Data Sheet 1 of 1 TERMINAL BLOCK SCREW HI/LO JUMPER CARD 20B 20A 19B TYPICAL 5A BIT 7 19A 17B 17A 15B 250 V A 20 19 18 17 BIT 7 16 15 BIT 6 14 13 BIT 5 12 11 BIT 4 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 6 15A 13B BIT 5 13A 11B BIT 4 11A 9B G01 G02 250 V BIT 3 9A 7B COMMON BIT 2 7A 5B BIT 1 5A 3B BIT 0 3A 1B 1A EDGE-CONNECTOR CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-222. QRO 3-33.3-33.7. Description Groups G01 through G06 (Must be revision F or later) are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QRS is designed to provide a redundant interface to the DPU. QRS 3-34. 3 analog outputs. When two QRS cards are configured as a redundant pair. The M/A station interface is referenced to the DIOB ground. All analog outputs have readback circuits which are monitored by the on-board microcontroller. The M/A station interface consist of 6 digital outputs. a Manual/ Automatic (M/A) station and a field device. Contact your Westinghouse representative for additional information. 1 fixed analog output and 1 analog input. If a problem occurs on the controller and the quality of the backup is good. The field interface consists of a single analog output which is electrically isolated from DIOB ground. The transfer of control could take up to 30 milliseconds. The QRS card can be configured to operate as part of a redundant pair or as a stand alone card.1. In addition to the readback circuits. QRS Redundant Station Interface (Style 3A99108G01 through G06) 3-34. M0-0053 3-420 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-34. one of the cards will be the controller and the other will be the backup. then control is automatically passed to the backup QRS. the microcontroller monitors several other functions to determine if the card is operating properly. 8 digital inputs. QRT 3-35.1.. QRT Q-Line RTD Input Amplifier (Style 7379A62 G01 and G02) 3-35.. The output of each input circuit is processed by a common microcomputer. R T D Channel 4 Voltage to Frequency Converter R T D (+) (-) COM (+) (-) COM Four Sets of 3-wire RTD Field Pick-ups Figure 3-223. Each QRT card contains four individually isolated voltage-to-frequency converter circuits (channels). this time period is a multiple of the power line frequency (50 or 60 Hz).. QRT Block Diagram 5/99 3-421 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . .. The digital data is the summation of a frequency counted for a time period. Description Applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QRT card converts an analog field signal to digital data. and the resulting digital data is multiplexed to the Distributed Input/Output bus (DIOB) as a 13-bit word (see Figure 3-223).3-35. DIOB Data Address Control Data Buffer RAM Address Comparator and Data Selection mP and Control Circuits Channel 1 Voltage to Frequency Converter . and a clocked voltage-to-frequency converter. The frequency of the offset and gain calibration cycle is determined by a constant which has been programmed into the memory of the system controller.3.3-35. Each analog input circuit contains circuitry for signal conditioning. The isolation circuit provides power for each analog input channel in addition to providing precise timing from a stable frequency.2. M0-0053 3-422 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 14) Output = Output including indicator bits (bits 15. biasing. Offset and gain correction factors are calculated periodically by the QRT card microcomputer. auto-zero and auto-gain correction. Definition of Terms • • • • • • • • • RCOLD = Resistance at bottom of span RHOT = Resistance at top of span RSUPP = Equivalent resistance to RCOLD on card IPROBE = Current through RTD VFS = Full scale input voltage RSPAN = RHOT minus RCOLD R = Current limiting resistors on the bridge Calculated Output = Output stripped of indicator bits (bits 15. 14) 3-35. This timing is generated on the digital side of the QRT card circuits. Features The QRT card uses an electrical isolation circuit (transformer) to separate the analog input from the digital counting circuits. QRT 3-35. DIOB CONTROLLER QTB CARD DIOB POWER LINE INPUTS QRT CARD NUMBER 1 FIELD INPUTS QRT CARD NUMBER 35 FIELD INPUTS NOTE THE QTB CARD OBTAINS A HIGH NORMAL MODE REJECTION IN APPLICATIONS WHERE LARGE POWER LINE FREQUENCY VARIATIONS OCCUR. and multiplexers to interface four isolated RTD inputs asynchronously to a process control or monitoring system.Actual 1000 5/99 3-423 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . platinum. in addition to supervising voltage-to-frequency conversion. Copper. and also performs periodic QRT card calibration. The QRT card includes an on-board 8039 microcomputer which. The front end is designed to convert field signals to a proportional frequency. converters.3-35. There are two QRT card groups: • G01–Full Scale 10 mV Nominal 10 VDC ref --------------------------. The QRT card is a voltage input card with four individually-isolated analog input channels. Figure 3-224. QRT Figure 3-224 shows a typical control system configuration using QRT cards. Typical Control System Using QRT Cards In process control and monitoring applications where temperature must be measured in various locations. converts the digitized voltage reading to a percent span of the full scale input voltage. a three-wire Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) input signal is connected to bridge the amplifier circuits. or nickel RTDs can be interfaced to the QRT card. The QRT card provides the bridges. Actual 300 where: 10 VDC ref = 10 VDC + 1 Percent The on-card controller is common to all four input channels and converts the variable frequencies to a parallel. If a twisted pair cable must be used. On-card memory (buffer) for storing conversion results Normal and common-mode rejection M0-0053 3-424 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-35. auto-gain corrections Each channel is electrically isolated from the other channels and the UIOB or DIOB ground. every two analog channels will have a common ground. Both QRT card groups include the following features: • IEEE surge withstand capability • • • • Auto-zero. 12-bit word. It also provides offset and gain correction and controls the interfacing to the DIOB. QRT • G02–Full Scale 33-1/3 mV Nominal 10 VDC ref --------------------------. If the output exceeds 11FFH. the output is set to 3DFFH. QRT Figure 3-225 shows QRT card percentage accuracy versus RCOLD/RSPAN.425% 0. The dynamic linear range of the output is shown in Figure 3-226. the output is set to 1200H. 1 0. 5/99 3-425 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . −0.5% 0. QRT Card Accuracy The range of the valid input voltages to the QRT card extends from -10% to +110% of the defined full scale voltage (that is.4% 2 3 0.3% 4 0. such as a shorted RTD.225% 0. such as an open RTD. Below 3E00H.3-35.1% NORMAL RANGE 5 1 2 3 4 RCOLD RSPAN WHERE: RSPAN = RHOT − RCOLD (STANDARD CALIBRATION) 1 2 3 4 5 GROUP 1 ACCURACY INCLUDING BRIDGE (4 Ω SPAN) GROUP 2 ACCURACY INCLUDING BRIDGE WITH LOW RTD SPAN (10 Ω SPAN) GROUP 2 ACCURACY INCLUDING BRIDGE GROUP 2 ACCURACY EXCLUDING BRIDGE GROUP 2 ACCURACY INCLUDING BRIDGE (CUSTOM CALIBRATION) Figure 3-225.1 VFS ≤ Vin ≤ VFS).2% 0.16% 0. The result of the conversion is a 12-bit binary word. If they are not. at which time they are updated. QRT CALCULATED OUTPUT 1200H 1000H OUTPUT D200H D000H (−)0. the controller tests for the USYNC signal’s presence and its limits. During a calibration cycle. Table 3-116 lists the interpretations of QRT card hexadecimal output data. and conversion of data begins when the reset control is removed and the QRT card buffer memory is updated. Bit 15 is reset to Logic 1 after a warm-up pause is complete.125 VFS VIN CALCULATED OUTPUT 3DFFH Figure 3-226. The QRT microcomputer is then reset. One reading is the bridge input.125VFS OUTPUT FDFFH VFS 1. At the end of the calibration cycle. the other three readings are the calibration readings. QRT Card Conversion Results Hexadecimal Output Data C000 Zero Input Interpretation M0-0053 3-426 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The length of the warm-up pause is determined by another constant which is programmed into the memory of the system controller. A failure here sets bit 15 to Logic 0. Bit 15 is also set to Logic 0 during the power up routine of the QRT card. the calibration readings are monitored to ensure that they are within acceptable ranges. the QRT card checks for the presence of the USYNC jumper. Table 3-116. QRT Card Output Dynamic Linear Range Four different measurements are taken for each channel.3-35. If the jumper is installed. The calibration readings plus bits 14 and 15 are stored in QRT card memory and remain unchanged until the next calibration cycle. taken when a calibration cycle occurs (period of approximately 8 sec). bit 14 is set to Logic 0. QRT Table 3-116.3-35. QRT Card Conversion Results (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Output Data C001 D000 D001-D1FF D1FF D200 FFFF FFFF-FE00 FE00 FDFF 8000-BFFF 0000-7FFF Zero + 1 + FS + Over range Interpretation Maximum operational range Above the operational range (or RTD open) Zero − 1 − Over Range Minimum operational range Below the operational range (or RTD shorted) Calibration readings not within acceptable range Warm-up or USYNC failure (USYNC not present or present but not within specifications) 5/99 3-427 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QRT Block Diagram Figure 3-227 and Figure 3-228 show functional block diagrams of the QRT card.3-35. 200 KΩ I OFFSET 10 VDC REF 100 KΩ GO(1) 50 KΩ GO(2) 100 Ω GO(1) 167 Ω GO(2) + INPUT (2) − + INPUT (3) R FRONT EDGE CONNECTOR R − + INPUT (1) − FULL SCALE REF GROUND REF + − RGAIN 0-4 VDC RANGE 75 KΩ VBRIDGE 500 Ω RTD RSUPP INPUT (4) + COMMON MODE − GROUND MULTIPLEXER + − 500 Ω MUX CONTROLLER I TO F INPUT SIGNAL +12 VDC −12 VDC (−) POWER SUPPLY INTEGRATOR SWITCHING LOGIC SYNCHRONOUS COMPARATOR CLOCK + 12 VDC CURRENT SOURCE IREF D1 C2 R5 PSD (250 KHZ) FREQUENCY INPUT F11 T1 CAPACITOR DISCHARGE LOGIC Figure 3-227. QRT Card Bridge and I to F Circuits Block Diagram M0-0053 3-428 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-35. Specifications Ratings • • • 5/99 Number of Analog Inputs: 4 Point Sampling Rate: 500 msec Auto Calibration Rate: 9 sec 3-429 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .4. QRT ADDRESS JUMPERS (250 KHZ) PSD ANALOG POWER CONTROL CL P15 RAM LOAD ENABLE AOK ADDRESS DECODER UADD (0-7) DATA DIR USYNC HI-LO DATA GATE 6 MHZ TADD (0-2) THI-LO DOUT P17 P16 60 HZ TUSYNC 50 HZ CL WR JU 3-1 8039 MICROCOMPUTER SS BUFFER RAM LOAD CONTROLLER MWR. QRT Card Digital Circuits Block Diagram 3-35. WHI-LO I/O LEVEL SHIFT AND BUFFER UDAT (0-7) DEV BUSY) BUFFER RAM BUS (DB0-7) LEN WD(0-7) DIOB PROGRAM MEMORY ADDRESS LATCH BUFFER LATCH CONTROL ADDRESS I/O P10-12 P14 RESET +5V COUNTER (5) COUNTERS (1 TO 4) POWER UP AND RESET 5 VOLT REGULATOR +12V ALE/4 F1 (0 THROUGH 3) Figure 3-228. 1 VDC 13. Normal Mode Voltage Input G01 Nominal Input Signal Range Input Span 0 through 10 mV 10 mV Actual 0 through Vref ----------------------------------1000 Vref ----------1000 Vref ≈ 10 VDC G02 Nominal 0 through 33-1/3 mV 33-1/3 mV Actual 0 through Vref ----------------------------------1000 Vref ----------300 Normal Mode Rejection • • • 60 dB at exactly 50 and 60 Hz (and harmonics) without line frequency tracking 25 dB at 50 and 60 Hz + 5% without tracking Optional 60 dB at power line frequency (and harmonics) + 5% with line frequency tracing Temperatures Stability For accuracy specifications to apply.3-35.1 VDC 1.0 VDC -1. The QRT card signal input can be open or short circuited without damaging the card. QRT • Power Supply Sampling Rate During Calibration: 1 sec Minimum Primary Voltage Optional Backup Current Normal Mode Voltage Input 12. M0-0053 3-430 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the QRT card’s temperature rate of change must not exceed + 10°C per hour. Table 3-117.0 A Maximum 13.4 VDC – Nominal + 13.4 VDC 12.2 A Table 3-117 lists the input signal ranges and input spans for both QRT card groups. QTB Tracking Ranges (Optional) 58 Hz to 62 Hz or 45 Hz to 55 Hz Input Channel Sampling Period 0. A continuous over-range input up to 10 VAC or 10 VDC can be sustained without damaging the QRT card.000 percent of the full-scale input scan (20 VAC maximum for G01. A continuous maximum of + 500 VDC or peak AC with respect to system ground is allowable. or until the next calibration.3-35.4 seconds Common Mode Input The IEEE surge may be applied without permanent damage to the QRT card. Reduced accuracy is to be expected if reading are taken during the surge and up to 10 seconds following the surge.1 VDC Bridge Current: 10 mA Maximum Temperature Coefficient: 40 ppm/degree C AC normal mode rejection does not apply if peak AC exceeds 50 percent of the input span (5 mV maximum for G01. QRT Amplifier Offset Temperature Drift Compensation The QRT card features automatic compensation for amplifier offset temperature drift. However. Common Mode Rejection • • 5/99 120 dB at DC 100 dB at exactly 50 and 60 Hz (and harmonics) without tracking 3-431 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The common mode reject ratio is not applicable if the AC peak value exceeds 200. 67 VAC maximum for G02).0 + 0. 17 mV maximum for G02). Bridge Supply • • • Accuracy: 10. readings taken following sustained over-range can be affected for several seconds. 3-35. Each of the four analog channels has four contacts: • • • • M0-0053 (+) input (−) input common shield 3-432 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QRT • • DIOB Interface 80 dB at 50 and 60 Hz + 5% without tracking Optional 100 dB at power line frequency (and harmonics) + 5% with line frequency tracking The QRT card plugs into a standard DIOB backplane connector.5. Backplane Connector Front Edge Connector (RTD Input) Figure 3-229. Field Input Connection Figure 3-229 shows the QRT card-edge connectors.3-35. QRT Card Connectors A standard Q-Line series front-edge connector is used on the QRT card. 3-35. QRT Table 3-118 lists QRT card front-edge connector pin numbers and signals. Table 3-118. QRT Front Edge Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number (Solder Side) Signal Pin Number (Component Side) Signal 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A (−) INPUT (POINT 0) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 0) UNUSED COMMON (POINT 0) UNUSED COMMON (POINT 1) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 1) UNUSED (−) INPUT (POINT 2) UNUSED (+) INPUT (POINT 2) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 2) UNUSED (−) INPUT (POINT 3) UNUSED (+) INPUT (POINT 3) GROUND UNUSED UNUSED GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B (−) INPUT (POINT 0) UNUSED (+) INPUT (POINT 0) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 0) (−) INPUT (POINT 1) (−) INPUT (POINT 1) UNUSED (+) INPUT (POINT 1) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 2) UNUSED COMMON (POINT 3) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 3) UNUSED SHIELD (POINT 3) UNUSED (+) INPUT (POINT 3) ENABLE UNUSED UNUSED UADD 2 UADD 3 UADD 4 UADD 5 UADD 6 UADD 7 5/99 3-433 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Custom RTD bridges are available to the user. B 24A. B 23A. Table 3-119. B 27A.6. Card Addressing As shown in Table 3-119. B 25A.3-35. the QRT card uses DIOB address bits UADD 7 through UADD 2 for address selection of the card. and uses UADD 1 and UADD 0 to select channels 1 through 4 on the card. B 26A. B Table 3-120 lists the six standard groups of bridge modules which are available for the QRT card. contact your Westinghouse representative. Front Edge Pairs for QRT Card Address Bits UIOB or DIOB Address Bit UADD 7 UADD 6 UADD 5 UADD 4 UADD 3 UADD 2 Selection of RTD Bridges Corresponding Front Edge Pairs 28A. Table 3-120. QRT Card RTD Bridge Modules (7380A92) Module Group Full Scale Voltage R Rsup Rspan 1 2 10 mV or 33-1/3 mV 33-1/3 mV -60 KΩ -100 Ω -200 Ω M0-0053 3-434 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QRT 3-35. A jumper to tie 20A to 20B on the front edge must always be inserted. a jumper is inserted at the terminal pair(s) corresponding to the UADD bit(s) which is (are) Logic 1. A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Possible Card Address Channels 1 through 4 To set a DIOB address. For ordering details. This feature removes the card from its DIOB address when the front-edge connector is removed. Table 3-119 lists the DIOB address bits’ corresponding front-edge connector pairs. 3-35. QRT Table 3-120. Application Information As noted previously. Controls and Indicators User configurable QRT card components are shown in Figure 3-230. If jumper JU3 is installed. the controller will use the QTB board’s USYNC signal for that time base (50 or 60 Hz according to jumper location).7. The following sections provide information intended to clarify the application of QRT cards. 5/99 3-435 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . the controller checks whether this jumper is installed. then the controller will use its own internal clock as a time base for voltage-to-frequency conversion. Four stranded jumpers may be installed to tie together the ground and shield of channels 1 and 2 to the ground and shield of channels 3 and 4. QRT Card RTD Bridge Modules (7380A92) (Cont’d) Module Group Full Scale Voltage R Rsup Rspan 3 4 5 6 33-1/3 mV 33-1/3 mV 33-1/3 mV 10 mV 15 KΩ 30 KΩ 30 KΩ 8 KΩ 120 Ω 100 Ω 400 Ω 8. Jumper JU3-1 is installed in order to perform line frequency tracking. At the end of each calibration cycle.5 Ω 50 Ω 100 Ω 100 Ω 8Ω 3-35. These RTDs can provide cold junction compensation for thermocouple (QAV) inputs.8. QRT Card Components 3-35. the QRT card provides an interface to four individual resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensors. Jumper JU3-1 Stranded Jumpers (4) Figure 3-230. If it is not installed. QRT Bridge Resistor Calculation Each of the four channels on the QRT card contains a resistance bridge. and would typically be specified to interface copper RTDs with very low resistance values (for example. Group 2 QRT cards accept a full scale bridge voltage input of 33. This bridge voltage is input to the QRT card. The bridge is said to be balanced when the resistance of the RTD equals the resistance of the bridge resistor arm that contains RSUPP. called the bridge modules. The fourth resistance arm is the RTD. Each voltage input channel provides its bridge with a precision 10 V source voltage. +10 V (RA-2) R R (RA-1) + + VBRIDGE (RB-1) RTD (−) COM RSUPP (RC-1) (−) Figure 3-231. and would typically be specified to interface platinum or nickel RTDs. are each connected to the QRT by a row of nine 25-mil square posts.3-35. The resulting bridge voltage is zero. These four daughter cards. and RSUPP) are located on the daughter card (see Figure 3-231). M0-0053 3-436 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 10 Ohm). located on a small daughter card. Bridge Resistance If the resistance of the RTD increases. the bridge is no longer balanced. Group 1 QRT cards accept a full scale bridge voltage input of 10 mV.3333 mV. Three of four resistance arms that form each bridge (R. R. and a net positive bridge voltage exists. RHOT) that corresponds to a full scale bridge voltage output.× ( R RTD – R Supp ) R 5/99 3-437 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-35. OR Formula 1c. Formula 1a. OR Formula 1b. These two resistors are used to limit the RTD probe current (which minimizes the RTD self-heating error). only resistor RB-1 is used. The two bridge arm resistors (RB-1) and RC-1) must be precision resistors (as specified on the applicable system drawing). To simplify the task of selecting a value for R. If RHOT and RSUPP are known. once RHOT and RSUPP have been determined. QRT The formulas used to specify the bridge resistors are shown below: RSUPP – This bridge arm resistance is normally set equal to RCOLD. then R is selected. a first order approximation of the bridge voltage is used: Formula 2a. RB-1 ∗ RC-1 RSUPP = ------------------------------RB-1 + RC-1 RSUPP = RB-1 RSUPP = RCOLD R – Two bridge resistance arms contain resistor R (RA-1 and RA-2). Resistor RC-1 may also be used if it is necessary to parallel two of the available resistors to obtain the desired RSUPP. 10V V Bridge = --------. R is used to select the RTD resistance (that is. Typically. In conjunction with RSUPP. The QRT card is calibrated so that when a full scale bridge voltage is applied to an input channel.3-35. 10 V R = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.× R 10V Card Output Calculation Formulas The QRT card provides a sixteen bit digital output for each of its four voltage input channels. Full Scale Bridge Voltage QRT Resistance Measurement Span = ------------------------------------------------------------. the user may select a resistor from the drawing with a slightly higher resistance. The following two formulas will be required to convert a bridge voltage into counts: M0-0053 3-438 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .∗ ( R HOT – R SUPP ) FULL SCALE BRIDGE VOLTAGE If the value of R that is calculated from Formula 2 cannot be obtained by selecting a resistor from the standard drawing. Bridge voltages that lie between zero and full scale result in digital output codes that range from C000H (0 counts) to D000H (4096 counts). Using such a resistor for RA-1 and RA-2 causes the span of resistance that can be measured by the QRT card to be slightly wider that RSPAN: Formula 3. Bits 15 and 14 are status bits and will be set to 1 if the QRT card is functioning properly. These fourteen bits (bits 13 through 0) are the fourteen least significant bits of the QRT card channel’s digital output. RRTD = RSUPP). The sixteen bit QRT digital output is typically expressed in hexadecimal form. A digital output of C000H indicates that the QRT card input channel is measuring a bridge voltage which is zero (that is. of which values of 0 to 4096 represent the normal full-scale operating range. The analog voltage to digital code conversion circuit in each QRT input channel produces a signed 14-bit output (sign bit plus 13 data bits). QRT A full scale bridge output voltage is desired when RRTD = RHOT: Formula 2b. the channel’s digital output code is D000H. there is a difference between the expected output (calculated from Formula 2) and the actual output (calculated from Formula 6): Formula 6. first using Formula 2. five values for RRTD. there is a non-linear relationship between RRTD and VBRIDGE (see Formula 6). 10 V * R RTD 10 V * R SUPP VBRIDGE = ------------------------------. Example A. using Formula 2b to calculate R results in a resistance value that is not precisely correct. ranging in equal increments from RCOLD to RHOT will be used to calculate bridge voltages. for a given value of RRTD. If bridge resistors RA-1 and RA-2 are selected to equal the calculated value of R. For each example.3-35. when the bridge module resistors are chosen. However. since Formula 2 is only an approximation of the actual bridge voltage equation (Formula 6. and then using Formula 6. FULL SCALE BRIDGE VOLTAGE VLSB = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4096 V BRIDGE COUNTS = --------------------V LSB Formula 5. Then.3333 mV. the actual bridge voltage will not equal the bridge voltage expected (from Formula 2). As a result. QRT Formula 4. so a Group 2 QRT card is selected. This provides a full scale bridge voltage of 33. shown below). As described previously. the RTD is obviously not a copper RTD. In addition. a first order approximation for the bridge voltage (Formula 2a) is used to derive the equation for calculating the value of R (Formula 2b). The two resulting bridge voltage values will be used to calculate counts and hexadecimal output codes. the values for bridge resistors R and RSUPP are calculated. as does the inherent non-linearity of the bridge.– --------------------------------R + R RTD R + R SUPP Bridge Resistor Selection and Output Examples The following examples illustrate how using a first order approximation of the bridge voltage to calculate R affects the expected (ideal) hexadecimal output code. Given the following values: =120 Ω RCOLD RHOT =170 Ω RSUPP is set equal to RCOLD (120 Ω) From the values given for RCOLD and RHOT. 5/99 3-439 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The results are shown in Table 3-121. and hexadecimal output codes can be calculated.– ------------------------------15KΩ + R RTD 15. For the following RTD resistance values: 120 Ω 132. With all three bridge resistors selected.138 µV 4096 Using the bridge voltage figures calculated for each RTD resistance value.3-35. Formula 4. 10 V * R RTD 10 V * 120Ω V BRIDGE ( Actual ) = --------------------------------. so bridge resistors RA-1 and RA-2 will have this value. Formula 2b is used to calculate the value of R (bridge resistors RA-1 and RA-2): 10 V R = -----------------.5 Ω 170 Ω Formulas 2 and 6 can be used to calculate bridge voltages (first order approximation and actual): Formula 2a.∗ ( 170Ω – 120Ω ) = 15 KΩ 33. 33. bridge resistor RB-1 will be 120 Ω (RC-1 is not required).5 Ω 145 Ω 157.138 µV The hexadecimal output codes are determined by converting the decimal count number into hexadecimal and adding C000H. V BRIDGE COUNTS = ---------------------8. Formula 5 can be used to calculate the corresponding ideal number of counts: Formula 5.* ( R RTD – 120 Ω ) 15000 Ω OR Formula 6.= 8. 10 V V BRIDGE ( Expected ) = --------------------. M0-0053 3-440 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the bridge voltages.3mV A 15 KΩ resistor is available from the standard drawing.333 mV VLSB = -------------------------. counts.120KΩ The voltage weight of one count (or LSB) is calculated using Formula 4. QRT Since a 120 Ω resistor is available on the standard drawing (651A129). For the following RTD resistance values: 8. QRT Table 3-121.666 mV 8.∗ ( 14. the bridge voltages.5 Ω RHOT = 14.5 Ω 10 Ω 11.698 mV 24.5 Ω 120 Ω Example B.376 mV 8.5Ω – 8. so both RC-1 and RB-1 will be set equal to 17 Ω. the RTD must be a copper RTD. Formula 2b is used to calculate the value of R (bridge resistors RA-1 and RA-2): 10 V R = -------------------------.195 mV 0.3-35. bridge resistors RC-1 and RB-1 will both be required.333 mV 0.0 Ω 14.5 Ω Formulas 2 and 6 can be used to calculate bridge voltages (first order approximation and actual): 5/99 3-441 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .333 mV 25.5 Ω) From the values given for RCOLD and RHOT. If two 17Ω resistors are placed in parallel (as will be the case with RC-1 and RB-1). The standard drawing does include a 17Ω resistor. With all three bridge resistors selected.5 Ω 13. counts. so a Group 1 QRT card is selected. Bridge. the resulting resistance is 8.5 Ω 145 Ω 132.000 mV Expected Counts 4096 3072 2048 1024 0 Expected Output D000H CC00H C800H C400H C000H Actual Bridge V 32.5 Ω RSUPP is set equal to RCOLD (8. and Output Values (Example A) RTD 170 Ω 157.000 mV A 6000 Ω resistor is available from the standard drawing.000 mV.000 mV 16. and hexadecimal output codes can be calculated. Expected Bridge V 33. This provides a full scale bridge voltage of 10. RCOLD Since an 8.5Ω ) = 6000Ω 10. so bridge resistors RA-1 and RA-2 will have this value. Count.5 Ω resistor is not available on the standard drawing.5Ω.000 mV Actual Counts 4018 3016 2012 1007 0 Actual Output CFB2H CBC8H C7DCH C3EFH C000H Given the following values: = 8.544 mV 16. 5Ω The voltage weight of one count (or LSB) is calculated using Formula 4.5 Ω Expected Bridge V 10.500 mV 5.0 Ω 11.500 mV 0. and Output Values (Example B) RTD 14. Count.473 mV 4.* ( R RTD – 8. Table 3-122. QRT Formula 2a.000 mV ---------------------------.000 mV Actual Counts 4080 3061 2041 1021 0 Actual Output CFF0H CBF5H C7F9H C3FDH C000H M0-0053 3-442 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .– -----------------------------6000Ω + R RTD 6008.962 mV 7. 10 V V BRIDGE ( Expected ) = -----------------.5 Ω 10.000 mV 2.= 2.44 µV The hexadecimal output codes are determined by converting the decimal count number into hexadecimal and adding C000H.5 Ω ) 6000 Ω OR Formula 6.44 µV 4096 Using the bridge voltage figures calculated for each RTD resistance value. Bridge. Formula 4.983 mV 2. VLSB = 10. 10 V * R RTD 10 V ∗ 8.3-35.000 mV Expected Counts 4096 3072 2048 1024 0 Expected Output D000H CC00H C800H C400H C000H Actual Bridge V 9. COUNTS = V BRIDGE --------------------2. The results are shown in Table 3-122.0 Ω 8.000 mV 7.492 mV 0. Formula 5 can be used to calculate the corresponding ideal number of counts: Formula 5.5 Ω 13.5Ω V BRIDGE ( Actual ) = ----------------------------------. The second QRT input cannot be used for customer RTD inputs. 5/99 3-443 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Segments are defined by the addresses assigned to the RTDs. The first two addresses (F8 and F9) are dedicated to the first segment. even if the second input is not used. Each segment uses two QRT inputs. only one address in each segment can be assigned (for example. to be defined in each cabinet. two temperature readings can be averaged. only one segment will be defined. called segments. Figure 3-232 illustrates two of the possible combinations of RTD(s) and segment(s). whether or not two RTDs are used.3-35. Note If RTDs are mounted in a separate termination (B) cabinet. two bridges must be installed for each segment. QRT Use of RTDs and Segments The DPU’s cold junction compensation approach allows two separate temperature zones. F8 in segment 1 and FA in segment 2). Also. If temperature averaging is not to be used. since it would be averaged into the cold junction temperature. If only addresses F8 and F9 are assigned. This permits very accurate compensation when required. a half-shell extension and baffle kit are required to prevent fan cooling from affecting the temperature reading. The QRT card always uses the block of four hardware addresses beginning at F8. For each segment. Any thermocouple points terminated in a given segment will use the segment’s (averaged) temperature reading. and the second two addresses (FA and FB) are dedicated to the second segment. Values for Sample RTDs The following sample provides specific values for the Westinghouse standard RTD: M0-0053 3-444 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QRT RTD 1 (Address F8) One Segment RTD 1 and RTD 2 Values Are Averaged RTD 2 (Address F9) RTD 1 (Address F8) Segment 1 RTD 1 and RTD 2 Values Are Averaged RTD 2 (Address F9) RTD 3 (Address FA) Segment 2 RTD 3 and RTD 4 Values Are Averaged RTD 4 (Address FB) Figure 3-232. etc. RTDs and Segments For additional information on cold junction compensation (CJ record field. refer to “Record Types User’s Guide” (U0-0131) and “MAC Utilities User’s Guide” (U0-0136). software addressing.3-35.). 0 13.17 5/99 3-445 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .0 127.78 70.0 Temperature in °C 0.95 149.00 52.0000 If used with a G02 QRT card and a G03 bridge module.01 139.0 158.0 For 5th order polynomial conversion: C0 = 32. S4-60) Alpha =.0081 For linear conversion: Gain = 3780.0 104.8691C5 = 0.378 Bias = 32.0333333 Temperature in °F 32.0000000 0.00 130.3-35. QRT 120Ω .79 159.33 mVDC for a range of 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F).00 Ohms 120.0229468 0.89 27.0000 C2 = −8044.0173913 0.0 57.0000 C1 = 3835.: 774A759H01 Manufacturer: Minco Products (No.0060386 0.Nickel RTD Westinghouse Part No.0118357 0.0 105.99 170. the following is true: Span = 0 to 3.6311C4 = 0.99 159.78 52.0 81.000C3 = 0.0176328 0.22 40. 120 to 170 Ω Temperature Range Information mV in VDC 0. 00 140.0 Ohms 100.07 280.31 240.22 222.00 C3 = 80864.0261753 0.0297610 0.0 380.0 267.0094422 0.0159562 0.0062151 0.01 160. 100 to 300 Ω Temperature Range Information mV in VDC 0.00385 For linear conversion: Gain = 30120.20 716.0 212.0 104.40 1036.20 316.0000000 0. QRT The following sample provides specific values for another common RTD: 100Ω .0196614 0.30 180.0333333 Temperature in °F 32.00 820.00 Temperature in °C 0.00 219.00 Bias = 32.40 413.40 928.0 158.33 mVDC for a range of 0 to 558°C (32 to 1036°F).60 624.0 For 5th order polynomial conversion: C0 = 32.00 C4 = 20502.0126693 0.00 C2 = 61050.0227092 0.0 438.3-35.00 M0-0053 3-446 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .Platinum RTD Manufacturer: Tempro Alpha =0.0000 C1 = 27634.15 260.0E + 003 C5 = −31987.0 498.60 512.0 329.24 200.0 558.0E + 004 If used with a G02 QRT card and a G03 bridge module. the following is true: Span = 0 to 3.26 300. 2. QRT Wiring Diagram: Plant Grounding Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-233): 1.3 mV full scale (high-range bridge and 100 Ω RTD) 5/99 3-447 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Use three-conductor shielded cable to interface the RTDs to the terminal block.9. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 4 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD Channel Shield (1 of 4) 2 TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B A (+) 1 PLUG-IN BRIDGE (−) 10 V POWER (+) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 RETURN (+) SHIELD (−) RTD1 RETURN (+) SHIELD (−) + SHIELD (−) RETURN PLANT GROUND RTD2 RTD3 RETURN 5 PLANT GROUND SHIELD (−) RTD4 Power Supply Return CHANNEL 4 (−) 10 V POWER (+) 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A Power Supply Return CHANNEL 3 4 (−) 10 V POWER (+) Power Supply Return CHANNEL 2 (−) 10 V POWER (+) 3B 3A 1B 1A Power Supply Return CHANNEL 1 EDGE-CONNECTOR FOR PLANT GROUNDED RTDS Figure 3-233. QRT 3-35. Group 1 QRT – 10 mV full scale (low-range bridge and 10 Ω RTD) Group 2 QRT – 33.3-35. RTD1 and RTD2 must have their power supply return and shield connections tied together and grounded to a single point. Channel 3 and Channel 4 must interface to similarly grounded RTDs (that is.3-35. Channel 3 and Channel 4 share a common power supply and a channel shield. RTD3 and RTD4 must have their power supply return and shield connections tied together and grounded to a single point. both RTDs must be cabinet grounded or both RTDs must be grounded to the same plant ground). A second pair of QRT printed circuit card jumpers is used to connect Channel 3 and Channel 4’s power supply return and channel shield together. 4. 6. Therefore. Channel 1 and Channel 2 share a common power supply return and a channel shield. QRT 3. M0-0053 3-448 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Since Channel 1 and Channel 2’s power supply return are connected together at the QRT. Move the QRT line frequency jumper (located at the lower left hand corner of the QRT printed circuit card assembly) to the 50 Hz position if 50 Hz operation is desired. 5. the following rules apply: Channel 1 and Channel 2 must interface to similarly grounded RTDs (that is. Therefore. Since Channel 3 and Channel 4’s power supply return are connected together at the QRT. If a QRT is to interface to both plant grounded and cabinet grounded RTDs. One pair of QRT printed circuit card jumpers is used to connect Channel 1 and Channel 2’s power supply return and channel shield together. both RTDs must be cabinet grounded or both RTDs must be grounded to the same plant ground). QRT Wiring Diagram: Cabinet Grounding 5/99 3-449 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QRT IInstallation Data Sheet 2 of 4 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER CARD Channel Shield (1 of 4) 2 TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW 20B 20A 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B A (+) 1 PLUG-IN BRIDGE (−) 10 V POWER (+) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 RETURN (+) SHIELD (−) + SHIELD (−) RETURN SHIELD RETURN (+) SHIELD (−) 5 RTD1 RTD2 5 RTD3 RETURN SHIELD 5 SHIELD (−) RTD4 Power Supply Return CHANNEL 4 (−) 10 V POWER (+) 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A Power Supply Return CHANNEL 3 4 (−) 10 V POWER (+) Power Supply Return CHANNEL 2 (−) 10 V POWER (+) 3B 3A 1B 1A Power Supply Return CHANNEL 1 EDGE-CONNECTOR FOR CABINET GROUNDED RTDS Figure 3-234.3-35. Use three-conductor shielded cable to interface the RTDs to the terminal block. One pair of QRT printed circuit card jumpers is used to connect Channel 1 and Channel 2’s power supply return and channel shield together. Since Channel 1 and Channel 2’s power supply return are connected together at the QRT.3 mV full scale (high-range bridge and 100 Ω RTD) 3. If a QRT is to interface to both plant grounded and cabinet grounded RTDs. Channel 3 and Channel 4 must interface to similarly grounded RTDs (that is. 4. 5. Channel 3 and Channel 4 share a common power supply and a channel shield. the following rules apply: Channel 1 and Channel 2 must interface to similarly grounded RTDs (that is. 6. RTD3 and RTD4 must have their power supply return and shield connections tied together and grounded to a single point. M0-0053 3-450 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Therefore. Move the QRT line frequency jumper (located at the lower left hand corner of the QRT printed circuit card assembly) to the 50 Hz position if 50 Hz operation is desired. both RTDs must be cabinet grounded or both RTDs must be grounded to the same plant ground). A second pair of QRT printed circuit card jumpers is used to connect Channel 3 and Channel 4’s power supply return and channel shield together. Group 1 QRT – 10 mV full scale (low-range bridge and 10 Ω RTD) Group 2 QRT – 33. Terminal block terminal number 5 allows RTD1 and RTD2 to be grounded at the cabinet halfshell. Terminal block terminal number 14 allows RTD3 and RTD4 to be grounded at the cabinet halfshell. A hole is provided in the half-shell for the RTD cabinet grounding. Therefore. Channel 1 and Channel 2 share a common power supply return and a channel shield. Use a Number 6 screw and a Number 6 nut for this purpose. Since Channel 3 and Channel 4’s power supply return are connected together at the QRT. 2. RTD1 and RTD2 must have their power supply return and shield connections tied together and grounded to a single point. QRT Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-234): 1. both RTDs must be cabinet grounded or both RTDs must be grounded to the same plant ground).3-35. Use a Number 6 screw and a Number 6 nut for this purpose. A hole is provided in the half-shell for the RTD cabinet grounding. 5. Move frequency jumper for 50 Hz operation. 4.3 mV full scale (high-range bridge and 100 Ω RTD) 3. When these jumpers are installed. When using standard A-B cabinet wiring (twisted pairs). The power supply return and shield of the RTD channel must both be grounded to a single point. QRT For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 4 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SHIELD RETURN (−) RTD 4 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 3 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 2 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 1 17 18 PE (+) EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-235.3-35. Group 1 – 10 mV full scale (low-range bridge and 10 Ω RTD) Group 2 – 33. only one ground wire of each pair should be connected. must be installed. 2. jumpers on the QRT card tying the grounds and shields of channels 1 and 2 together. and the grounds and shields of channels 3 and 4 together. 5/99 3-451 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Use 3/C Shielded Cable. QRT CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Grounded at the B Cabinet) Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-235): 1. When these jumpers are installed. 2. When using standard A-B cabinet wiring (twisted pairs). Group 1 – 10 mV full scale (low-range bridge and 10 Ω RTD) Group 2 – 33. M0-0053 3-452 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . jumpers on the QRT card tying the grounds and shields of channels 1 and 2 together. only one ground wire of each pair should be connected.3-35. must be installed. QRT For CE MARK Certified System 4 of 4 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SHIELD RETURN (−) RTD 4 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 3 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 2 RETURN (−) SHIELD (+) RTD 1 17 18 PE (+) EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-236. 5. The power supply return and shield of the RTD channel must both be grounded to a single point. and the grounds and shields of channels 3 and 4 together. QRT CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Grounded in the Field) Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-236): 1.3 mV full scale (high-range bridge and 100 Ω RTD) 3. Move frequency jumper for 50 Hz operation. 4. Use 3/C Shielded Cable. QSC Speed Channel Card (Style 2840A75G01 and G02) 3-36. QSC 3-36. The card also contains an analog output that is proportional to the input frequency. Description The Speed Channel Card (QSC) converts tachometer signal pulses directly into a 14-bit binary speed number (see Figure 3-237). (For new applications. the QSS card is recommended). This binary number can be read by a software program via the DIOB bus interface.1. Figure 3-237.3-36. QSC Block Diagram 5/99 3-453 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . M0-0053 INPUT ZERO CROSSING DETECTOR CLOCK 3-454 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C JUMPER SELECTED RANGE 0-1500 RPM TO 0-6670 RPM UP COUNTER SETABLE PULSE CIRCUIT TIMING & CONTROL 5/99 . QSC Block Diagram A functional block diagram of the QSC is shown in Figure 3-238.3-36. There are two groups of QSC cards. Features The card counts zero crossing of the input signal for a sampling period and then latches the value to allow reading from the DIOB interface.2. DIOB ADDRESS DIOB DATA ADDRESS COMPARE DELAY TO PREVENT SKEWING READ ENABLE LATCH ADDRESS SELECT JUMPERS LATCH +V VREF PULSE TO VOLTAGE CONVERTER ANALOG OUTPUT 0-10V Figure 3-238. To allow missing card detection. This value consists of a 14-bit binary number that is simultaneously displayed on the cards front edge via 16 LEDs. QSC Card Functional Block Diagram 3-36. one bit (#15) is always high (“1”) and the other bit (#14) is always low (“0”). ) Nominal Input Speeds: 1. In addition.0 kHz (240.0K 6. Specifications Inputs The Speed Channel (QSC) card accepts a sine wave input. QSC Input Frequency Selection Nominal Speed (Hz) 1.3.6K 4. the card contains a 0 to 10 volt analog output that is proportional to 0% to 125% of the nominal input frequency.000 RPM) 1.0.0K 3.3-36.67 kHz (400. Sensitivity: 0.000 RPM) 4. The input may be connected to 120 Vac RMS without damage.200 RPM) 5/99 3-455 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .000 RPM) 6.6 kHz (216. QSC • • Group 1 has a sampling period of 1/8 second and the 14-bit binary output is equal to 1/4 of the input frequency.0V P-P @ 4.5. 1.5 kHz Common Mode Voltage: 20V P-P (Max.0 and 6.5 kHz (90.000 RPM) 3. These ranges are selected via jumpers which are located on the card (see Table 3-123 and Figure 3-239).5K 1.8.8K 3. Group 2 cards have a sampling period of 1/2 second and the 14-bit binary output is equal to the input frequency.67K 1 A 2 B 4 C X X 8 D X X X 16 E X 32 F 64 G 128 H X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X = Jumpers to be installed for desired nominal speed 3-36.5V P-P @ 36 Hz 5.8 kHz (108. Table 3-123. The nominal input ranges are 1.67 kHz. 4.0 kHz (180.000 RPM) 3. 3. 67 kHz Output 0 to +10V proportional to 0 to 125% of nomina speed setting Accuracy: 0.5 and 1.0.8.09% of span for 1. 3. Supply Coefficient0.3V to +11V + 0. 4.7V + 0. Bit 13 = MSB) Update Rate1/8 second for Group 1 1/2 second for Group 2 Output: Binary value that is 1/4 of the input frequency for Group1. Accuracy 0.06% of span for 3.67 kHz ranges 0.0 and 6. QSC Input Impedance: 20 k ohms DIOB Output Data word: 16 Bits (Bits 0-13 = data. Bit 14 = 0. 4.6.5. Bit 0 = LSB. Bit 15 = 1. 3.005% per degree F.0 V supply Temperature Coefficient+ 0.8 kHz ranges Output Noise<5 mV P-P Output Load500 ohms or greater. Binary value equals the input frequency for Group2.03% with one bit resolution (min.0 and 6.) over temperature range Analog Output Isolated Output Span10V Nominal Input Speeds1.6V Reference Condition25 degrees C ambient. 1. Short circuit protection provided Output Limits−0. 3.3-36.0.6.02%/ volt M0-0053 3-456 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 13. Eight jumpers are used to determine the DIOB address.1 V 400 mA 5/99 3-457 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . See table below: Pin # 15A 17A 7B 5B Power Supply Voltage Field Signals Speed input signal Speed input return Analog output source (+) Analog output return (−) Minimum Primary Optional Backup: Current (Supplied by DIOB) 12.3-36. Controls/Indicators The LEDs indicate the output value (see Figure 3-239) LEDs Speed Selection Jumpers Figure 3-239. Contacts supplied include two contacts for the speed input and two contacts for the analog output signal.4 V Nominal + 13. QSC Card Components 3-36.0 V -- Maximum 13.4 V 12. Wiring The QSC card employs the standard Q-Series front-edge connector.5. QSC 3-36.1 V 13.4. The QSD card positions the two EH or MH actuators.3-37. QSD 3-37.1. Description Group 01 is applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Servo Driver (QSD) card is a position controller which interfaces the electronic control system via the UIOB to either two EH or two MH actuators. UI OB QSD Card Position and Indicators Feedback Pushbuttons Pos A Pos B Drive Drive Feedback A M Valve “A” Valve “B” Field M/A Station Figure 3-240. QSD Typical QSD Card Application M0-0053 3-458 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSD Servo Driver Card (Style 2840A78G01 through G04) 3-37. Figure 3-240 shows a typical application of a QSD card. which operate the turbine steam valves of the BFPT and MSR systems. Auto mode selection is prevented when the UIOB controller is not ready. Electrical connection to the QSD card is made through a 34-pin rear-edge connector (UIOB) and a 56-pin front-edge connector (M/A Station and Field Connections). When the EH actuator type is selected. The EH actuator position is determined by a Schaevitz DC-DC LVDT at the actuator.3-37. Operating mode selection is made from the UIOB. In Manual mode. Additionally. The QSD card contains a two-speed manual clock and the control logic used during Manual mode operations. 5/99 3-459 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .2. Features The QSD card has two modes of operation. which are: • • AUTO – where the QSD card converts a 12-bit binary number from the UIOB into a position control signal to the EH or MH actuators MANUAL – where the QSD works with a manual station to produce the position control signal to the EH or MH actuators In Auto mode. The output control signal to the MH actuator is adjustable from 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC. When the MH actuator type is selected. The QSD card is available in one group (G01). the QSD card works with a manual station (M/A). a watchdog timer switches the card from Auto to Manual mode if the QSD card is not periodically serviced by the UIOB controller. The M/A Station increases or decreases the output control signal through the RAISE and LOWER pushbuttons. the QSD card can be configured to control either EH or MH actuators with the insertion of on-card jumpers and resistors (see Table 3-125 and Figure 3245). QSD 3-37. Indicator lamps on the M/A Station display the valve position. the output control signal to the MH actuator is determined by applying an adjustable gain to the converted 12-bit binary number. the output control signal to the EH actuator is determined by applying a proportional plus integral control action to the error between the desired and actual values of the actuator position. M0-0053 3-460 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3. QSD 3-37. QSD Block Diagram Block Diagram Description The following block diagram descriptions apply to Figure 3-241 through Figure 3-244.3-37. Specifications Block Diagram Offset TP4 JDA MASTER CLEAR FAST LOWER RAISE AUTO MANUAL MANUAL AUTO READY ALIVE RFA D/A Output D/A TJ Common TJ P+I LVDT Gain Offset TP2 JDB P+I (-) TJ: Test Jack TP: Test Point RFB P+I LVDT Gain Span JDB Direct Jumpers LVDT Zero (-) +24 VDC TJ Position Output Position Feedback Valve Coil Drives P+I (-) Span JDA Direct Jumpers LVDT Zero (-) +24 VDC TJ Position Output Position Feedback Valve Coil Drives Control Logic TP3 LVDT Drive U I O B UIOB Interface Up/Down Counter Output A TP1 LVDT Drive Output B Figure 3-241. 3-37. when both are pressed. and GO TO MAN bits (Figure 3-242). Up/Down Counter and D/A Converter The up/down counter holds the 12-bit data count for control of either EH or MH actuators through the D/A converter. Figure 3-242 shows the data word coming from the UIOB which contains the 12-bit demand for the up/down counter. GO TO ALIVE. In this case. If jumper A is in place. The clock (fast or slow) operates at a constant rate when enabled. The rate at which the up/down counter is clocked is determined by whether the FAST push-button on the M/A Station’s front panel is pressed and by separate plug-in resistors for the fast and slow clocks (see Controls and Indicators). Except for the KEEP ALIVE. In Auto mode. the up/down counter holds its last value if neither RAISE nor LOWER is pressed. LOWER takes precedence over RAISE. Additionally. this logic provides a CLEAR to the up/down counter on receipt of a MASTER CLEAR from either actuator. When jumper A is not installed. As a result. the up/down counter driving the D/A converter is clocked up or down when the RAISE or LOWER push-button is pressed on the M/A Station’s front panel. the power-up control logic initializes the card to Manual mode and initiates RESET and CLEAR signals which set up the QSD card’s logic. the output of the D/A converter is a linear ramp while the RAISE or LOWER pushbutton remains depressed. the counter holds if both buttons are pressed or neither button is pressed. 5/99 3-461 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Manual Mode In Manual mode. causing the up/down counter to count. the counter is loaded with a 12bit actuator demand from the UIOB controller. the counter is incremented or decremented by the M/A Station’s RAISE or LOWER push-button. QSD Power-Up and Master Clear When power is applied. the output from the UIOB controller is ignored in Manual mode. In Manual mode. QSD Card Input Data Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 M S B Up/Down Counter Data 1 = Card in Place 1 = Ready 1 = Manual. QSD Card Output Data M0-0053 3-462 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSD Input and Output Bit Patterns Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 High Byte M S B Low Byte L S B Up/Down Counter Data Not Used 1 = Go to Manual 1 = Go to Auto 1 = Keep Alive Figure 3-242.3-37. 0 = Auto 1 = Auto Push-button L S B Figure 3-243. The QSD card grants the AUTO REQUEST and switches to Auto mode if the above conditions are satisfied and a MANUAL REQUEST has not been initiated. the UIOB controller must determine if the operator pressed the AUTO push-button. GO TO AUTO bit. and the UIOB controller must output the same value already contained in the upper 8 bits of the up/down counter. the GO TO AUTO bit generates an AUTO REQUEST. the operator must press the AUTO push-button at the M/A Station’s front panel. LOWER. When the AUTO push-button is pressed. The QSD card’s UIOB interface logic latches the two byte input data (Figure 3-242) from the UIOB and transfers the 12-bit demand to the up/down counter. announcing the operator’s request. RAISE.The UIOB controller sends back a GO TO AUTO bit (shown in Figure 3-242) when it sees that the operator pressed the AUTO push-button. If jumper B is in place. and FAST inputs to the QSD from the M/ A Station are ignored in Auto mode. To be READY. If jumper G is installed. and the correct data can all be contained in the same output from the UIOB controller (Figure 3-242) if desired. 5/99 3-463 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . the AUTO push-button signal generates an AUTO REQUEST. the QSD must be READY before an AUTO REQUEST is granted. the QSD must be in Manual mode and be ALIVE (watchdog not timed-out). The KEEP ALIVE bit.3-37. If jumper C is installed. If jumper C is not installed. QSD Manual to Auto Transfer Sequence To initiate a transfer from Manual to Auto mode. its status is latched and is available in the QSD’s output data word (shown in Figure 3-243) for the UIOB controller to read. data from the UIOB controller is loaded into the up/down counter which drives the D/A converter. Auto Mode In Auto mode. A MANUAL REQUEST also prevents an AUTO REQUEST from being granted if the QSD is already in Manual mode. If a MANUAL REQUEST is made. The KEEP ALIVE bit is not latched when received by the QSD. it has a two byte format as pictured in Figure 3-242. respectively. M0-0053 3-464 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . If appropriate enabling jumpers are installed. it immediately transfers the QSD to Manual mode even if an AUTO REQUEST is present. a high KEEP ALIVE bit must be written to the card within the watchdog time-out period (Table 3-126). QSD Auto to Manual Transfer Sequence Several events can generate a MANUAL REQUEST which initiates a transfer from Auto to Manual mode. CAUTION The QSD card should not be read continuously at a rate faster than 100 times per second. GO TO MAN bit from UIOB controller (jumper E is installed). RESET signal due to low power supply voltage. when they are set. To keep the watchdog timer from timing out. These events are: • • • • • An operator pressing the MANUAL push-button at the M/A Station’s front panel. Input Data to QSD from UIOB When data is written to the QSD from the UIOB. RAISE or LOWER push-button pressed on M/A Station’s front panel (jumper F is installed). Output Data from QSD to UIOB The format for QSD card output data transfers to the UIOB controller is shown in Figure 3-243 with the up/down counter data contained in bits 0 through 11 and the QSD card’s status contained in bits 12 through 15. for they are latched by the QSD card.3-37. The 12-bit digital valve position is loaded into the up/down counter and used to control the EH or MH actuators. The GO TO AUTO and GO TO MANUAL bits of the input data cause continuous AUTO or MANUAL REQUESTS. three other events can also cause MANUAL REQUESTS: Card not ALIVE (jumper D is installed). See Controls and Indicators for a detailed description of the plug-in resistors. producing the error drive signal to the valve actuator coils. The actual valve position is fed back to this circuit as the LVDT differential signal. QSD Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is started on receipt of a high KEEP ALIVE bit from the UIOB (see Figure 3-242). until it is equal to zero (actual position = desired position). potentiometers and jumpers JDA or JDB. Valve Actuator Drive Circuits The operating characteristics of these circuits (A and B. 5/99 3-465 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . A switch provides user selection of watchdog time-out periods as listed in Table 3-126 under Controls and Indicators. The resulting drive to the actuator is determined by the error signal and indicates the desired new actuator position. and jumper installations. This signal is presented to the LVDT calibration circuit. If the UIOB does not write another KEEP ALIVE bit to the QSD within the timer’s selected time-out period. The block diagram of Figure 3-244 shows both the EH and MH actuator applications of these circuits.3-37. the output of the LVDT calibration circuit is displayed on a position meter on the M/A Station indicating the actual valve position. the error drive signal decreases. Additionally. The ALIVE = high signal resets the card to Manual mode. the plug-in resistors and jumpers are set up for a closed-loop operation as follows: • • • RFA (or RFB) installed JDA (or JDB) removed RDA (or RDB) removed For EH actuator application. The D/A OUT signal from the D/A converter (Figure 3-244) drives the actuator via the summing amp and the P + I amp. the linear amp provides P + I amplification. potentiometer adjustments. When this circuit is set up for EH actuator operation. the timer times-out and ALIVE goes high. With resistor RDA (or RDB) removed. As the difference between the desired and actual valve position decreases. This actual position signal is summed with the desired position signal (D/A OUT). which are identical) are determined by the plug-in resistors. both outputs (COIL1 and COIL2) are used to drive the EH valve actuator. The output of the LVDT calibration circuit is presented to the summing amp as a 0 to (−)10 VDC level equivalent to the actual position of the valve. MH Valve Actuator (Torque Motor) LVDT Calibration 0 to + 10 V Position Meter M/A Station DC LVDT Position Indication Figure 3-244.2 A maximum With MH actuator – 1. the plug-in resistors and jumpers are set up for an open-loop operation as follows: • • • RFA (or RFB) removed JDA (or JDB) installed RDA (or RDB) installed Power Requirements • • • Primary Voltage: 12.0 VDC nominal 13. QSD D/A Out Setpoint 0 to + 10 V Error K Position 0 to (-)10 V P+ I Coil 1 EH Valve Actuator ( 1+TS TS ) Coil 2 1/TES LVDT Calibration Gain & Offset 0 to + 10 V Position Meter M/A Station DC LVDT Position Indication D/A Out Gain and Offset Amp. EH and MH Actuator Applications When this circuit is set up for MH actuator operation.4 VDC minimum 13.4 VDC minimum 13.1 VDC maximum 12.1 VDC maximum Backup Voltage: Current: With EH actuator – 1.3-37.6 A maximum M0-0053 3-466 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . maximum (The delay is from the time of contact closure to the appearance of 0. adjustable from 0 VDC through (-)10 VDC full scale across 100 Ω minimum.3-37. QSD Field Interface As shown in the block diagram of Figure 3-241. Position Feedback (Two Circuits) A high impedance differential input receives the position signal from a demodulating Linear Variable Differential Transformer (DC LVDT).0 VDC at the D/A output.5 VDC to +15.025%/°C The Master Clear is a self-powered differential input connected to a field contact. (MH output is negative with respect to common).2 V at 25 mA Supply Voltage Coefficient: +0.0 VDC depending on LVDT type and stroke Input Impedance: Differential (with floating source). The only exceptions are the provisions for individual calibration of the various circuit parameters which depend on selected resistor values (see Table 3-129). Closing the field contact clears the up/down counter but does not switch the QSD card to Manual mode. Valve Coil Drive (Two Circuits) • • EH actuator: two current outputs of +24 mA each into 80Ω MH actuator: a single output. 400KΩ Inputs (tied together) to common.4%/volt Average Temperature Coefficient: +0. Specifications include: • • • • Open Circuit Voltage: 42 VDC +8 V Closed Circuit Current: 15 mA maximum Contact and Wiring Resistance: 100Ω maximum Delay: 6 msec. where: • • • Input Scan: +1. the control circuitry for each actuator is identical. 150 KΩ Common Mode Voltage: +10 VDC maximum LVDT Drive (Two Circuits) • • • Master Clear +24 VDC +1.) 5/99 3-467 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 4. Direct Output Controller (MH Actuator) • • M0-0053 Offset: (−)1.5 V to +30 VDC maximum Low Input Voltage: 2.02% of span/°C Analog Controller Each of the two QSD card controllers is jumper programmed as either a Direct Output or a P + I controller. Specifications include: • • • • High Output Voltage: Open Collector. 30 VDC maximum High Output Leakage Current: 0.75 msec.3-37. Specifications include: • • • • DIM Outputs Input Voltage Range: (−)0. measured by comparing the position output with the position feedback input Temperature Coefficient: +0.0 VDC to 10 VDC 3-468 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5 mA maximum Low Output Voltage: 1.0 VDC maximum Low Output Current: 250 mA maximum Position Output (Two Circuits) • • • • Output Span: 0 through 10 VDC which corresponds to 0 through 100% of actuator position Load Resistance: 2 KΩ minimum Accuracy: Adjustable to within 0.0 VDC to +1.0 VDC minimum Delay: 0.0 VDC maximum High Input Voltage: 10. Operator Interface DIM Inputs DIM inputs are typically connected to operator pushbuttons.1% of span.0 VDC Span: 1. maximum DIM outputs are typically connected to operator panel lamps. QSD 3-37. 3-37.02% of span/°C Gain: 1. (Output is negative with respect to common). Table 3-124 lists the connector’s pin designations. 9A) 6A Ground (Return to pin 10A) 7A Ground (Return to pin 11A) Pin # 1B Ground 2B Ground 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B Ground Signal Name Ground (Return to pin 16B) Ground (Return to pin 17B) AUTO IN FAST 5/99 3-469 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . P + I Controller (EH Actuator) • • • • • • Offset: (−)10% to +10% of demand Span: Actuator position from 25% to 200% for 100% demand Accuracy: Position Feedback within 0. Signal Interface The standard front-edge connector interfaces the QSD to the M/A Station and the field. The relationships are detailed in Table 3-131. 13A) 5A Ground (Return in pins 8A. QSD Front-Edge M/A Station and Field Connector Pin # Signal Name 1A Ground (System Common) 2A -Master Clear Contact Input 3A +Master Clear Contact Input 4A Ground (Return to pins 12A.1% of span Temperature Coefficient: +0.5 sec to 10 sec* Note* The gain and reset time constants are interrelated and controlled by the resistors.1% of span for adjusted demand Temperature Coefficient: +0. Table 3-124.02% of span/°C Output: Single output adjustable from 0 to (-)10V full scale across 100 Ω minimum.22 to 122* Reset Time Constant: 0. QSD • • • Accuracy: +0. pins 21A through 28A and 21B through 28B are UIOB Address Selection connections. 6A.10 V Position Ind.3-37. M0-0053 3-470 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 2B. 1B.“A” actuator valve coils LVDT Drive “B” actuator LVDT Drive “A” actuator COIL 1 -. (“A”) 18B SLOT (NO PIN) 19B Unused 20B Unused 21B ASEL0 22B ASEL1 23B ASEL2 24B ASEL3 25B ASEL4 26B ASEL5 27B ASEL6 28B ASEL7 In Table 3-124: pins 1A through 17A are Field connections. and 5B. (“B”) 0 . 4A. The following front connector pins are tied together on the QSD: 1A.10 V Position Ind.“B” actuator valve coils -LVDT Feedback “B” actuator +LVDT Feedback “B” actuator -LVDT Feedback “A” actuator +LVDT Feedback “A” actuator SLOT (NO PIN) Unused Unused UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds UIOB Grounds Pin # 8B RAISE 9B LOWER Signal Name 10B MAN IN 11B READY 12B AUTO 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B ALIVE MAN 2 MAN 1 0 . Pins 1A and 1B should also be tied to the System UIOB Ground at one point in the system. 3B. 7A. 5A. QSD Front-Edge M/A Station and Field Connector (Cont’d) Pin # 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A Signal Name COIL 1 -. pins 1B through 17B are M/A Station connections.“A” actuator valve coils COIL 2 -.“B” actuator valve coils COIL 2 -. 4B. QSD Table 3-124. Span A Pot. ROB. ROA. RSB. TP1 . RTA. Test Jacks Offset B Pot.4 ABCDEFG RFA. Inserting a jumper between an ASELX pin on the B side and the corresponding pin on the A side encodes a “1” on the address line. Card Addressing The QSD card address is determined by the eight jumpers detailed in Appendix B. RGA RZB. Figure 3-245. JDB Span B Pot. RDB Auto/Manual Selection Jumpers Gain and Zero Pots. RTB.3-37. 3-37. QSD Card Outline and User Controls 5/99 3-471 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QSD may be read from or written to via the UIOB only if the address from the UIOB is the same as that selected by the A and B pins on the front-edge connector. Controls and Indicators RZA.5. RS Watchdog Timeout RFB. Buffers RDA JDA Offset A Pot.6. D/A Invert RSA. RGB LEDs RF. QSD 3-37. QSD Front Edge Potentiometers (total of 8): • • • • LVDT ZERO (One each circuit A and B) LVDT GAIN (One each circuit A and B) OFFSET (One each circuit A and B) SPAN (One each circuit A and B) Test Jacks (total of 4): • • • • Test Point Pins: POSITION A POSITION B D/A OUTPUT COMMON • • • • • • LED Indicators TP1 (Coil 2.3-37. circuit A) JDA (Coil 1. circuit B) TP2 (OFFSET. circuit A) JDB (Coil 1. circuit A) TP4 (OFFSET. circuit B) • • • • M0-0053 POWER ON MANUAL READY ALIVE 3-472 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . circuit B) TP3 (Coil 2. When installed. the GO TO AUTO bit from the UIOB Controller produces an AUTO REQUEST (Auto mode). simultaneous RAISE and LOWER signals from M/A Station cause the output to hold. QSD Jumpers Table 3-125 provides a list of QSD card jumpers and the selected operational card characteristic produced when each is installed. The location of these jumpers is shown on Figure 3-245. When installed. a READY state must be latched before an AUTO REQUEST is granted. When installed. QSD Watchdog Timeout Selections Switch Segments H 0 0 J 0 0 K 0 1 Watchdog Timeout All times +25% 1/16 second (62 msec) 1/8 second (125 msec) 5/99 3-473 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSD Card Jumpers Jumper JDA JDB A B C D E F G Description Installed for direct configuration of circuit A. a RAISE or LOWER signal from the M/A Station places card in Manual mode. pressing the AUTO push-button at the M/A Station produces an AUTO REQUEST. When installed. Table 3-125. the GO TO MAN bit from the UIOB Controller places card in Manual mode. Watchdog Timeout Select Switch The Watchdog Timeout switch (Figure 3-245) sets timeout periods as listed in Table 3-126. When installed.3-37. Installed for direct configuration of circuit B. a timeout (ALIVE = high) from the Watchdog Timer causes the card to switch to Manual mode. placing card in Auto mode. When installed. Table 3-126. When installed. QSD Clock Rate Selection Full Scale Ramp RF or RS Value 2 KΩ 5 KΩ 10 KΩ Fast 15 sec. which cause the D/A converter to behave inversely. Manual Mode Selection of which clock (FAST or SLOW) is made by the FAST push-button at the M/A Station. QSD Watchdog Timeout Selections (Cont’d) Switch Segments H 0 0 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 0 0 1 1 K 0 1 0 1 0 1 Watchdog Timeout All times +25% 1/4 second (250 msec) 1/2 second (500 msec. 50 sec. Slow 30 sec. by stepping the counter in the Manual mode.) 1 second 2 seconds 4 seconds 8 seconds D/A Converter Input Buffer Selection Under normal conditions non-inverting buffers (Figure 3-245) are used as inputs to the D/A converter.3-37. However. Table 3-127 indicates the time for full scale ramp generation and percent of change per minute for plug-in resistor values in both fast and slow applications. These clocks. QSD Table 3-126. these can be replaced by inverting buffers. input data of 000 (hexadecimal) produces +10 VDC at the output from the D/A converter output. while the SLOW clock’s rate is determined by selecting values for plug-in resistor RS (Figure 3-245). 37 sec. produce a linear ramp analog level to the valve actuator at rates that are adjusted by changing the resistor value. With the inverting buffers installed. The FAST clock’s rate is determined by selecting values for plug-in resistor RF. and input data of FFF (hexadecimal) produces 0 VDC at the output. Table 3-127. 74 sec. 25 sec. Up/Down Counter Clock Rate Selection. Percent/Minute Fast 400 240 162 Slow 200 120 81 M0-0053 3-474 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 2 VDC V2 RLP Position V3 Feedback 0 to (-) 10 VDC RFX 50K + VO 330 80 330 80 IO Figure 3-246. QSD Table 3-127. Percent/Minute Fast 86 34 18 Slow 43 17 9 Analog Output State Plug-in Resistor Selection Figure 3-246 shows an equivalent circuit for the Analog Output Circuits (A and B). Additionally. QSD Analog Output Stage 5/99 3-475 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and typical values for both Direct Output or P + I controller applications. 175 sec. Slow 140 sec. 660 sec. RIN D/A Out 0 to 10 VDC SPAN V1 RSX RDX EH Valve Coils 50K ROX RTX 1µf JDX ROS Bias ± 1. 330 sec.3-37. Table 3-128 lists each resistor. operating equations are provided as an aid in determining the specific parameters for each application. 350 sec. QSD Clock Rate Selection (Cont’d) Full Scale Ramp RF or RS Value 20 KΩ 50 KΩ 100 KΩ Fast 70 sec. its function. Each circuit contains up to seven plug-in resistors determining specific characteristics per application needs. 9 KΩ open 10 KΩ to 200 KΩ Note P + I Controller 10 KΩ 2 KΩ to 20 KΩ 0 to 500 KΩ 0 to 500 KΩ 0 to 500 KΩ 500 KΩ to 10 MΩ open The presence or absence of these resistors. as well as the resistor values varies greatly from one application to the next. QSD Analog Output Stage Plug-in Resistors Resistor RZA or RZB RGA or RGB RFA or RFB ROA or ROB RSA or RSB RTA or RTB RDA or RDB Function Controlled LVDT Zero LVDT Gain Position Feedback Offset Span Time Constant Direct Output Typical Values* Direct Output 10 KΩ 2 KΩ to 20 KΩ open 0 to 200 KΩ 24. (*See calibration notes to select the resistor for the desired system performance. Table 3-128. QSD Resistor locations are illustrated in Figure 3-245. the information provided here is of a general nature.) M0-0053 3-476 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-37. Therefore. 3-37.  R IN   1 + ( RD x × 1µf )S VI Note* Filter Term when RTx = jumper • Span: RD x SPAN = 10VDC  ----------  R IN  • Offset (referred to D/A OUT): R IN OFFSET = ± 1. --------.  -------------------------------------------  R LP   1 + ( RT x × 1µf )S 410Ω ∆V 2 where: 500Ω = Scale Factor = V2 10 VDC ----.= ------------.2VDC  -------. QSD Direct Output Operating Equations • Voltage Gain: * RD x Vo 1 ----.= ( − )  ----------  ------------------------------------------.= -------------------Io 20 mA 5/99 3-477 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .  R OS • Filter Time Constant (when RTx= jumper): TC = ( RD x )1 µf P + I Controller Operating Equations • Gain: ∆I o 1 500Ω RT x --------. LVDT Calibration resistor Selection Position Feedback from LVDT +1 VDC to +2.5 VDC +10.0 VDC to +20 VDC RGA or RGB Value 2KΩ 5KΩ 10KΩ 20KΩ M0-0053 3-478 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-37.0 VDC +5.  R OS • Span (Position Feedback vs.22  --------.  R LP Calibration Notes This description provides general QSD calibration information.0 VDC to +12. LVDT Calibration Plug-in resistors RZA and RZB should be 10KΩ.  R LP  410  R LP  • Reset Time Constant: TC = ( RT x )1 µf • Offset: R IN OFFSET = ± 1. Plug-in resistors RGA and RGB should be selected to meet position feedback requirements as follows: Table 3-129. = 1.2VDC  -------. --------.5 VDC to +6. D/A OUT): R IN SPAN =  -------.5 VDC +2. QSD • Proportional Gain: RT x 500 RT x K = -------. QSD The LVDT ZERO potentiometer of each analog output circuit (A and B) is adjusted for 0 VDC at the POSITION output. Direct Output Calibration The A and B Analog Output Circuits are identical and independently configured and calibrated. The LVDT GAIN potentiometer is adjusted for 10 VDC at the POSITION output. The plug-in resistor configuration is selected as indicated in Table 3-130. with the LVDT in its minimum position. with the LVDT in its maximum position. Table 3-130.3-37.9 Ω As desired Where: Recommendation Desired Span 1 to 3 VDC 3 to 6 VDC 6 to 10 VDC RD Value 10KΩ 20KΩ 50KΩ 5/99 3-479 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSD Direct Output Resistors Resistor ROA and ROB RSA and RSB RTA and RTB RDA and RDB Range 0 to 200 KΩ 0 to 200 KΩ jumper or open 10KΩ to 200KΩ As desired 24. QSD P + I Controller Calibration The A and B Analog Output Circuits are identical and independently configured and calibrated. QSD P + I Controller Resistors Resistor RFA and RFB ROA and ROB RSA and RSB RTA and RTB Range 0 to 500 KΩ 0 to 500 KΩ 0 to 500 KΩ 500KΩ to 10MΩ Recommendation Use the lowest possible values Where the Gain Range vs. Reset Time Constant is as follows: TC/GAIN 1 sec/2. Table 3-131.44 to 24.3-37.4 to 122 M0-0053 3-480 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .4 10 sec/24. The plug-in resistor configuration is selected as indicated in Table 3-131. Installation Data Sheet For CE MARK Certified System CARD 2A 10B 8B 7B 9B 5A 8A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9A 16A 17A 5B 17B EDGE-CONNECTOR A 3A 1 2 3 7A 11A 4A 12A 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13A 14A 15A 4B 16B 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) (SHIELD) 24 VDC (+) (−) (SHIELD) B-Servo Coll #1 (+) (−) (SHIELD) B-Servo Coll # 2 (+) (−) (SHIELD) B-LVDT Feedback (+) (−) (SHIELD) B-Position (+) Master Clear (+) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE Manual IN/ Raise IN/ Fast IN/ Lower IN/ (−) (SHIELD) A-Servo Coll #1 (+) (−) (SHIELD) A-Servo Coll #2 (+) (−) (SHIELD) A-LVDT Feedback (+) (−) (SHIELD) A-Position (+) Master Clear (-) Figure 3-247. QSD CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-481 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .7.3-37. QSD 3-37. with the shield connected to earth ground at the B cabinet. Analog inputs and outputs must use individually-shielded twisted pair cables. M0-0053 3-482 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Digital inputs must use shielded cable (an overall shield is acceptable). as shown. with the shields connected to earth ground at the B cabinet.3-37. QSD Installation Notes (Refer to Figure 3-247): 1. 2. for Group1 and 3 msec. Digital filtering is used to reject input signal changes with less than a minimum predetermined time interval (3. After the PROMs are “burned” in the time interval is constant. During the power-up the mask register is set to all “ones. while events are entered into the other Event Buffer. Dual Event Buffers are used to permit reading of one Event Buffer. for Group2).1. and time tagging of changes in plant status (see Figure 3-248). Description Groups 01 and 02 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QSE Card is a DIOB-compatible single-card sequence of events subsystem which provides monitoring of field status points.5 msec. in firmware only. The monitoring for chattering starts at the time the mask bit is set to 1. The Group 2 QSE card has the additional feature of recognizing “chattering” on any of its sixteen inputs. signal conditioning. recording. Through a rear-edge connector. This time interval can be set from 20 to 255 msec. power. The QSE interfaces to sixteen field contacts using a common return line. On-card contact-wetting supply. and optical isolation are provided.3-38. The digital inputs are brought onto the card via a front-edge connector. and ground). the QSE interfaces with the Distributed I/O Bus (DIOB).” On Group 2 QSE cards. the mask bits have the additional function of holding the corresponding Chattering Flag and Chattering Counter in the reset condition. QSE 3-38. a collection of parallel wires (signal. “Chattering” is defined as a condition when the number of input changes exceed four within a specified time interval. QSE Sequence of Events Recorder (Style 7380A36G01 and G02) 3-38.” The card contains a “mask register” which can be both read or written by the DIOB controller. The outputs of the digital filters can be read at any time by the DIOB controller as “current status. The mask register content determines which bits are checked for change of state and cause entries in the Event Buffer. into which point cards are inserted. as long as the mask bit is set to zero. 5/99 3-483 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . .01 percent. QSE Time Tagging of the status changes is accomplished with the aid of the on-card clock.. QSE Block Diagram The frequency of the synchronization is controlled by the DIOB controller and it should occur at least once per second. Inp Real Time Clock Buffer #2 Reg Control Logic P07 Events Storage Memory Digital Debouncer 0 Oscillator .. for Group2. and an accuracy of +0.” DIOB Bus Data Address Control Data Interface Address Decoder Buffer #1 DEMUX Mask Status Curr.15 Figure 3-248.15 On-Card Isolated Power Sply. a resolution of 1/8 millisecond for Group1 and 1 msec. The clock has a one-minute range...3-38. +10VDC +48VDC 2: 1 MUX 0 16 Optical Isolators and Signal Conditioners RTN 0 .. M0-0053 3-484 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The clock can be synchronized by a “Group DIOB Write. 8 . Bit 4 in this field indicates that the Event Buffer is full. Optical isolation for each input. Recognize. for Group 1 and 1 msec. mark and inhibit chattering inputs (Group 2 only) 5/99 3-485 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . status and control words are used. Sixteen inputs that also can be read directly. Optical coupling. 500 VDC isolation from DIOB. QSE Card OK bit (Bit 6). The control word is used to set or reset the Enable Stack Operation (freeze) bit. QSE To facilitate QSE-DIOB controller communication. for Group2. The status word is read by the DIOB controller to determine the number of events (N) in the first Event Buffer. On-card one-minute range synchronizable clock. The first Event Buffer is now reset and is available for storing new events. The status register can be read by the DIOB controller at any time. Features The QSE card is available in groups (G01 and G02) and has the following features: • • • • • • • • • • • • • DIOB-compatible. Mask register for flexible sequence of event recording. new events will be entered into the second Event Buffer. IEEE surge withstand capability. When the “freeze” bit is set. the control word is used to reset the “freeze” bit.2. 3-38. The DIOB controller performs 2N reads from the Event Stack location to collect all entries. Resolution event recording of 1/8 msec.) After the Event Buffer is read.3-38. single card sequence of events subsystem. Dual event storage memory. the Event Buffer Overflow bit (Bit 5) and the Number of Events in Buffer field (Bits 0-4). On-card 48 V contact-wetting supply. It contains the Enable Stack Operation (freeze) bit (Bit 7). LED power supply operating indicators. (Event Buffer and Event Stack are the same. Specifications Contact-Wetting Voltage Supplied by QSE All inputs are optically isolated. QSE 3-38. Minimum Open Circuit Voltage (Volts) Closed Contact Current (mA) 42 7 Nominal 48 14 Maximum 56 21 M0-0053 3-486 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3.3-38. 1 V -- Electrical Environment IEEE surge withstand capability (Ref.3-38. IEEE 472-1974) (Ref. ANSI C37.4 V -Nominal 13. QSE Input Requirements Field Cable and Contact: Minimum Leakage Resistance (KΩ) Group 1 Propagation Delay (msec. 50 3.5 msec. < 3.) Group 2 Propagation Delay (msec.902-1974).5 3 Nominal -4 -Maximum -4.4 V 12.0 msec.0 V -1A Maximum 13.1 V 13. 500 VDC or peak AC between input command and DIOB ground.0 msec.5 4 Power Supply Minimum Primary Voltage Optional Backup Current 12. > 4.5 msec. > 4. 5/99 3-487 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .) Input Signal Rejection Group 1 Input Signal Duration Group 2 Input Signal Duration Always Rejected Always Passed < 3. In order to ensure that closed contacts will always be recognized as closed by the QSE card. QSE Cabling Limitations Since up to 1.500 feet For 1 Common/Card Length of return = length of cables to contacts 1. However. Table 3-132 shows cable length limitations. M0-0053 3-488 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .200 feet 700 feet 500 feet 300 feet 200 feet Contact Cycle Time If the maximum QSE on-card generated contact-wetting voltage is to be applied to plant contacts that interface to the QSE card.000 feet 6. the sum total of the contact series resistance and cable resistance must be less that 60 ohms. no current can flow from the +10 voltage supply due to reverse biased diodes). the nominal voltage present across the open contacts would only be 25 volts. 50K ohms is required as a minimum shunt resistance in order to maintain the high level contact-wetting voltage. Table 3-132.000 feet 2.3-38. the elapsed time between the contact’s opening and its subsequent closure must be greater than 15 msec.000 feet 4. from the +48 volt supply (with open contacts. if the open contact shunt resistance was 25K ohms.000 feet 10.2 mA could flow through any open contact shunt resistance (RS). See Figure 3-249. Maximum Cable Lengths (Assume RC = 0) for QSE Card Cable Wire Gauge 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG 20 AWG 22 AWG For 16 Commons/Card (RR = 0) Length given is the distance from contacts to termination 15. As an example.800 feet 1.500 feet 1. the minimum open contact shunt resistance that would permit open contacts to be recognized by the QSE card as open contacts is 10K ohms. 3-38. QSE RLINE CONTACT ONE OF SIXTEEN QSE CONTACT INPUTS RS COMMON RC RR FROM OTHER CONTACTS FOR A CLOSED CONTACT: RC + RLINE + 16RR < 60 OHMS RS = OPEN CONTACT SHUNT RESISTANCE RC = CLOSED CONTACT SERIES RESISTANCE RR = RESISTANCE OF THE COMMON RETURN LINE (IF ANY) RLINE = RESISTANCE OF NON-COMMON LINE LENGTH TO AND FROM CONTACTS Figure 3-249. the total capacity of the two buffers is 32 events. each having a capacity of 32 16-bit words. Resolution Event time tagging resolution is 1/8 msec. 5/99 3-489 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . and 1 msec. Since each event requires two 16-bit words. for Group 2. Accuracy One millisecond. relative to synchronizing. Contact Wiring Event Buffer Capacity Two Event Buffers are used. for Group 1. At the end of each time interval (Ti). When an input counter reaches the zero count. Rates lower than 1/Ti will reset it. If the mask bit is 0.4. See Table 3-133 for a list of the DIOB signals used by the QSE card. Table 3-133. 3-38. the Group 2 QSE card has an additional counter for each input channel to accumulate the number of changes. all the input counters are decremented by one count. QSE Rate of Input Change Monitor (Group 2 Only) In order to recognize “Chattering”. the Chattering Flag is set and the change is entered into the Event Register with Bit 7 in the Point ID set to a 1. If the corresponding input counter is less than four. the corresponding Chattering Flag is reset allowing future changes to enter the Event Register. Every time the input is scanned. At the time of an input change. No entry is made to the Event Register if the Chattering Flag (corresponding to the input channel) is set. the corresponding input counter is checked for a count of four. Time Interval (Ti) Ti = 100 msec.3-38. If the counter is set to four. it is incremented and the change is entered to the Event Register. Monitoring for chatter starts when the mask bit is set to one. and a common counter to measure the time interval (Ti). The input counters will not “underflow” or exceed the count of four. QSE J1 Connector DIOB Pin Out Solder Side Signals PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND Card-Edge Pins 1 3 5 2 4 6 Component Side Signals PRIMARY BACKUP GROUND M0-0053 3-490 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Signal Interface DIOB Interface The QSE card is interfaced to the DIOB via the QSE’s pin J1 connector. Input rates higher than 1/Ti will set the Chattering Flag. then the Chattering Flag and Chattering Counter assigned to the input is reset. the corresponding mask bit is tested. If the “Device Busy” pulse is missing. QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Address Jumpers Signal CA7 CA6 CA5 CA4 Card Edge Pin Number 28B 27B 26B 25B 5/99 3-491 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The QSE card does not interface to the following DIOB signal: UFLAG UCAL USYNC When the card is addressed by the DIOB controller (read cycles only) and the DIOB control signal “Data Gate” is received. The appearance of the “Device-Busy” signal indicates to the DIOB controller that the QSE is on the DIOB and is powered up. the QSE card will activate the “Device-Busy” DIOB signal line.3-38. See Table 3-134 for the signal list. QSE Table 3-133. Card address assignment is accomplished via the front-edge 56-pin J2 connector. QSE J1 Connector DIOB Pin Out (Cont’d) Solder Side Signals UADD 0 UADD 2 UADD 4 UADD 6 HI-LO/ UNIT GROUND UDAT 0 USAT 2 UDAT4 USAT6 GROUND * Card-Edge Pins 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 UCLOCK Component Side Signals UADD 1 UADD 3 UADD 5 UADD 7 R/W1 DATA-GATE DEV-BUSY UDAT 1 UDAT 3 UDAT 5 UDAT 7 * * GROUND *These pins are open. Table 3-134. the DIOB controller can assume that there is no point card capable of recognizing that particular DIOB address. Power-Up The power-up circuit performs the following functions: • • • Maintains reset as long as the power supply is below 9 volts. Each contact input is single-ended and shares a common return connection with the other contact inputs. QSE Table 3-134. 3-38. Extends the reset for a nominal 250 msec. providing stable data before the status bit ST6 is set.5. isolated dual voltage supply. During this delay. Circuit Description A functional block diagram of the QSE card is shown in Figure 3-248. See Table 3-135 for the J2 connector signal pin out. the on-board microcontroller completes over a thousand cycles. M0-0053 3-492 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . provides a delay of 125 msec. status bit ST6 indicates both power-up and “card ok” conditions. Each contact can thus be wired directly between the QSE card’s field common pin and one of the sixteen contact input pints. for Group 1 and 1 second for Group 2 before it enables the setting of the status bit ST6. After the reset is terminated it. QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Address Jumpers Signal CA3 CA2 CA1 CA0 Hi/Lo (Address Protect) Logic Common Card Edge Pin Number 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 21A-28A Contact Inputs The 16 QSE card contact inputs are interfaced to the field contact via the 56-pin (J2) front-edge connector. for Group 1 and 2 seconds for Group 2 after the power supply is above 9 volts. there is no need for an external contact-wetting voltage supply. Thus. Since the QSE has an internally generated.3-38. or longer than 150 µsec. see Table 3-135. The input signals are digitally filtered (debounced). The clock begins at “0” time after the reset is terminated. Memory load latch. while an open contact produces a “0. The card handles 16 contact inputs with common return. QSE • Continuously monitors the processor cycle time and clears the status bit ST6 if the cycle is shorter than 100 µsec. The Event Buffer is cleared of all entries. the following circuits are cleared: • • • • • • Input Circuit Real time clock.” This enables entries to the Event Buffer when the change of state of any input bits is recognized. Table 3-135. The contact-wetting voltage supply is shut down. QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Field Inputs Contact Input Bit Number DB15 DB14 DB13 DB12 DB11 DB10 DB9 DB8 Card Edge Pin Number 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 5/99 3-493 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . for Group 1 and 1700 µsec for Group 2.” For field input connector pin out. To perform this “Watchdog timer” function. Reset During reset.for Group 1 and 700 µsec for Group 2. All mask-bits are set to “one. the power-up circuit timing is independent of the processor clock.3-38. The processor is reset. Contact closure produces a “1” at the DIOB. Insertion of a jumper encodes a “one” on that address line. the card has been selected by the bus controller. Pins 19A and 19B are internally tied together on the QSE Card. DIOB Control The card is addressed by means of the six most significant DIOB address lines (UADD7-UADD2). Because the DIOB has eight data lines. absence of a jumper encodes a “zero. Data protection during the removal of the front connector is implemented via a short front-edge pin in the location of the HI/LO jumper (front connector Pins 20A-20B).” The Base Address is selected by jumpers at the top of the front card-edge connector. B = Component Side A = Solder Side 2. Note The jumper must be installed. QSE Table 3-135. the HI/LO line of the DIOB is used to determine whether the high or the low half of the 16-bit data word is to be transferred.3-38. M0-0053 3-494 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .” When this pattern of jumpers matches that on the bus. QSE J2 Connector Pin Out for Field Inputs Contact Input Bit Number DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0 COMMON Notes Card Edge Pin Number 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1A and 1B 1. This address is referred to as “Base Address. Each bit indicates the state of the corresponding input as shown in Table 3-136. QSE Current Input Input Bit Number DB15 DB14 DB13 DB12 DB11 DB10 DB9 DB8 DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0 J2 Card Edge Pin Number 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A Note DIOB Data Lines UDAT7 UDAT6 UDAT5 UDAT4 UDAT3 UDAT2 UDAT1 UDAT0 UDAT7 UDAT6 UDAT5 UDAT4 UDAT3 UDAT2 UDAT1 UDAT0 DIOB HI/LO “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” The “Current Input” word is unaffected by the “Mask” word. 5/99 3-495 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Current Input (UADD0 = “zero”. The two least significant DIOB address lines are used as described in the following sections.3-38. QSE If the connector is removed. Table 3-136. this contact opens first and removes the card from its DIOB address. UADD1 = “zero”) This word can be read any time. This allows use of the full DIOB address while allowing removal and insertion of the cards in an operating DIOB. this feature does not allow these cards in the lower half of the DIOB address while using cards with a short A7 pin type address protection in the DIOB upper half address. However. QSE QSE Mask (UADD0 = “one. to enter the change (with corresponding time) to the Event Buffer. Upon power-up. and.” UADD1 = “zero”) The word determines which bits are checked for change of state to cause entries in the Event Buffer (See Table 3-137). For Group 2 QSE cards. This word can be both read and written.” Table 3-137. Monitoring will start at the time the mask bit is set to 1. all QSE Mask bits are set to “one.3-38. for Group 1 and 1msec. for Group 2. a zero in any bit position of the Mask Word resets the corresponding Chattering Counter and Chattering Flag in order to disable monitoring for chatter. A “one” in any bit position causes the corresponding input to be checked for change of state every 125 µsec. QSE Status Word Bit Assignment QSE Mask Bit MB15 MB14 MB13 MB12 MB11 MB10 MB9 MB8 MB7 MB6 MB5 MB4 MB3 MB2 MB1 MB0 DIOB Data Lines UDAT7 UDAT6 UDAT5 UDAT4 UDAT3 UDAT2 UDAT1 UDAT0 UDAT7 UDAT6 UDAT5 UDAT4 UDAT3 UDAT2 UDAT1 UDAT0 DIOB HI/LO “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “one” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” “zero” M0-0053 3-496 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . in case of change of state. ” UADD1 = “one”) The Status word indicates the condition of the QSE Card (power is up. a byte read operation is sufficient to obtain status information. The two bytes of the Status Word (HI/LO) are identical. bits ST0 to ST4 indicate the number of events entered to the buffer prior to when it was frozen. Table 3-138 lists the assignment of the bits within the Status Word: Table 3-138. Buffer overflow (ST5 = “one”) warns that no more entries are allowed to either buffer. thus information may be lost. The “freeze” bit (ST7 = “one”) indicates that the “Enable Stack Operation” was initiated by the DIOB controller.3-38. watchdog timer is OK). The following procedure is used to empty (read) Event Buffer.” UADD1 = “one”) The control word is used by the DIOB controller to enable stack operations. QSE Status Word Bit Assignment DIOB Data Line UDAT7 UDAT6 UDAT5 UDAT4 UDAT3 UDAT2 UDAT1 UDAT0 Status Bit Number ST7 ST6 ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 Freeze bit Function Card “OK” flag Buffer overflow Number of events in the Buffer (ST 4 = “one” means Buffer-full). Status bits ST0 to ST4 are meaningful only after the DIOB controller initiates an “Enable Stack Operation” (ST7 is set on “one”). QSE Status Word (UADD0 = “one. thus. and the status of the Event Buffer. Bit ST4 = “one” if the buffer is full. Control Word (UADD0 = “one. Under this condition. The Card OK flag (ST6 = “one”) means that the card is operating. and to reset the Event Buffers. 5/99 3-497 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . for Group 2 to detect change of states. To eliminate the stack operation (unfreeze). 5.” Otherwise. 4. The DIOB controller now reads 2N words from the card’s “Base Address” + 2 in order to collect all information. an entry is made to the Event Buffer. (Only the most significant bit is used in the control word. If a change is detected for 32 continuous sample cycles (4 msec. For each registered change that has the corresponding mask bit set. The DIOB controller sets the Enable Stack Operation (freeze) bit to “one” by writing a word (with the most significant bit = “one”) to the card’s “Base Address” + 3. for Group 1 and 1msec. Write operations are not used with this address. the other bits can be in any state. the DIOB controller clears the freeze bit by writing a word (with the most significant bit = “zero”) to the card’s “Base Address” + 3. so that the number of entries (N) to the Event Buffer can be determined. QSE 1. then the mask bit (that corresponds to the bit that registered the change) is tested. Entries to the Event Buffer All 16 field-input bits are sampled every 125 µsec.) for Group 1 or 4 continuous sample cycles for Group 2.3-38. 3. all zero data words are returned. only the unfreeze (reset) procedure is required. With no entries. then the read/ unfreeze operations are repeated.” then the reads from this address (Card Base Address + 2) are treated as pop operations from the Event Buffer stack. The status word (byte) is read next. If additional entries are detected. M0-0053 3-498 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Events Buffer (UADD0 = “zero. In case the number of reads exceeds 2N words (where N = the number of entries in the Event Buffer at the time of the freeze command). This action also clears the Event Buffer (the one just read from) so that it is free to record new events.” UADD1 = “one”) The word is active only when the Enable Stack Operation (freeze) bit is set to “one. The DIOB controller repeats the freeze/status read procedure to check for entries to the second buffer. read operations return all zero data words. If the Enable Stack Operation (freeze) bit = “one.) 2. The bit assignment of the Point ID is shown in Table 3-139. The first read from location Base Address + 2 returns Event 1 Point ID. QSE For Group 2 QSE cards additional tests are made to determine if the new change causes a chattering condition. This sequence continues for 2N reads required to empty the buffer stack through location Base Address + 2. used to provide 1/8 msec.) for Group 1. If the chattering condition already exists. Time Tag extension bits. The second half of the entry is the 16-bit representation of the time-tag (LSB = 1 msec. Chattering Flag for Group 2. The next read from the same location returns Event 1 Time-Tag. LSB = Bit 0) Event Buffer Stack Each Event Buffer has a capacity of 16 entries (32 15-bit words). then no entry is made to the Events Buffer. If it does the change is entered with the Chattering Flag set.3-38. QSE Point ID Bit Assignment Bit Position 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 New Point Value Always “one” Always “zero” Always “zero” Always “zero” Always “zero” Always “zero” Description Always “zero” for Group 1. The first word is referred to as the Point ID. Event 1 Point ID 5/99 3-499 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Always “zero” for Group 2.). Binary representation of the bit causing the entry (MSB = Bit 3. Bit Identification Code. resolution (LSB [Bit Position 4] = 1/8 msec. An entry consists of two 16-bit words. Event 1 is the first change of state (oldest event) since the buffer was last emptied. Table 3-139. and compare it to the previous state of inputs called “Current Input” (Current Input is stored in the 8031’s internal registers and cleared during reset).) Reset all the counters that have no corresponding alarm bits set. low byte first. Double byte transfer (word transfer) should be used on the DIOB. If the two writes (bytes) are more than 200 µsec apart. The QSE clock is synchronized when the high byte is transferred.” 3-500 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the QSE aborts the synchronization attempt.6. 3-38. Increment the corresponding counter(s) for each alarm bit. (The 8031’s internal registers are used as counters. high byte second.3-38. Reset the corresponding alarm bits for each counter that did not reach the terminal count. QSE Event 1 Event 2 Event 2 Event 3 Event 3 • • • Event N Event N Time-Tag Point ID Time-Tag Point ID Time-Tag Point ID Time-Tag Clock Synchronizing Clock synchronizing is accomplished by periodic DIOB write operations. Calculate the new “Current Input” based on “surviving” alarm bits and the old “Current Input. The result is stored as “alarm bits” in internal registers. Test each counter for a terminal count (32 for Group 1 and 4 for Group 2). Firmware Considerations The 8031 microcontroller is used to perform the following functions: • • • • • • M0-0053 Sample the status information from the isolated contact inputs. One of four Group Write Addresses can be selected by jumpers J1 and J2 (see “Group Write Address Selection Jumpers”). In order for the debounce algorithm to be accomplished within the time restriction in Group 1 QSE cards. and proceeds to test the next alarm bit. reset the alarm bit just processed. The sampling rate was lowered to 1 KHz. Thus. An additional “shadow PROM” is used to generate “marker” bits to translate the code address for the control logic. If the test indicates that the counter reaches the terminal count. The Group 2 firmware also uses the “Shadow PROM” to communicate the changes to the control logic that is external to the microcontroller. The program is written so that it completes the processing of each bit in exactly the same time. This approach enables the 8031 to complete each cycle in exactly 125µsec. Event Memory Arbitration Timing Clock The Event Memory is accessed by both the microcontroller (to record new events) and the DIOB controller (to read the recorded data). 5/99 3-501 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . resets the counter. the firmware was written in a more conventional form in order to fit the code into the 512x8 PROM. In addition. Repeat the cycle.3-38. and the advancing of the real-time clock. mark the Event Buffer entry using the Chattering Flag and prevent additional entries to the Event Buffer while the chattering condition exists. then jumps to the “high” map area to increment and test the corresponding counter. and with the shadow PROM supplying the pulses to advance the QSE’s real time clock. For the Group 2 QSE card. there is no contention between events recording. the code is written in-line (no loops). The program executes from the “low” map area until it detects an alarm bit. These algorithms recognize the chattering condition. in order to accomplish the additional algorithms. regardless of the jumps. the program jumps back to the “low” map area. In order to minimize hardware changes. QSE • • Output new “Current Input” to registers that can be read by the DIOB controller. the program will stay in the “high” area. the code-map is segregated to two separate areas. and test the next alarm bit. If the counter did not reach terminal count. the area from which the program is executed indicates the bit being processed and the result. The principal signals are shown on Figure 3-250. In Figure 3-250 the timing of the signal ADD.DLD is generated by delaying the inverted PSEN/ signal. using two flip-flops as synchronizers (U56-A and U56-B). thus.3-38.DLD ADD. The designators T1 through T12 refer to the microcontroller’s oscillation periods (states). The ALE and PSEN/ are generated by the microcontroller and used to strobe addresses and enable external program memory. the data will be strobed to the DIOB in less than 625 nsec after the DIOB signal “Data Gate” is valid. The PSEN.OK is such that it just missed setting the synchronizers. relative to the timing of the microcontroller. Under this worst-case condition. ADD.OK is derived from the DIOB address and control signals. and it is asynchronous. arbitration logic is used. The CLOCK’s frequency is 12 MHz. T1 CLOCK ALE PSEN/ PSEN. The signal MUC is also generated to control the memory address multiplexer in advance of the strobe SY1. The signal SY1 is generated. to replace the strobe (STR) that is normally used to access the Event Buffer by the on-card microcontroller.OK U63-A U63-B MUC SY1 STR T12 T1 T12 T1 Figure 3-250. QSE Event Buffer Memory Arbitration Timing Chart The CLOCK is generated by a precision oscillator and used by the microcontroller.DLD. M0-0053 3-502 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSE To avoid contention. synchronization is delayed by a full cycle of the signal PSEN. Jumper Inserted J1 J2 J1 J2 J3 J3 J4 J4 Group Write Word Selected FC FD FE FF Addressing The QSE card occupies four DIOB addresses. the Power LED indicates the card is receiving DIOB power. QSE 3-38.3-38. These addresses are described below: 5/99 3-503 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-38.8. QSE LED Card Components Light Emitting Diodes When lit.7. When lit. Power LED I/O Power LED Figure 3-251. Card Addressing Group Write Address Selection Jumpers One of the four group write words (16 bit wide) can be selected with the aid of four jumpers. the I/O Power LED indicates the card is generating +10 VDC and 48 VDC. Controls and Indicators Figure 3-251 shows the LED card components. QSE • • The first DIOB address is used for reading the current input word. each event is made up of 2 words of information (see Figure 3-252). Otherwise. The fourth DIOB address is used to set/reset (FREEZE/UNFREEZE) the enable stack operation bit. (RANGE 0 TO 7) BIT POSITION OF DIGITAL VALUE IN THE CURRENT INPUT WORD NUMBER OF msec. which can be read at any time. Each bit of the current input word indicates the state of the corresponding input. it returns to 0000 when read. The mask word determines which inputs are checked for changes of state.3-38. The event data read through this DIOB address is treated as a “POP” operation from the event stack buffer. and to read the status (byte) (see Figure 3-253). • • • F D E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 1/8 DIV 4 3 2 1 0 BIT POSITION TIME TAG IN msec. As noted previously. (0 TO EA60H) D 1/8 DIV BIT POSITION TIME TAG IN msec. The state of the bits on the following page can be read at any time: — Enable stack operation — QSE card OK — Buffer overflow — Buffer full The number of events in the event stack buffer can be read only when the enable stack operation bit is set (FREEZE). (RANGE 0 TO 60000) Figure 3-252. The mask word has no effect on the current input word. All bits in the mask word are set to 1 upon power-up. = = = = DIGITAL VALUE TIME TAG IN 1/8 msec. The third DIOB address is used for reading the event data from the event stack buffer. This word is only active when the enable stack operation bit (described below) is set to 1 (FREEZE). QSE Event Data Format M0-0053 3-504 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . and causes entries in the event buffer. The second DIOB address is used to set/reset the bits in the mask word. and print them in chronological order The resolution of the SOE is 1/8 msec. Application Information The QSE card is one element of the WDPF Sequence of Events (SOE) subsystem. INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION) ENABLE STACK OPERATIONS BIT (SET = FREEZE. and send General Purpose Messages to one or two designated drops Logger. (within a single DPU). INDICATES THAT THE CURRENTLY USED BUFFER CONTAINS 16 EVENTS) BUFFER OVERFLOW BIT (WHEN SET. 5/99 3-505 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSE Status Byte Format 3-38. or HDR software to process event messages (from multiple DPUs).3-38. HSR. scan the QSE for events. the SOE subsystem contains the following elements: • • DPU software to synchronize the QSE with the Data Highway clock. buffer the events. QSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NO. INDICATES THAT THERE ARE 32 EVENTS ENTERED INTO THE QSE CARD) QSE OK BIT (WHEN SET. sort the events by time. the overall accuracy (between drops) is calculated to be better than 1. In an SOE subsystem with multiple DPUs. RESET = UNFREEZE) Figure 3-253.5 msec. OF EVENTS NUMBER OF EVENTS (0 TO 15) BUFFER FULL BIT (WHEN SET. which provides a means of determining the order in which a set of preselected contact inputs change state.9. In addition to the QSE. . with the following exceptions: — The EQ record field must be set to 1. Each event stack buffer has a 32 word capacity. DPU Configuration The user can configure a DPU to monitor up to 576 SOE points. In general.01%.5 msec.). the user must do the following: • • Connect the appropriate field input signals to the QSE cards. the user may specify a value for the RL field (relay close delay time). this onboard clock can be synchronized by a group DIOB offset (1FEH). Time Tagging Time tagging of status changes is accomplished using the QSE clock. To determine the relative real time of the events to the system. — Optionally. M0-0053 3-506 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . storing event data in one of its dual event stack buffers. the total combined capacity of the event buffers is 32 events. QSE QSE Capacity The QSE performs a high-speed scan of its 16 digital inputs. This clock has a 1 minute range.3-38. while the other continues to accept event data as it occurs.5 to 4. resolution of 1/8 msec. and accuracy of + 0. each with 16 inputs. Since each event requires 2 words. For the DPU to collect event information. an overflow condition occurs and the card stops collecting information. When this maximum is exceeded.) subtracted from the reported time before it is sent to the Logger. the SOE points will be initialized as standard digital inputs (DI type). these points correspond to a maximum of 36 QSE cards. — The HW field must be a multiple of 8H (allowing four DIOB word addresses per QSE). Input Conditioning The QSE card includes a digital filter for each input. Each event read from the QSE card will have this value (in msec. which is used to reject signal changes within a predetermined time interval (3. Initialize the appropriate process point record fields. This dual buffer allows accumulated events to be read from one event stack. and subsequently writes a value to each card (mask) that indicates which of the QSE’s 16 inputs are to be monitored for SOE. The DPU’s functional processor then resets each QSE card.3-38. Note QSE input points which are not event monitored may be used as ordinary contact or digital input points. 5/99 3-507 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . At restart. and builds a table which it will use to expedite event recording. QSE • Operation Initialize the drop number(s) of the drop(s) to receive SOE data from the DPU (using the DPU configuration diagram). a DPU configured for SOE handling searches through all DI records for the SOE points. the DPU will continue to collect data until the RAM buffer is full. Once the “dead” drop acknowledges a message. the DPU will periodically re-transmit the same message to both drops until at least one of them responds. the DPU will send the event messages to both drops simultaneously. If only one drop responds. Checks for buffer overflow condition (Buffer Overflow bit set) and verifies correct operation of the QSE card (QSE OK bit set. Typically. QSE Each time the functional processor executes its overall loop. reset the mask bit. new events will not be saved. If two target drops are specified.” Subsequent messages will still be sent to both target drops. That is. which has the capability of receiving. Once the RAM buffer is full. sorting. the target drop will be a Logger. Note that if the target drop fails. If one target drop is specified by the user. If neither drop acknowledged its message. each message requires the receiving drop to acknowledge. it will be considered “alive”. Once the event data is recorded into the DPU’s RAM buffer. If the target drop continues to fail to respond. In addition.3-38. until the target drop responds. up to three times. If this fails. the event data is read and temporarily stored in RAM (until it can be sent to the designated drop(s)). during each scan. Each message requires the receiver to acknowledge it within a pre-determined period of time. and printing SOE data from multiple DPUs. If QSE hardware failure is detected. the DPU functional processor does the following: • • Checks the number of events contained in both event stack buffers on each QSE card. and Enable Stack Operation bit set/reset properly). and remove the points from alarm. it synchronizes the QSE cards with the real time from the Data Highway Controller clock. If the target drop fails to acknowledge a message. the DPU will automatically initialize the new card. the DPU will periodically repeat the message. (When the card is repaired or replaced.) Note Removing a point from digital input scan will also remove it from SOE scan. If the number is greater than 0. M0-0053 3-508 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . before the DPU will send the next one. however. and the DPU will once again attempt to re-transmit any unacknowledged messages. the RAM buffer will continue to fill and can contain a minimum of 790 events. the DPU will not repeat the messages to the “dead” drop. the DPU will send the event data to that drop one message at a time. the non-responding drop will be considered “dead. it is sent to the user-specified drop (or drops). the DPU will re-attempt the message to the non-responding drop. the card’s input points are put into alarm. because the base time will not have been updated. The DPU’s RAM event buffer is initialized. DPU SOE RAM BUFFER FILLED – Indicates that the DPU’s RAM event buffer is full. INITIALIZING SOE DATA BASE – Indicates that the SOE subsystem is being initialized. QSE 3-38. Events entering the QSE cards’ Event Stack Buffers will not be collected while this condition exists. When the clock is re-enabled. the DPU resets all the QSE cards and sets their masks. DPU DHC CLOCK DISABLE – Indicates that the Data Highway clock is disabled. When this occurs. SOE Event and Error Messages When certain error conditions occur. and will not be collected. This message will appear after restart and when a redundant DPU is switched from Backup to Control mode. The oldest 32 events will be saved. and the status of the target drop(s) is set to “alive”. In this case. The SOE error messages are listed below: • • • QSE BUFFER OVERFLOW – Indicates that the number of events stored on the QSE card has reached 32. DPU DHC CLOCK ENABLE – Indicates that the Data highway clock is re-enabled after a disabled condition. any additional events (exceeding 32) will be lost. although the SOE is otherwise operational.10.3-38. • • 5/99 3-509 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . as event messages are sent to the remote drops (creating space in the buffer). Any event data entering the second (UNFROZEN) Event Stack Buffers (in all QSE cards) will be considered bad data. all events (in all QSEs’ FROZEN Event Stack Buffers) are slowly dumped into the DPU’s RAM buffer. an error message will be sent to the designated drop(s). 3-38. QSE Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-510 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Installation Data Sheet 1 of 2 REQUIRED ENABLE JUMPER +V OPTO ISO 20B CARD 20A 19B 19A TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 B 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 +10VDC BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 +V OPTO ISO 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A 7B 7A 5B 5A 3B 3A 1B 1A BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS EDGE-CONNECTOR INTERNAL BUS STRIP Figure 3-254. QSE 3-38.11. QSE CE MARK Wiring Diagram 5/99 3-511 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-38. QSE For CE MARK Certified System 2 of 2 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS CARD 1A 1B BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 BIT 9 BIT 10 BIT 11 BIT 12 BIT 13 BIT 14 BIT 15 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-255. The actuator position is determined by an LVDT at the actuator. The only difference between groups 1 and 3 is that the DPU demand and readback codes are inverted. Shutdown is activated by command from the DPU (one channel at a time). by a card reset. The demand Digital to Analog (D/A) converter in each channel of the QSR card converts a 12 bit binary number (the demand code from the DPU) into a desired position analog signal. The QSR is similar in function to the Q-Line Servo Driver Card (QSD) but has independent outputs and provides more features.1. This allows the DPU to digitally compare the actual position with the desired output position. The only difference between groups 2 and 4 is that the DPU demand and readback codes are inverted. The group 2 and 4 boards have two channels and control up to two AC actuators. The output signal which drives the actuator is determined by applying proportional plus integral (analog) control action to the error between the desired demand and actual feedback values of the actuator position. M0-0053 3-512 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSR Servo Driver with Positional Readback (Stlye 3A99101G01 through G04) 3-39. valve shutdown options. autocalibration of the channels. or by a watchdog timer timeout. A microcontroller provides the interface function between the DIOB and the channels. To monitor the feedback or position voltage of the actuator. Some features are DPU readback of the valve position for each channel. a 12 bit value representing the actuator position from the LVDT is available for readback by the DPU for each channel. QSR 3-39. This drives the actuator to its fully open or closed state. Group 1 and 3 boards have four channels and control up to four DC actuators. and electrically isolated channels. Description G01 through G04 (Must be revision L or later) are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Q-Line Servo Driver with Position Readback (QSR) card is a valve position controller I/O card that interfaces to the WDPF DPU through the DIOB in order to control Electro-Hydraulic (EH) actuators in the field. It also handles the auto-calibration function for the card. The valve shutdown function on the QSR is used to either fully open or fully close the actuators (independent of the position feedback or the demand output).3-39. A gain D/A converter located in each channel scales the channel's feedback voltage before it is summed with the demand signal. Each channel has a jumper to select an overdriven positive or overdriven negative output coil drive level during shutdown. This signal is summed with an Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT) feedback signal to produce an error signal. 3. 2.2. Position readback of AC and DC feedback voltage. and unipolar2. and unipolar2 as follows: 5/99 3-513 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . High impedance differential inputs for feedback. Configurable valve coil drive levels. Features The QSR card provides the following features: • • • • • • • • • Channel shutdown capability. Resistor programmable 1kHZ or 3kHZ modulated LVDT power supply (Group 2 and 4 only).3-39. Unipolar1: Valve Type Select jumper set to N-normal position and RBP is NOT installed. Microprocessor and hardware watchdog timers. 3-39. Bipolar: Valve Type Select jumper set to N-normal position and RBP is installed. Selectable magnitude (+15V or +16V) bipolar DC LVDT power supply (Group 1 and 3 only). install the Valve Type Select jumper and Bipolar Select Resistor (RBP) as follows: 1. Specifications Channel Valve Types A QSR channel may be configured to drive 1 of 3 valve types which include bipolar. To configure a channel for a specific valve type. unipolar1. Electrical isolation between channels and between field and digital control circuitry. See Figure 3-260 and Table 3-145 through Table 3-148 for location of RBP and Valve Type Select jumper for each channel of the QSR. Diode protected feedback inputs.3. unipolar1. QSR 3-39. The four QSR groups define bipolar. Unipolar2: Valve Type Select jumper set to I-inverted position and RBP is DON'T CARE. DC LVDT Unipolar1 DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output. -10VDC = 0% NOTE: Invert leads of the LVDT feedback so feedback range is 0VDC to -10VDC Unipolar2 DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output. M0-0053 3-514 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: -10VDC = 0%. Bipolar DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output. +10VDC = 100% NOTE: Adjust feedback leads so above feedback polarities are true. 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VDC = 100%. +10VDC = 0% NOTE: Do NOT invert leads of the LVDT feedback. QSR Group 1 . 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VDC = 100%.3-39. Bipolar DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output.DC LVDT Unipolar1 DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output. 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VAC = 100%. Unipolar2 DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output. 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VDC = 0%. 5/99 3-515 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 0VAC on feedback B = 100%. 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: ±10VAC on feedback A. ±10VAC on feedback B. 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VDC = 0%. +10VDC = 0% NOTE: Adjust feedback leads so above feedback polarities are true. 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VAC = 0%.AC LVDT Unipolar1 DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output. QSR Group 2 .3-39. ±10VAC = 0% NOTE: Connect LVDT feedback leads to feedback B of channel. Unipolar2 DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output. +10VDC = 100% NOTE: Do NOT invert leads of the LVDT feedback. Bipolar DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output.AC LVDT Unipolar1 DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output. 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VAC = 100%. Group 3 . −10VDC = 100% NOTE: Invert leads of the LVDT feedback so feedback range is 0VDC to -10VDC. ±10VAC = 100% NOTE: Connect LVDT feedback leads to feedback B of channel. Group 4 . 0VAC on feedback A = 0% NOTE: Adjust feedback leads so above feedback conditions are true. 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: −10VDC = 100%. ±10VAC = 0% NOTE: Connect LVDT feedback leads to feedback A of channel. 5V to ±10V See Per Channel Jumper description under Controls and Indicators for necessary LVDT Input Level Jumper positions which are dependent on the input span. 0VAC on feedback A = 100% NOTE: Adjust feedback leads so above feedback conditions are true.5V to ±15V Bipolar LVDT Type: ±1. and Table 3-146 for location of Rout on board). 100% = negative coil drive output LVDT Feedback: ±10VAC on feedback A. Bipolar DPU Demand: 0% = positive coil drive output. Unipolar LVDT Type: ±1. Configurable drive levels are as follows: Resistor 210 ohms 100 ohms 158 ohms Level ±40mA ±60mA ±40mA Load 40 ohms 60 ohms 80 ohms Resolution: 11 BitAccuracy: 10 Bit LVDT Position Feedback Groups 1 and 3 . Table 3-145. Input Impedance: Differential (with floating source): 400 Kohms Inputs (tied together) to common: 150 Kohms M0-0053 3-516 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .DC LVDT Input Span: depends upon LVDT type and stroke.3-39. The resistor which sets this current (Rout) is installed in spring sockets to allow other drive levels/loads (see Figure 3-260. ±10VAC on feedback B. QSR Unipolar2 DPU Demand: 0% = negative coil drive output. See Figure 3-260 and Table 3-147 for location of LVDT Input Level Jumpers. Valve Coil Drive QSR boards are assembled for ±40mA into 40 ohms. 0VAC on feedback B = 0%. 100% = positive coil drive output LVDT Feedback: 0VAC = 0%. ±10VAC = 100% NOTE: Connect LVDT feedback leads to feedback A of channel. QSR Common mode rejection: 55 dB with LVDT Input Level Jumpers in “<10V” position 50 dB with LVDT Input Level Jumpers in “>10V” position Inputs are diode protected against common mode and differential overvoltages. Average Change Over Temperature: ±1% max from 0 to 60oC Tracking accuracy: ±1. 30mA max.3-39.AC LVDT See Figure 3-260 and Table 3-148 for location of LVDT Input Level Jumpers.) Frequency Stability:1.8 to 3. Signal Span:20Vp-p max Common mode voltage:±10V max Input Impedance:10K ohm with input floating Common mode rejection: 55 dB with LVDT Input Level Jumpers in “<10V” position 50 dB with LVDT Input Level Jumpers in “>10V” position Voltage applied:±30V max Resolution: 11 BitAccuracy: 9 Bit 3-39.5% max from 0 to 60oC Groups 2 and 4 . Resolution: 11 BitAccuracy: 9 Bit Groups 2 and 4 .0 kHz .see AC LVDT Drive Resistors under Controls and Indicators for location of resistor which set the frequency. LVDT Power Supply Groups 1 and 3 .5% ppm per oC Amplitude:19Vp-p max ±11% 5/99 3-517 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3 kHz (May be set to 1. See Figure 3-260 and Table 3-147 for location of DC LVDT Supply Level Jumpers.4.AC LVDT Supply Signal: Sine wave 2.DC LVDT Supply Adjustable: Jumper selectable per channel for +15V and -15V or +16V and -16V outputs each at ±5% tolerance. QSR Load resistance:500 ohm min 3-39. Power Requirements DIOB supply voltage: +12. Watchdog Timers The Microprocessor watchdog timer puts all channels in shutdown mode if the onboard microprocessor fails to service the QSR within 0.LO No Connection M0-0053 3-518 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-39.1 VDC Current (supplied by DIOB):1. If the Shutdown jumper JS1 is enabled.5.5 seconds. a timeout will put all channels in shutdown. The hardware watchdog timer causes the Alive LED to blink if the DPU has not communicated with the QSR within three seconds.9A typ 1.4A max .0A typ 1.Groups 1 and 3 0.7. Table 3-140.Groups 2 and 4 3-39.6.5A max . 3-39. The card-edge DIOB signal assignments are given in Table 3-140 below. Signal Interface DIOB Connector The QSR interfaces to the DIOB bus through a 34 pin card-edge connector on the DIOB backplane. QSR DIOB Card Edge Connector Pinout Signal Name Component Side PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD1 UADD3 UADD5 UADD7 DATA-DIR DATAGATE Pin # 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Pin # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Signal Name Solder Side PRIMARY +V BACKUP +V GROUND UADD0 UADD2 UADD4 UADD6 HI.4 VDC to 13. Table 3-141.3-39. Groups 1 and 3 (DC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector Signal Name Component Side ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 Shield LVDT 2 (+)Feedback LVDT 2 (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 2 (+)Supply LVDT 2 (-)Supply No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 2 GROUND 2 Pin # 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B 15B 14B 13B Pin # 28A 27A 26A 25A 24A 23A 22A 21A 20A 19A 18A 17A 16A 15A 14A 13A Signal Name Solder Side +13V +13V +13V +13V +13V Shield LVDT 4 (+)Feedback LVDT 4 (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 4 (+)Supply LVDT 4 (-)Supply No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 4 GROUND 4 5/99 3-519 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The field device connection points are different for Group 1. QSR DIOB Card Edge Connector Pinout Signal Name Component Side DEVBUSY UDAT1 UDAT3 UDAT5 UDAT7 No Connection No Connection Ground Pin # 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Pin # 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Signal Name Solder Side GROUND UDAT0 UDAT2 UDAT4 UDAT6 Ground No Connection No Connection 3-39.4 cards as shown in Table 3-141 and Table 3-142. QSR Table 3-140. Field/Addressing Connector The front card edge of the QSR card provides for both the card DIOB address assignment and for the connections to the field devices.3 cards and Group 2.8. 3-39. Groups 1 and 3 (DC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector Signal Name Component Side No connection Shield LVDT 1 (+)Feedback LVDT 1 (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 1 (+)Supply LVDT 1 (-)Supply No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 1 GROUND 1 Pin # 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B Pin # 12A 11A 10A 9A 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A Signal Name Solder Side No connection Shield LVDT 3 (+)Feedback LVDT 3 (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 3 (+)Supply LVDT 3 (-)Supply No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 3 GROUND 3 Note LVDT (+) and (-) Supply signals are referenced to channel ground. Table 3-142. QSR Table 3-141. Groups 2 and 4 (AC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector Signal Name Component Side ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 Shield LVDT 1B (+)Feedback LVDT 1B (-)Feedback No connection Shield No connection No connection No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 1B GROUND 1 No connection Shield Pin # 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B Pin # 28A 27A 26A 25A 24A 23A 22A 21A 20A 19A 18A 17A 16A 15A 14A 13A 12A 11A Signal Name Solder Side +13V +13V +13V +13V +13V Shield LVDT 2B (+)Feedback LVDT 2B (-)Feedback No connection Shield No connection No connection No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 2B GROUND 2 No connection Shield M0-0053 3-520 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSR Table 3-142.3-39. DIOB CARD ADDRESS = 10011xxx = 9816 . QSR Card Address Jumper Assembly 5/99 3-521 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Addressing is identical for all groups of the card.9F16 See Table 3-143 for valid addresses represented JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: JUMPER: A7 = 1 A6 = 0 A5 = 0 A4 = 1 A3 = 1 CARD-EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) Figure 3-256. Groups 2 and 4 (AC LVDT) Field/Addressing Front Card Edge Connector Signal Name Component Side LVDT 1A (+)Feedback LVDT 1A (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 1 (+)Supply GROUND 1 No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 1A GROUND 1 Pin # 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B Pin # 10A 9A 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A Signal Name Solder Side LVDT 2A (+)Feedback LVDT 2A (-)Feedback No connection Shield LVDT 2 (+)Supply GROUND 2 No connection Shield COIL DRIVE 2A GROUND 2 The QSR card address is established by five jumpers on the front card edge connector as show in Figure 3-256. See Table 3-144 for register numbers. M0-0053 3-522 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Operation DIOB Data Format The DPU has access to all channels of the QSR card.9. The DPU can then read the latches to obtain the information. Register numbers identify from which QSR register the DPU is requesting data.Write only Channel 4 Demand . the DPU writes the 12-bit demand to one of the last four addresses listed in Table 3-143. Only double byte (that is.Write only Channel 3 Demand . The QSR processor then retrieves the desired data from its memory and places it in the QSR's DIOB read registers. word) DIOB read and write operations are allowed. QSR DIOB Address Assignments DIOB Address aaaaa000 aaaaa001 aaaaa010 aaaaa011 aaaaa100 aaaaa101 aaaaa110 aaaaa111 Register Read Address Request Register not used not used not used Channel 1 Demand . A read operation of a channel requires two steps. The QSR card occupies eight DIOB address locations which are assigned as shown in Table 3-143. First the DPU must write a register number to the first address listed in Table 3-143.Write only Channel 2 Demand . where aaaaa is the DIOB address set on the front card edge connector (see Figure 3-256) Table 3-143.Write only To write a demand to a channel of the QSR. QSR 3-39. A read of any of the eight DIOB address locations provides the same data since there is only one set (two bytes) of DIOB read registers on the QSR.3-39. 5/99 3-523 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . A status of 0 indicates that the QSR has not yet determined the feedback position value or that there is an on-card or LVDT problem (such as an uncalibrated channel) in determining that value.3-39. and the LVDT feedback position can be read where command and status bits are embedded within the read/write data value. the demand position can be both read and written. Figure 3-258. a Data Valid status bit of 1 indicates that the feedback position value has been determined by the QSR processor. When reading the feedback position. and Figure 3-259. QSR Table 3-144. The formats of these data types are given in Figure 3-257. Maximum and minimum scale factors may be read for each channel where valid scale factors only appear for calibrated channels (DATA VALID status bit=1). The valve type that each channel is currently calibrated to drive may also be read from the card. QSR Read Register Assignments Register Number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 Assignment Channel 1 Demand Channel 1 Feedback Channel 2 Demand Channel 2 Feedback Channel 3 Demand Channel 3 Feedback Channel 4 Demand Channel 4 Feedback Channel 1 Min Scale Factor Channel 1 Max Scale Factor Channel 2 Min Scale Factor Channel 2 Max Scale Factor Channel 3 Min Scale Factor Channel 3 Max Scale Factor Channel 4 Min Scale Factor Channel 4 Max Scale Factor Valve calibration type for each channel For each channel. and Scale Factors HI Byte 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 LO Byte 4 3 2 1 0 Chan4 0 Hex: 1 Hex: 2 Hex: 3 Hex: F Hex: Chan3 Chan2 Chan1 ChanX = not yet calibrated for a valve type set up for unipolar1 valve type * set up for unipolar2 valve type * set up for bipolar valve type * non-existent channel (used for AC Groups 2 and 4 channels 3 and 4 which do not exist) * Valve types are listed and explained in the Specifications section above. Read Data Format for Reading Demand. QSR HI Byte 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 LO Byte 4 3 2 1 0 M S B 12 Bit Data Data Valid (1=Valid 0=Invalid) L S B Shutdown Direction (1=Positive 0=Negative) Shutdown Active (1=Active 0=Inactive) Card OK (1=OK) Figure 3-257.3-39. Figure 3-258. Feedback. Read Data Format for Reading Channel Valve-Type Assignments M0-0053 3-524 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSR HI Byte 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 LO Byte 4 3 2 1 0 M S B 12 Bit Data Not Used Not Used Activate Shutdown (1=Activate) Not Used L S B Figure 3-259. Write Data Format for Sending Demands to a Channel 5/99 3-525 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-39. Controls and Indicators JS10 R52 N I TP18 JS14 15V 16V R125 R126 R98 R99 R148 RV2 JS18 >10V R67 R68 3-526 R53 TP4 N I JS12 TP15 JS19 <10V R55 TP7 TP11 NEG POS R162 TP8 R45 DPU CTRL EN DIS CT CAL 15V 16V JS6 JS16 R115 TP14 TP19 >10V Figure 3-260. QSR R107 R108 RV4 JS20 >10V JS21 SW1 <10V TP9 R118 R167 R61 SW2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C R113 R105 R106 R58 5/99 . QSR Card Outline and User Controls JS4 TP5 JS2 SHDN JS1 DIS EN INT VALVE CAL JS3 TP2 JS8 NEG POS JS26 JS27 JS28 JS29 RV1 JS11 N I <10V JS15 15V 16V R160 R75 R76 R59 TP6 TP17 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 ALIVE LE1 LE2 LE3 LE4 LE5 M0-0053 JS13 N I 3-39.LEDS UP1 UP2 SP STP TP12 TP16 R119 JS17 >10V 15V 16V NEG POS TP20 JS30 EN CAL CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 STRT CAL TP1 TP10 R40 TP3 TP13 JS7 RV3 NEG POS JS22 JS23 JS24 JS25 <10V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 JS9 3-39.10. x = 1.2 for Groups 2 and 4): • • • • Switches Flashes every 0. QSR LED Indicators The following LEDs are located near the card edge (see Figure 3-260): ALIVE: • • Stays lit when DPU is communicating with the microcontroller. Stays lit when channel x undergoes internal or valve calibration. CALx (x = 1. Remains off when channel x has been calibrated and is able to send demand positions to valve and readback valve positions. An 8-position DIP switch (SW1) located near the card edge (see Figure 3-260) has the following switch configuration: UP1 UP2 BP SSTEP CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Valve-calibrate channel for unipolar1 valve type Valve-calibrate channel for unipolar2 valve type Valve-calibrate channel for bipolar valve type Single-step through valve calibration Calibrate channel 1 Calibrate channel 2 Calibrate channel 3 Calibrate channel 4 1 5/99 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The start calibration push-button switch (SW2) is also located near the card edge. 3-527 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Blinks every 0. Blinks when the DPU fails to interrupt the microcontroller at least once every 3 seconds.4 for Groups 1 and 3.25 sec when channel x requires internal calibration.5 sec when channel x requires valve calibration.3-39. The DIP switch settings are read by the QSR only when this button is pressed.2.3. the card should be sent back to the factory. 2. the channel does not require re-calibration on power-up if it is wired to drive the same valve and LVDT for which it was most recently calibrated to drive. 3. UP2. Valve Calibration Valve calibration is required of every channel on the QSR each time the channel is wired to drive a new valve and LVDT. 7. or CAL4) for the channel being calibrated will remain lit during calibration. 8. CH3.5 sec. Select the valve type being driven using the front card-edge DIP switch (SW1) (UP1. For channels driving bipolar valves. or BP). If this occurs in the field. CAL3. Check that feedback wires are installed properly for valve type being driven (see Channel Valve Types under Specifications to determine valve type). Set the Calibration Select jumper to the VALVE position (JS3). QSR Internal Calibration Internal calibration is performed only by the factory. 5. A channel's calibration LED flashes every 0. 4. CAL2. press the start calibration button (SW2) on the front card edge. Remove RBP for all channels driving Unipolar1 type valves (see Table 3-145 and Table 3-146 to locate RBP for each channel).3-39. Select the channel to be calibrated using the front card-edge DIP switch (SW1) (CH1. configure the QSR Card as follows (see Figure 3-260 for locations): 1. Set the DPU Control jumper to the disable (DIS) position (JS4). If a channel is already calibrated and power is removed from the card. The Calibration LED (CAL1. 6. If a channel has never been valve calibrated or if the channel is between valve calibration steps. Install the Enable Calibration jumper (JS30). CH2. To begin valve calibration. M0-0053 3-528 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Before valve calibration begins. Set the Valve Type selection jumper to normal (N) or inverted (I) mode based on the valve type (see Channel Valve Types under Specifications to determine valve type and Table 3-147 and Table 3-148 to locate jumpers). or CH4).25 seconds if the channel has not been internally calibrated. and is done to set internal voltage ranges for each channel. valve calibration consists of four steps. its calibration LED will blink every 0. This determines the MIN_SCALE factor. the DPU Control jumper (JS4) must be set to the enable (EN) position so that the DPU may communicate with the channels. This determines the MAX_SCALE factor. or CAL4) is turned off and the microcontroller puts the channel in shutdown. and a successive approximation of the LVDT feedback is performed to calculate the MIN_SCALE factor. Once a channel is calibrated. 2. Channel coil drive is overdriven in the positive direction and a successive approximation is done of the LVDT feedback voltage being scaled by the autogain coefficient. Channel coil drive is overdriven in the positive or negative direction (depending on whether the valve is unipolar1 or unipolar2 type) which drives the valve to its fully driven positive or negative position. Note MAX_SCALE and MIN_SCALE factors are used to translate DPU demand codes to coil drive demand voltages and to translate LVDT feedback voltages to DPU feedback codes. An auto-gain coefficient which scales the fully driven LVDT feedback voltage is determined on the card. 5/99 3-529 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . CAL3. Channel coil drive is overdriven in the negative direction and a successive approximation is done of the LVDT feedback voltage being scaled by the chosen autogain coefficient. QSR 1. the channel's calibration LED (CAL1. For channels driving unipolar valves. Channel coil drive is driven with 0V. A successive approximation is done of the scaled LVDT feedback voltage to determine MAX_SCALE factor. 2. 4. Note When all channels driving valves are calibrated. An auto-gain coefficient which scales the fully driven LVDT feedback voltage is determined on the card. valve calibration consists of two steps: 1. 3. Channel coil drive is overdriven in the negative direction which drives the valve to its fully driven negative position. An auto-gain coefficient which scales the fully driven LVDT feedback voltage is determined on the card. CAL2.3-39. The lesser of the above two auto-gain coefficients is chosen. Channel coil drive is overdriven in the positive direction which drives the valve to its fully driven positive position. QSR Analog Output Stage Bipolar Resistor (RBP) See Channel Valve Types section under Specifications above to determine what valve types require RBP to be installed. QSR If a calibration step fails. the microprocessor will pause between each step of calibration until the calibration button is pressed to proceed on to the next step.11. RD RT RIN D/A Out V1 RS + 1µf ROUT 210 Ω or 100 Ω or 158 Ω Valve Coil 40 Ω or 60 Ω or 80 Ω Feedback V2 Position RF RLP Figure 3-261.3-39. Plug-in Resistors Analog Output P/I Loop Circuitry The output stage of each channel is an analog proportional plus integral (P/I) loop circuit as shown in Figure 3-261. The channel's Calibration LED will be illuminated while a calibration step is executing and will blink between calibration steps. CAL2. If power is cycled to the QSR. or CAL4) back to its blinking state to indicate that the channel still needs valve calibration. Table 3-145 and Table 3-146 list the location for RBP in each channel and Figure 3-260 illustrates the location. M0-0053 3-530 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . any remaining steps are skipped. Figure 3-260 and Table 3-145 and Table 3-146 show the location of the resistors used to locate them on the board. CAL3. and calibration terminates by forcing the channel into its shutdown state. A failure also sets the channel's Calibration LED (CAL1. the channel's LED will stop blinking if previous successful valve calibration data was stored for the channel. 3-39. By setting the SSTEP switch on the front card edge DIP switch (SW1) before starting the calibration routine. an additional switch setting is provided to allow single stepping through the calibration routines outlined above. To aid in diagnostics. 3-39. only if EN CAL is also installed. QSR AC LVDT Drive Resistors Two resistors per channel are used to set the AC LVDT Supply frequency. Plug in Resistor Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3) Channel 1 2 3 4 RF R75 R99 R67 R108 RS R58 R98 R52 R107 RT R59 R115 R53 R119 RD R76 R113 R68 R118 ROUT R160 R162 R148 R167 RBP R45 R55 R40 R61 Table 3-146. Channel 2 resistor locations are R125 and R126. This applies only to Group 2 and 4 boards. Channel 1 resistor locations are R105 and R106. (See JS30 on Figure 3-260) Card Test Calibration (CT CAL): When installed. Plug in Resistor Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4) Channel 1 2 RF R75 R67 RS R58 R52 RT R59 R53 RD R76 R68 ROUT R160 R148 RBP R45 R40 3-39. Jumpers Per Card Enable Calibration (EN CAL): When installed. internal calibration is enabled.12. card may be calibrated. (See JS2 on Figure 3-260) 5/99 3-531 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Frequency 1K Hz 3K Hz Resistor 33K Ohms 11K Ohms Table 3-145. Valve Type Select (N/I): In N position.feedback span between ±1. In the VALVE position. the DPU cannot communicate with the channels. QSR Calibration Select (CAL INT/VALVE): In the INT position. (See JS3 on Figure 3-260) DPU Control Enable/Disable (DPU CTRL EN/DIS): In DIS position. pressing the start calibration button begins internal calibration. LVDT Supply levels are +15V and -15V referenced to channel ground. For Bipolar Valves . channel shutdown state overdrives channel coil drive to approximately +13V. channels maintain demand positions if the DPU breaks communication with the microcontroller. communication breakdown drives the channels to their shutdown positions. In 16V position. Inverted valve type is selected (see Valve Type section under Specifications above).feedback span between ±1. In I position.5V. shutdown state is approximately -13V. Feedback span between ±4V and ±10V. These jumpers are found on Group 1 and 3 boards only. communication is permitted between the DPU and QSR.5V and ±7. Normal valve type is selected.5V and ±15V. M0-0053 3-532 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5V and ±4V. LVDT Supply levels are +16V and -16V referenced to channel ground. (See JS1 on Figure 3-260) Per Channel (see Table 3-147 and Table 3-148 for reference designators) Valve Shutdown Direction (POS/NEG): In POS position. In NEG position. (See JS4 on Figure 3-260) Shutdown Enable/Disable (SHDN EN/DIS): In DIS position.3-39. pressing the button begins valve calibration. In the EN position. install jumper in “<10V” position. Feedback span between ±7. install jumper in “>10V” position. DC LVDT Power Supply Level (15V/16V): In 15V position. In EN position. The jumper should be in DIS position on initial power up and during calibration. install jumper in “>10V” position. LVDT Input Level (>10V/<10V): For Unipolar Valves . install jumper in “<10V” position. JS27 JS18.JS29 JS22 . JS21 Valve Type Select JS11 JS12 JS10 JS13 Table 3-148.3-39. JS23 JS20. JS19 JS22.JS25 Valve Type Select JS11 JS10 5/99 3-533 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Channel Jumper Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4) Channel 1 2 Valve Shutdown JS8 JS7 LVDT Input Level JS26 . QSR Table 3-147. Channel Jumper Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3) Channel 1 2 3 4 Valve Shutdown JS8 JS6 JS7 JS9 DC LVDT Supply Level JS15 JS16 JS14 JS17 LVDT Input Level JS26. Channel Test Point Reference Designators (Groups 1 and 3) P/I Loop Test Channel 1 2 3 4 GND TP17 TP8. TP2 Channel Test Points: Table 3-149.13. Calibration TP14 TP11 TP13 TP12 Table 3-150. Test Points Digital Ground: TP1. Potentiometers for DC LVDT Drive (Groups 1 and 3 only) These potentiometers are used during internal calibration to adjust the DC LVDT supply output levels. Channel Test Point Reference Designators (Groups 2 and 4) P/I Loop Test Channel 1 2 GND TP17 TP18 Tie to GND TP5 TP3 Inject Signal TP6 TP4 Probe for Int. Channel 1: RV1 Channel 2: RV2 Channel 3: RV3 Channel 4: RV4 M0-0053 3-534 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . TP19 TP18 TP10.14. Calibration TP14 TP13 3-39.3-39. TP20 Tie to GND TP5 TP7 TP3 TP9 Inject Signal TP6 TP15 TP4 TP16 Probe for Int. QSR 3-39. 5/99 3-535 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSR Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 and 3) Installation Notes: 1.15. and B12 shown above may be jumpered to the (+) Feedback signal instead of the (-) Feedback signal depending on the valve type. A12. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 5 QSR CARD TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW A Coil Drive 1 Shield Ground 1 LVDT 1 (+) Supply Shield LVDT 1 (-) Supply LVDT 1 (+) FB Shield LVDT 1 (-) FB Coil Drive 2 Shield Ground 2 LVDT 2 (+) Supply Shield LVDT 2 (-) Supply LVDT 2 (+) FB Shield LVDT 2 (-) FB 2B 3B 1B 6B 7B 5B 10B 11B 9B 14B 15B 13B 18B 19B 17B 22B 23B 21B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2A 3A 1A 6A 7A 5A 10A 11A 9A 14A 15A 13A 18A 19A 17A 22A 23A 21A Coil Drive 3 Shield Ground 3 LVDT 3 (+) Supply Shield LVDT 3 (-) Supply LVDT 3 (+) FB Shield LVDT 3 (-) FB Coil Drive 4 Shield Ground 4 LVDT 4 (+) Supply Shield LVDT 4 (-) Supply LVDT 4 (+) FB Shield LVDT 4 (-) FB QSR CARD QSR Card Edge-Connector Component Side QSR Card Edge-Connector Solder Side Figure 3-262.. A8. 2. A5. The jumper should always correspond with the return or COM signal of the LVDT in the field. B3.3-39.) to ground screw or half shell. . jumpers are required from each WDPF shield Terminal (A2. QSR 3-39. Although not shown above. Jumpers from A3. M0-0053 3-536 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . A5. jumpers are required from each WDPF shield Terminal (A2. Although not shown above.3-39.. A8. . QSR Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 and 4) Installation Note: 1.) to ground screw or half shell. QSR Installation Data Sheet 2 of 5 QSR CARD TERMINAL BLOCK #8-32 SCREW A Coil Drive 1A Shield Ground 1 LVDT 1 (+) Supply Shield Ground 1 LVDT 1A (+) FB Shield LVDT 1A (-) FB Coil Drive 1B Shield Ground 1 NC 2B 3B 1B 6B 7B 5B 10B 11B 9B 14B 15B 13B 18B 19B NC LVDT 1B (+) FB Shield LVDT 1B (-) FB 17B 22B 23B 21B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 HALF SHELL EXTENSION (B-BLOCK) B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2A 3A 1A 6A 7A 5A 10A 11A 9A 14A 15A 13A 18A 19A 17A 22A 23A 21A NC LVDT 2B (+) FB Shield LVDT 2B (-) FB Coil Drive 2A Shield Ground 2 LVDT 2 (+) Supply Shield Ground 2 LVDT 2A (+) FB Shield LVDT 2A (-) FB Coil Drive 2B Shield Ground 2 NC QSR CARD QSR Card Edge-Connector Component Side QSR Card Edge-Connector Solder Side Figure 3-263. 2. QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 1 & 3) Installation Notes (Groups 1 & 3) (Refer to Figure 3-264): 1. QSR For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 5 CARD 2A 3A 1A 2B 3B 1B 6A 7A 5A 6B 7B 5B 10A 11A 9A 10B 11B 9B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 (-) LVDT 1 Feedback (-) LVDT 3 Feedback (+) LVDT 1 Feedback (−) LVDT 1 Supply (+) LVDT 3 Feedback -16V +16V Coil Drive 3 Ground 3 Coil Drive 1 Ground 1 (+) LVDT 3 Supply (−) LVDT 3 Supply (+) LVDT 1 Supply LVDT Output COM EDGE-CONNECTOR A 14A 15A 13A 14B 15B 13B 18A 19A 17A 18B 19B 17B 22A 23A 21A 22B 23B 21B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) LVDT 2 Feedback (-) LVDT 4 Feedback (+) LVDT 2 Feedback (−) LVDT 2 Supply (+) LVDT 4 Feedback -16V +16V Coil Drive 4 Ground 4 Coil Drive 2 Ground 2 (+) LVDT 4 Supply (−) LVDT 4 Supply (+) LVDT 2 Supply LVDT Output COM Figure 3-264. Valve interfaces for channels 1 and 3 are shown with the shields connected to earth ground at the B cabinet.3-39. 5/99 3-537 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Valve interfaces for channels 2 and 4 are shown with the shields connected to earth ground in the field. QSR 3.3-39. M0-0053 3-538 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the feedback leads (Output and COM) from the LVDT in the field may have to be swapped when connected to a channel’s feedback inputs. or bipolar). Whichever feedback lead polarity is wired in the B cabinet. Based on the valve type (unipolar1. the earth ground tie should always correspond to the COM lead not the Output lead. unipolar2. 3-39. QSR For CE MARK Certified System 4 of 5 CARD 2A 3A 1A 2B 3B 1B 6A 7A 5A 6B 7B 5B 10A 11A 9A 10B 11B 9B EDGE-CONNECTOR A 14A 15A 13A 14B 15B 13B 18A 19A 17A 18B 19B 17B 22A 23A 21A 22B 23B 21B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) LVDT 1B Feedback (-) LVDT 2B Feedback (+) LVDT 1B Feedback (+) LVDT 2B Feedback Ground 1 Ground 2 Coil Drive 1B Coil Drive 2B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) LVDT 1A Feedback (-) LVDT 2A Feedback (+) LVDT 1A Feedback Ground 1 (+) LVDT 2A Feedback Ground 2 (+) LVDT 1 AC Supply Ground 1 (+) LVDT 2 AC Supply Ground 2 Coil Drive 1A Coil Drive 2A Figure 3-265. QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 & 4 with B Cabinet Earth Grounding) 5/99 3-539 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSR CE MARK Wiring Diagram (Groups 2 & 4 with Field Earth Grounding) M0-0053 3-540 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-39. QSR For CE MARK Certified System 5 of 5 CARD 2A 3A 1A 2B 3B 1B 6A 7A 5A 6B 7B 5B 10A 11A 9A 10B 11B 9B EDGE-CONNECTOR A 14A 15A 13A 14B 15B 13B 18A 19A 17A 18B 19B 17B 22A 23A 21A 22B 23B 21B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) LVDT 1B Feedback (-) LVDT 2B Feedback (+) LVDT 1B Feedback (+) LVDT 2B Feedback Ground 1 Ground 2 Coil Drive 1B Coil Drive 2B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 1 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE (-) LVDT 1A Feedback (-) LVDT 2A Feedback (+) LVDT 1A Feedback Ground 1 (+) LVDT 2A Feedback Ground 2 (+) LVDT 1 AC Supply Ground 1 (+) LVDT 2 AC Supply Ground 2 Coil Drive 1A Coil Drive 2A Figure 3-266. Description Must be sub E or later to be applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The Speed Sensor Card (QSS) converts tachometer signal pulses directly into a 15-bit binary speed number (see Figure 3-267).1.3-40. QSS Speed Sensor Card (Style 7381A73G01) 3-40. DIOB Address Data DIOB Interface Buffer Latch Update Rate Speed Range Select Micro Controller Timer D/A Converter Zero Crossing Detector Analog Output Input Signal Figure 3-267. QSS Block Diagram 5/99 3-541 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSS 3-40. This binary number can be read by a software program via the DIOB bus interface. The card also contains an Analog output that is proportional to the input frequency. QSS Card Functional Block Diagram Address Compare DIOB Address DIOB Control DIOB Data Latch Buffer LEDs Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 3-542 5/99 Input Sine Wave Signal Zero Crossing Detector Timer Control Micro Controller D/A Converter Analog Output 0 .10 V Timer Speed Range And Update Rate Selects . QSS Figure 3-268. Detail 3-40.M0-0053 Address Select Jumper Block Diagram. QSS The QSR card counts zero crossing of the input signal over an update period +/− 0. 6. 1. 7. Bit 15 of the output word is high (“1”) to indicate the presence of a functional QSS card. 3.3-40. These ranges are selected via a switch located on the card (see Figure 3-269 for an illustration of the speed selection switch and Figure 3-270 for the location of this component. The “2 x frequency” will be represented by bits 0-14 in a 16 bit output word which can be read via the DIOB interface. The update period is selected by jumper to be either 50 ms or 25 ms.8.6.5 T (T is period of the input sine-wave). The nominal input ranges are 1.0.0. This output word is also displayed on the front card edge with 16 LEDs.2 kHz. In addition. The Micro Controller (with timer) on the card will determine the “2 x frequency” of the input signal.) ON OFF SPARE1 1500 1800 3000 3600 6000 7200 SPARE2 (NOMINAL SPEED = 3600 HZ. QSS Speed Selection Switch 5/99 3-543 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . AS SHOWN ABOVE) Figure 3-269. the card contains a 0 to 10 volt analog output that is proportional to 0% to 125% of the nominal input frequency. 3.5. 8 kHz 3.3-40.0 V P-P @ 7. Bit 0 = LSB. QSS 3-40.0 T for speeds less than 20 Hz.0 T for speeds less than 40 Hz.1 V 650mA 12. Bit 15 = 1.5 T for speeds greater than or equal to 40 Hz.2 kHz 1.0 kHz 7. Specifications Inputs/Outputs Power Supply Voltage Minimum Primary Optional Backup Current (supplied by DIOB) Inputs The Speed Channel (QSS) card accepts a sine wave input.0 V -500mA Maximum 13.5 kHz 1.4 V - Common Mode: Voltage: 20V P-P (Max.2. Bit 14 = MSB) Update Rate:Selectable by jumper to be either one of the following: 50 ms ±0. 25 ms ±0. The input may be connected to 120 Vac RMS without damage.6 kHz 6. M0-0053 3-544 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5 T for speeds greater than or equal to 20 Hz. 1.1 V 13.2 kHz Nominal 13.4 V 12. Sensitivity: 0.5 V P-P @ 36 Hz 8.0 kHz 3.) Nominal Input Speeds: Input Impedance: 40 k ohms DIOB Output Data word:16 Bits (Bits 0-14 = two times the input frequency. 1. 6 kHz 6.0 kHz 3. Accuracy: Minimum one LSB resolution (± 0.5 Hz) over temperature range for low update rate (50 ms).0 kHz 7.3-40.1% of span at 25 C Output Load: 500 ohms or greater short circuit protection provided Output Limits: -0.5 kHz 1. Output: Binary value equal to two times the input frequency.8 kHz 3.2 kHz Output: 0 to +10V proportional to 0 to 125% of nominal speed setting Accuracy: 0. QSS where: T = period of input sine-wave. Analog Output Isolated Output Span: 10V Nominal Input Speeds: 1. minimum two LSB resolution (±1 Hz) over temperature range for High update rate (25 ms) Output value indication:16 LEDs (see Figure 3-270).1V to +10.1V 5/99 3-545 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSS Watchdog Timer Bit Number Mnemonic Description 0 1 2 3 4 ANALOG ERROR CALIB ERROR TIMER ERROR DIPSWITCH PULSE ERROR Error in Analog output circuitry Analog output below 10V Error in Timer control circuit Invalid setting of DIP switch Pulse generator malfunction M0-0053 3-546 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . • • If the watchdog timer is enabled via a jumper (see Figure 3-270) the watchdog timer will time out to reset the card until the error is corrected. the QSS maintains a self test. If the watchdog timer is disabled.3-40. If an error is detected.3. The meaning of the patterns is described in Table 3-151: Table 3-151. QSS Card Components LED Errors In normal operation. the card will enter the error mode. QSS 3-40. Controls and Indicators Error Mode (Watchdog Timer) Jumper Speed Selection Switch Reset Switch LEDs Update Period Jumper LED Detail D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09 D08 POK COK Figure 3-270. errors can be read via flashing LEDs (see LED Detail in Figure 3-270). (This error will cause the QSS to enter error mode. Invalid serial port interrupt Invalid Timer 2 Interrupt Negative floating point number Floating point overflow Floating point underflow Number not a floating point value Card OK bit Power OK 5/99 3-547 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . three consecutive times.3-40. QSS Table 3-151. Analog calibration data too high Invalid data received from timers. however the error is saved for display if another error occurs). QSS Watchdog Timer Bit Number Mnemonic Description 5 6 TIMER FLAGS AO OVF 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AO AVERAGE TIMER DATA SPI ERROR T2I ERROR FPNEG FPOVF FPUNF FPNAN COK POK Error in two second loop Speed is greater than 125% of nominal. QSS Wiring Diagram (Recommended) Field Input Connections (Refer to Figure 3-271) The QSS card employs the standard Q-Series front-edge connector. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 3 QSS Card 20B 20A 19B 19A A 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Input Circuit A1 17B 17A 15B 15A 13B 13A 11B 11A 9B 9A Input Return Input Signal Input Earth Ground Output Circuit 7B 7A 5B 5A + Output Source . Contacts supplied include two contacts for the speed input and two contacts for the analog output signal. Other options are shown on the following pages. See Table 3-152 below.3-40. QSS 3-40.Output Return A2 3B 3A 1B 1A This configuration is for maximum common mode rejection and is recommended. QSS Field Inputs Pin Number 1A 3A Field Signals Earth ground from card clamp Analog output shield M0-0053 3-548 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Figure 3-271. Table 3-152.4. Eight jumpers are used to determine the DIOB address. QSS Table 3-152. QSS Field Inputs Pin Number 5A 13A 15A 17A 1B 3B 5B 7B 13B 15B Analog output shield Field Signals Earth ground from card clamp Speed input signal Speed input return Earth ground from card clamp Analog output return (−) Analog output return (−) Analog output source (+) Speed input shield Speed input shield 5/99 3-549 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-40. Output Return Output Earth Ground A2 05B 05A 03B 03A 01B 01A This configuration has the output shield terminated at the Field. Figure 3-272.3-40. QSS Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-550 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QSS Installation Data Sheet 2 of 3 A QSS Card Input Circuit 20 19B 19A 17B 17A 15B 15A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 Input Return Output Return A1 13B 13A 11B This configuration has the speed input cable’s shield at the DPU chassis. QSS Card Output Circuit 09 09A 07B 07A 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 + Output Source . Return Output + Source Input Signal Input Return EDGE-CONNECTOR Figure 3-273. The output shield must be connected to the output return. QSS For CE MARK Certified System 3 of 3 CARD 1A 1B 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B 19A 19B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE Output . with both connected to earth ground at the B cabinet as shown.3-40. 2. The input shield may be connected to earth ground in the field or at the B cabinet. 5/99 3-551 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QSS CE MARK Wiring Diagram Installation Notes: 1. In brief. QST Smart Transmitter Interface (Style 4256A76G01 and G02) 3-41. Complete details on the installation and use of this interface are found in“ Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) User’s Guide” (U0-1115). QST 3-41. Description There are many field devices (known as “smart” transmitters) that transmit their values over a digital link. the interface consists of three separate printed circuit cards: • • • Q-Line Smart Transmitter (QST) SBX Smart Transmitter link (SST) Q-Line Serial Link Controller (QLC) The QLC card with one SST card may be connected to up to four QST cards to provide a hardware interface for up to 24 smart transmitter current loops. providing an interface to a maximum of 18 smart transmitter loops.3-41. Communication via this interface to WDPF is provided through the Smart Transmitter Interface.1. see “QLC User’s Guide” (U0-1100). the QLC software limits the actual number of QSTs to three. However. M0-0053 3-552 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . For additional detail on the QLC card. The HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) protocol is one such link specification. Figure 3-274. The card generates precise analog control timing signals for use by analog point cards within a process control system. and offset conversion command signals to the analog input cards via the DIOB. clock. The QTB (by digitally tracking the power line frequency) generates integration.1. Description Groups 03 and 04 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QTB card is the source of DIOB analog control timing signals (see Figure 3-274). QTB Time Base (Style 2840A20G01 through G04) 3-42.3-42. QTB 3-42. QTB Block Diagram 5/99 3-553 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 50 Hz or 60 Hz operation. Features The QTB provides the following features: • • • • • • • • • • Calibration not affected when integration period is varied to match line period. The QTB may also be enabled or disabled at any time by the bus controller via the DIOB. G03 compatible with 60 Hz systems. Real time clock circuit. This card may be used in a Q-crate assembly. QTB 3-42. provides frequency tracking for a 50 Hz. G02 compatible with 50 Hz systems. 3-42.2. provides frequency tracking for a 60 Hz. Provides command to signal analog point card to obtain offset value. The QTB card has card-edge jumper-selectable options for either normally enabled or disabled QTB operation following power up or system initialization. input-voltage frequency. M0-0053 3-554 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . input-voltage frequency.3. has no frequency tracking for the 50 Hz frequency. has no frequency tracking for the 60 Hz frequency. Variable time-base clock. Auto-zeroing. Optional redundant configuration with primary and backup QTB cards. Four QTB groups are available: • • • • G01 compatible with 60 Hz systems. Optional crystal oscillator controlled timing. Specifications Figure 3-275 shows a functional block diagram of the card. Digital power line frequency tracking. Compatible with any DIOB controller. The QTB Card complies with the DIOB interface design specifications.3-42. A command on the DIOB overrides the initially jumpered set-up. G04 compatible with 50 Hz systems. 06 percent/sec Input Common Mode Voltage Surge: IEEE Surge Withstand Capability Continuous: + 500 VDC (maximum) Input Normal Mode Voltage Surge: IEEE Surge Withstand Capability 5/99 3-555 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QTB Input Voltage (G01 and G02) 120 VAC + 10 percent (rms) Sourcing Current: 20 mA Input Voltage Frequency G01 – 60 Hz + 2 Hz G02 – 50 Hz + 2 Hz G03 and G04 – None (internal crystal oscillator) Maximum Change: + 0.3-42. QTB 3-556 Figure 3-275. QTB Card Functional Block Diagram Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C UADD 5/99 .M0-0053 +12V UCAL COUNTER SYNC AC INPUT fL DIGITAL TRACKER CLOCK UCLOCK (G01 AND G02 ONLY) TRI-STATE BUFFER +12V USYNC DISABLE D I O B SET LATCH RESET UDAT ENABLE/DISABLE CARD-EDGE JUMPER UIOB INTERFACE START DATA GATE UNIT DATA DIR HI/LO 3-42. 0V (nominal) +13. QTB Output Signal UCLOCK Logic 1: +2. Real Time Clock The QTB Card.4V (minimum) +13. Output Signal USYNC Logic 0: Logic 1: 0V to +3V +8V to +12V Output Signal UCAL Logic 0: Logic 1: +12V (nominal) 0V (nominal) UCAL is low true for one pulse every 512 line-frequency cycles.4V (minimum) +13.0V (minimum) +3V (nominal) +4.1V (maximum) Current: 100 mA 3-42.1V (maximum) Optional Backup: +12.0V (nominal) +0. 4. The pulse width is longer than the USYNC high time by 500 UCLOCK periods. 8. Power Supply Primary: +12. Real Time Clock is two five-stage counters clocked by the SYNC signal. 2.4.240 times the input-voltage frequency. The resulting outputs are: • 5/99 16.5V (maximum) UCLOCK is a pulse train with varying ON/OFF time.3-42. The time-averaged frequency is equal to 10.5V (maximum) Logic 0: −0. and 1 Hz 3-557 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .6V (minimum) 0. The UCLOCK signal occurs very rapidly compared to USYNC and UCAL. As the AC input frequency changes. JU5-2 for G01 and G03..3-42. JU5-1 for G02 and G04) ensures that the outputs are the same regardless of group type. During the time USYNC is high.960 times during a USYNC pulse. M0-0053 3-558 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . UCLOCK occurs approximately 40. Normally. The UCAL signal may be pulled low by the bus controller at any time. G03 and G04 have no line tracking and long term stability of the Real Time Clock is slightly lower.e. signal integration occurs on analog input cards. QTB The counter outputs are gated and jumpered for reset circuitry. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BIT USYNC 16 Hz 8 Hz 4 Hz 2 Hz 1 Hz ENABLED 0. The jumpers (i. QTB Timing Requirements The QTB output signals are closely related in timing requirements. but a QTB-initiated UCAL occurs on the rising edge of the USYNC pulse 255. The Real Time Clock can be read with a normal DIOB Read operation.5 Hz (50 PERCENT DUTY CYCLE Figure 3-276. The UCLOCK signal in Figure 3-277 is magnified for clarity. However. The Data format is shown in Figure 3-276. the counter outputs do not have 50 percent duty cycles and the duty cycle is not the same on 50 Hz and 60 Hz cards. Note The Real Time Clock stability is excellent for G01 and G02 since these groups are synchronized with the line frequency. QTB Real Time Clock Data Format 3-42. the USYNC signal must also change since USYNC is tracking the line frequency.5. However. UCLOCK also varies with the AC input frequency as shown in Figure 3-277. QTB Output Signal Timing Diagrams Note The USYNC signal occurs on the rising edge of the squared-up AC input signal. Control and Indicators Figure 3-278 shows the card outline. QTB NORMAL INPUT FREQUENCY UCLOCK LOW INPUT FREQUENCY HIGH INPUT FREQUENCY USYNC PULSE 0 1 2 255 0 1 UCAL LOCK-OUT BY CONTROLLER QTB INITIATED Figure 3-277. However.960 clock pulses later and this pulse width may vary with input frequency.6.3-42. QTB Card Outline 5/99 3-559 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Figure 3-278. USYNC ends 40. 3-42. field wiring that carries the AC mains must have double insulation. The ENABLE jumper must be in place for proper QTB Card operation. Pins 14A and 14B for a one-card system jumper. M0-0053 3-560 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-42. In redundant configurations where a backup QTB is used. Pins 12A and 12B for PRIMARY. uses the following pins: • • • • • • Pins 2B and 8B for the 117 VAC line and neutral. this jumper must be omitted. There is no backup QTB. The front connector. Pins 19A and 19B for INHIBIT UCAL. in addition to the nine address jumpers. The INHIBIT CAL jumper is used in special applications to defeat the auto-calibration feature. All user jumpering is done at the front cardedge connector. This jumper must be removed for a DIOB which has QAI cards. respectively. The jumper in pins 14A and 14B is in place for systems using one QTB Card. Pins 16A and 16B for ENABLE.3-42.7. Note For CE Mark certified systems. Connectors and Terminations The QTB uses a standard Q-line front connector. QTB Note There are no user-configurable jumpers on this card. Pin 5A for AC ground. The PRIMARY jumper is used in redundant configurations to identify the primary card in a two-QTB system. Both cards respond to the same output cycle (Lo Byte) for active card selection. The primary card uses the low byte while the secondary card uses the high byte when reading the Real Time Clock. QTB 3-42. 5/99 3-561 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . The active card always drives the USYNC. Redundant QTB Configurations The QTB Card can be configured in a primary-backup connection controlled by the jumper selection on the front-edge connector. The active card is selected as either a primary or backup using a DIOB output cycle. UCAL and UCLOCK lines.3-42. Both the primary and backup cards are given the same address.8. 3-43. This card contains eight identical solid state relays (TRIAC’s) capable of 120 VAC line frequency switching. An on-card read/write latch provides an 8-bit memory function. QTO 3-43.1. Figure 3-279. This card also contains a switch selectable dead-computer time-out. QTO Block Diagram M0-0053 3-562 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QTO 3-43. Description The QTO card receives DIOB signals and provides solid-state AC switching to the field processes within a plant environment (see Figure 3-279). 2. The TRIAC outputs are brought out to the front edge of the card. Zero voltage switching for reducing inductive load surges (see Figure 3-280). Read/write output data operation. The QTO interfaces the DIOB through a rear-edge connector. bus. QTO 3-43. Card-edge LED indicator for each TRIAC output. Switch-selectable dead computer time-out periods. 5/99 3-563 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . This card provides the following features: • • • • • • • • IEEE surge-withstand protection. On-card power-up. Features The QTO card is available in one group only. 500 VDC common mode rating.3-43. The DIOB signals at this interface are defined by DIOB standards. Compatible with any DIOB controller. and dead-computer time-out resets. QTO Vtrigger = 15 V Maximum Voff (Peak) Voff (RMS) Von = 1. TRIAC Zero Voltage Switching M0-0053 3-564 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .5 V Maximum Voltage across triac (Resistive load) tdelay (On) QTO Latch bit status tdelay(Off) 10=On 0=Off 0=Off Where tdelay (On) and tdelay(Off) = 5/8 line cycle maximum Figure 3-280.3-43. 3-43. QTO Voff (Peak) Voff Voltage across solid state switch 1=On QTO Latch bit status 0=Off 0=Off Figure 3-281. TRIAC Operation with Load Current Below 75 mA 5/99 3-565 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3. Specifications A functional block diagram of the QTO is shown in Figure 3-282.3-43. DIOB ADDRESS UNIT POWER UP 9 ~ 8 ~ DATA CARD REFRESH COMPARE EIGHT-BIT LATCH DRIVERS OR 9 8 TO JUMPER ADDRESS RESET LATCH OPTICAL ISOLATORS SSR + + SSR POINT 0 POINT 7 Figure 3-282. QTO 3-43. QTO Functional Block Diagram M0-0053 3-566 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 1 VDC 13.8 A RMS (continuous) 10A RMS (T ≤ 5 cycles) 63 HZ 500 VDC (Peak) 300 VAC (RMS) (line frequency 8 mA (RMS) 12.4 VDC Nominal + 13.3-43.0 VDC -150mA Maximum 13. 5/99 3-567 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .075* 47 -Typical 115 ---Maximum Units 140 VAC 1.1 VDC 250mA Current (OFF) -- -- * The load current must be above 75 mA to fire the TRIAC (see Figure 3-281). QTO Power Requirements Minimum Primary Voltage Optional Backup Current Output Capabilities Characteristic Voltage (RMS) Current (ON) Frequency Common Mode Voltage Minimum 80 0.4 VDC 12. M0-0053 3-568 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3-43. JUMPER: CARD ADDRESS = 1100 1000 (X ‘C8’ HIGH BYTE) JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: BLANK: BLANK: BLANK: JUMPER: A7 = 1 A6 = 1 A5 = 0 A4 = 0 A3 = 1 A2 = 0 A1 = 0 A0 = 0 HI-LO = 1 (i.4. Controls and Indicators QTO card components are shown in Figure 3-284. card-edge connector (see Figure 3-283). QTO 3-43. front. Insertion of a jumper encodes a 1 in the address line. Card Addressing The QTO card address is selected by eight jumpers on the top. QTO Card Address Jumper Assembly Example 3-43. HIGH BYTE) CARD-EDGE CONNECTOR (FRONT VIEW) Figure 3-283. The LEDs indicate which Triac output is active.5..e. The update period is set by four DIP switches as given in Table 3-153. LEDs Update Period DIP Switches 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LED Detail Figure 3-284. QTO Card Components 5/99 3-569 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . the card resets. QTO If the QTO Card is not periodically updated.3-43. card-edge connector. Table 3-154. rear. The Solid-State Relay (SSR) outputs are brought to the front edge of the card. 3A 3B 5A 5B 7A 7B 9A 9B 11A Field Terminal Block Terminal No.6. and to protect the SSR from damage. data Latched (X = don’t care) 3-43. QTO Table 3-153. QTO Card Reset Switch Position DIP Switch A B C D Reset Time 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 62 ms + 20% 125 ms + 20% 250 ms + 20% 500 ms + 20% 1 sec + 20% 2 sec + 20% 4 sec + 20% 8 sec + 20% No time out. Connectors and Terminations The QTO Card interfaces to the DIOB via a standard DIOB. R-C snubbing networks are provided on the card across the SSR terminals to minimize inductive load surges on TRIAC turnoff.3-43. QTO Digital Output Contact Allocations Output Digital Bit Number B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 PC Card Edge Pin No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 M0-0053 3-570 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . These two-wire outputs have the contact pin allocations listed in Table 3-154. QTO Digital Output Contact Allocations (Cont’d) Output Digital Bit Number B5 B6 B7 PC Card Edge Pin No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 5/99 3-571 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-43. QTO Table 3-154. 11B 13A 13B 15A 15B 17A 17B Field Terminal Block Terminal No. Installation Data Sheet 1 of 1 HI/LO JUMPER CARD 20B 20A 19B TYPICAL 5A 19A 17B 17A 15B BIT 6 15A 13B BIT 5 13A 11B BIT 4 11A 9B BIT 3 9A 7B BIT 2 7A 5B BIT 1 5A 3B BIT 0 3A TERMINAL BLOCK 20 19 18 17 BIT 7 16 15 BIT 6 14 13 BIT 5 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 EDGE-CONNECTOR CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS Figure 3-285. QTO 3-43.3-43. QTO Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-572 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .7. 3-44. or contact your Westinghouse representative for additional information. Features • • • • • • Computer (Automatic) or PB Manual mode operation. 03. Servo valve contingency setpoint LVDT feedback position rate of change monitoring. 280 ohm (+/-50 mA) servo-valve coils Consult the “Q-Line Valve Position (QVP) Servo Controller User’s Guide” (U0-1125). and a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) attached to the stem of the controlled valve. 280 ohm (+/-50 mA) servo-valve coils 4 to 20 mA current loop interface. 80 ohm (+/-24 mA) servo-valve coils 4 to 20 mA current loop interface.2. 02. Description Groups 01. QVP 3-44. 3-44. and 04 are applicable for use in the CE MARK Certified System The QVP is the interface between a WDPF DPU drop’s DIOB controller.1. an OIM (M/A station). The QVP is available in four groups: • • • • Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 LVDT interface. a hydraulic servo valve positioner. Computer or PB Manual mode selection via external OIM signals or the WDPF drop’s DIOB controller. 5/99 3-573 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 80 ohm (+/-24 mA) servo-valve coils LVDT interface. Simplified valve calibration procedures that do not require trim-pots. Automatic valve closing bias. QVP Servo Valve Position Controller (Style 4256A94G01 through G04) 3-44. 4. 3-44.00 Vp-p +/-5%. QVP 3-44.00 kHz +/-10% sine wave or 3. Specifications Table 3-155. Functional Description An on-card 80C32 microcontroller provides a link between the QVP card’s DIOB interface circuit. adjustable 23. The QVP’s microcontroller provides closed loop proportional-plus-integral (PI) control for real time servo valve position control. adjustable 0. The setpoint may normally be altered by the OIM’s Raise/Lower pushbuttons or by the WDPF drop via the DIOB interface. LVDT Coil Drive Outputs Signal Amplitude: Group 1 Group 2 Gain Change Offset Total Harmonic Content Protection 1. M0-0053 3-574 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .3. A valve position setpoint is maintained by the QVP.5% maximum (0 to 60 C) 25 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 1% maximum The QVP card Primary Coil Drive circuit may be short circuited without damage to the circuit. and the LVDT primary coil excitation and LVDT secondary coil demodulation circuit. The valve position setpoint causes the QVP card to generate redundant control output signals which drive the hydraulic servo valve actuator coils.00 kHz +/-10% sine wave (user selectable via jumpers) 17.75 Vp-p +/-5%.3-44. the hydraulic servo valve coil drive circuit. Short circuit current is limited to 80 mA nominal. The feedback loop is closed with the valve position measurement obtained from a LVDT that is mounted on the valve stem at the actuator. LVDT Secondary Inputs Signal span Common mode voltage Common mode rejection Voltage applied Differential Input Impedance 25 Vp-p maximum +/. QVP Table 3-156.2 V (+/-50.7 mA maximum into 280 ohm coils) 80 ohm +/-12% 280 ohm +/-10% Any output will function correctly if the other output(s) are short circuited to common. Short circuit current is limited to 80 mA nominal.00 V (+/-25 mA maximum into 80 ohm coils) +/-14. Table 3-158.10 volts maximum 55 dB maximum +/-30 volts maximum 10 k ohm with input open-circuited Table 3-157.3-44. QVP Setpoint Output Signal span Load resistance Gain error Offset Protection 0.0 volts nominal 5 k ohm minimum 50 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 25 mV maximum (25 C) 25 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 4 mV maximum (25 C) The QVP card Setpoint Voltage circuit output terminals may be short circuited without damage to the circuit. All outputs may be short circuited to +10 V or to -10 V without suffering damage. QVP Valve Coil Drive Outputs Signal span: Groups 1 and 3 Groups 2 and 4 Load resistance: Groups 1 and 3 Groups 2 and 4 Protection +/-2.0 to +10. 5/99 3-575 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Input Impedance Input Circuit M0-0053 3-576 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QVP Table 3-159. QVP Valve Position Output Signal span Load resistance Gain error: CPU alive CPU dead Offset: CPU alive CPU dead Protection 0. Table 3-160.3-44. A differential input stage is used to reject common mode voltages present at the QVP card inputs.0 volts at 25 C 500 ohm minimum 50 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 25 mV maximum (25 C) 200 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 25 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) 4 mV maximum (25 C) 100 mV maximum (0 to 60 C) The QVP card Position Voltage circuit output terminals may be short circuited without damage to the circuit. QVP Current Loop Input (Groups 3 and 4) Signal Input range Unipolar DC current 4 to 20 mA 20 mA = 0% (fully closed) 4 mA = 100% (fully open) 250 ohms +/-2% The inpedance converts the 4 to 20 mA input current into a 1 to 5 V input voltage. Short circuit current is limited to 80 mA nominal.0 to +10. 6 to 30 Volts maximum 24 Volts nominal This voltage must be supplied from an external isolated power supply. Prty-Lower. Prty-Raise. 2 VDC sinking 150 mA 3 VDC sinking 200mA 200 mA 30 VDC 0. QVP Watchdog Timer Time-out period 45 msec +/-33% 5/99 3-577 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .5 mA 3 mA Minimum on voltage Maximum on voltage Maximum off voltage Minimum on current Maximum on current Maximum off current Table 3-163. Lower. QVP Table 3-161. QVP Digital Outputs Quantity Power Supply 2 (Manual and Servo-Bad) 21. 20 Volts 30 Volts 6 Volts 4.5 mA 11.6 to 30 Volts maximum 24 Volts nominal This voltage must be supplied from an external isolated power supply. Raise.5 mA at 30 VDC Minimum on voltage Maximum on current Maximum off voltage Maximum off current Table 3-162. Man-Shtdwn) 21.3-44. QVP Digital Inputs Quantity Power Supply 6 (Man-Sel. followed by the high byte. Interface The QVP card occupies a block of eight consecutive DIOB word addresses.5. Since the DIOB is a byte oriented data bus.Address Bit = Logic 1 Jumper removed . QVP P2 card edge connector’s mating hood (front view) Up CA7 = 1 CA6 = 0 QVP card DIOB Base Address = B8 DIOB Addresses B8 through BF are assigned to this QVP card CA5 = 1 CA4 = 1 CA3 = 1 CARD-ENA = 1 Jumper installed . must always be installed to enable QVP card access by the DIOB controller. Five jumpers may be used to select the base address which will always end in a 0 or an 8. the DIOB address lines must contain an address that has been assigned to the QVP card. CARD-ENA/. Byte data transfers are not permitted. QVP 3-44. The QVP card interfaces the DIOB controller using sixteen bit data words. The order of data transfer must always be low byte first. A sixth jumper. two DIOB data transfers are required to transfer DIOB data to or from a QVP card. The QVP card’s base DIOB address is selected by the installation of jumpers on the QVP card’s P2 connector’s mating front card edge connector (see example in Figure 3-286).3-44.Address Bit = Logic 0 Figure 3-286. Example of QVP DIOB Base Address Selection M0-0053 3-578 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . but reading any of the eight addresses will get the same data. Before data transfer to and from the QVP card can occur. All eight of these DIOB addresses can be written to. Four additional three-position header are used as test points on the QVP card. Manual Controls Testpoints The QVP card contains 12 testjacks mounted at the front edge of the card. These testjacks permit a voltmeter to be used to measure specific voltage levels on the QVP card or to provide contact inputs in parallel with three of the external isolated contact inputs.6. Table 3-164. QVP 3-44. QVP Testjacks Testjack Number TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 JS1 JS7 JS10 JS11 Name AGND VPCAL VSET VPOS VC1 VC2 VC3 C-COM ISO-COM LMAN-SEL/ R/ L/ Function Analog power supply common Bipolar DC output voltage of the LVDT demodulator circuit (Groups 1 and 2) Setpoint Meter Drive voltage Position Meter Drive voltage Servo-valve coil 1 voltage Servo-valve coil 2 voltage Servo-valve coil 3 voltage Servo-valve coil drive circuit power supply common Isolated power supply common Isolated Local Manual mode select contact input Isolated Local Manual mode valve Raise contact input Isolated Local Manual mode valve Lower contact input Digital Common Analog Common Analog Common +10 V Reference voltage 5/99 3-579 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .3-44. QVP Card Switches The QVP card contains two switches (SW1 and SW2) that are located near the front edge of the card (see Figure 3-287).3-44. or up position of this switch will disconnect the servo drive from the servo coils and isolate the servo drive amplifiers from the P2 front edge connector. SW2 is an SPST toggle switch. or down position for normal operation of the QVP card M0-0053 3-580 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . The on-line. These controls are described in the following sections. Pressing and releasing this switch will cause a hard reset of the QVP. The two positions of this switch are test and online. Switches SW1 LE1 POK SRVO OK MAN SW2 LE2 LE3 Jumpers 123 JS8 123 JS9 LEDs 123 JS2 123 123 123 JS5 JS6 JS3 Figure 3-287. The test. SW2 must be in the on-line. QVP QVP Card Figure 3-287 illustrates the manual controls and LEDs on a QVP card. or down position of this switch will connect the servo drive to the servo coils. • • SW1 is a pushbutton switch. The QVP card is currently not in PB MANUAL mode. If the QVP card is powered. Selects LVDT Excitation Oscillator sinewave frequency of 3 KHz. Table 3-166. card’s servo-valve control operation.3-44. QVP LEDs LED LE1 Lit Unlit The QVP DIOB power fuse is intact The QVP DIOB power fuse is open or and at least one DIOB supply voltage neither DIOB supply voltage is present. and may be in any other mode. QVP LEDs The QVP card contains three LED indicators that are mounted near the front edge of the card (see Figure 3-287). is present. The QVP card (Groups 3 and 4) contain four three-position single row headers with plug-in jumpers installed. there is There is a problem with the QVP card’s no detected problem with the QVP servo-valve control operation. The QVP card is operating in PB MANUAL mode. Table 3-165. Table 3-165describes what the LEDs indicate when they are lit or unlit. QVP Option Select Headers Header JS2 JS3 JS5 * JS6 **JS8 **JS9 Posts Shorted 1 -2 2-3 1 -2 2 -3 1 -2 2 -3 1 -2 2 -3 1 -2 2 -3 Function Enable Alive watchdog timer Disable Alive watchdog timer Normal running mode Test mode Disable DIOB watchdog timer Enable DIOB watchdog timer Configure from QVP algorithm Configure from on-board EEPROM Selects LVDT Excitation Oscillator sinewave frequency of 1 KHz. ** Groups 1 and 2 only. * See the Calibration section in “QVP” Servo Controller User’s Guide” (U0-1125). 5/99 3-581 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . LE2 LE3 Jumpers The QVP card (Groups 1 and 2) contain six three-position single row headers with plug-in jumpers installed (see Figure 3-287). Installation Data Sheet CARD 8A 9A 10A 8B 9B 10B 16A 17A 18A 20B 21B 22B 20A 21A 22A 16B 17B 18B EDGE-CONNECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B (H/S Ext) 12A 13A 14A 12B 13B 14B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1B 1A 6A 18 19 20 + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC V SET PT (-) MAN-SHTDWN/ MAN-SEL/ LOWER/ RAISE/ PRTY-RAISE/ PRTY-LOWER/ MANUAL/ SERVO-BAD/ Digital Outputs Digital Inputs V POS (-) V SET PT (+) V POS (+) Coil 3 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (-) Coil 3 Out (+) Coil 1 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (+) VOSC (-) Coil 1 Out (+) LVDT B(-) VOSC (+) LVDT A(-) LVDT B(+) A (QHS) LVDT A(+) Recommended grounding: Figure 3-288 shows shields grounded at the halfshell. QVP 3-44. Six holes have been drilled on each halfshell block for this purpose. Figure 3-288.3-44. Insert a #6 screw in the hole located near the shield terminal on halfshell block “A” and add six jumpers (as shown). QVP Wiring Diagram (Using #6 Screws) M0-0053 3-582 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .7. Figure 3-289.3-44. Insert a #6 screw in the hole located near the shield terminal on halfshell block “A” and add six jumpers (as shown). Six holes have been drilled on each halfshell block for this purpose. QVP Wiring Diagram (Using #8 Screws) 5/99 3-583 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . QVP Installation Data Sheet A (QHS) 8A 9A 10A 8B 9B 10B 16A 17A 18A 20B 21B 22B 20A 21A 22A 16B 17B 18B EDGE-CONNECTOR B (H/S Ext) 12A 13A 14A 12B 13B 14B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 1B 1A 6A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC V SET PT (-) MAN-SHTDWN/ MAN-SEL/ LOWER/ RAISE/ PRTY-RAISE/ PRTY-LOWER/ MANUAL/ SERVO-BAD/ Digital Outputs Digital Inputs V POS (-) V SET PT (+) V POS (+) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Coil 3 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (-) Coil 3 Out (+) Coil 1 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (+) VOSC (-) Coil 1 Out (+) LVDT B(-) VOSC (+) LVDT A(-) LVDT B(+) LVDT A(+) CARD Recommended grounding: Figure 3-289 shows shields grounded at the halfshell. 3-44. QVP CE MARK Wiring Diagram M0-0053 3-584 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QVP For CE MARK Certified System * 8A 9A 10A 8B 9B 10B 16A 17A 18A 20B 21B 22B 20A 21A 22A 16B 17B 18B EDGE-CONNECTOR 1 CARD A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE Coil 3 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (-) Coil 3 Out (+) Coil 1 Out (-) Coil 2 Out (+) VOSC (-) Coil 1 Out (+) LVDT B(-) VOSC (+) LVDT A(-) LVDT B(+) LVDT A(+) * 12A 13A 14A 12B 13B 14B 2A 3A 2B 3B 4B 4A 5A 5B 1A 1B 6A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE 2 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE SERVO-BAD/ + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC RTN + 24VDC LOWER/ MAN-SEL/ RAISE/ PRTY-LOWER/ PRTY-RAISE/ MANUAL/ Digital Outputs Digital Inputs V SET PT (-) MAN-SHTDWN/ V POS (-) V SET PT (+) V POS (+) * DIN-rail mounted tension clamp terminal block Figure 3-290. 5/99 A-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . refer to “MAC Utilities User’s Guide” (U0-0136). • • • Worksheet A shows the possible Q-Card hardware addresses. Both Worksheets B and C show the card-edge connector identification and half-shell location (zone-row) for each Q-Crate slot. and provide space to record the card type and group.Appendix A. and provides space to record the card which is assigned each address. For additional information on the default naming option. Worksheets A-1. Worksheet C can be used to record the Q-Crate slot assignment for each card (when default naming is used). The address associated with each card slot (for default naming) is shown also. Worksheet B can be used to record the Q-Crate slot assignment and assigned hardware address for each card (when default naming is not used). Section Overview The following pages contain three worksheets which can be used to assign and record Q-Card addresses and Q-Crate slot assignments. x2. QAO. QSE) must start at x0. QSP. x8. QAM. x4. QID. xA. xC 2 channels (QAA. QAV. QPA. F8-FB = QRT) Available only if QTB and/or DIOB checking is not implemented * Indicates address used with default naming feature Q-Cards with: 12 channels (QAX) must start at zero and use 2 blocks of 6 addresses 8 or 6 channels (QAH.A-1. x8 4 channels (QAI. Section Overview Worksheet A Q-Card Address Assignments *80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 *90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 *A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 *B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 *C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 *D4 D5 D6 D7 *E0 E1 E2 E3 *E4 E5 E6 E7 *E8 E9 EA EB *EC ED EE EF *F0 F1 F2 F3 *F4 F5 F6 F7 *F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF *70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 *88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 *08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F *98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F *A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF *B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF *C8 C9 CA CB *CC CD CE CF *D8 D9 DA DB *DC DD DE DF *10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 *20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 *28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F *30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 *40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 *50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 *60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 *68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F *18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F *38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F *48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F *58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F *78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Indicates restricted address – DO NOT USE Indicates reserved address (80 = QTB. QCI. Q-card Hardware Address Selection Form M0-0053 A-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . QLJ) must start at x0. QSC. QLI. QAW. x4. QTO) may use any address Note QBI and QDI are being replaced by the QID card Figure A-1. QRO. xC. AA and 55 = QBO. x8. xE where x = 0 through F Other cards (QBI. QDI. x6. QLC) must start at x0. A-1. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE 1 Q-Crate 2 (Q2) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4 C5 D5 C6 D6 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Q-Crate 3 (Q3) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge 302 Address Half-Shell E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 E6 F6 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 318 320 322 324 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Q-Crate 4 (Q4) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge 402 Address Half-Shell G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5 G6 H6 404 406 408 410 412 414 416 418 420 422 424 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Worksheet B 5/99 A-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Section Overview Worksheet B Q-Line I/O Layout Drop No. Q-Crate 1 (Q1) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 Cabinet No. Q-Crate 1 (Q1) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell 102 08 A1 104 10 B1 106 18 A2 108 20 B2 110 28 A3 112 30 B3 114 38 A4 116 40 B4 118 48 A5 120 50 B5 122 58 A6 124 60 B6 Cabinet No. Section Overview Worksheet C Q-Line I/O Layout (Default Naming Option) Drop No.A-1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Q-Crate 2 (Q2) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell 202 68 C1 204 70 D1 206 78 C2 208 80 D2 210 88 C3 212 90 D3 214 98 C4 216 A0 D4 218 A8 C5 220 B0 D5 222 B8 C6 224 C0 D6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Q-Crate 3 (Q3) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell 302 C8 E1 304 CC F1 306 D0 E2 308 D4 F2 310 D8 E3 312 DC F3 314 E0 E4 316 E4 F4 318 E8 E5 320 EC F5 322 F0 E6 324 F4 F6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Q-Crate 4(Q4) Slot Card Type Group Card Edge Address Half-Shell G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5 G6 H6 402 404 406 408 410 412 414 416 418 420 422 424 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 QBE Worksheet C M0-0053 A-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . L II i I/ n e O WD 28 (Last Address Jumper) 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 (First Address Jumper Location) Note: The first 20 locations are reserved for card wiring. The figure also shows the conversion of the hexadecimal address (supplied by Westinghouse on the worksheets) and the binary equivalent via jumpering. Address Jumpers on Cable Connector (“B” Cabinet Terminations) 5/99 B-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Introduction This appendix shows how to set the appropriate jumpers to define an address on a Q-card. Figure B-2 shows a head-on view of the address jumpers. Table B-1 shows the binary equivalent for hexadecimal 00 to FF (256) PF Q. Setting Q-Card Addresses B-1.Appendix B. Figure B-1 shows the connector handle and position of the address jumpers. Figure B-1. Card Address Jumper Assembly M0-0053 B-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Introduction DIOB CARD ADDRESS = 00100011 = 23H BLANK: A7 = 0 BLANK: A6 = 0 JUMPER: A5 = 1 BLANK: A4 = 0 BLANK: A3 = 0 BLANK: A2 = 0 JUMPER: A1 = 1 JUMPER: A0 = 1 Figure B-2.B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5/99 B-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Introduction Table B-1.B-1. Introduction Table B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 M0-0053 B-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5/99 B-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 .B-1. Introduction Table B-1. Introduction Table B-1.B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 M0-0053 B-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5/99 B-7 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Introduction Table B-1. B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 M0-0053 B-8 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . Introduction Table B-1. B-1. Introduction Table B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5/99 B-9 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . B-1. the next 256 (decimal) addresses are obtained by adding a jumper below the A0 (or number 20) location as seen in Figure B-2. Introduction Table B-1. Conversion of Hexadecimal Number to Jumper Address (Cont’d) Hexadecimal Card Address A7 A6 Jumper Settings A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 For an adjacent cabinet. M0-0053 B-10 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . the drop is packaged in dual (“A” and “B”) cabinets. the Standard and the Enhanced. Note There are two types of A and B cabinets. Section Overview The DPU drop utilizes one of two methods of field signal terminations. In the second method (cabinet termination). where the drop is packaged in a single “A” Cabinet. more half-shell zones. and more terminals per half-shell zone. With the Enhanced cabinets. Refer to Section 2 for information on the cabinet method of signal termination. This appendix discusses the card-edge termination. 5/99 C-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . Card-Edge Field Termination C-1. there are more slots for Q-Cards.Appendix C. The field termination card-edge connector also contains address selection slots 20 through 28. providing a maximum of 36 cards. Card-Edge Connectors Card-edge terminations are recommended only for “A” Cabinets with three Q-crates with a maximum of 12 Q-cards per crate. Note The card-edge termination connector cannot be used with a QAA or QAX card. as shown in Figure C-1. Field termination edge connectors are used at each Q-card for user field signal connections. field connections are made to screw-down terminals on each card’s edge connector. Address Jumpers on Card-Edge Termination Connector M0-0053 C-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . A specific card address is selected by the insertion of jumpers into the appropriate slots. Figure C-1. Note Use of card-edge connections is not recommended with the Enhanced “A” cabinet with 4 Q-Crates. When using card-edge termination. These 9 slots are located on the top right side of the connector. Q-Card addresses are assigned using jumper clips which are inserted into the termination card-edge connector.C-2. Figure C-2 shows the standard card-edge termination hardware. The cabinet illustrated in Figure C-2 is a Standard cabinet. Edge Connector for Field Terminations C A R D E D G E F U S E Q C R A T E Q1 Q2 Paddle Card for Expansion Q-Crate Slot 1 Q-Card Z O N E Q3 S C O N N E C T O R Electronics A-Cabinet Front Figure C-2. An Enhanced cabinet would contain four Q-Crate zones. Standard Card-Edge Field Connections 5/99 C-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . with an exploded view of a card-edge connector. These tie points are not used in analog terminations. 16 AWG or smaller conductor wire be used. for ease of connector removal and replacement after installation. Each connector’s wires are bundled together after the field connections are completed.As shown in Figure C-3. which duplicate the function of the B-block in the half-shell type terminations. each connector contains 20 screw-down terminals for field signal terminations. However. The top 7 screw-down terminals (1 through 7) are field termination tie points. Field connections to and from the card-edge connector can be made using up to No. and are tie-wrapped to the cabinet frame directly under the Q-crate. 14 AWG conductor wire. 7 6 Fuse 5 4 3 2 1 19A 17A 15A 13A 11A 9A 7A 5A 3A 1A Field Termination Tie Points Field Signal Terminations 19B 17B 15B 13B 11B 9B 7B 5B 3B 1B Field Signal Terminations Figure C-3. Westinghouse recommends that No. Screw-Down Terminal Numbers M0-0053 C-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . can be used to locate terminals for field signal connection. Card-Edge Terminal Locations Card Slot Numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• •• 1B• 1A 19B • 19A •• Q1 •• 1B• 1A Q 19B • 19A C •• Q2 R •• A 1B• T 1A E 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B 19B • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A • 19A •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• Q3 •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1B• 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A Note: Field Termination Tie Points not shown. which illustrates the Q-crate terminal locations.Table C-1. Table C-1. 5/99 C-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . for ease of connector installation and removal. Westinghouse recommends no greater than No. WARNING Remove drop power and use extreme caution when making field connections to these edge-connectors. and then move down to Q-crate 2. 3. take care not to switch connectors between cards. A shock hazard to personnel may exist on some of the higher voltage signals. Connection to these terminals may be made with up to No. slot 1 and so on. slot 1. Caution After address selection. Each card’s selected address should be in compliance with the terminations list. Use the custom Termination Lists supplied for the system to locate specific termination points. 16 AWG conductors be used. M0-0053 C-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 .C-3. Locate the field wires or cables to be connected to the selected edge-connector and make connections to the screw-down terminals. Use wire tags to identify the cables. Repeat the procedures of Steps 1 through 4 for each remaining edge-connector until all field terminations to the cabinet have been completed. Select a card-edge termination connector for field wiring. It is usually best to start at Q-crate 1. Then work across to slot 12 of Q-crate 1. Only wires and/ or cables which comply with each field connection’s signal and noise minimization requirements should be used. Another option is to start at Q-crate 3. Bundle the wires connected to the terminal block with tie wraps and then tie-wrap to the cabinet frame directly under the Q-crate. insert the appropriate jumpers in the upper-right hand side of the connector. If not previously done at the factory. 4. 1. Field Wiring Card-Edge Terminations Follow these procedures for field wiring the WDPF System to the termination card-edge connectors within the electronics cabinet. However. Also refer to the specific card information provided in Section 3. 14 AWG conductors. Remember to leave service loops to relieve stress and/or to permit access to the cabinet when it is to be moved out of position for maintenance purposes. working up to Q-crate 1. Doing so will indiscriminately switch card addresses. 2. 5. C-2. def. 3-512. 3-87 Clock Synchronizing 3-500 Cold Junction 3-193 common mode rejection 3-128 common-mode voltage 2-11 compensation B-cabinet 2-19 half-shell 2-18 on-board 2-20 configuration constants 3-325. 3224. 3-180 CE MARK Certified System 3-49. 3-573 Chattering 3-483. 3-180 card-edge connectors 2-3. 3-398. 3-235. 3-338 configuration data 3-325. 3-265. 3-353 Automatic mode 3-91 Automatic/Manual card 3-74 B B Cabinet compensation 2-19 enhanced 2-23 standard 2-23 Termination Structure 2-25 Beck drive 3-14 bridge power supply 2-19 Bridge Resistor 3-436. 3-254. 3-553. 3-439 D database limitations 2-35 daughter card 3-16 derived QPA functions 3-386 diagnostic test card 3-276 differential input 3-50 digital contact input 3-254 Digital Controller 3-265 digital input 3-213. I/P converter 3-74 A A/D converter 3-49 actuator auto manual card 3-14 actuator position 3-15 address blocks 2-29 address jumpers B-1 address selection slot C-2 address selection via jumper 2-36 addresses setting B-1 addressing constraints 2-32 Air Temperatures 2-39 analog conditioning card 3-37 analog high level input point 3-148 analog input card 3-61 analog input point 3-49 analog output card 3-100 analog position 3-19 analog signal conditioner 3-37 analog signal filtering 2-12 Analog Signal Shielding Techniques 2-15 analog to digital 3-119. 3-173. 2-5 Cabinet Termination 2-22 cable length 3-260 cable routing 2-37 card replacement 2-37 5/99 Index-1 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-338 contact allocations 3-417 contact input card 3-254 contact-wetting voltage 3-254 Continuous Scan 3-50 control timing 3-66 copper RTD 3-423 Current Amplifier card 3-235 current to pressure. 3-483. 3-318. 3-148.Index Numerics 12 Point Analog Input card 3-173 8039 3-423 Card Type Index 3-179. 3296. 3-421. 3-119. 3-200. 3399. 3-458. 3-490 clock 3-86. 3-266 digital input card 3-212 digital multiplexed interface 3-61 C cabinet number. 3-365. 3-61. 3-148. 3-193. 3-282. 3-276. 3-317. 3-420. 3-351. C-6 cascaded control loop 3-332 CCI 2-21 CCO 2-21 CD 3-179. C-6 field termination C-1 termination 2-22. 3541. 3100. 3-173 analog velocity 3-18 analog-to-digital converters 3-61 Auto mode 3-344. 3-34. 2-5 Grounding 2-13 M0-0053 Index-2 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-57. 3-349. 3-97. 3-546. 3-343 Block Diagram 3-344 Components 3-349 Features 3-344 groups 3-10 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-10 G ground connection. 3-221. 3-339. 3-503. 3-359 Addressing 3-381 definition 3-366 interface 3-20. 3-561. 3-326. 3-196. 3-160 flow-rate meter 3-365 Four Wire RTD Input Amplifier 3-399 frequency summation 3-421 frozen 3-366 L lamps 3-224 LED 3-33. C-1 list 2-3 wiring 2-2 field termination 2-2 field wiring 2-1. 3-472. 3-568 LIM 1-4. 3-546. 3-568 ENABLE 2-36 HI/LO 2-36 F fast acting actuator 3-14 field signal connections 2-38 termination 2-22. 3-228. 3-291. 3-114. 3-134. 3-207. 3-319. 3-332. 3-19. 3416. 3257. 3-162. 3135. 2-5 hardware addresses 2-29 available 2-29 determining 2-29 restricted blocks 2-29 Selection Form 2-31 worksheet A-1 HART 3-552 highways 1-1 Hl/LO jumper 2-36 Hl/LO signal 2-32 Humidity Rating 2-39 E E/P. current to pressure 3-74 increased cable length (digital) 3-296 Input Amplifier Four Wire RTD card 3-399 Input Amplifier card 3-421 J jumper 2-36. 2-2 FLAG 3-366 flag bit 3-133. 3-415. 3-339. 3-353. 3-558. 3-79 monitor 3-283 DIP switch 3-99 Display mode 3-279 DPU 2-2 drops 1-1 H half-shell 2-3 compensation 2-18 Termination 2-38 termination C-4 zone location. def. voltage to pressure 3-74 EEPROM 3-325 elapsed time measurement 3-365 electromagnetic 2-13 electromagnetic field 2-11 electrostatic 2-13 electrostatic field 2-11 ENABLE jumper 2-36 Enable signal 2-32 errors. 3-357. 3-500. 3-318. 3-207. 3-333. 3-326. 3-457. 3-164. 3544. 3-137. 3-290. 3-262. LED 3-546 I I/P. 3-543. 3-95. 3-158. 3-503. 3-131. 3-274. 3-231. def. 3-185.Index digital output card 3-224 digital signal 3-100 digital signal isolation 2-11 digital. 3-306. 3-278. 3-435. 3-178. 3-455. increased cable length 3-296 digital-to-analog 3-100 DIOB 3-70. 3-44. 3-543. 3-380. 3-353 memory bus 3-359 Memory Bus Terminator card 3-359 monitor DIOB 3-283 mother card 3-16 multiple channel hardware address 2-32 multiplex 3-61 multi-speed DPU 2-35 Q QAA 1-4. shielding 2-15 overrange bit 3-49. 3-37 Block Diagram 3-37 Controls and Indicators 3-48 groups 3-4 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-4 Specifications 3-42 QAH 1-4. 3-61 Block Diagram 3-61 Card Addressing 3-70 Card Diagram 3-71 N nickel RTD 3-423 noise class 2-10 discrimination 2-7 minimization techniques 2-7 problems 2-37 source 2-10 noise and signal sources 2-10 noise minimization techniques 2-1 noise rejection 2-11 noise-sensitive suppression 2-12 O On-Board Compensation 2-20 open thermocouple detection 3-64 optical isolator 2-11 output data 3-159 output flashing 3-232 Output Signal Noise Rejection 2-12 Ovation QAV 3-139 QAX 3-180 5/99 Index-3 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-352 Lower setpoint 3-344. def. 3-160 P pin assignments 3-261 platinum 3-423 platinum RTD 3-423 plug braking 3-14 point number. 3-149 line frequency switching 3-562 links DIOB backplane 3-200 LMAN 3-19 LMNA 3-19 Local mode 3-345. 3-353 Loop Interface card 3-318 with output readback 3-332 Loop Interface Module 3-343 low pass filtering 2-9 Lower output 3-344. 3-49 Block Diagram 3-49 Card Addressing 3-53 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-60 Controls and Indicators 3-57 groups 3-4 Installation Data Sheet 3-59 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-4 Specifications 3-50 QAI 1-4. 3-14 Card Addressing 3-20 Card Outline 3-16 Controls and Indicators 3-23 groups 3-4 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-4 Specifications 3-18 Tuning 3-24 Word Format 3-20 QAC 1-4. 3-352 low-level signal. 3-345. 2-4 position encoder 3-365 position feedback 3-14 potentiometers 3-98 Power Consumption 2-40 power line frequency 2-9 Proper Grounding and Shielding 2-13 Pulse Accumulator 3-365 M Manual mode 3-91.Index Specifications 3-348 limit check 3-121. Index CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-73 groups 3-4. 3-62 Installation Data Sheet 3-72 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-4 Specifications 3-63 QAM 1-4. 3-232. 3-226. 2-19 analog input point 3-119 Block Diagram 3-119 Card Addressing 3-131 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-147 Controls and Indicators (Level 6 and earlier) 3-134 (Level 8 and later) 3-136 Features 3-123 groups 3-5 Installation Data Sheet 3-143 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-5 Specifications 3-126 QAW 1-4. 3-229. 3-212 Block Diagram 3-215 Card Addressing 3-217 Controls and Indicators 3-221 groups 3-7 Installation Data Sheet 3-222 power consumption 2-40 QID replacement 3-296 ranges 3-7 Specifications 3-215 QBI . 3-101 Installation Data Sheet 3-116 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-5 Specifications 3-105 QAV 1-4. 3-224 Block Diagram 3-224. 3-233.QID equivalence 3-212 QBO 1-4. 3-228. 3-173 Block Diagram 3-173 Card Addressing 3-178 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-189 Controls and Indicators 3-184 groups 3-6 Installation Data Sheet 3-186 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-6 Specifications 3-176 QAXD 1-4. 3-190 groups 3-6 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-6 QAXT 1-4. 3-74 Block Diagram 3-74 Controls and Indicators 3-91 groups 3-5 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-5 Reset 3-94 Specifications 3-78 QAO 1-4. 3-100 Block Diagram 3-100 Card Addressing 3-113 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-117 Controls and Indicators 3-113 groups 3-5. 3-163 groups 3-6 Installation Data Sheets 3-165 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-6 Specifications 3-151 QAX 1-4. 3-200 Block Diagram 3-200 Controls and Indicators 3-207 groups 3-6 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-6 Specifications 3-205 QBI 1-4. 3-231. 3-193 Block Diagram 3-193 Controls and Indicators 3-195 groups 3-6 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-6 Specifications 3-194 Wiring 3-196 QBE 1-4. 3-234 Card Addressing 3-228 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-234 Controls and Indicators 3-231 groups 3-7 Installation Data Sheet 3-233 M0-0053 Index-4 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-148 Block Diagram 3-148 Card Addressing 3-158 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-172 Controls and Indicators 3-162. 3-293. 3-282 groups 3-8 ranges 3-8 QIC 1-4. 3-265 groups 3-7 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-7 QDI 1-4 Block Diagram 3-267 Card Addressing 3-269 Controls and Indicators 3-274 groups 3-8. 3-283 Block Diagram 3-283. 3-266 Block Diagram 3-296 Card Addressing 3-305 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-314 Controls and Indicators 3-306 groups 3-9 Installation Data Sheet 3-310 power consumption 2-41 Q-Line Digital Input 3-296 ranges 3-9 Specifications 3-300 Wiring 3-307 QID .QID. 2-4 Q-Card Addresses setting B-1 Q-card Hardware Address A-2 Q-Cards 1-3 list of available 1-4 QCI 1-4. 3-317. 3-294 Controls and Indicators 3-290 groups 3-8 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-8 Signal Interface 3-292 Specifications 3-289 QID 1-4. 3-249. equivalence 3-266 QLC 1-4. 3-343. 3-552 groups 3-9 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-9 QLI 1-4. 3-267 Installation Data Sheet 3-275 power consumption 2-40 QID replacement 3-296 ranges 3-8 Specifications 3-268 QDI . 3-276 Block Diagram 3-276 Controls and Indicators 3-279 groups 3-8 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-8 Specifications 3-277 QFR 1-4. 3-235 Card Outline 3-248. 3-351 Block Diagram 3-318 Card Addressing 3-323 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-330 Circuit Description 3-322 Controls and Indicators 3-324 groups 3-9 Installation Data Sheet 3-327 Interface Specifications 3-322 5/99 Index-5 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-212. 3-318. 3-289.QBI equivalence 3-212 QID . 3-251.Index power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-7 Specifications 3-227 QCA 1-4. 3-290. 3-254 Block Diagram 3-254 Card Addressing 3-257 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-264 Controls and Indicators 3-262 groups 3-7 Installation Data Sheet 3-263 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-7 Specifications 3-256 Q-Crate card slots 2-35 QDC 1-4. 3252.QDI. def. 3-253 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-253 Controls and Indicators 3-248 groups 3-7 Installation Data Sheets 3-251 Operation 3-240 power consumption 2-40 ranges 3-7 Signal Interface 3-238 Specifications 3-236 Q-Card 3-1 hardware address 2-29 Hardware Address Selection 2-34 Q-card address. equivalence 3-266 QDT 1-4. 3-250. 3-332 Q-Line RTD Input Amplifier RTD card 3-421 Q-line Serial Link Controller 3-317 QLJ 1-4.Index power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-9 Specifications 3-321 Q-Line Bus Extender 3-200 Q-Line DIOB Monitor 3-283 Q-Line Loop Interface Card 3-318. 3-332 Block Diagram 3-332 Card Addressing 3-337 Circuit Description 3-336 Controls and Indicators 3-338 groups 3-10 Installation Data Sheet 3-340 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-10 Specifications 3-335 QMT 1-4. 3-410 Block Diagram 3-410 Card Addressing 3-415 Controls and Indicators 3-416 groups 3-11 Installation 3-417 Installation Data Sheet 3-419 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Specifications 3-412 QRS 1-4. 3-453 Block Diagram 3-453 Controls/Indicators 3-457 groups 3-11 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Specifications 3-455 Wiring 3-457 QSD 1-4. 3-361 groups 3-10 ranges 3-10 Signal Requirements 3-363 QPA 1-4. 3-420 groups 3-11 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 QRT 1-4. 3-365 Addressing 3-377 Applications 3-386 Average Inverse Speed Measurement 3-390 Block Diagram 3-365 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-395 Definitions 3-366 Elapsed Time Measurement 3-388 External Inputs’ Digital Filter Clock 3-376 groups 3-10 Implementation Example 3-390 Installation Data Sheet 3-393 Internal Timebase Clocks 3-376 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-10 Specifications 3-373 Speed Measurement 3-387 Speed Ratio Measurement 3-389 QRC 1-4. 3-359 Block Diagram 3-359. 3-421 Application Information 3-435 Block Diagram 3-421 Card Addressing 3-434 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-451 Controls and Indicators 3-435 Definition of Terms 3-422 Field Input Connection 3-432 groups 3-11 Installation Data Sheet 3-447 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Specifications 3-429 QSC 1-4. 3-398 power consumption 2-41 QRF 1-4. 3-458 Card Addressing 3-471 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-481 Controls and Indicators 3-471 groups 3-11 Installation Data Sheet 3-481 Operator Interface 3-468 M0-0053 Index-6 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 3-399 Block Diagram 3-400 Card Addressing 3-405 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-409 Controls and Indicators 3-407 groups 3-11 Installation Data Sheet 3-408 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Specifications 3-402 QRO 1-4. 2-19. 3584 power consumption 2-41 R Raise output 3-344. 3-352 Redundant Station Interface card 3-420 reference junction compensation 3-193 relay coils 3-224 relay output card 3-410 relay switching 3-410 Remote I/O Fiber-Optic Interface 3-282 Remote Q-Line Controller card 3-398 reset 3-493 resistors 3-95 restricted block address 2-29 row 2-23 RTD 3-399. 3-483 Application Information 3-505 Card Addressing 3-503 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-511 chattering 3-490 Circuit Description 3-492 Controls and Indicators 3-503 Firmware Considerations 3-500 groups 3-11 Installation Data Sheet 3-510 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Signal Interface 3-490 Specifications 3-486 QSR 1-4. 3-552 groups 3-12 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-12 QTB 1-4. 3-583. 3-458 Servo Driver with Positional Readback card 3512 setpoint zero 3-98 shielding 2-13 5/99 Index-7 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C M0-0053 . 3-423 copper 3-423 Input Amplifier card 3-421 nickel 3-423 signal field connection 2-19 use of 3-443 S safe operation 3-414 Scan and Hold 3-50 scan rate 3-50 sequence of events 3-483 serial link controller 3-317 servo driver card 3-235. 3-541 Block Diagram 3-541 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-551 Controls and Indicators 3-546 groups 3-12 Installation Data Sheet 3-548 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-12 replacing QSC 3-453 Specifications 3-544 QST 1-4. 3-352 Raise setpoint 3-344.Index power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Specifications 3-460 QSE 1-4. 3-512 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-537 Controls and Indicators 3-526 groups 3-11 Installation Data Sheet 3-535 Operation 3-522 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-11 Signal Interface 3-518 Specifications 3-513 Test Points 3-534 Valve Calibration 3-528 QSS 1-4. 3-562 Block Diagram 3-562 Card Addressing 3-568 Controls and Indicators 3-568 groups 3-12 Installation Data Sheet 3-572 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-12 Specifications 3-566 QVP 1-4 CE MARK Wiring Diagram 3-582. 3-553 Block Diagram 3-553 Control and Indicators 3-559 groups 3-12 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-12 Specifications 3-554 QTO 1-4. 3-465. 1-2 WEMAC 3-14 worksheets A-1 Z zone 2-23 T tachometer 3-365 tachometer signal pulse 3-453.Index low-level signal 2-15 sign bit 3-160 signal termination 2-1 signal wire coupling 2-11 Simulator mode 3-278 single-speed DPU 2-35 site preparation and planning 2-37 slidewire power supply 3-36 SLIM 1-4. 3-546 WDPF field wiring 2-1 WDPF Installation 1-1. 3-120. 3-193 M0-0053 Index-8 Westinghouse Proprietary Class 2C 5/99 . 2-5 termination cabinet 2-22. 3-541 Temperatures 2-39 terminal block temperature sensing 3-193 terminal strip connection points. 3-319 Block Diagram 3-352 CE MARK Certified System 3-358 Components 3-356 Features 3-352 groups 3-10 power consumption 2-41 ranges 3-10 Small Loop Interface Module 3-351 Specifications 3-356 slot assignment worksheet A-1 smart transmitter interface 3-552 smart transmitter interface card 3-552 solid-state AC switching 3-562 sort-by-hardware 2-3 sort-by-point 2-3 speed channel card 3-453 speed measurement 3-365 speed ratio measurement 3-365 speed sensor card 3-541 SSR 3-570 SST 3-552 standard card-edge termination hardware C-3 stepping motors 3-224 STI 3-552 Surge Protection 2-14 switching transients 2-9 coefficient 3-181 considerations 2-18 grounding 2-20 thresholding 2-8 tie point C-4 time base card 3-553 Time Interval (Ti) 3-490 timing signal 3-553 transient noise 2-9 TRIAC Output card 3-562 tuning constant 3-345 turning constant 3-353 twisted pairs 2-13 V Valve Actuator 3-465 Vibration 2-39 voltage to pressure. E/P 3-74 W W2500 I/O subsystem 3-283 watchdog timer 3-15. 3493. 2-38 card-edge 2-22 point 2-38 thermocouple 3-66. 3-75. def. 3-19.